Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PW CNT 03-04/Selmer Co
BIDDER: CONTRACT AND SPECIFICATIONS STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRADE CONTRACT 03-04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN Prepared by: STRAND ASSOCIATES, INC.® 910 West Wingra Drive Madison, WI 53715 strand.com June 2003 STRANCI F SECTiQN 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRADE CONTRACT 03~04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN F F DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS ADVERTISEMENT TO BID ........................................................................... INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ..................................................................... WOMEN'S AND MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION ................................... BID ............................................................................................................... BID BOND .................................................................................................... AGREEMENT ..................................................... ~ ......................................... NOTICE TO PROCEED ................................................................................ CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND ................................................... CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND .............................................................. GENERAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS .......................... : ...................................... NOTICE ........................................................................................................ wISCONSiN ADMINISTRATIVE RULE TAX 11 ~ ............................................. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY Of WORK .................................................................................. CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS .................................................................. COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING, AND MEETINGS ........................... CUTTING, PATCHING, AND ALTERATIONS .................................................. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ........................................... SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................... QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................... TEMPORARY FACILITIES ............................................................................ TEMPORARY CONTROLS ........................................................................... FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS ...................................................................... MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................... STARTING OF SYSTEMS ............................................................................. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................. WAGE RATES .............................................................................................. Pages Through 00100- 2 00200-12 WI-7 00400-12 00430- 2 00500-10 00550- 1 00600- 4 00600- 8 00700-42 00800-17 1 1 01010- 6 01019- 2 01039- 3 01045- 6 01060- 2 01090- 6 01300- 5 01400- 2 01500- 4 01560- 3 01590- 3 01600- 4 01650- 3 01700- 3 WR-15 Section 00010-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK DEMOLITION ............................................................................................... 8lTL CLEARING AND 8TRIPPING ............................................................... DEWATERING .............................................................................................. EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, AND GRADING ........................................... AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ...................................................................... 8LOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL ........................................ MODULAR RETAINING WALL ...................................................................... DRILLED CONCRETE PIER8 (CAI880NS) .................................................. ASPHALTIO OONORETE PAVING ................................................................. BURIED PIPING AND APPURTENANOE8 .................................................... CHAIN LINK FENCE ..................................................................................... SEEDING AND 80DDING ......................... , .................................................. DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE CONCRETE FORMWORK ............................................................................ CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT ................... ~ ............................................... CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ....................................................................... PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS ........................................ DIVISION 4 - MASONRY MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT ............................................................... UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM ............................................................................ DIVISION 5 - METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL: ................................................................................. METAL FABRIOATION8 ................................................................................ ANOHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION BOLTS, AND RESIN ANCHOR8 .................. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION VAPOR BARRIER ................................................... ~ ..................................... BOARD INSULATION ................................................................................... FIRESTOPPING ........................................................................................... SINGLE PLY ROOFING - FULLY ADHERED ................................................. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ................................................................... CAULKING AND SEALANTS ........................................................................ DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS STANDARD 8TELL DOORS AND FRAME8 .................................................. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ..................................................................... ALUMINUM WINDOWS ......... : ...................................................................... DOOR HARDWARE ...................................................................................... GLAZING ...................................................................................................... DIVISION 9 - FINISHES PAINTING ................................................. Pages Through 02050- 2 02110- 2 02140- 3 02222- 7 02231- 2 02270- 5 02276- 3 02375- 4 02510- 3 02600-11 02831- 5 02936- 5 03100- 4 03200- 5 03300-15 03415- 5 04100- 3 04300- 8 05120- 5 05500- 7 05560- 2 07191- 1 07212- 2 07270- 3 07531- 3 07620- 3 07900- 2 08110- 3 08331- 3 08520- 2 08710- 3 08800- 2 09900- 8 Section 00010-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES .............................................. DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS HOISTS AND CRANES ................................................................................. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ....................................................................... MECHANICAL INSULATION ......................................................................... HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING INSULATION ................ PLUMBING ................................................................................................... HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES ....................................................... HVAC PUMPS .............................................................................................. TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS ........................................................... CENTRIFUGAL FANS ................................................................................... DUCTVVORK ................................................................................................. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES ....................................................................... AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ......................................................................... TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION .............................. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING .................................................... DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................. CONDUIT ..................................................................................................... WIRE AND CABLE ....................................................................................... MEDIUM VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES .......................... BOXES ......................................................................................................... WIRING DEVICES ........................................................................................ CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES ................................................................... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .................................................................... STANDBY POWER SYSTEM ........................................................................ MEDIUM VOLTAGE PARALLELING EQUIPMENT ......................................... 5KV METAL-CLAD CIRCUIT BREAKER SERVICE ENTRANCE SWlTCHGEAR ..................................................................... TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) .............................. ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM ~ ................................................................ SECONDARY GROUNDING ......................................................................... MOTOR CONTROL ...................................................................................... INSTRUMENT WIRE AND CABLE ................................................................ CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION ........................................................ TESTING ...................................................................................................... SCADA SYSTEM I/O LISTING ...................................................................... DRAWINGS Pages Through 10522- 2 14600- 3 15040- 8 15250- 2 15290- 3 15400- 3 15510- 3 15540- 2 15835- 2 15860- 2 15890- 3 15910- 2 15940- 2 15980- 3 15990- 4 16010-10 16110- 5 16120- 6 16121- 2 16130- 4 16141- 3 16160- 3 16195- 4 16230-10 16253-18 16344-11 16412- 4 16420- 2 16450- 2 16480- 8 16930- 5 16940-24 16950- 3 16990- 7 STANDARD DETAILS - SANITARY SEWER APPURTENANCES ................... 01-975- 43A STANDARD PROJECT SIGN LAYOUT ..........................................................01-975-158A SAMPLE REPORTS ..................................................................................... 25 END OF SECTION Section 00010-3 1-382-636/03-O4 SECTION 00100 ADVERTISEMENT TO BID STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRADE CONTRACT 03-04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN The City of Oshkosh will receive sealed Bids for Standby Power System and SCADA Upgrade at the Wastewater Treatment Plant until 2 P.M., December 11, 2003 at the City Clerk's Office, Room 104 City Hall, 215 Church Avenue, Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54903, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud in Room 404 of the City Hall. The work includes the construction of a new standby engine generator facility served by two 880 kW natural gas-fueled engines with space provided for a third unit. The engine generator system includes paralleling switchgear and switchgear for interfacing with utility power. The engine generators will be housed in a new structure on the treatment plant property. New service entrance switchgear for the entire treatment plant, replacing existing gear, will also be installed that will allow paralleling with utility power. Other work includes new power conductors to various parts of the treatment plant, upgrades to the existing plant SCADA system, and associated HVAC and plumbing to support the facility. Electric utility, Wisconsin Public Service, will also install new high voltage primary conductors and new exterior transformer as part of this contract. Bids are to be addressed to the City Manager, C/O City Clerk's Office, City Hall, 215 Church Avenue, P.O. Box 1130, Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54903-1130 and shall be marked "Sealed Bid - Standby Power System and SCADA Upgrade - Contract 03-04." The name and address of the bidder shall be clearly marked on the sealed envelope. Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office which is Strand Associates, Inc.®, Consulting Engineers, 910 West Wingra Drive, Madison, Wisconsin 53715, (608) 251-4843. A deposit of $150 will be required for each full-size set (22-inch by 34-inch drawings) and $100 for each half-size set (11-inch by 17-inch drawings). Shipping and handling fees are included. Overnight mailing of Bidding Documents will not be provided. The deposit will be refunded if the Bidding Documents are returned in good condition no later than thirty days after the day set for receiving Bids. Bidding Documents may be examined at the City of Oshkosh and are on file at the Bid+Network in Madison, Wisconsin, the F.W. Dodge Office in Milwaukee, Wisconsin, the Fond du Lac Builders Exchange in Fond du Lac, Wisconsin, and Reed Construction Data in Brookfield, Wisconsin. No Bid will be received unless accompanied by a cashier's, certified or bank check or a Bid Bond equal to at least five percent of the maximum Bid, payable to the OWNER as a guarantee that after a Bid is accepted, Bidder will execute and file the Agreement and 100% Performance and Payment Bonds within fifteen days after the Notice of Award. Bidders shall comply with all provisions of Section 66.0903 of the Wisconsin Statutes with respect to wage scales. Section 00100-1 The City of Oshkosh reserVes the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any technicality, and to accept any Bid which it deems advantageous. All Bids shall remain subject to acceptance for 6_.~0 days after the time set for opening Bids. Prospective Bidders a~e required to complete and submit a prequalification questionnaire with supporting documents to OWNER (see Instructions to Bidders). Prequalification forms will be provided with Bidding Document sets. The City Manager's decision as to qualification of bidders will be final. Completed forms are to be submitted no later than seven days prior to the date set for the bid opening. Contractors that are already prequali~ied with the City of Oshkosh for the year 2003 do not need to prequalify again. Any Contract to be awarded is expected to be funded in part by a loan from the Wisconsin Clean Water Fund. This procurement will be subject to regulations contained in Chapter NR 162, Wisconsin Administrative Code and appropriate State Statutes. Bidders must demonstrate positive efforts to utilize ~vomen's and minority owned businesses. This procurement will be subject to regulations contained in NR 162.09(3). Failure to comply could result in disqualification of Bidder and termination of financial assistance or other sanctions identified in NR 162.18 and NR 162.19. A prebid conference will be held at 9 A.M. on December 2, 2003 at the City of Oshkosh Wastewater Treatment Plant, 233 North Campbell!Road. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will transmi,t to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. Published by the authority of the City of Oshkosh Richard Wollangk, City Manager Dated at City of Oshkosh October 20, 2003 October 27, 2003 END OF SECTION Section 00100-2 1~382.636/03.04 SECTION 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. These Yns[r~Jati'ans'{~' Bia"d~i-~'e'~'t~bii~h requirements for Bidding and Award of Contract. B Table of Contents 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 12. 14. 15. 16. 19. 20. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Defined Terms Copies of Bidding Documents Qualifications of Bidders Examination of Bidding Documents, Other Related Data and Site Prebid Conference Site and Other Areas Interpretations and Addenda Bid Security Contract Times Liquidated Damages Substitute or "Or EquaF Items Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others Bid Basis of Bid; Evaluation of Bids Submission of Bids Modificatior and Withdrawal of Bids Opening of Bids Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance Award of Contract Contract Security and Insurance Signing of Agreement Retainage Income Tax Other Taxes Wage Rate Determination Women's and Minority-Owned Businesses ARTICLE 1- DEFINED TERMS Other terms used in the bidding documents and not defined elsewhere have the following meanings which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meaningS indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: A. Bidder - The individual or entity Who submits a Bid directly to OWNER. B. Issuing Office - The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and ~'- where the bidding procedures are to be administered. C. Successful Bidder - The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. Section 00200-1 1,-382-636/03-04 ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement to Bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office. The deposit will be refunded to document holders of record who return the Bidding Documents in good condition within thirty days after opening of Bids. 2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.03 OWNER and ENGINEER in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 Section 66.0901(2) Wisconsin Statutes permits the prequalification of Bidders interested in submitting a Bid on a municipal project. A questionnaire is provided with Bidding Document sets. This questionnaire, including proof of financial responsibility, must be filed with OWNER on or before date indicated in Advertisement to Bid. Contractors that are already prequalified with the City of Oshkosh for the year 2003 do not need to prequalify again. 3.02 If in OWNER's opinion, based on information contained in the questionnaire or derived therefrom, Bidder is not qualified to carry out the provisions of the Contract, Bidder will be notified prior to the date of Bid opening. OWNER will not open the Bid of any disqualified Bidder. ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMEN~rS, OTHER RELATED DATA AND SITE 4.01 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. 2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface ar3d subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except underground Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.01,A will be made available by OWNER to any Bidder on request: Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 4.02 Underground Facilities A. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are based upon information and data Section 00200-2 furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER or others. 4.03 Hazardous Environmental Condition A. If any hazardous environmental conditions are known, the Supplementary Conditions identifies those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.03.A will be made available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in paragraph 4.06 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 4.04 Provisions concernin§ responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated conditions appear in paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data fumished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents because of any H~zardous Envir0nrhental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Spedfications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work appear in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. 4.05 On request, OWNER will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 4.06 Reference is made to Article 7 of the Supplementary Conditions for the ideniifi~ation of the general nature of other work that is to be performed at the Site by OWNER or others (such as utilities and other prime co~tractors) that relates to the Work for which a Bid is to be submitted. On request, OWNER will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of Contract Documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such other work. 4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, including any Addenda and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents; B. visit the Site and become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work; C.' beCOme familiar with and satisfy Bidder aS to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect COSt, progress, or performance of the Work; D. CarefullY StUdy all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except underground Facilities) which have Section 00200-3 been identified in the Supplementary conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and carefully study all reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions; E. obtain and carefully study (or assume responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto (Bidder may want to engage the services of a specialist or specialists to help Bidder evaluate these physical conditions and their impact on the work enumerated above); F. agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents; G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents; H. correlate the information known to Bidder, information and obServations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents; 1. promptly give ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder; and J. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work. 4.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the work required by the Bidding Documents and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents and the wdtten resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the work. ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE 5.01 A pre-Bid conference will be held at 9 A.M. on December 2, 2003, at City of Oshkosh Wastewater Treatment Plant, 233 No[th Campbell Road, Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54903. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend _ and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER Considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. Section 00200-4 1-382-636/03-04 ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS 6.01 The Site ia identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment are to be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to ENGINEER in wdting. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Issuing Office as having received the Bidding Documents. 7.02 All requests for interpretation must be received at least seven days prior to the day set for receiving Bids. Addenda will be mailed not later than five days prior to the day set for receiving Bids. Failure of any Bidder to receive any such Addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such Bidder from any obligations under the Bid as submitted. All Addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 7.03 Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7.04 Addenda may also be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER. 7.05 Receipt of all addenda must be acknowledged in space provided in the Bid. ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY 8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to OWNER in an amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a cashier's, certified, or bank check or a Bid Bond (on form attached, if a form is prescribed) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of paragraphs 5.01 and 5,02 of the General Conditions. 8.02 The Bid security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required Contract security within fiftee~ days after the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. 8.03 Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening. Section 00200-5 1-382-636/03-04 ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIMES 9.01 The numbers of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) Substantially Completed and (b) completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement (or incorporated therein by reference to the attached Bid Form). ARTICLE 10- LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 10.01 Provisions fOr liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE OR "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment sPecified or described in the Bidding Documents with any combination of Bid Alternatives selected, but without consideration of Equipment Alternatives or other possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever itis specified or described in the Bidding Documents that an Equipment Alternative listed in the Lump Sum Base Bid or that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by ENGINEER is set forth in paragraph 6.05.A of the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 11.02 As an excePtion to the above, there will be no substitutions or ,'or equal" items considered for Base Bid or Alternative Bid designated items that are included in the Contract award. ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 12.01 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain subcontractors, suppliers, individuals, or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to OWNER a list of all such subcontractors, suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such subcontractor, supplier, individuals, or entities if requested by OWNER. If OWNER or ENGINEER, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed subcontractor, supplier, individual, or entity may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in the Bid. 12.02 If apparent successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution; OWNER may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors, suppliers, individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for the forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any subcontractor, supplier, individual, or entity listed and against which OWNER or ENGINEER makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in paragraph 6.06.B of the General Conditions. 12.03 CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier, individual, or entity against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. Section 00200-6 ARTICLE 13 - BID 13.01 The Bid form is included with the Bidding Documents. The Bid must not be separated from the attached volume. 13.02 All blanks on the Bid form must be completed in ink and the Bid signed. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternative, adjustment unit price item or Unit price item listed therein, or the words "No Bid," "No Change." or "Not Applicable" entered. 13.03 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 13.04 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 13.05 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown below the signature. 13.06 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder's name and official address. 13.07 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner indicated on the Bid form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown below the signature. 13.08 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures. 13.09 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid form. 13.10 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 13.11 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder's authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the Contract. Bidder's state contractor license number for the state of the Project, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid form. 13.12 All Bids shall be signed in the presence of and be notarized by a Notary Public or other Officer authorized to administer oaths. ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID: EVALUATION OF BIDS 14.01 Lump Sum Base Bid with Bid Alternatives and Equ~ pment Alternatives A. Bidders shall submit a Lump Sum Bid for the Base Bid. The price for all Base Bid items shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. Bidder shall include a separate Bid price for each Bid Alternative described in the Bidding Documents and as provided for in the Bid. The price for each Bid Alternative will ~3e the amount to be added to or deducted from the price of the Base Bid if OWNER selects the Bid Alternative. Section 00200-7 B. Bidder shall include a separate pdce for each Equipment Alternative Item listed in the Bid. Bidder may bid other Equipment Alternatives by writing in the alternative's name and the amount to be added to or deducted from the price of the Base Bid Equipment Item, if spaces are included in the Bid form. C. Failure to provide a separate price for each Bid Alternative and for each Base Bid Equipment Item may result in OWNER declaring Bid non-responsive. Consideration of Bid Alternatives will be made prior to the Notice of Award. Consideration of Equipment Alternatives will be made by OWNER within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. D. Bid Alternative and Equipment Alternative prices shall include the entire cost of the Bid Alternatives and Equipment Alternatives, including cost for engineering changes to accommodate the Bid alternatives and Equipment Alternatives, and additional work to be performed which is not shown on the drawings but which is required as a result of selection of the Bid Alternative and/or Equipment Alternative. 14.02 Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be reSolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. DiscrepanCies between Words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. 14.03 The Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for overhead and profit on account of cash allowances named in the Contract Documents as provided for in paragraph 11.02 of the General Conditions. The final Contract Price will be adjusted to reflect actual costs on account of cash allowances. No allowances for temporary services are provided. Bidder shall include costs for temporary services in Contract Price. 14.04 The following cost allowances shall be included in the Bid for the Contract(s). Project Contingencies Allowance Section 01019 - Contract Considerations Unsuitable Foundation Material for Structures and Roads Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading Unsuitable Foundation Material for Utility Trenches Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading Excavation and Disposal of Solid Waste Fill Materials Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading Face Brick Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System Electrical Service Section 16420- Electrical Service System Computers and Appurtenances Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation Lift Station Telemetry Modifications Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation ARTICLE 15 - SUBMISSION OF BIDS 15.01 Bids will be received for all divisions of the specifications and all other provisions of the Bidding Documents. Section 00200-8 15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the Advertisement to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and. if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), the name and address of the Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other recuired documents. If [he Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate envelope plainly marked on the outside with the notation "BID ENCLOSED." A mailed Bid shall be addressed to place indicated in the Advertisement to Bid No relief shall be provided for a mailed Bid no! being received by the prescribed time. No Bid will be considered which is received after the time set for receiving Bids. ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 16.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time set for the opemng of Bids. ARTICLE 17- OPENING OF BIDS 17.01 Bids will be opened at the time an~ place indicated in the Advertisement to Bid and, (unless obviously nonresponsive), read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternatives and components (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 18 - BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid form, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. ARTICLE 19 - AWARD OF CONTRACT 19.01 OWNER reserVes without limitation the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time Or changes in the work and to negotiate Contract terms with the successful Bidder and the right to accept or reject all incomplete, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, obscure, or conditional Bids, or Bids which contain additions not called for, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, or which do not comply with .the Instructions to Bidders. OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the project to make an award to that Bidder whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. OWNER further reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to be nonresponsible. 19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest. 19.03 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, Whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternatives, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid form or prior to the Notice of Award. Section 00200-9 19.04 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the work for which the identity of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data, and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 19.05.1 OWNER may make such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the work in accordance with the Contract documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. Bidder shall furnish to OWNER all such information and data for this purpose as OWNER may request. OWNER reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy OWNER that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract Documents and to complete the work contemplated therein. 19.05.2 OWNER shall be satisfied that Bidder involved (1) maintains a permanent place of business, (2) has adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously, (3) has a suitable financial status to meet obligations incident to the work, (4) has appropriate technical experience, and (5) can submit a satisfactory performance record, 19.06.1 If a Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible Bidder of either the Lump Sum Base Bid or the Lump Sum Base Bid plus or minus any Bid Alternative(s) selected by OWNER whose evaluation indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the project. Bid from the successful Bidder for the Lump Sum Base Bid plus or minus any Bin Alternative(s) selected by OWNER may not necessarily be lower r~ price than the Lump Sum Base Bid or Bids for other Bid Alternative combinations. 19.06.2 OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid Alternatives or Equipment Alternatives to the Lump Sum Base Bid. Should OWNER wish to consider Bid Alternatives listed, Bidder may be required to provide additional information as listed in Article 6.05 of the General Conditions prior to the Notice of Award. If a Bid Alternative is selected by OWNER, the Contract will be awarded and a Change Order incorporating the cost of the Bid Alternative will be prepared concurrently with Contract award and signed along with the Contract Documents. Consideration of Equipment Alternatives of the selected Bidder will be made by OWNER within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 19.07 If a Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the successful Bidder a Notice of Award within sixty days after the time set for opening Bids. ARTICLE 20 - CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE 20.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurances. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied by the required performance and payment bonds and insurances. ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 21.01 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement attached thereto. Within 15 days thereafter, Section 00200-10 1 ~382-636/03~)4 successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to ENGINEER with the required Bonds and insurances. Within ten days thereafter, ENGINEER shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Successful Bidder with a complete set of Drawings with appropriate identification. ARTICLE 22 - RETAINAGE 22.01 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 23 - INCOME TAX 23.01 Bidders, whether a corporation, partnership, or individual, who are nonresidents of the State of Wisconsin, shall comply with Section 71.80 (16) of the Wisconsin Statutes. ARTICLE 24 - OTHER TAXES 24.01 The Bid shall include all taxes in effect at the time the Bid is submitted. Bidders who are uncertain as to what items are subject to tax, or who require further explanation or clarification, are requested to contact the State of Wisconsin Department of Revenue. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions SC-6.10 for additional information on taxes, including exemptions for sales tax at wastewater treatment facility sites. ARTICLE 25 - WAGE RATE DETERMINATION 25.01 A State wage rate determination will be inserted as a part of the Bidding Documents and/or will be on file at the office of OWNER. Bidders shall inspect the wage rate determination and shall incorporate its requirements into their Bid. See the General Requirements for additional requirements. 25.02 Subsection 66.0903(12)(d) of the Wisconsin Statutes requires that any person submitting a Bid complete the Disclosure of Ownership form included at the end of the Bid. The term "other construction business" includes the business or businesses currently at least 25% owned as well as previously within the last three years at least 25% owned. ARTICLE 26 - WOMEN'S AND MINORITY-OWNED BUSINESSES 26.01 This Contract is expected'to be funded in part through{he Clean Water Fund. The procedures from the State of Wisconsin for involving women's and minority-owned businesses must be followed for Bidders to be considered responsive and responsible with respect to their business involvement. 26.02 OWNER is required to comply with the Wisconsin Clean Water Fund subcontracting requirements contained in NR 162 (and 165 if applicable). To this end, Bidders shall follow the requirements set forth in NR 162.09 (and 165.11 if applicable), as required elsewhere in this document. 26.03 The following pages outline the requirements for utilization of women's and minority-owned businesses for the Clean Water Fund. Bidders must use the Wisconsin Department of Development's Minority-Owned Businesses Directory, since only firms listed in this directory are recognized by DNR as being MBE firms. Copies can be obtained from the Department of Development. See address below. Minority Businesses listed in this directory are certified in the State of Wisconsin; contacting and utilizing them fulfills the requirements of Chapter NR 162.09(3) (and 165.11 (4) if applicable), Wisconsin Administrative Code. Bidders may also use other resources as also listed below. The women and minority-owned businesses identified in 2. a., b. and c. below must meet the definitional requirements of the Clean Water Fund Program. Section 00200-11 1~382-636/03-04 Minority-Owned Businesses a. Recipients must use the Certified list provided by the: Bureau of Minority Business Development Wisconsin Department of Development P.O. Box 7970 Madison, WI 53707 Telephone: (608) 267-9550 Women-Owned Businesses a. Recipients may use the information in Disadvantaqed Business Enterprises prepared by the: Wisconsin Department of Transportation Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Programs 4802 Sheboygan Avenue, Room 951 P.O. Box 7916 Madison, WI 53707-7916 Telephone: (608) 266-6961 FAX: (608) 266-7818 Recipients may use the information provided by the Official Joint Certification Proqram on Minority, Disadvantaged and Women Business Enterprises. Contact Person: Disadvantaged Business Development Division County of Milwaukee 907 North 10th Street Courthouse Annex, Room 311 Milwaukee, WI 53233 Telephone: (414) 278-5248 c. Recipients may use any other relevant information from other sources. END OF SECTION Section 00200-12 WOMEN'S AND MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION CONTRACT 03-04 GENERAL Bidders shall demonstrate positive efforts to utilize women and minority-owned businesses. This Procurement will be sUbject to regulations contained in NR 162.09(3). A copy of NR 162.09 is attached. Failure to comply could result in the termination of the Contract and the Iow interest loan ~ (N19) · R 162.18 and NR 162. . "Women Business Enterprise" means a woman-owned business as an independent business concern which is at least 51% owned by a woman or women who also control and operate it. Determination of whether a business is at least 51% owned by a woman or women shall be made without regard to marital property laws. Section 560.036, Wisconsin Statutes, defines a minority-owned business (MBE) as a sole proprietorship, partnership, joint venture, or corporation that fulfills the following requirements: F It is at least 51% owned, controlled, and actively managed by a minority group member or members who are U.S. citizens or persons lawfully admitted to the United States for permanent residence, as defined under 8 USC 1101(a)(20). b. It is currently performing a useful business function. A minority is a member of one or more of the following groups: "Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Asian Americans, American Indians, American Eskimos, and American Aleuts." Federal Register Vol. 43, No. 248 - Tuesday, December 26, 1978. Native Hawaiians are also identified as a minority. BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITIES It is Bidder's responsibility as CONTRACTOR, if awarded a Contract, to utilize women businesses and minority-owned businesses if CONTRACTOR awards subcontracts. Bidders are required to submit documentation of all positive efforts to use women and minority-owned businesses with their Bid. If Bidder does not meet the women business or minority business goals listed below, Bidder must document the efforts Bidder made to achieve these goals. UTILIZATION GOALS Minority and Women's Business OWNER has a combined minority and women's business utilization goal of 8% to be achieved by CONTRACTOR ~n awarding subcontracts. If CONTRACTOR awards subcontracts, the 8% goal also applies to the subcontractors. WI-1 F' DEP~ OF N~ RRSOUR(]ES WI-3 WI-4 WI-5 F Ii WI-7 SECTION 00400 BID STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRADE CONTRACT 03-04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN Bids to be received until 2 P.M., December 11, 2003. THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: City of Oshkosh City Clerk's Office 215 Church Avenue Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54903 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the Prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of OWNER. Bidder will sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement with the bonds, insurance certificates and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of OWNER's Notice of Award. 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that: Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda (list addenda by addendum number and date), receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: Date: Addendum No.: Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the work. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to ail federal, state and local taws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Section 00400-1 1-382-656/03-04 D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing .surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site · (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions' as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions and (2) reports and Drawings~ of a Hazardous EnvirOnmental condition, if any, which has been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional or supplementary examinations, nvestigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or wl~ich relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, thereto, and safety precautions and programs incident. F. Bidder does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance and furnishing of the work in accordance with the times, price, and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents. I. Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder. J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms.and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work for which this Bid is submitted. 4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization; or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER. Section 00400-2 5.01 Bidder will complete the work for the following price(s): The following abbreviations may be used in this Bid: CIP CY Dt fiST EXCL FT GAL HERCP HRS IN INCL LBS Complete in Place LF - Linear Foot Cubic Yard LS Lump Sum Ductile Iron LT Left Diameter MBF Thousand Board Feet Each MH Manhole Estimate(d) RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe Excluding RT Right Feet SF Square Foot Gallon STA Station Horizontal Elliptical 'RCP SY Sq ~are Yard Hours T Ton Inch VLF Vertical Linear Foot Including W/ With Pounds W/O Without BIDDERS SHOULD NOT ADD ANY CONDITIONS OR QUALIFYING STATEMENTS TO THIS BID OR THE BID MAY BE DECLARED IRREGULAR AS NOT BEING RESPONSIVE TO THE INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. Section 00400-3 BID STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRAD'E CONTRACT 03-04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN LUMP SUM BASE BID: (Words) ~¢~ (Numbers) See Section 01019 - Contract Considerations for discussion of cash allowances to include in Bid. Contract award will be made based on the Lump Sum Base Bid or Lump Sum Base. Bid with any combination of Bid Alternatives selected. The price for all Base Bid equipment items-, shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. Bid Alternatives will be added or deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid, if they are accepted, prior to Notice of Award being made. OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid Alternatives or Equipment Alternatives to the Lump Sum Base Bid. Should OWNER wish to consider Bid Alternatives listed, Bidder may be req-uired to provide additional information as listed in Article 6.05 of the General Conditions prior to Notice of Award. Consideration of Equipment Alternatives of the selected Bidder will be made by OWNER within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. If a Bid Alternative is selected by OWNER, the Contract will be awarded and a Change Order incorporating the cost of the Bid Alternative will be prepared concurrently with Contract award and signed along with the Contract Documents. NOTE: THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMI'FI'ED AS THE BID. PAGES FROM THE BOUND DOCUMENT. Section 00400-4 1-382-636/03-04 DO NOT SEPARATE BID BID ALTERNATIVES BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 1: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of $ ~ shall be Added to the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if OWNER elects to have the CONTRACTOR provide all welded construction of the service entrance switchgear enclosures as specified in Section 16344 - 5KV Metal Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear. BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 2: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. The price of $ ~5¢~0~?~ shall be Added to the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if OWNER elects to have the CONTRACTOR provide all welded construction of the paralleling switchgear enclosures as specified in Section 16253 - Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. BID ALTERNATIVE NO. 3: CONTRACTOR shall include in the cost of the Bid Alternative ALL work associated with providing the scope listed below. · ~ The price of $ ¢0~)0(~ shall ~e Added to the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid if OWNER elects to have the CONTRACTOR provide Inventory and Maintenance Reports as specified in Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation, Part 1.14 Inventory and Maintenance Reports. NOTE: THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED AS THE BID. DO NOT SEPARATE BID PAGES FROM THE BOUND DOCUMENT. Section 00400-5 EQUIPMENT ALTERNATIVES The name of the Base Bid Equipment item which Bidder shall include in the Lump Sum Base Bid is listed for each equipment item. Where the Bid form allows, as indicated by printed spaces, Bidder may bid other Equipment Aternatlves by wrtng n the Alternabves name. Equ~pmen Alternative Bid prices shall include the entire cost of the Alternative, including cost for eng neet ng changes to accommodate the Alternative, and additional work to be performed which is not shown on the drawings, but which is required as a result of selection of the Alternative. Whether or not an Equipment Alternative is offered to one or more of the Base Bid items provided for in the Bid. Bidder shall, in the "Name" column on the Bid form and immediately above the name of each of the Base Bid Items A. through O, write (in Numbers) the price for providing the Base Bid item, as included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. When more than one Base Bid manufacturer name is listed for a Base Bid item, CONTRACTOR shall circle the name of the equipment selected for the Lump Sum Base Bid and write in the price for the selected equipment. ITEM NAME Standby Power System and Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment (Sections 16230 and 16253) Base Bid Includes: (Circle One) Alternative Alternative (o&0,0O0''¢- 5KV Metal Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear (Section 16344) ADD DEDUCT TO FROM BASE BID BASE BID ~mmins~.N Pow_~_e~r~'f (Not Applicable) (Not Applicable) OR (Not Applicable) (Not Applicable) Caterpillar~,J' ] ~'~ (+) Base Bid Includes: ABB (Not Applicable) (Not Applicable) (Circle One) ~---% (Not Applicable) (Not Applicable) OR-- Cutler Hammer (Not Appli. cable) (Not Ap, piicabie) Alternative Alternative NOTE: THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED AS THE BID. DO NOT SEPARATE BID PAGES FROM THE BOUND DOCUMENT. Section 00400-6 i ITEM C. Controls and Instrumentation (Section 16940) Base Bid Includes: (Circle One) $ L.W. Alien Altronex ent Cont~'ro~ Wunderlich-Malee ADD TO NAME BASE BID (Not Applicable) Not Applicable) DEDUCT FROM BASE BID (Not Applicable) (Not Applicable) NOTE: THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED AS THE BID. PAGES FROM THE BOUND DOCUMENT. DO NOT SEPARATE BID Section 00400-7 1-382-636/03-04 L BID STANDBY POWER SYSTEM AND SCADA UPGRADE CONTRACT 03-04 CITY OF OSHKOSH, WISCONSIN SUPPLEMENTAL UNIT PRICES The following Supplemental Unit Prices will apply in the event that additions to or deductions from the work required in the Bid are ordered. A single price shall be bid for each item. OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject these prices for Items 1, 2, 3 and 6 by inclusion in or omission from the Contract Documents to be executed after the award of the Contract. If work involving omitted Supplemental Unit Prices does occur, such work shall be compensated for using other methods as provided in the Con[tact Documents. Items 4, 5, and 7 shall become part of the Contract Documents to,be used for additions to or deductions from the estimated quantities given in the specifications. TYPE OF WORK 1. Drilled Concrete Piers; Additional Length (Section 02375) 2. Drille~l Concrete Piers; Reduced Length (Section 02375) 3. Drilled Concrete Piers; Obstruction Time (Section 02375) 4. Remove and Replace Unsuitable Foundation Material for Structures and Roads (Section 02222) 5. Remove and Replace Unsuitable Foundation Material for Utility Trenches (Section 02222) 6. Sidewalk (Section 03300) 7. Excavation and Disposal of Solid Waste Fill Materials (Section 02222) UNIT // , .~, - h _£y/~,,~ ~ (Words) (Numbers) - ' (Word~) (Numbers) (Words) (Numbers) ¢ (Words) (Numbers) CY (Words) ¢~,..,U~j~_~?F (Words) T (Words)' Dollars $_ (Numbers) Dollars (Numbers) Dollars $_ ~,.e~ (Numbers) NOTE: THE ENTIRE DOCUMENT, MUST BE SUBMITTED AS THE BID. DO NOT SEPARATE BID PAGES FROM THE BOUND DOCUMENT. Section 00400-8 ~ e work wil be substantially Complete on or before November 30, 2004, ~ ' 6.01 Bidder agrees that th ......... .~ ....... ~+ ,~ ranranh 14.07 B of th'e General 'i and completed and ready for Tlnal payment In auuu,u,~,,,.~ ~ Conditions on or before December 31, 2004. ~ rov sions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of 'i 6.02 Bidder accepts the p .......... m,,,~ oh,~ve which shall be stated in the failure to complete the Work within ~ne umeu ~pu~.,,,~,~, .... I.'-- Agreement. ~ 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: ~.,- ~ord in the ; .: A. Required Bid Security in the form of (Bond or Certified Check) .i Pi~e ~em.e~t. Dollars ~ amount ~ (.,.. ($ .) as required by the Instructions to Bidders. B. Disclosure of Ownership Statement. 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. COmmunications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to the address of Bidder indicated 9.01 below: Name: Street: CitY, State, Zip Code: ~ Phone: (920) 42A-0230 Submitted on [)m. erri:e~ 11 2003 State Contractor License No. (if applicable). Section 00400-9 1.382-856/03-04 If Bidder is: _An Individual Name (typed or printed): By: (Individual's signature) Doing business as: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: A Partnership Partnership Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of general partner :- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: A Corporation Corporation Name: (SEAL) J state of Incorporation: Type (~e~¢eral Bssirje'Es~, p, ro[essional, Service, Limited Liability): By: .~'~'"~¢~¢~ .~¢P'"~ ./'~,/-/'~¢-.~_..~ -. . , (~]¢nature -- a~ach evidence of authority [o sign) C.a--em'l ~ Name (typed or printed): Title: Attest M~'cl;'ael E. Mm/~ Business address: 2200 gboc~lm Ava~e Phone No.: (920) 434-0233 FAX No.: Date of Qualification to do business is - t~esident (CORPORATE SEAL) ,, ~ 3; Sc~lels, (Signature of Corporate Secretary) (920) 434-0454 Swo, rn and subscribed to before_~e~ dJ&,'¢~. ~ day o~ this Notary Public or Other Officer Authorized to Administer Oaths. My Commission expires: April 8, 2007 Section 00400-10 A Joint Venture Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: Joint Venturer Name: (SEAL) By: q (Signature -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: Phone and FAX Number, and Address for receipt of official communications: (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.) Sworn and subscribed to before me this day of ,. Notary Public or Other Officer Authorized to Admin stet Oaths. My Commission expires: Section 00400-11 1-382-836103~)4 Disclosure of Ownership Persona{ information you provide may be used for secondscy pucposes.(See Section 15.04(1 )(m) Wisconsin Statutes for detalls.) On the date a contractor submits a bid to or completes negotiations with a state agency or local governmental unit on a project subject to Section 66.0903 or 103.49, Wisconsin Statutes the contractor shall disclose to such state agency or local governmental unit the name of any "other construction business" which the contractor, or a shareholder, officer or partner of the contractor, owns or has owned within the preceding three (3) years. The term "other construction business" means any business engaged in the erection, construction, remodeling, repainng, demolition, altering or painting and decorating of buildings, structures or facilities and any business engaged in supplying mineral aggregate, or hauling excavated matedal or spoil as provided by Sections 66.0903(3), 103.49(2) and 103.50(2), Wisconsin Statutes. This form ONLY needs to be completed if (a) the contractor, or a shareholder, officer or partner of'the contractor, owns at least a 25% interest in the "other construction business" indicated below on the date the contractor submits a bid or completes negotiations, or has owned at least a 25% interest in the "other construction business" at any time within the preceding three (3) years; and (b) the Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development IDWD) has determined that the "other construction business" failed to pay the prevailing wage rate or time and one-half the required hourly basic rate of pay for hours worked in excess of the prevailing hours of labor to any employee at any time within the preceding three (3) years. This form DOES NOT have to be completed if the requirements of both (a) and (b) above are not met. If the requirements of both (a) and (b) above are met. this form must ONLY be filed with the state agency or local govemmenta] unit that will be awarding the contract. Name and address of other construction business of any "other construction business" which meets ali of the criteria specified in [2) and (3) above. Name of Other Construction Business Street Address or P.O. Box, City, State and Zip Code I hereby state under penalty of perjury that the information contained in this document is true and accurate according to my knowledge and belief. . .~'~~ F~_cI~p1 Pdnt Name of Authorized Officer Signature of Authorized Officer t/ l~esid~nt This l~th Day of ~ ' V Title of Authorized Officer Name of Corporation, Partnership or Sole Proprietorship 2~00 kbodale Avenue, ti) ~ox 11415 (ke~n ~ay WI 54307-1415 Address (Include Street or P.O. Box. City, State and Zip Code) The statutory authority for the use of this form is prescribed in Sections 66.0903(12)(d) and 103.49(7)(d), Wisconsin Statutes. The use of this form is 'mandatory. The penalty for failing to complete this form is prescribed in Section 103.005(12), Wisconsin Statutes. ERD-7777 (R. 03/2003) END OF SECTION Section 00400-12 1-382-536103-04 BIDDER (Name and Address}: P. O. ~ox/1415 SECTION 00430 5% BID BOND SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): Fidelity and Deposit Ompany of Maryland 3910 Keswick P~ad OWNER ~Name and Address): City BID: BID DUE DATE: PROJECT (Brief Description including Location): Stardly Po~r Systen & BOND: BOND NUMBER: DATE: (Not later than Bid Due Date): PbNAL SUM: Five percent of aTstnt bid J ! , IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject ~o th~ terms prin~ed on the reverse side hereof, do &ach cause this Bid Bead to be duly executed on ils behalf by its authorized officer, ag?t, or represenlstive. SURETY Fidelity and D~x~sit Ccr~sny of MarylaJ~ (SeaP Surety's Name and Corporate Seal OyCe ~ ' ' gnature and l~tte .¢Attarc[~ Power of Attorney) BIDDER ame ~/.g~porate Seal (eal} Attest: Signature and Title Section 00430-1 1-382-6J6/03-04 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bir~d themselves, their heirs, exe. cutors, administrators, successors and assignees to pay to OWNER upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. 2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any perfor.mance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents. 3. This obligation shall be null and void if: 3.1 OWNER accepts Bidder's Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by OWNER) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any Performance and Payment Bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents, or 3.2 All Bids are rejected by OWNER, or 3.3 OWNER fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by paragraph 5 hereof). Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 catendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from OWNER, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of and any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue notice of award agreed to in writing by OWNER and Bidder, provided that the time for issuing notice of award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid Due Date without Surety's written consent. 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after Bid Due Date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the project is located. 8. Notice required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or repi'esentative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond Shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of the Bond conflicts with any applicable provision of any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect. 11. The term "bid" as used herein includes a bid, offer, or proposal as applicable. END OF SECTION Section 00430-2 SECTION 0O5O0 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT by and between (hereinafter called OWNER) and (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: or indicated in the Contract Article2. THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: Article 3. ENGINEER 3.01 The Project has been designed by Strand Associates, Inc.® who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 4. CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Section 00500-1 1-382-636/03-04 F 4.02 Dates for Substantial Completion and Final Payment A. The work shall be substantially complete on or before November 30, 2004, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07. B of the General Conditions on or befnre December 31, 2004. 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay to OWNER the following daily charge: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT From More Than To and Including DAILY CHARGE Calendar Day $ $ 100,000 $ 500 100,000 500,000 800 500,000 1,000,000 1,000 1,000,000 3,000,000 1,200 3,000,000 5,000,000 1,500 5,000,000 2,000 The above liquidated damages shall be applied separately to each of the substantial and final completion dates as shown in paragraph 4.02.A. Article 5. CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in Current funds as follows: A. For all Work stated in CONTRACTOR's Bid attached hereto as an exhibit. B. All specific cash allowances are included in the Contract Price and have computed in accordance with paragraph 11.02 of the General Conditions. been Section 00500-2 1-382-636/03-04 Article 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be ~rocessed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage A. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Pdce on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as established at the preconstruction conference dudng performance of the Work as provided in paragraphs 6.02.A. 1 and 6.02.A.2 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.07.A of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements: 1. Prior to Substantial Completion, OWNER will retain an amount equal to 10% of each progress payment application until 50% of the Work has been completed. At 50% completion, further progress payment applications shall be paid in full to the CONTRACTOR and no additional amounts will be retained unless the ENGINEER certifies to the OWNER that the job is not proceeding satisfactorily. Amounts previously retained shall not be paid to the CONTRACTOR until substantial completion of the Work. At 50% completion of the Work, or any time thereafter when the character and progress of the Work is not satisfactory to OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, additional amounts may be retained, but in no event shall the total retainage be more than 10% of the value of the work completed. 2. Upon Substantial Completion, OWNER shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 98% of the Work completed, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine in accordance with paragraph 14.02.B.5 of the General Conditions and less 100% of ENGINEER's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the certificate of Substantial Completion. 6.03 Final Payment A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the work in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.07. Article 7, HIERARCHY 7.01 In resolving inconsistencies among two or more sections of the Contract Documents, precedence shall be given in the following order: First: Second: Third: Fourth: Fifth: Sixth: Seventh: Eighth: WRITTEN AMENDMENTS AGREEMENT CHANGE ORDERS ADDENDA SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS Section 00500-3 Figure dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over scale dimensions. Detailed drawings shall take precedence over general drawings. Article 8. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01 In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: A. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. CONTRACTOR has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the work. C. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress and performance of the work. D. CONTRACTOR has carefully studied (1) all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except underground facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which has been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. CONTRACTOR has Obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site that may affect the cost, progress, and performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, Sequences, and procedures of construction, if any, expressly required by the Contract Documents to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the performance and fumishing of the work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. F. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the WOrk as indicated in the contract Documents. H. CONTRACTOR has correlated the information known to CONTRACTOR, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports, and drawings identified in the Contract Documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. Section 00500-4 F I CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Article 9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the following: 9.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. This Agreement (pages 00500-1 through (~0~00-/'d_~ · inclusive); Performance Bond (pages to 00600-1 through 00600-4, inclusive); Payment Bond (pages 00600~5 through 00600-8, inclusive); Other Bonds a. ./[.)~/~ (pages ,/~,,/~ to /'/J,,/~ , inclusive); b. /7,~,/A- (pages //~/~ to /b~,/~ ,inclusive); c. ~/~ (pages ?~/~ to , inclusive); 5. General Conditions (pages 00700-1 through 00700-42, inclusive); 6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 00800-1 through 7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual; 8. Drawings , inclusive); inclusive incorporated herein by reference with each sheet bearing the following gener.¢l title: aS well as drawings listed in the table of contents that are bound at the back of these specifications. Section 00500-5 10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows:) a. Notice to Proceed (page NP-1, inclusive); b. CONTRACTOR's Bid ( /~('~)L/(~_ ~/ .-(z~.,,]g--/X~/~.J ~)~(~(~-~/,,z~? ); ! c. Supplemental Unit Prices are included as part of the Agreement except as noted: Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award e. ( WI-1 throuqh WI-7, inclusive ); 11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: a. Written Amendments; b. Work Change Directives; ¢. Change Order(s). B. The documents listed in paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9. D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. Article 10. MISCELLANEOUS 10.01 Terms A. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 10.02 Assignment of Contract A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation, monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. Section 00500-6 10.03 Successors and Assigns A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.04 Severability A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. Section 00500-7 1-382-636/03-04 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in triplicate. One counterpar[ each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER. All portions of the COntract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or identified by ENGINEER on their behalf. This Agreement Will be effective on ~2~--,-,~.~ ;{~r~. ,~oo~ (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). ~1~ OWNER: (SEAL) (Title) ATTERT- Business Address: Name: Street: City, State, Zip Code: Phone: Facsimile: Designated Representative: Section 00500-8 1~382-636/03-04 CONTRACTOR: (SEAL) By: (Title) ATTEST: Business Address: Name: Street: City, State, Zip Code: Phone: Facsimile: Designated Representative: Section 00500-9 O N~_~_.ER~ 'Atto rney ~....~ 7 Provision has been made to pay the liability that will accrue under this Agreement: Countersigned: OWNER's Comptroller or Treasurer Date INSTRUCTIONS FOR EXECUTING CONTRACT If the Agreement is to be signed by the Secretary of the corporetion, the certificate below should be executed by some other officer of the corporetion, under the corporete seal. In lieu of the foregoing certificate, there may be attached to the Agreement copies of so much of the records of the corporetion which will show the official charecter and authority of the officere signing, duly certified by the secretary or assistant secretary under the corporate seal to be true copies. The full name and business address of CONTRACTOR should be inserted and the Agreement should be signed with CONTRACTOR's official signature. Please have the name of the signing party printed under all signatures to the Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is opereting as a partnerehip, each partner should sign the Agreement. If the Agreement is not signed by each partner, there should be attached to the Agreement a duly authenticated power of attorney evidencing the signer's (signers') authority to sign such Agreement for and in behalf of the partnership. If CONTRACTOR is an individual, the trede name (if CONTRACTOR is operating under a trede name) should be indicated in the Agreement and the Agreement should be signed by such individual. If signed by other than CONTRACTOR, there should be attached to the Agreement a duly authenticated power of attorney evidencing the signer's authority to execute such Agreement for and in behalf of CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, the folloWing ceraficate should be executed: I, ~-'Ol~d ~. '--~-~'~ , certify that l am the Secr. e~a~t- .of 0 th_e . cprporation named as CONTRACTOR herein above; that EA.,LCt/L~,~t J~.~ ~i~JI~).~,C~ ,~ , ~-~Who ,~igned the foregoing Agreement on behalf of CONTRACTOR was then ~./~,~.~/~ of said corporation; that said Agreement was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body, and is within the scope of its corporete powers. ~~ ~.~ateSea,) END OF SECTION Section 00500-10 1-382-636/03-04 F TO: . ADDRESS: CONTRACT FOR SECTION OO55O NOTICE TO PROCEED (CONTRACTOR) Dated OWNER'S CONTRACT NO. - (Insert name of contract as it appears in the Bidding Documents) You are notified that the Contract Time under the above Contract will commence to run on , __. On that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. Before you may start any work at the site, paragraph 2.05 C. of the General Conditions provides that you and OWNER must each deliver to the other (with copies to ENGINEER and other identified additional insureds) certificates, copies of endorsements, and other evidence of insurance which each is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with the Contract Documents. '~ Aisc before you may start any work at the site, you must!~'~'~(O\[(0~¢-' (Add other requirements) F/ Z/ (OW~I,,ER) ('Authorizi~d Signature) END OF SECTION Section 00550-1 1-382-636/03-04 (Title) SECTION 00600 CONSTRUCTION PERFORMANCE BOND ~08657117 Any singular reference to CONTRACTOR. Surety, OWNER or other party sh~ll be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): The Selmer Company 2200 Woodale Avenue Green Bay~ WI 54313 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Oshkosh 215 Church Avenue Oshkosh, WI 54902-1130' CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: 1/22/04 SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland 3910 Keswick Road Baltimore~ MD 21211 Amount: $2,837,000.00 Description (Name and Location): Contract ~O3~04 - Standby Power System and SCADA Upgrade, Oshkosh, WI BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): 1/22/04 AmOunt: $2,837,000.00 Modifications to this Bond Form: See Attached Terrorism Rider CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL COmpany: ~ne Sel~r C~pany Signature: ~.¢.~. ~ _~ ~.~ (Corp. Seal) SURETY Fidelity and Deposit Company: Company of Maryland signature: Name: Joyce Novak (Corp. Seal) Title: Attorney-in-Fact Approved by (~VVNER: / _ ~ (Title) (Date) Section 00600-1 1-382-636/03-04 1. CONTRACTOR and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to OWNER for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If CONTRACTOR performs the Construction Contract, Surety and CONTRACTOR shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in subparagraph 3.1. 3. If there is no OWNER Default, Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 OWNER has notified CONTRACTOR and Surety at its address described in paragraph 10 below, that OWNER is considering declaring a CONTRACTOR Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with CONTRACTOR and Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If OWNER, CONTRACTOR and Surety agree, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive OWNER's rights, if any, subsequently to declare a CONTRACTOR Default; and 3.2 OWNER has declared a CONTRACTOR Default and formally terminated CONTRACTOR's rights to complete the Contract. Such CONTRACTOR Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after CONTRACTOR and Surety have received notice as provided in subparagraph 3.1; and 3.3 OWNER has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the Contract with OWNER. 4. When OWNER has satisfied the COnditions of paragraph 3, Surety shall promptly and at Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1 4.2 Arrange for CONTRACTOR, with consent of OWNER, to perform and complete the ConstrUction Contract; or Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, ihrough its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified COntractors acceptable to OWNER for a COntract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by OWNER and the COntractor selected with OWNER's COncurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to OWNER the amount of damages as described in paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by OWNER resulting from CONTRACTOR's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and COmplete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to OWNER and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to OWNER; or 2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify OWNER citing reasons therefor.- Section 00600-2 1~382-636/03-04 5. If Surety does not proceed as provided in paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from OWNER to Surety demanding that Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and OWNER shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to OWNER. If Surety proceeds as provided in subparagraph 4.4, and OWNER refuses the payment tendered or Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice OWNER shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to OWNER. 6. After OWNER has terminated CONTRACTOR's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if Surety elects to act under subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of Surety to OWNER shall not be greater than those of CONTRACTOR under the Construction Contact, and the responsibilities of OWNER to Surety shall not be greater than those of OWNER under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by OWNER of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1 The responsibilities of CONTRACTOR for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from CONTRACTOR's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of Surety under paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or nonperformance of CONTRACTOR. 7. Surety shall not be liable to OWNER or others for obligations of CONTRACTOR that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than OWNER or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors. 8. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after CONTRACTOR Default or within two years after CONTRACTOR ceased working or within two years after Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10. Notice to Surety, OWNER, or CONTRACTOR shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not a common law bond. Section 00600-3 12. Definitions: 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to CONTRACTOR of any amounts received or to be received by OWNER in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which CONTRACTOR is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of CONTRACTOR under the Construction Contract. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.. 12.3 CONTRACTOR Default: Failure of CONTRACTOR, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 OWNER Default: Failure of OWNER, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay CONTRACTOR as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. END OF SECTION Section 00600-4 1,-382-636/03,,04 SECTION 00600 CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND #08657117 Any singular reference to CONfRACTOR, ~urety.' OWNER or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): ~Ine Selmer Company 2200 Woodale Avenue Green Bay, WI 54313 OWNER (Name and Address): City of Oshkosh 215 Church Avenue Oshkosh, WI 54902-1130 SURETY(Name and Principal Place of Business): Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland 3910 Keswick Road Baltimore, MD 21211 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: 1/22/04 Amount: $2,837,000.00 Description (Name and LOcation): Contract #03-04 - Standby Power Syptem and SCADA Upgrade~ Oshkosh~ WI BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date):. 1/22/04 Amount: $2,837,000.00 Modifications to this Bond Form: SEE attached Terrorism Rider CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: The Selm~er ~pany S i g n at u r e: .~/~¢/.~-r , Name: ~.jT~..~. %..,~//. ~ ~~ Title: ~ / ~ ~ (Corp. Seal) SURETY Company: Signature: Name: cFidelity an~ Deposi. t ompany of LvlaryianQ JoTce Sovak (Corp. Seal) Title: Attorney-in-Fact Approv~by ~VNER.' /~./~k (Title) Section 00600-5 1 ~382-636703A34 (Date) 1. CONTRACTOR and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themSelves, their heirs, execUtors, administrators, successors and assigns to OWNER to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. With respect to OWNER, this obligation shall be null and void if CONTRACTOR: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless OWNER from all claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided OWNER has promptly notified CONTRACTOR and Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) of any claim, demands, liens, or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to CONTRACTOR and Surety, and provided there is no OWNER Default. 3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if CONTRACTOR promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4. Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with CONTRACTOR have given notice to Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to OWNER, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with CONTRACTOR: Have furnished written notice to CONTRACTOR and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to OWNER, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from CONTRACTOR, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from CONTRACTOR by which CONTRACTOR has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to OWNER, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to CONTRACTOR. 5. If a notice required by paragraph 4 is given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR or to Surety, that is sufficient compliance. Section 00600-6 6. When Claimant has satisfied the conditions of paragraph 4, Surety shall promptly and at SuretY's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to Claimant, with a copy to OWNER, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7. Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by Surety. 8. Amounts owed by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By CONTRACTOR furnishing and OWNER accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of CONTRACTOR and Surety under this Bond, subject to OWNER's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9. Surety shall not be liable to OWNER, Claimants, or others for obligations of CONTRACTOR that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. OWNER shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations. 11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which Claimant gave the notice required by subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1)or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 12. Notice to Surety, OWNER, or CONTRACTOR shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, OWNER, or CONTRACTOR, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, CONTRACTOR shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. Section 00600'7 1-382-636/0304 15. Definitions: 15,1 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with a subcontractor of CONTRACTOR to furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials, or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 OWNER Default: Failure of OWNER, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay CONTRACTOR as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. END OF SECTION Section 00600-8 1-382-636/03-04 ZURICH THIS IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE IS PART OF YOUR BOND We are making the following informational disclosures in compliance with The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. No action is required on your part. Disclosure of Terrorism Premium The premium charge for risk of loss resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) under this bond is $__waived__. This amount is reflected in the total premium for this bond. Disclosure of Availability of Coverage for Terrorism Losses As required by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002, we have made available to you coverage for losses resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) with terms, amounts, and limitations that do not differ materially as those for losses arising from events other than acts of terrorism. Disclosure of Federal Share of Insurance Company's Terrorism Losses The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 establishes a mechanism by which the United States government will share in insurance company losses resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) after a insurance company has paid losses in excess of an annual aggregate deductible. For 2002, the insurance company deductible is 1% of direct earned premium in the prior year; for 2003, 7% of direct earned premium in the prior year; for 2004, 10% of direct earned premium in the prior year; and for 2005, 15% of direct earned premium in the prior year. The federal share of an insurance company's losses above its deductible is 90%. In the event the United States government participates in losses, the United States government may direct insurance companies to collect a terrorism surcharge from policyholders. The Act does not currently provide for insurance industry or United States government participation in terrorism losses that exceed $100 billion in any one calendar year. Definition of Act of Terrorism The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act defines "act of terrorism" as any act that is certified by the Secretary of the Treasury, in concurrence with the Secretary of State and the Attorney General of the United States: 1. to be an act of terrorism; 2. to be a violent act or an act that is dangerous to human life, property or infrastructure; 3. to have resulted in damage within the United States, or outside of the United States in the case of an air carrier (as defined in section 40102 of title 49, United 17 States Code) or a United States flag vessel (or a vessel based principally in the United States, on which United States income tax is paid and whose insurance coverage is subject to regulation in the United States), or the premises of a United States mission; and 4. to have been committed by an individual or individuals acting on behalf of any foreign person or foreign interest as part of an effort to coerce the civilian population of the United States or to influence the policy or affect the conduct of the United States Government by coercion. But, no act shall be certified by the Secretary as an act of terrorism if the act is committed as part of the course of a war declared by Congress (except for workers' compensation) or property and casualty insurance losses resulting from the act, in the aggregate, do not exceed $5,000,000. ? These disclosures are informational only and do not modify your bond or affect your rights under the bond. !, Copyright Zurich American Insurance Company 2003 surety terrorism disclosure notice Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND KNOW ALL MEN BY T~SE pREgENTs: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by PAUL C. ROGERS, Vice President, and T. E. SMITH, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Axticle VI, Section 2 side hereof and are hereby certified to appoint Roger G~ FERRIS, Kelly CODY, Joyce NOVAK, Timothy MEISINGER and in-Fact, to make, execute, undertakings and the execution of such regularl3 constitute and tR. Attorney- any and all bonds and shall be as binding upon said ~ executed and acknowledged by the in their own proper pemons. This power of attorney revokes that CODY, Joyce NOVAK, Timothy J. MCKENNA, P. L. CORMIER, Jeffrey dated February 26, 2003. The said Assistant: Ices hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a tree copy of Andcle VI, Section 2, of the By-Laws of said Company, and is now in rome. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice-President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 24th day of September, A~D. 2003. ATTEST: FIDELITY AND DEPOSITCOMPANYOFMARYLAND By: T. E. Smith Assistant Secretary Paul C. Rogers Vice President State of Maryland }ss: City of Baltimore On this 24th day of September, A.D. 2003, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came PAUL C. ROGERS, Vice President, and T. E. SMITH, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year ftrst above written. Dennis R. Hayden Notary Public My Commission Expires: February 1, 2005 POA-F 184-3544 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice-President, or any of the Senior Vice-Presidents or Vice-Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice-Presidents, Assistant Vice-Presidents and Attorneys-in-Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice-President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice-Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney-in-Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the By-Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice-president, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Compaoy, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have het~eunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Company, this 22nd day of January 2004 Assistant Secretary This docomem has important legal consequences; cgusultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOC~ COM]B~'i'i'EI~ AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL and Issued and Published Jointly By National Society of I Professional Engineers P~ofe.~io~al En§ineers in Prate PracEce' 'AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America Coustmctlon Specifications Iustltute These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Owner-Contractor Agreements (No. 1910-8-A-1 or 1910- 8-A-2) (1996 Edkions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EICDC User's Guide (No. 1910-50). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. 1910-17) (1996 Edition). EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1996 Edition) Copyright ©1996 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 00700 - 2 TABLE OF CONT~rI'S .: ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms ..................................... 00700 - 6 · . 1.02 Terminology .......... ' ....... 00700 ~ 6 :~ ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ................................... 00700 - 8 2.01 Delivery of Bonds ........................... 00700.9 2.02 Copies of Documents ................................ 00700 - 9 ............................................. 00700 - 9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ' ' 2.04 Starting the Work .......................... 00700 - 9 2.05 Before Starting Construction ........................... 00700 - 9 .......................................... 00700 - 9 2.06 Preconstructian Conference ................ ' 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules .............. i i i i i i i i i i i ............... 00700- 10 ARTICLE 3- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING REUSE ... : ........... 00700- 10 3.01 Intent ............................................ j ..... :::::: 01370t3-10 3.02 Reference Standards 00700 - 10 .............................................. 00700- I0 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................... 00700 - 11 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 3.05 Reuse of Documents ........................... 00700 - 11 ............................................... 00700- 11 ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4,01 Availability of Lands .............................................. 00700- I1 ....................................... 00700 - 1t 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Cond/~ons ................... ' ....... 00700 - 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions 4.04 Underground Facilities ................................ 00700 - 12 4.05 ............................................. 00700 - 13 Reference Points ................................. 00700 - 13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condi~an at Site ................ 00700 - 14 ARTICLS 5- BONDS Imrnm, cE. 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds . i i i i i i i: i i ...................... 00700- 15 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ..... ' ..................... 00700 - 15 5.03 ............................. 00700- I5 Certificates of l~,_urance .............. 00700 - 15 5.04 CONJ2~CTOR s liability Insurance . ' ........................ 00700 - 15 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance .................... ......................................... 00700- 16 5.06 Property Insurance ' ' ' ............................................ 00700- 16 5.07 Waiver of Rights :: 5.08 ................................................. 00700- 17 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds · ............................. 00700- 18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ........................ 00700 - 18 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ........................ 00700 - 18 . ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence . ' .................................. 00700 - 18 6.02 ...................................... 00700 - t8 Labor; Working Hours ..................... 00700- 19 6.04 Progress ........... 00700- 19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .............. ' ' ' ' 00700 - 20 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ......................................... 6.08 Permits ..................................................... ] ] 00700-21 00700 - 21 6.09 Laws and Regulations 6.10 ......................... 00700 - 22 Taxes ............................................ 00700 - 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas .......... ' ......... 00700 - 22 6.12 Record Documents 6.13 Safety and Protectio'n ............................................... 00700 - 22 .............................................. 00700--23 6.14 Safety Representative ....................... 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ............... i ii i ii i ii i ............. 00700- 23 00700 - 23 00700 - 3 6.16 Emergencies .................................................... 00700- 23 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples .......................................... 00700 - 23 6.18 Continuing the Work ............................................... 00700 - 24 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee ........................... 00700 - 25 6.20 Indemnification .................................................. 00700- 25 ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK ................................................... 00700 - 26 7.01 RelaXed Work at Site ............................................... 00700 - 26 7.02 Coordination ................................................... 00700 - 26 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................ 00700 - 26 8.01 Cornmurdcations to Contractor ........................................ 00700 - 26 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER .......................................... 00700 - 26 8.03 Furnish Data ................................................... 00700 - 26 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due ............................................ 00700- 26 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .................................. 00700 - 26 8.06 Insurance ..................................................... 00700 - 27 8.07 Change Orders .................................................. 00700 - 27 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ...................................... 00700- 27 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities ................................. 00700 - 27 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................ 00700 - 27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................... 00700 - 27 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ........................... 00700 - 27 9.01 OWNER'S Representative ............... : ............................ 00700 - 27 9.02 Visits to Site .................................................... 00700 - 27 9.03 Project Representative ............................................. 00700 - 27 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations ...................................... 00700 - 28 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work ........................................ 00700 - 28 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work ............................................ 00700 - 28 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .............................. 00700 - 28 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work ..................................... 00700 - 28 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work .......... 00700 - 28 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities ...................... 00700 - 28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ................................... 00700 - 29 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ....................................... 00700- 29 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................... 00700 - 29 10.03 Execution of Outage Orders .......................................... 00700 - 29 10.04 Notification to Surety .............................................. 00700 - 29 10.05 Claims and Di~ntes ....... : ..- ..................................... 00700 - 30 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .............. 00700 - 30 11.01 Cost of the Work ................................................. 00700 - 30 11.02 Cash Allowances ................................................. 00700 - 32 I 1.03 Unit Price Work ................................................. 00700 - 32 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ............. 00700 - 33 12.01 Change of Contract Price ........................................... 00700 - 33 12.02 Change of Contract T/roes ........................................... 00700 - 33 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control ................................. 00700 - 33 12.04 Delays l~thin CONTRACTOR's Control .................................. 00700 - 34 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control ........................ 00700 - 34 12.06 Delay Damages .................................................. 00700 - 34 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................... 00700 - 34 13.01 Notice of Defects ................................................ 00700 - 34 13.02 Access to Work .................................................. 00700 ~ 34 13.03 Tests and Inspections .............................................. 00700 - 34 13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................. 00700 - 35 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work .......................................... 00700 - 35 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................. 00700 - 35 00700 ~ 4 13.07 Correction Period ......................................... 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ........................ ' ..... 00700 - 35 13.09 OW1VER May Correct Defective Work ....................... i ........ 00700-36 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .. 00700 - 36 14.01 Schedule of Vahtes ............................................... 00700 - 36 14.02~ Progress Payments ............................................... i 00700 - 36 14.03 CON72~CTOR's Warranty of Title .............................. 00700- 37 14.04 Substantial Completion 00700- 38 14.05 Partial Utilization ............................................. 00700 - 38 14.06 Final Inspection ................................................ 00700 - 39 ................................................. 00700 - 39 14.07 Final Payment .................................................. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed ............... 00700 - 39 .... 00700 - 40 14.09 Waiver of C/alms ................................................. 00700 - 40 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ....... 15.01 .................. 00700 - 40 OWNER May Suspend Work ........................... 00700 - 40 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause ......... ' ........... 00700 - 40 15.03 .......... OWNER May Terminate For Convenience ................................. 00700 - 41 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terrrdnate .............. 00700 - 41 ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RF~OLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................ 00700 - 41 ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ............................................ 00700 - 41 17.01 Giving Notice ... ' ............................................... 00700 - 42 17.02 Computation of Times 00700 - 42 .............................................. 00700 - 42 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................. 17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................. 00700 - 42 00700 - 42 17.05 Controlling Law ................................................. 00700-42 00700 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular ~nd plural thereof. I. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contrant Documents. Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of ~ the Agreement. I0. Claim-A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONTRACTOR seeking an adjusunent of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract--The entire and integrated written agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 2. Agreement--The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR during the course of the Work in requesting progress or fma/payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos-Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. · 5. Bid-The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidding Documents--The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to reCeipt of Bids). 7. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if any, and the Bid form with any supplements. 8. Bonds-Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. 9. Change Order--A document recommended by ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or. an adjustment in the Contract Price or the 12. Contract Documenis--The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the repons and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not ConWact Documents. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in this paragraph are Contract Documents. Files in electrohic media format of text, data, graphics, and the like ti'mt may be furnished by OWNER to CONTRACTOR are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price-The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that k is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment. 15. CONTRACTOR--The individual or entity with whom OWNER has entered into thc Agreement. 00700 - 6 ~ 16. Cost of the Work--See paragraph ll.O1.A for definition. 17. Drawings-That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by ENGINEER which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings as so 18. Effective Date of the Agreement-Tbe date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective. but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sig~ and deliver. 19. ENGINEER--The individual or entity named as such in the Agreemem. 20. ENGINEER's Consultant-An individual or entity having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or consultant with respect m the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementaxy Conditions. 21. Field Order--A written order issued by ENGI- NEER which requires rnraor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 22. General Requiremenzs-Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 23, Hazardous Environmental Condition-The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste. or Radioactive Material in suet~ quantities or cn'eumstances that may present a substnntial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste-The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinn'a,-.es, cxsdes, and ordem of any and all governmental bodies. agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. L/ens--Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone-~A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple- tioa date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award-The written notice by OWNER to the apparent sueeassful bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 29. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Times wilt cornmenee to nm and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 30. OWNER-The individual, entity, public body, or authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreentent and for whom the Work is to be performed. 31. Partial Utilization-Use by OWNER of a substan~ tially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 32. PCBs--Polychiorinated biphenyls. 33. Petroleum-Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 34. ProJect-The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as may be indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 35. Project Manual-The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and couswaeting the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual. which may be bound in one or more volumas, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 36. Radioactive Material-Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 37. Resident Project Representative--The authorized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 00700 - 7 38. &~nples-Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanqhip that are representative of some portion of the Work and winch establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. ShopDrawings-All drawings, diagrams, illnstra- tions, schedules, and other data or information winch are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CON- TRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work. 40. Site-Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Work is to be performed, including fights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by OWNER winch are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. 41. Specifications-That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 42. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 43. Substantial Completion-The thne at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be milized for the purposes for which k is intended. The terms "subsmutially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communicatious, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 47. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 44. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier-A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 46. Underground Facilities--All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, 48. Work--The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be -~ provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes WI and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating : '! all materials and equipment into such construction, all as Iii required by the Contract Documents. 00700 - 8 49. Work Change Directive--A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended -~ by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision ml in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under winch the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change :', Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Wl Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change ~ Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued II Change Order following negotlatious by the parties as to its .effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 50. Written Amendment--A written statement modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and aormally dealing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly coustruetien-related aspects of the Contract Documents. 1.02 Terminology A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms ~as allowed,~ "as approved,' or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or -' adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an W action or determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioalng whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statemem indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be cffective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. B. Day 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day Of 24 hour~ measured from midnight to the next midnight. C. Defective 1. The word defective, when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWN-ER at Substantial Completion in accor- dance with paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish,' when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to ~pply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARy MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten cOPies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract 2-trnes; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to nm on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Ia no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, winchave~ daie is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on winch the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform? or "pro- vide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring au obligation of CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. E. Unless stated otherWise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. A. coNTP~cToR's Review of Contract Docurnents: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to repo~ any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherWise specified 00700 - 9 ia the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for its timely review: 1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, includiag any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Dmwiag and Sample submittals winch will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing, and proeessiag such submittal; and 3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work winch includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdi- vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performa.ee of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. C. Evidence oflnsurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance winch either of them or any additional insured may reasonably reques0 winch CONTRACTOR and OWNER respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference A. Within 20 days after the Contract Times start to run, but before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schednles referred to ia paragraph 2.05.B, procedures for handiiag Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. Unless otherwise provided ia the Contract Dceu- ments, at least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by CON- TRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided below the schedules submitted ia aceerdance with paragraph 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted to ENGINEER. 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides aa orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. 2. CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Dmwiag and Sample submittals will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. CONTRACTOR's schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intern A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Projeot (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Docu- ments or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided ia Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organiTation, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula- tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement ff there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. I 2. N° provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of OWNER. CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or anf of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or imtruction be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or auy duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistem with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. If, during the performance of the Work, ( CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Decuments and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction ofauy Supplier, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in writing at once. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except ia an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.04; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR .~ball not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any snah Conflict, error, ambiguity, or dis- crepancy unless CONTRACTOR l~ew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any COnflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the proVisiOns of the Contract DOCUments and: 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change Order; or (iii) a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGINEER's written interpremtiun or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documeras A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, including · electronic media editions; and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaption by ENGINEER. Tnis prohibition will survive final paymem, completion, and acceptance of the Work, or terra,nation or completion of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifi- cally incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Conlxact Documents would resnit in violation of such Law or Regulation). ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. OWNER shall fttr-i~h the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facitkies. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or beth, as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 00700 - 11 B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or fling a mechanic's or eoustmction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Repons and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those repons of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Docu- ments; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such repons and drawings, but such repons and drawings axe not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical dam," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim agalnnt OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such repons and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and,program~ incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsur~ face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a mmre as to require a change in the Contract Docmnents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally reco~m~iT~xl as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Decuments; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), notify OWNER and ENGINEER ia writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work ia connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. ENGINEER's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings and conclusions. -. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, perforo mance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraph 4.03.A; and 00700- 12 b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 and 11.03. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Conuact Times by the submission of s Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a ~esult of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CON- TRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times. or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. However, OWNER, ENGINEER~ and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses, or damnges (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all eoort or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in ctmnection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with raspeet to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities. including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided ia the Supplementary Conditions: 1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or dam; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price. and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and dam, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the COntract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under- ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility ts uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and documem the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If ENGINEER concludes that a change ia the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price of Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CON- TRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work. shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property 00700- 13 monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OW-~R. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary ehanseS in grades or locations, and shall be respons~le for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.0~ Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Conlxact B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such repom and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Dccumants. Such "technical data' is identified in the Supplemuntaty Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim agaln~t OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations~ opinions or information. C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CON- TRACTOR is responsible. D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shal/ immedi- ately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER and ENGINEER (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. g. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resnmption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cmmot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Pdee or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop- page or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by CONTRACTOR, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then OWNER may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Aa'title 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless CONllL~CTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all clalmn, COSTS, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolmion costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that'such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or idantified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CO~CTOR is responsible. Nothing 00700 ~ 14 F in this paragraph 4~06.E sh~! obligate OWNER to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or enthy's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and ReguLations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consulhmts, and the officers, directors, panners, employees, agents, other consultants, and mbeontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (inelnding but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution eusts) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4;06.F shall obligate CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 are not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. CONTRACTOR shall furrfish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faitlfful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when fatal payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Doenments except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treesmy. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON- TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do bnsine.?s is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.0LB, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties an~ Insurers A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance compaffies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain. OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of immranee requested by CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and CONTRACTOR'~ other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to 00700 - 15 perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other Similar emi3i0yee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 3. claims for damages because of Ixxlily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sus- tained: (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages b~eanse of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownemhip, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as add/tional insure, ds (subject to any castomaty exclusion in respect of professional liability) OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional iusureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners. employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insure& shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under para- graphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance fum/shed by the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supple- mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.04, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER's expense OWNER's own liability iusuranee as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work al the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in thc Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: l 1 mmmj 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRAC- TOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identi- fied in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; mm 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fira, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 00700 - 16 ~ 4. cOver materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incOrperated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been incinded in an Application for Payment recommended by ENGINEER; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and smxtup; and 7. be maintained in effect tmtil £mal payment is made unless otherwise agreed to ia writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certifi- cate of insurance has been issued. B. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machine~ insurance or edditionai property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maln. t .ained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a prowsmn or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER i:~ CONTRACTOR ~nd to each ~r additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph 5.07. at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that all policies purchased in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will protect OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and ail other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as iusureds or additional insure, ds (and the officers, directors, panners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss cOvered thereby. All such policies shall cOntain provisions to the effect that in the evem of paymem of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recOvery agaln~t any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, parmers, employees, agents, and other cOnsultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for ail losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss cOvered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplemen- tary Conditions to be listed ss insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, parmers, employees, agents, and other cOnsultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by OWNER ss trustee or otherwise payable under any peliey so issued. malnt~,m.g any property insurance specified in tiffs paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deducilbte amount will be Ix)me by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance cOverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, direeters, parmers, employees, agents, and other cOnsultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: E. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such i~urance, and the cOst thereof will be charged to CON'II~CTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to cOmmaneement of the Work I. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequentiai loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to OWNER's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other peril whether or not insured by OWNER; and 2. loss or damage to the cOmpleted Project or paxt thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance m~intalned on the completed Project or past thereof by OWNER during partial utilization pursuant to paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion 00700- 17 pursuant to paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to paragraph 14.07. C. A~y insurance policy mnlmnlned by OWNER enver- ing any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, or ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, parmers, employees, agents, and other censultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.08.B. OWNER shall deposit in a separate aeconnt any money so received and ~hall Ci~ it in accordance with such agree- meat as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replac~I, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Chn~nse Order or Written Amendment. B. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in witing within 15 days after the econrrenee of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power, ff such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in aocordanee with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER as fldueinry shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, OWNER ns fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either OWNER or CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the Bonds or insurance required to be purchased and malnta.in~d by the other puny in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shnll .so notify the other party ia writing withi-~ 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by paragraph 2.05.C. OWNER and CONTRACTOR eh,Il each provide to the other such additienal information, in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not ~ or m~intain all of the Bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other pa.ny in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other pa_ny may elect to obtain equivalent Bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price aeeordingiy. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effee~d any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. Tbe insurers provi6ing the property insurance shall consent by endorse- ment on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 -CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILr£i~:3 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such a~ntion thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, teehdiques, sequences, and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract l~cuments. CONTRACTOR shall bo responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Compact Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superin- tendent thereto who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The a~tendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All COmm~lltiCatiOns given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. 00700- 18 6.02 Labor; Working ttours A. CONTRACTOR Shall Provide competent,' suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the WOrk as required by the Contract Documents. CON- TRACTOR shall at all times maintn~m good discipline and r-, order at the Site. any provisions of the Genera~ Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that win change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order Or Written Ameadmem in accordance with B. Except as 0therwise required fOr the safety or Article 12. protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Dneuments, a/1 Work at the Site shal/be performed during regular worldag hours, and CONTRACTOR will not penmt overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Suaday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. 6]03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- quirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, tramportation? constructioa equipment and machinery, tools, ~llant-.es, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shal] expressly run to the benefit of OWNER. If reqnlred by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipmem. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, nse6, cleaned, and conditioned in accordaace with iuslrucilons of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Decu~ ments. 6.04 Progress Schedule 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or-equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circum- stances described below. I. "Or-Equal' Items: If ia ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently .qimila~ so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or--equal' item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole diseretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A. 1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named iff a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (il) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; A. CONTRACTOR shall adbem tn the progress sebeduie established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. .... 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptane~ (tO the extent indicated in paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Conttltct Times (or Milestones). Such adjusug_ents will conform generally m thc progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with 00700- 19 b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it wilt conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. - If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an ~or-equal' item under paragraph 6.05.A. I, it will be comidered a proposed substitute item. b. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. c. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the cir~lm~tanc~s. d. CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that.the proposed substitute item will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be Similar in mlbstellee to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the pro- posed substitute item from that specified will be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, rnulutenence, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indi- rectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and clalmn of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute item. ENGINEER may require CON- TRACTOR to furnish additional data about the pro- posed substitute item. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, methtxl, teeimique, sequence, or procedure of constraction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of constrnction approved by ENGI- NEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The proc*- dure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Ev,~!,,,,#on: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or-equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." ENGINEER will advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guararaee: OWNER may require CON- TRACTOR to furnish at CONI1L~CTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substiU.~e. E. ENGINEER's Cost Reimbursement:' ENGINEER win record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A.2 aad 6.05.B and in making changes ill the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the ProjeCt) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute. F. COArIRACTOR's Expense: CONTRACTOR shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or-equal" at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any SubcontraCtor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or az a replacement, against whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR .qhall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER ia advance for acceptance by OWNER by a specified d~te prior to the Effective Date of the Agreemem, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof ia accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, WNER s acceptance (e~ther m writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or enl/ty so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. CON- TRACTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected SubcontraCtor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, end the Contract Price will be adjusted by the differ- ence ia the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Wriuen Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any fight of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for ail acts and omissions of the SubcOntractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as CONTRACTOR is rusponsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for acheduling and Coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furolehlng ally of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other iadividuais or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to cemmBulcate with ENGI- NEER through CONTRACTOR. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRAS0R i~ dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and eonditious of the Contract Documents. for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subeontraetur or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against OWNER, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities identified ia the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as iusureds or additional iusureds (and the officers, directors, parmers, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property iusumnce applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRAc- TOR will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume ail costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use ia the performance of the Work and ff to the actual lmowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royaity to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees or agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claim% costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees end charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any .irffriagemem of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agre~ffient between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary ConditionS, CONTRACTOR shall"~>btaia and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER ~hall assist CONTRACTOR, when u~, ill obtaining such permits 00700 ~ 21 and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto, such as plant investment fees. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. E, xeept where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Reguiatiom, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be respomible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primaW re~pomibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or lime of perfo~ of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Cunt~act Price or Contract Times. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRAC- TOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant, and the officers, directors, parmers, employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engiueers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, leg~l, or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debrix During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work CONTRACTOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall con- form to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it ready for utilization by OWNER. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to Original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. · D. Loading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall not load nor pemit, any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any p~ir~ of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work 00700- 22 ~ Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of alt approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall iJe solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at thc Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, wal~, pavements, ~0adways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal} relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persom or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall ereCt and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CON- ~,TRACTOR, any Subcomractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable} shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault Of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Con- suitant, or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a notice to OWNER' and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Reprexentazive A. CONTRACTOR shall desiguate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. CONTRACTOR shall be respomible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affeCting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been mused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. All subnftttals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show ENGINEER the services, materials, and equipment CONTRACTOR Proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample 00700 - 23 submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The ~,mhers of each Sample m be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittah acceptable to ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Drawing and Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. E. ENGINEER's Review D. Submittal Procedures I. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance criteria, installation reqnirements, materials, catalog numbers, and Simil~r infoIIl~tion with r~$pexgt thereto; 1. ENGINEER will timely review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER. ENGINEER's review and approval will be only to determine ff the items covered by the sulm]ktals will, afu:r installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Docments and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. b. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of coustmc- tion and safety precautions and progrmm incident thereto; and d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Docu- ments. 2. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, ~chnlques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of constre, ction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the require- ments of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's attention to each ~uch variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17.D.3 and ENGINEER hns given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the' Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR .from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D. 1. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. 3. At the time of each submittal, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written eom- manication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop F. ResubmittaJ Procedures 1. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected cepies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CON- TRACTOR ~hall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGI- NEER on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall can5' on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except 00700 - 24 as Permitted by paragraph 15.04 or as oWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. · :6.19 CONTRACTOR's Genet:cd Warranty and Guarantee A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Sub- contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or . 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. B. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: , 1: observations by ENGINEERi 2. recommendation by ENGINEER or payment by OWNER of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related theret° bY OWNER; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and alt court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising 6ut of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage: I. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and 2. is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity direefly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of an individual or entity indem- nified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless' of the negligence of any such individual or entity. B. In any and all claim~ agai~t OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, parmers, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of CONTRAcTOR~ anY Subcontxactor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or.indirectly employed by any of them to perform'any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any'6f them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR so; under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants or to the 6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil-consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them ity by ENGINEER; arising out of: 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, 8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 6.20 Indemnification 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to :: :~ive them; if thli is the pi~ 6a~e of the injury or A. T° the fullest extent Permitted by Laws and Regula- damage. tions, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, director, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from 00700 - 25 ARTICLB 7 - OTHER WORK 7.02 Coordination 7.01 Related Work at Site A. OWNER may perform other work rehted to the Project at the Site by OWNER's employees, or let other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted ia the Con- tract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to CON- TRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are uaable to agree on entitlemant to or on the amotmt or extent, if any, of aw adju.~ent ia the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the other work with OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipomnt and the execution of such other work and ~hall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CON- TRACTOR shall do all euUing, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by ontting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coorai.~tlon of the activities among thc va_dons contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be item/zed; and 3. the extent of such authority a~.d responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and respon- mil s~ility for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RES~NSIBILITIF3 8.01 Communications to Contractor n. ExcoptasctherwiseprovidedintheseGaneralCondi- .~ tions, OWNER shall issue all commuulcations to ~ CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER A. In ease of termination of the employment of ENGI- NEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer to whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose starts uader the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. 8.03 Furnish Data A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents. C. If the proper execution or restflts of any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies ia such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. CONTRACTOR's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for htont defects and deficiencies ia such other work. 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. OWNER's dudes in respect of providing lands and easemonts and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER's identifying and mating available tO CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations 00700 - 26 ami tests of subsurface eonditions and drawiag~ of physical conditions ia or rclatiag to existing Surfaee or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by ENGINEER ia preparing the Contract Decuments. 8.06 Insurance A. WNER s responsibihtles, if any, in respect to pur- cha$illg and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders '- A. oWNER is Obligated to execute Change Orders as iadi6ated in ~aragraph 10.03. 8708 .Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. OWNER's responsibility ia respect to certain inspec- e- tions, tests, and approvals is set forth ia paragraph 13.03.B. i · ~ 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities ~ A. The OWNER Shall not Supervis¢~ direct, or have · ) enntrol or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, ~ · : 6r 15}~tires of e~ustruetio~, Or the safety precautions and :~ I programn iaeident thereto, or for any failure of CON- TRACTOR to comply with Laws ~ Regulations applicable r-- to the performance of the WOrk. OWNER will not be [ i responsible for CONTRACToR's faihtre tO perform the ' Work ia accordance with the Coutraet Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hagardous Environ/nent ai Condition A. OWNER's responsibility ia ~ to aa undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is sel forth ia paragraph 4.06. !7- 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy OWNER's obligations under the Contract Documents, OWNER's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S Representative A. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the eonstsuction period. The duties and respousibilitias and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth ia the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written cousem of OWNER and ENGINEER. 9.02 Visits to Site A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at iatervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for the benefit of OWNER, will determine, ia general, ff the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Doenments. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site m check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. B. ENGINEER's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth ia paragraph 9.10, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, teehdiques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. .... 9~0~3 Project Representative J A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER ia providing more extensive observation of the Work. The respomibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER desiguates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who is not ENGINEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supple- menUay Conditions. 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the require- ments of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may deter- mine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER and CON- TRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the mount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR are unable tO agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of a Field Order, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed Project thza conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.07 Shop Drawings, (Ynange Orders and Payments A. in connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, i I, and 12. C. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CON- TRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinatjens on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's writ~ten decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate 6uts) upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, subject to the prox;isioas of paragraph 10.05. 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acoeptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents per,sluing to the performance of the Work, and Clalm~ seeking changes in the Contract Price o~ Connect Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a formal decision. B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this paragraph 9.09, ENGINEER will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition precedem to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may othenvise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Atahority and Respon- sibilities A. Neither ENGINEER's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Conumct Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority 00700 - 28 or realxa~ibility or the undertaking, exemise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or o~erwise owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Outages in the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to aa increase B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, tecimiques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incidem thereto, or for any fa/lure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute .... : appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or written Amendments) covering: omissions of CONTRACTOR Or of any Sfibeontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all mainte- nance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their coment complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, teats, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9A0 flaall alSO apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident ProjeCt Representative, and assistants. 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under para- graph 13.08.A or OWNER's correction of defective Work under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Tunes which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. WithOut invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). If OWNER ~ CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or beth, that should be ~allowed as a result of a Work Change 3. changes ia the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER purmant to paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and'aPplicable Laws and Regulatiom, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility. The amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted to refleCt the effect of any such change. 00700 - 29 10.05 Claims and Disputes A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the Claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) afar the sten of the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract within 60 days afar the start of such event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accomp .a.~ied by claimant's written statement that the adjust- ment cla~med is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). B. ENGINEER's Decision: ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of thc last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. ENGINEER's written decision on such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be fired and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: 1. an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the titne limits and in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Axticlu 16; or 2. if no such dispute resolution procedures have been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's written decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within 30 days after the date of such decision, and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction within 60 days after the date of such decision or within 60 days after Substantial Completion, whichever is later (unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR), to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such Claim, dispute, or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If ENGINEER does not render a fomal decision in writing within the time stated in paragraph 10.05.B, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. 00700 - 30 D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Cona-act Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CON- TRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not ineinde any of the costs itemized in paragraph I1.01.B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such employees shall include without limitation superintendents, foremen, aud other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unem- ployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash~ll discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3- Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER, who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER~ which bids, if any, will be .acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fcc, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fcc shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the Work and fcc as provided in this paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporasy facili- ties at the Site. and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether reined from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, ma- chinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CON- TRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regu- latious. and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR in cormcction with the perfor- mance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with paragraph 5.06.D). provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the wriuen consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, ttamages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determin~g CONTRACTOR's fcc. g. The cost of utilities, fuel. and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expressage, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. L W'ben the Cost of the Work is used to determine the value of a Change Order or of a Claim, the cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of the changes in the Work or mused by the event g~ving rise to the Claim. j. When ail the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all Bonds and insurance CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general manag- ers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, audi- · tots, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekccpers, clerks, and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or in CO~CTOR'S ~fin~aY6~ branch 0ffice for general e. Deposits lost for causes other than negli- adlnlni~tration of the Work and not specifically included gence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications anyone _dixecdy or indirectly employed by any of referred to in paragraph I1.01.A. 1 or specifically them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, covered by paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be 00700 - 31 considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. 2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices other tha~ CONTRACTOR's office at the Site. 3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR's capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be linble, including bm not limited to, the cerrention of defective Work, dL~osal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraphs ll.01.A and 11.01.B. C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, CONTRACTOR's fee sh~11 be determined as set forth ia the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment ia Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determined as set forth in paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determlnexl pursuant to paragraphs ll.01.A and I1.0LB, CONTRACTOR will establish and mainlaln records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemi?ext cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Cash Allowances A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price ali allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such snm~ as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRAC- TOR 0ess uny applicable trade discounts) of materials und equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and hamlling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the allow- ances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual mounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspoadingly adjusted. ll.03UnitPriceWork A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agree- ment. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and detel'Inining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantifies and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR w~ll be made by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. B. Each unit price will be deemed to include un amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price ia accordance with paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from Se estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; end 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. 00700 - 32 ~ ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE O1= CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adJustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party malting the Claim to the ENG~ER Md the other Party to the Contract in accor- dance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B: The value °f any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjnstment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica- tion of such unit prices to the quantifies of the items involved (subjeet to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); 2. where the Work involved is not covered by prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agree- merit t0a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work ' (determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (deter- mined as provided in paragraph 12.01.C). C. C031TRACTOR's Fee: The CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: I. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee :.based on the following percentages of the various :' ::~rtibm of the Cos{ of the Work: a. for costs incurred under paragraphs IL0i.A.1 and 1L0i}A~2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be i5 percent; -b. for costs incUrred under paragraph 1 i:01.h,.5, ~e CON~CTOR,s fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are On the basis of Cost of the Work plns a fee and no 00700 fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraph 12.01 .C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs ll.01.A.1 and ll.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs ll.01.A.4, ll.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by 'CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are in- volved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with para- graphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.~.2.e, inclu- sive. [2.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times (or Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays Beyond cohrTRACTOR,s Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work ns contemplated by - 33 Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER's and COArlRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from complet~ lng any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. 12.06 Delay Damages A. In no event ~hal! OWNER or ENGINEER be liable to CONI1L~CTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organi?ation, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from: 1. delays caused by or within the control of CON- TRACTOR; or 2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in Contract Price pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption directly attributable to actions or inactions of OWNER or anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. to CONTRACTOR. All defective .Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with haspection and testing personnel to facilitate required impections or tests. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of whleh OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given B. OWNER ~ha!! employ and pay for the services of an independem testing laboratory to perform all impecfions, tests, or approvais required by the Contract Documents except: I. for inspections, tests, or approvais covered by paragapl~ 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or impecfions conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.04.B; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con- tract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereo0 specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shali assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shail pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvais required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipmem to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approvai priOr to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. 00700 - 34 E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CON- TRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGI- NEER has not acted with reasonable prompmess in response to such notice. ' 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or impected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR. at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work ia question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Clalm% costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and ePrOfessionalsother and all court or arbitration or other di~ut resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to aa appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Chim therefor as provided ia paragraph 10.05. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attribut- able to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection. testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable m agree as to the amount or extent thereof~ CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 13.05 OWNER May St°p the Work A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipmem, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this fight of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising om of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repa/r or replacement of work of others). 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made avanable for CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfac- torily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such mstmctious, or /n an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all C]airne, COSts. losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engmcers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals aud ail corm or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited m all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. B. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that 00700 - 35 item may start to run from an earlier date ff so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendmem. C. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an addifienal period of one year after such correction or removal .and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. D. CONTRACTOR's obligations under this paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and rephcemem of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claim~, costs, losses, and mm. ages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engtaeers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and al! ennst or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the dlmln;shed value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the nccessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the dimln!nhed value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate mount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.06.A, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Comraet Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. B. la exereisihg the fights and remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shail proceed expeditiously. In connection with such enrrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto,' take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, eon- struction equipment and machineD, at the Site, and incorpo- rate in the Work ail materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other contractors, and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants access to the Site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09 will be charged agalmt CON- TRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Conwact Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses aml damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destzoyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed a~ extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 00700 - 36 ~ F' r' [- 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit m ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other docu- mentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equtpment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, alt of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application *,hall include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments red6ived on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment 3. The amount of retainage with respect to pro- gress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. ENGINEER will, within 10 days after receipt of each Appl{cation for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case. CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design profession- al and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief: 00700 - 37 a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.08, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment ENGI- NEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) inspecnous made m check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contra~ Documents; or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 4. Neither ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR's Work for the purposes of recom- mending payments nor ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment, including f~nal payment, will impose responsibility on ENGINEER to supervise, direct, or control the Work or for the means, methods, toctm/ques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautious and programs incident thereto, or for CON- TRACTOR's failure to comply with Laws and Regu- lations applicable to CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Additionally, said review or recommendation will not impose responsibility on ENGINEER to make any examination m ascertain how or for what purposes CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or m determine that title to any of the Work. materials, or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens. 5. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opimon, it would be incorrect to make the representa- uons to OWNER referred m in paragraph 14.02.B.2. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspoctious or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be nece.~a~ in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work ~ b~n damaged, requiring correction o7 replace- ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Orders; c. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.09; or d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated ia para- graph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's reeom- mendafio~ the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. D. Reduction in Payment' 1. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because: a. clalm~ have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or fur- uishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in counection with [he Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling OWNER to a set-off agaiust the amount recommended; or d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occur_ rence of any of the events enumerated ia paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or paragraph. 15.02.A. 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) ~tating the reusons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any adjustmem thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRAC- TOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the masons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be t~eated as aa amount due as determined by paragraph 14.02.C.I. 14.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title A. CONTRACTOR warrants sud guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Paymem, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in Writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the eertiftcate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before fatal payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said 14 days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Comple- tion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRAC- TOR a written recommendation as to division of rasponsibili- 00700 - 38 t/es peeding fiunl payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site afar the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work winch has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or winch OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following conditions. 1. OWNER at any time may request CON- TRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially Complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER'that iu~h pm ~f fli~ Work is ,.-- substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue } i : a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of ,~ the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time afier either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that pan of the Work to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that pan of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that pan of the Work and the division of responsibility m respect thereof and acc~s thereto. 00700 - 39 2. No occupancy or separate operation of pan of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CON- TRACTOR in writing of all p~rticulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Paymem A. Application for Paymem 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, ia accordance with the Contract Documents, all tenance and operating instructions, schedules, guaran- tees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment fonowing the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to .OWNER) of all Lien fights arising out of or Liens m connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for winch a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for winch OWNER or OWNER's property might ia any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER agaln~t any Lien. B. Review of Applicazion and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Centract Decuments, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Con~act Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to OWNER for pay- ment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return' the Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CON- TRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due I. Thirty days after the presentation to OWNER of the Application for Payment and accompanying decu- mentation, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and, when due, will be paid by OWN- ER to CONTRACTOR. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if ENGINEER so coma-ms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendat/on of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that ponien of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall he submitted by CON- TRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditiom governing £mal payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of fmai payment will constitute: I. a waiver of all Chime by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final impection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claim~ by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing which are still umetiled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 conseentive days by notice in writing to CON- ' :'~ TRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, direetiy attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: I. CONTRACTOR's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Doeumcats (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 2. CONTRACTOR's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. CONTRACTOR's disregard of the authority of ENGINEER; or 4. CONTRACTOR's violation in any.substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified hi paragraph 15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of ail CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and m~cbinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such ease, CONTRACTOR shall not be e,ntifled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid baianee of the Contract Price exceeds all claim~, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and ail court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by OWNER arising out of or relating to oompleting the Work, such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid baiance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such clalm~, costs, losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by ENGINEER, incorporated ia a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remudies under tlfis paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obta~ the lowest price for the Work performed. C. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any fights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or paymem of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. 15.03 OWNER May Termincae For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminnte the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable snmn for overhead and profit nn such Work; 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termlna,ion ia performing services and furnishing labor, materiais, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. for ~1 clalma~ costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to ail fees and charges of engineers, amhitects, attorneys, and other professionals and ail court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid oa account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 CONTI~CTOR May Stop Work or Terraincae A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, termi,,,te the Contract and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms ns provided in paragraph 15.03. in lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGI- NEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days afier it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for 30 days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may, seven days after written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, shall be as set forth in the Supplemeuta~ Conditions. If no method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documants or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. 00700 - 41 ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporatian for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contt~act Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the f~rst and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereander to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of th/s paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representatious, thderanificatious, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Docmnents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final paymem, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Agreement. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 00700 - 42 F r' SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. Al provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. B. Table of Contents SC-1.01 .A. 17 SC-1.01 .A.49 SC-2.01 SC-2.02 SC-2.03 SC-2.05 SC-2.05.C SC-3.03.A SC-4.02 SC-4.04 SC-4.05 SC-5,O1 SC-5.02.A SC-5.03.A SC-5.04 SC-5.04.B SC-5.06.A SC-5.06.A.1 SC-5.06.B SC-5.06.D SC-5.06.E SC-5.10 SC-6.02 and 6.03 SC-6.03.B SC-6.05 SC-6.06.A SC-6.06.C SC-6.08 SC-6,09 SC-6.10 SC-6.12 SC-6,14 SC-6.20 SC-7.01 SC-7.03 SC-9;03 SC-12.01 SC-13.02 SC-13.03.A SC-13.07.A SC-14 SC~14.02.A SC-16 SC-16.02 SC-16.03 Drawings Work Change Directive Delivery of Bonds Copies of Documents Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed Before Starting Construction Evidence of Insurance Reporting Subsurface and Physical Conditions Underground Facilities Reference Points Performance and Payment Bonds Insurers Certificates of Insurance CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance Additional Insureds Coverage Property Insurance Additional nsureds Boiler and Machinery and Additional Property Insurance Deductible Provisions Policies of Insurance Partial Utilization Working Hours, Limitations, Scheduling, Etc. Materials and Equipment Warranty Substitutes and "Or Equal" Items Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others Payment Information Permits Laws and Regulations Taxe~ Record Documents Competent Person Indemnification Related Work at Site Claims Between Contractors Resident Project Representative Change of Contract Price Access to Work Tests and Inspections Correction Period Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion Payment for Shop Drawings, Stored Materials, and Equipment Dispute Resolution Mediation Arbitration Section 00800,1 SC-1.01.A. 17 Drawinqs The following Drawings are part of the Contract Documents: Drawings 382-636-1 through 382-636-32 prepared by Strand Associates, Inc.® and incorporated herein by reference and drawings listed in the table of contents that are bound at the back of these specifications. SC-1.01 .A.49 Work Chanqe Directive Amend the phrase "and signed by OWNER" in the first sentence of paragraph 1.01.A.49. of the General Conditions to read as follows: "and signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR." SC-2.01 Delivery of Bonds Delete paragraph 2.01.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds. insurance certificates, insurance endorsements, and other documents as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish. SC-2.02 Copies of Documents Delete the first sentence of paragraph 2.02.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to 20 copies of the Contract Documents to CONTRACTOR. SC-2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed In the first sentence of paragraph 2~03 of the General Conditions, change "thirtieth day" to "fifty-fifth day." In the last sentence of paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, change "sixtieth day" to "eighty-fifth day" and change "thirtieth day" to "fifty-fifth day." SC-2.05 Before Startinq Construction Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 2.05.B. of the General Conditions: 4. a proposed listing of subcontractors and major material and equipment suppliers. The list shall include any proposed substitutionS in accordance with paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions. SC-2.05.C Evidence of Insurance Delete paragraph 2.05.C. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: C. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Section 00800-2 Conditions the required number of counterparts of the fully executed Agreement, Bonds, and other documents 'as may be required by the Contract Documents, as well as OWNER-approved copies of certificates of insurance, copies of endorsements, and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request, which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.04 and 5.06. SC-3 03 A Reporting Add the following language at the end of paragraph 3.03.A. of the General Conditions: If CONTRACTOR proceeds with work that CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge or should have known that a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy existed as indicated above, correction of work constructed without such notification to ENGINEER shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense, (except in an emergency as authorized by paragraph 6.16). SC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions Add the following new paragraph(s) ir:nmediately after paragraph 4.02.B: C. In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications, ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultants relied upon the following reports and drawings of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the Site: 1. Report dated February 21, 2003, prepared by STS Consultants, Consulting Engineers, Green Bay, Wisconsin, entitled: Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Proposed Engine Generator Facility, Oshkosh, Wisconsin, consisting of 21 pages. 2. Report dated March 13, 2003, prepared by STS Consultants, Consulting Engineers, Green Bay, Wisconsin , entitled: Addendum No. 1, Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineer's Evaluation Proposed Engine Generator Facility, Oshkosh, Wisconsin, consisting of 11 pages. ENGINEER accepts no responsibility for accuracy of the soil data or water level information. Soil borings, included with these Contract Documents, were not obtained for the purposes of designing excavations:and trenches,~ .Borings were used by ENGINEER for design purposes only. CONTRACTOR shall assure itself by personal examination as to subsurface conditions and shall provide its own investigations and make its own assumptions to comply with OSHA and any other applicable laws and regulations regarding excavation and trenching requirements. D. In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultants relied upon the following reports and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Fa~;ilities) which are at or contiguous to the Site: 1. Drawings dated 1978. of Wastewater Treatment Plant, prepared by Donohue & Associates, Inc., Sheboygan, Wisconsin, entitled: Wastewater Treatment Plant, Oshkosh, Wisconsin, consisting of 221 sheets numbered I to 221, inclusive. 2. Drawings dated November 1994 of Wastewater Treatment Facilities Modifications, prepared by Strand Associates, Inc, Madison, Wisconsin, entitled Wastewater Treatment Facility Modifications for Oshkosh, Wisconsin, consisting of 140 sheets numbered 1 to 140, inclusive. E. Copies of reports and drawings itemized in SC-4.02.C and SC-4.02.D that are not included with Bidding Documents may be examined at the offices of Strand Associates, Inc., Section 00800-3 1 ~382-636/03-04 910 West Wingra Drive, Madison, Wisconsin 53715, (608) 251-4843 and atthe City of Oshkosh Wastewater Treatment Plant during regular business, hours. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents SC-4.04 Underqround Facilities CONTRACTOR is referred to the General Requirements for requirements for keeping records of Underground Facilities and allowing facility owners to inspect. SC-4.05 Reference Points CONTRACTOR is referred to the General Requirements for additional requirements fo~;~ ay ng out thework. : SC-5.01 Performance and Payment Bonds The forms of the performance and payment Bonds attached hereto shall be used f°r'ihe ContraCt. Note instructions thereon as to the form applicable. Each form contemplates one corporate surety only. In case co-sureties or individual sureties will be furnished, proper forms therefore shall be obtained. Besides the stiPUlations of paragraphs 5,01 through 5.03 of the General Conditions, the surety on the Bonds shall provide a certificate indicating surety is licensed to underwrite contracts in the jurisdiction of the project location which shall be attached to the Bonds. Every Bond must run to OWNER. If the principal is an individual, his/her full name and residence shall be inserted in the body thereof, and he/she shall sign the Bonds with his/her usual signature on the line opposite the scroll seal If the Principals arer partners, their individual names shall appear in the body of the Bonds, With the recital that they are Partners comprising a firm, naming iti and all the members of the firm Shall execute the Bonds as individuals, The signature of a witness shall appear in the appropriate places, attesting the signatures of each individual party to the Bonds: If the principal is a corporation, the name of the state in which incorporated shall be inserted inthe apPrOPriate Place in ~he body of the Bonds, and said instrument shall be executed and attested under the corporate seal as indicated on the form. If the corporation has no seal, the fact shall be stated, in which case a scroll or adhesive seal shall appear following the corporate name. This also applies to execution by surety. The date of the Bonds must not be prior to the date of the Contract for which Riven. A power of attorney, authorizing the execution of the Bonds by an attorney-in-faCt, or agent, shall be attached to one executed counterpart of the Bonds. SC-5.02~A Insurers . Insurance is to be placed with insurance companies with a Best's rating of no less than A-VI. SC-5:03.A Certificates of Insurance ' : Delete paragraph 5.03.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Section 00800-4 A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance, copies of endorsements, and other evidence of r~surance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured, which CONTRACTOR ~s required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.04 and 5.06 of the General Conditions. SC-5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability nsurance Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph 5.04.B: C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.04 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations. The types of insurance and the limits of liability indicated are the minimum required. Neither OWNER or ENGINEER warrant the adequacy of the types of insurance or the limits of liability required. Any policy exclusions shall be indicated on the insurance certificate. Insurance shall be provided on an occurrence form basis. CONTRACTOR shall' providevedfication of all coverages with or on the insurance certificate. I · Workers' Compensationj and related coverages under paragraphs 5.04.A. 1. and A.2. of the General Conditions: a. State (WI): Statutory b. Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman's): Statutory c. Employer's Liability: Bodily Injury by Accident: Each Accident $ 100,000 Bodily Injury by Disease: Each Employee $ 100,000 Policy Limit $ 500,000 2. CONTRACTOR's General Liability under paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through A.6. of the General Conditions which sha II be written on a commercial general liability form: a. Policy Limits: 1) General Aggregate Limit (other than P-CO) $ 2,000,000 2) Products- Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000 ' 3) Personal and Advertising Injury Limit (Per Person/Organization)' $ 1,000,000 4) Each Occurrence Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $ 1,000,000 5) Fire Legal Liability Damage Limit (Any One Fire) $ 50,000 Section 00800-5 6) Medical Expense Limit (Any One Person) $ 5,000 b. Policy shall include as a minimum the following coverages: 1) Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverages where applicable under Property Damage Liability Insurance. 2) Contractual Liability Coverage. 3) Independent Contractor Coverage. 4) General Aggregate Limits specified above shall apply separately to this project by attachment of: "Amendment of Limits of Insurance - Designated Projects" Endorsement (ISO Form No. CG 25011185) or "Amendment - Aggregate Limits of Insurance- Per Project" Endorsement (ISO Form CG 25031185) or equivalent endorsement coverage. 5) Products/Completed Operations Coverage for two years after project completion. 3. Commercial Automobile Liability under paragraph 5.04.A.6. of the General Conditions: a. Bodily Injury: Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000 Property Damage: b. Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage): $ 1,000,000 c. POlicy shall include contractual liability coverage and coverage on all owned, nonowned and hired vehicles. 4. Umbrella Coverage: a. Umbrella Liability providing coverage at least as broad as the underlying COverages specified in 5.04 C.1, 5.04 C.2, and 5.04 C:3 with a minimum limit of $2,000,000 each occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate, and a maximum self-insured retention of $10,000: b. Policy shall include OWNER, ENGINEER, and any others required by paragraph 5.04.B.1. of the General Conditions as additional insureds. c: The stated limits of paragraphs 5.04.C.1, 5.04.C:2, and 5.04.C.3 can be obtained through individual policies or in conjunction with an umbrella policy (pay on behalf form) to arrive at the total limits requested. Section 00800-6 Add the following new paragraphs at the end of paragraph 5.04.B. of the General Conditions: D. Regardless whether or not an OCP policy or Project Management Protective Liability policy is furnished, insurance certificates for commercial general, automobile, umbrella, and builders risk shall specifically indicate by name the additional insureds which are to include OWNER and ENGINEER as well as other persons or entities so identified. Certificates shall be Acord 25-S or equivalent. E. Additional insured Endorsement/OCP Policy/Project Management Protective Liability Policy 1. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain liability insurance, as described above, specifically naming as additional insureds OWNER and ENGINEER as well as other individuals or entities so identified (see paragraph 1.O1.A.20. of the Supplementary Conditions), and specifically stating the following language as the Additional Insurance Endorsement on Form CG 20 26 11 85 or equivalent form: "That the persons insured under this policy is amended to include as an additional insured, OWNER and ENGINEER as well as other individuals and entities so identified, but only with res pect to liability arising out of (1) operations performed for the additional insured by the named insured or (2) acts o¢ failure to act by the additional insured. in connection with general supervision, inspection and/or coordination of CONTRACTOR's operations.", or, in lieu of providing Form CG 20 26 11 85 with the above language, provide Form CG 20 09 03 97 or equivalent form. 2. As an alternative to providing either Form CG 20 26 11 85 or Form CG 20 09 03 97, CONTRACTOR may furnish to OWNER an Owners' and Contractors' Protective (OCP) policy or a Project Management Protective Liability policy, with ENGINEER as additional !,n.sured. OCP policy or Project Management Protective Liability policy shall provide for bodily injury and property damage coverage equal to the sum of: the general aggregate limit for commercial general liability plus the amount specified for the umbrella coverage. OCP policy or Project Management Protective Liability policy shall provide coverage arising out of: operations performed by CONTRACTOR at the project location. iL acts or omissions in connection with the general supervision of such operations. Endorsements, OCP, and/or Project Management Protective Liability policy shall not exclude supervisory or ~nspection services. F. Policies of insurance shall also include ENGINEER's consultants as identified in paragraph 1.01.A.20 of the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds under the provisions of paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.5. of the General Conditions. G. The General Liability, Commercial Automobile Liability, and Umbrella Coverage required are to be primary and not contributary to any coverage carried by the OWNER and ENGINEER. SC-5.04.B Additiona Insureds Covera,qe 5.04.B.3 and 5.04.B.7 Products and Completed Operations Insurance: Amend in paragraphs 5.04.B.3. and 5.04.B.7. of the General Conditions the phrase "completed operations insurance" to read "products and completed operations insurance." Section 00800-7 Delete in paragraph 5.04.B.7. of the General Conditions the phrase "and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis," 5.04.B.5 Insurance Policies: Delete the phrase "materially changed" and insert the following ~n its place: "materially changed with respect to coverage on the project." SC-5.06.A Property nsurance Delete paragraph 5.06.A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place: A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of full replacement cost thereof. Insurance shall be completed value form. This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's consultants and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured (Insurance certificates shall specifically indicate by name the additional insureds which are to include OWNER and ENGINEER as well as other individuals or entities so identified.); 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or similar form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the work, temporary buildings, false work and materials and equipment. Such insurance shall insure against at least the following perils or causes Of loss: special peril, collapse, debris removal, demolition, and increased cost.of .construction occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. This insurance shall also cover in-transit and off-site storage as well as items at the construction site; r · 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover the total value of materials and equipment supplied under the Contract from the time CONTRACTOR takes possession of them until they are installed and tested by CONTRACTOR and the project is accepted as complete by OWNER under an endorsement to this policy or in the form of Installation Floater Insurance of the ,all risk" type; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. 8. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured retention. Section 00800--8 9, The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained bY CONTRACTOR in accordance with this paragraph 5.06 shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.06.C. SC-5.06.A.1 Additional Insureds Policy shall also include ENGINEER's consultants as identified in paragraph 1.01:A.20 of the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds under the provisions of paragraph 5.06.A.1. of the General Conditions. SC-5.06.B Boiler and Machinery and Additional Property Insurance Delete paragraph 5.06.B. of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the followin~ in its place: B. CONTRACTOR shall purchase Builder's Risk, Installation Floater, or Boiler and Machinery Insurance or a combination thereof to protect CONTRACTOR's interests in the materials and equipment which will also include the interests of OWNER, subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. Insurance'certificate shall specifically indicate by name the additional insureds which are to include OWNER, its employees, elected and appointed officials, ENGINEER, and subcontractors as well as other individuals or entities so identified. CONTRACTOR's coverage shall extend until the materials and equipment are installed and tested by CONTRACTOR and the project is accepted as complete by OWNER. CONTRACTOR's coverage shall insure against at least the following perils: accident, mechanical breakdown, electric arcing, and problems arising during testing because of defects. SC;5.06.D Deductible Provisions Delete the first sentence of paragraph 5.06.D. of the General Conditions and insert the following in its place: CONTRACTOR shall pay all deductible provisions of insurances. The maximum deductible shall be $5,000. SC-5.06.E Policies of Insurance Amend paragraph 5.06.E. of the General Conditions by inserting "OWNER" for "CONTRACTOR" and "CONTRACTOR" fer "OWNER." SC-5.1'0 Partial Utilization CONTRACTOR's insu~-ance coverages shall extend beyond OWNER's partial use of completed facilities. OWNER's partial use shall not interrupt any specified coverage. CONTRACTOR shall obtain permission of insurance carrier for OWNER's partial use of work. SC-6.02 and 6.03 Work nq Hours, Limitations, Schedulinq, Etc. See the General Requirements for special requirements concerning working hours and power outages at the treatment plant. SC-6.03.B Materials and Equipment Warranty Add the following to the end of paragraph 6.03.B. of the General Conditions: Section 00800-9 Suppliers shall be deemed to impliedly warrant that their products and all component materials incorporated into them are suitable and fit for the intended use of such products and shall be free from defect in material, workmanship or design, such warranty to run to the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. The foregoing applies whether the products or their component materials are specified in the Contract Documents or are of Supplier's design. SC-6.05 Substitutes and "Or Equal" Items Add the following paragraph to the end of paragraph 6.05: G. All requirements of paragraph 6.05 shall apply to review and acceptance of Equipment Alternatives listed in the Lump Sum Base Bid, except for paragraph E., ENGINEER's Cost Reimbursement. SC-6.06.A Concerninq Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others Add the following to paragraph 6.06.A. Of the General Conditions: If OWNER or ENGINEER after due investigations has reasonable objections to any proposed subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity, either may request CONTRACTOR submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price. SC-6.06.C Payment Information Add the following sentence at the end of paragraph 6.06.C. of the General Conditions: OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a particular subcontractor, supplier, or other individual or entity. SC-6.08 Permits See General Requirements for additional permit information. SC-6.09 Laws and Requlations In connection with the performance of Work under this Contract, CONTRACTOR agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant because of age, race, religion, color, handicap, sex, physical condition, developmental disability, or national origin. CONTRACTOR further agrees to comply with fair employment practices pursuant to subchapter II of ch. 111, Wis. Stats. This provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. CONTRACTOR further agrees to take affirmative action to ensure equal employment opportunities for individuals with disabilities. CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places, available for employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of the nondiscrimination clause. A sample form is included at the end of these Supplementary Conditions. SC-6.10 Taxes CONTRACTOR shall refer to and comply with the stipulations set forth in Wisconsin Administrative Rule Tax 11.11, a copy of which follows these Supplementary Conditions, in order to obtain a state sales tax exemption on the purchase of property for incorporation into a municipal wastewater treatment facility. Section 00800o10 1-382-636/03-04 CONTRACTOR, if not a Wisconsin resident, shall comply with the provisions of Section 71.80 (16) Wisconsin Statutes. SC-6.12 Record Documents paragraph 6.12.A: of the General Conditions, change the reference as follows: In the first sentence change the word "one" to "two." paragraph 6.12.A, delete last sentence and insert the following: Upon completion of the work, these record documents, samples, and shop drawings shall be delivered by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. SC-6.14 Competent Person Add the following p~ragraph atthe end of paragraph 6;~14.A~ of the General Conditions: B. CONTRACTOR shall keep at the site at all times during the progress of the Work a competent person to comply With OSHA trenching and excavation requirements. The competent person shall be one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to employees, and Who has authorization to take p~'ompt corrective measures to eliminate tt~em. SC-6.20 Indemnification Add the following to the end of paragraph 6.20~A. of the General Conditions: CONTRACTOR shall, at its own expense, appear, defend, and pay all fees of attorneys and all costs and 'other.expenses arising therefrom or incurred in connection therewith; and, if any judgments shall be rendered against any individual or entity indemnified hereunder in any such actiop, CONTRACTOR shall,, At its own expense, satisfy and discharge same. CONTRACTOR exp'ressly understands and agrees that any Letter of Credit or insurance protection required by the Contract, or Otherwise provided by CONTRACTOR, shall in no way limit the responsibility to indemnify,' keep and. save harmless, and defend any individual or entity indemnified hereunder 'as herein provided. Delete paragraph 6.20.C., including paragraphs 1. and 2. Insert new paragraphs 6.20.C. and D.: C. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability Of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors, or omissions of any of them. '~ D. For' any matter for which E,N_GINEER is indemnified under paragraph 6.20.A, CONTRACTOR shall pay for ENGINEERs reasonable defense, including, but not limited to, all fees and Charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs or awards until ENGINEER is found negligent. If ENGINEER is found negligent, ENGINEER shall reimburse CONTRACTOR for the prorata extent of ENGINEER's negligence for the cost of ENGINEER's reasonable defense. section 00800,11 1-382-636/03-04 SC-7.01 Related Work at Site A. Electric utility will Complete installation of new Conductors from grid to new external pad mounted transformer, which is also provided by utility. This work is to be coordinated by CONTRACTOR and paid for by Contract allowance. B. Gas utility will complete work for de vering natural gas to project as shown on the drawings. CONTRACTOR to coordinate with utility but nOt responsible for cost of thiS UtilitY work. Gas utility will pay for this work. : SC-7.03 Claims Between Contractors Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph GC-7.02: SC-7.03 Claims Between Contractors A. Should CONTRACTOR cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor at the Site or should any claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work at the Site be made by any separate contractor against CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants or the construction coordination, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such separate contractor by agreement or to otherwise resolve the dispute by arbitration or at law. B. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, the construction coordinator and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly, or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any separate contractor against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, or the construction coordinator to the extent said claim is based on or arises out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Should a separate contractor cause damage to the Work or property of CONTRACTOR or shou d the performance of work by any separate contractor at the Site give rise to any other Claim, CONTRACTOR shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, against OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, or the construction coordinator or permit any action against any of them to be maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit i~ any court or before any arbiter which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, or the construction coordinator on account of any such damage or Claim. C. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time ~n performing or furnishing Work by any act or neglect of a separate contractor, and OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent of any adjustment in Contract Times attributable thereto, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an extension of times '~n accordance with Article 12. An extension of the Contract Times shall be CONTRACTOR's exclusive remedy with respect to OWNER, ENGINEER, ENG NEER's Consultants, and construction coordinator for any delay, disruption, interference, or hindrance caused by any separate contractor. This paragraph does not prevent recovery from OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant, or construction coordinator for activities that are their respective responsibilities. SC-9.03 Resident Proiect Representative The duties and responsibilities of the resident project representative include the following: Section 00800-12 BIB 1. Review schedules as required in paragraph 2.05.B. of the General Conditions and amendment thereto. 2. Attend conferences and meetings with CONTRACTOR. 3. Serve as liaison between ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR and help ENGINEER serve as liaison between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 4. Conduct on-site observation of the work. ~ 5. Observe tests, equipment, and system startups. 6. Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed. Consider, evaluate, and report to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR's reqe'ests fo~ modification. 7. Maintain orderly records, keep a daily log (when on a part-time basis, keep log for days visiting site), and furnish periodic reports to ENGINEER of the progress of the work. 8. Before project completion, prepare final list of items to be completed or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance of the work. The resident project representatives shall not: 1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitutions of materials or equipment. 2. Exceed limitation§of ENGINEER's authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of CONTRACTOR, subcontractor, or Contractor's superintendent. 4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the - mean~sjmethods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction. 5. Advise on, issue directions regarding; or assume control over safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. 6. Accept shop drawing or sample submittals from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. 7. Authorize OWNER to occupy the project in whole or in part. 8. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others except as specifically authorized by ENGINEER. SC-12.01 Chanqe of Contract Price Clarification of paragraph B.2.: The overhead and profit allowance for lump sum work shall be in accordance with paragraph 12.01.C.2. unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that these allowances are not appropriate for the Work involved. Section 00800-13 1 ~382-636/03-04 Delete paragraph C.2.e. and insert the following: e. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will bethe amount of the actual net decrease in cost; and SC-13.02 Access To Work Add the following paragraph after paragraph 13.02;A. of the General Conditions: B. Representative of the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources shall have access to work and on-site records at reasonable times for inspection. CONTRACTOR shall allow the DNR or any authorized representative to have access to any books,, documents, plans, reports, papers and Other records of CONTRACTOR which are pertinent to the project for the purpose of making audits, inspections, examinations, excerpts, copies, and transcriptions. CONTRAOTOR shall insure that all parties to subagreements will provide the DNR access to the project, including sites, documents and records. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection: This is in accordance with the requirements of NR 162.10(4). SC,13,03.A Tests and Inspections Add the following to the beginning of Paragraph 1310371 of the GeneralConditions: All work is subject to testing to indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements. DupliCate copies of test results of all tests required Shall be submitted to ENGINEER. Testing laboratories are subject to the approval of ENGINEER. Tests and inspection of work may be conducted by OWNER or an independent laboratory employed by OWNER. Tests may also be performed in the field by ENGINEER as a basis for acceptance Of the work. Add the following to the end of paragraph 13,03.A. of the General Conditions: Samples required for testing shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR at no cost to OWNER. In the event that Completed work does not conform to specification requirements during the initial test, the work shall be corrected and retested for conformance, The entire cost of retesting completed work shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. This shall include the extra cost for inspection to OWNER which will be deducted from the final amount due CONTRACTOR; SC-13.07.A Correction Period Amendment to paragraph 13.07.A. of the General Conditions: The one-year correction period shall extend from the date of final acceptance of the work, not the day or days on which sections of the work are indicated to be substantially complete. SC-14 Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion Add the following paragraph: In accordance with the 1997 WiSConsin Act NO. 237, CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims for labor and materials, CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of all subcontractors and suppliers, and OWNER may make direct payment to a subcontractor or pay CONTRACTOR with checks made payable to CONTRACTOR and to one or more subcontractors. Section 00800-14 SC-14.02.A Payment for Shop Drawinqs, Stored Materials, and Equipment Add the following paragraphs after paragraph 14.02.A.3. of the General Conditions: 4. No advanced payment for shop drawing preparation will be made. :Shop drawing costs will be paid when equipment and materials are delivered and suitably stored on the site. 5. All stored equipment and materials for which payment is requested shall have two copies of invoices included with the pay request. Equipment shall be identified thoroughly on the invoices, including serial numbers. 6. Payment for the stored equipment and material which are on the site shall not exceed the invoiced amount for each item, less the Contract retainage. The overhead and 3rofit for the stored items shall not be invoiced until the item is installed. 7. Payment for off-site storage is normally reserved for sensitive or very large p~eces of equipment that in ENGINEER's opinion would not be practical to have stored on the site. Payment for off-site -stored items shall be limited to 75% of the invoiced value of the item, less Contract retainage. CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER the cost of inspecting off-site stored items. When off-site storage is approved, CONTRACTOR shall provide Insurance Certificates and Document of Ownership to OWNER. 8. Payment for PLC and SCADA programming shall be limited to 75% of the invoiced time spent, less Contract retainage. To allow this payment value, programming must be completed by area and system. CONTRACTOR must provide the following: a. Signed certification by an officer of CONTRACTOR and electrical subcontractor that work has been completed. b. Written operation description of the system(s) submitted. c. Ladder diagram dump with complete descriptive narrative. d. Database cross reference report. e. Data table dump report. f. Database f(~rm. g. Rung description and page title usage form. h. I/O partial list. i. Smart I/O configuration report. j. Processor configuration report. SC-16. Dispute Resolution Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 16.01 of the General Conditions: Section 00800-15 SC-16.02 Mediation A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they shall submit any and all unsettled Claims or counterclaims, disputes, or other matters in question between them arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof to mediation by the State Statutes Chapter 788 prior to either of them initiating against the other a demand for arbitration pursuant to paragraph SC-16.03, unless delay in initiating arbitration would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties. The 30-day time limit within which to file a demand for arbitration as provided in paragraphs SC-16.03.B and 16.03.C shall be suspended with respect to a dispute submitted to mediation within that time limit and shall remain suspended until 10 days after the termination of the mediation. The mediator of any dispute submitted to mediation under this agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise agreed. Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph SC-16.02: SC-16.03 Arbitration A. All Claims or counterclaims, disputes, or other matters in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof (except for Claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph 14.09) not resolved under the provisions of paragraph SC-16.02 will be decided by binding arbitration in accordance with the State Statutes Chapter 788 then obtaining, subject to the limitations of this paragraph SC-16.03. This agreement to arbitrate entered into will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. B. No demand for arbitration of any Claim or counterclaim, dispute, or other matter that is required to be referred to ENGINEER initially for decision in accordance With paragraph 9.09 will be made until the earlier of: (i) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision, or (ii) the 31st day after the parties have presented their final evidence to ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by ENGINEER before that date. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim or counterclaim, dispute, or other matter will be made later than 30 days after the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance with paragraph 10.05; and the failure to demand arbitration within said 30-day period will result in ENGINEER's decision being final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. C. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the selected arbitrator, and a copy will be sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the 30 day period specified in paragraph SC-16.03.B, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim or counterclaim, dispute, or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim or other dispute or matter in question would be barred by the applicable statue of limitations. D. Except as provided in paragraph SC-16.03.E, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees, or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; and Section 00800-16 2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings; and 3. the written consent of the other individual or entity sought to be included and of OWNER and CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. E. Notwithstanding paragraph SC-16.03.D, if a Claim or counterclaim, dispute, or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the Work of a subcontractor, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor as a party to the arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts required by paragraph 6.06.G a specific provision whereby the subcontractor consents to being joined in an arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the Work of such subcontractor. Nothing in this paragraph SC-16.03.E nor in the prOvisions of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall create any claim, right, or cause of action in favor of subcontractor and against OWNER, ENGINEER, or ENGINEER's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. F. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal. Add the following paragraph G. to paragraph 16.03 of the General Conditions: G. When arbitration is deemed to be necessary, it is imperative that OWNER insure that any arbitration award contains a decision setting forth in detail its factual and legal basis. Otherwise, it may not be possible for the reviewing agency to determine allowability of costs awarded. Therefore, as a condition precedent to any agreement to arbitrate, CONTRACTOR must obtain agreement by OWNER that OWNER and CONTRACTOR will require, at the time that the request for arbitration is made; that any arbitration-based settlement or awards contain findings of fact, conclusions of law, basis of award, and rationale for settlement. END OF SECTION Section 00800-17 NOTICE In connection with the performance of work on this project under a contract involving funds of the State of Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources, CONTRACTOR has agreed not to discriminate against any employe or applicant for employment because of sex, physical condition, disability as defined in CONTRACTOR has also age, race, religion, color, handicap, national origin or developmental S.51.01 (5), Wisconsin Statutes. agreed to take affirmative action to ensure equal employment opportunities. These provisions apply to, but are not limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment layoff or termination; rates of compensation; and selection apprentiCeship. or recruitment advertising; pay or other forms of for training, including CONTRACTOR'S Signature Date Tax 11.11 Industrial or governmental waste treat- merit facilities. (!) G~'~[~ Section 77_54 (26), Stats? pro- vides a sales and use tax exemption for tangible personal property which becomes a component part of a waste treatment facility. (2) i~rous-mua, w~mw.~.~'n~wrmm~n'no~- (a) Ifanindus- trial or utility waste tre~ment facility qualifies for thc prope~y tax exemption under s. 70.11 (21) (a), Stats~ as approved by the departm~nt~ it qua]~fies for the sales and ns~ t~x exemption under s. 77~54 (26), Stats. Co) When any plant or equipment has been approved az exemp( from ~e property tax on 1anuary 1, t~ re~r, service, alteration, cleaning, painting and maintenance of the exempt property and the r~pair pa~ and replacements related to that prop(~y are also exempt through the foliowing December 31 - The sales and u~ tax exemption applies to chemicals, supplies and utilities used or consumed in operating a waste Ueatment facility. (3) MoI~clI,Ac WASTE T~,EA~'~ON- Tangible per- zonal property which becomes a component or ingredient pair of the following municipal facilities that ~xcat waste qualLfies for exemprion from Wisconsin sales and use tax under s. 77_~4 (26), Stats.: (a) Wa~tovater treatmen~ facility. L Only thc central waste ~xeam~ent plant which actually ~rents the ~ewa~e qualifies for the 2. Storm sewers, water supply systems and private domas~c was~ water facilitibs do not qualify for the sales and use tax exemption~ 3. The collection system throughout the area served by the u-cam~¢nt facility, the effluent pipeline carrying the treated sew- ag~ away from the cenffal treai~aeat plant~ earthen dills and chain llnk fcn~e~ on the boundary of a ~eatmeat plauL end dxerlge ma~- rial dispo~l sites are not exempL The collection system~ includes the l~ft stations. Force mains and azsoc~ted pumping erluipment used to bring the raw ~wage to the centx~tl (reatment plznC (b) Material recovery facility. 1. A facility constructed by a municipality to meet mandates of ch. 287, Stats., regarding the muse, recycling and rece~,ery of waste material to reduce the need for waste disposal is exempt if the activities include all of the fol- lowing. a. Sorting tecycinble materials delivered f'~om'municipal~es. b. Processing recyciable matexials which n~y include remov- ing contaminants, baling paper, shredding paper, pelletizing plas- tics and crushing glass. c. Storing proceased recyciable materials for sale to others. 2. The exemption docs not apply if the only activiries per- fotme~I are setting and storing and no prnce~ing of the raz~e, rials takes place. (c) ,~nitary LzndfilL A sanitary landfill, including the ment eCluipmen~ such as the collec~inn'and burner syster~ labom- toty equipn~nt, maintenance buildings, gacages, offic~ bniidiogs, fences and gates, qualifies for exempfion~ (d) Groundwater facilities. 1. A municipal facility constrt~cted to treat hazardous or contaminated groundwater, including oil and water seporators, air sirippr~ aerators, blowers, fdters, enfoon unit~, coatrols, thcrn~l oxidize~ and pumps, quali- fies for exemption. 2. The collection system used to bring the b~7~r, tous Or con- taminated water to the facility and the dls~iburion system ~ to carry th~ treated water away from the facility are not exemp~ (4) R~u~ s~c~ ~ o~.A~o:~. Thc ~, service, alter- ation, cic-anin§, painting and maintenance of an indns(xial wazte ~ent facility described in sub. (2) and a municipal waste wentment facility described in sub. (3), the repair parts and repincements for thnse types _o,.f faciliti? and chemicals, sup_p.l?s and utilities used or conzoraed m opera~ang ~ose types of fa~li~tes are exempt from t~ sales ann use tax. (S) Com~cro~s ~ stmco~ra~cro~s~ (a) Exempt pur- closes. The sales and use tax exemption extends to anti includes the purchases of tangible personal property by a contractor-in- . stalier who incorporates the l~Operty into an approved induswial waste treatment facility or who incorporates the property into a municipal waste txentment facility- The conWaCtOr--installer shall certify the intended exempt use of the item to each supplier in . order to ~lieve the supplier of the duty of collecting and repotting the tax on the sate. Certification of exempt use shall be made on a cerlificate of exemption, form S-211. CO) Taxable purclu~e~. ^ conlx-*actor's purchases of items used er consumed in the pefforraanco of the cons~rnction contract, and which do not become a component pa~ of thc waste Ireatment facility, arc subject to ll~ tax. This incindcs industrial gases, form lumber, tunnel shields and supplies used by a contractor during construction. Payments by a con~-actor for equipment purchased or leased to perform a constmctinn job are also taxable. (¢) gaterrnini~ exetr~otlonx. Contractors shall ascertain whether the industrial waste ~m~ttment facility they are cons=ct* lng has been properly approved by the department for a property tsx exemption under s. 70.11 (21) St~. If there has been no "approval," the contractor or subcontractor may be liable for the sales or use tax on its purchases. Approvals are not required for municipal waste treatment facilities and, therefore, contractors may purchase without tax constrnction materials which become a component part of the exempt facility_ r_ (1) (b) a~l O). I~..,.~ (1) (10 to he (I) and ~m-. reaum- ~(2) (i})*. ~). and (c) t°~sb~(a~! Co), (c) and (,0 ~ he ~) (b), (a), (¢) and (d), Bogi~/'me- I~.l, 14o. 42~. _e_ ~ -~lo;' o~vec~in~ in 12) (a) ma~ ~mder 13.93 (2m) (b) 7. S~a~.. Regis, A~ ~ ~gt~. ~)~d~ ~-~ DIVISION ~1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DIVISION ONE 1.02 A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all sections of the Contract. PROJECT SCOPE CONTRACTOR shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods mentioned or scheduled on the drawings or herein specified: including all labor, supervision, equipment, incidentals, taxes and permits necessary to complete the work as described within the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall install all items provided by OWNER as mentioned or scheduled on the drawings or herein specified. 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - INTENT AND USE Intent of Documents: 1. Singular notations and specifications shall be considered plural where application is -reasonably inferred. 2. Mention or indication of extent of work under any work division or specification section is done only for convenience of CONTRACTOR and shall not be construed as describing all work required under that division or section. 3. Some individual sections may contain a list of related sections, The list of related sections in individual sections is provided for the convenience of CONTRACTOR and is not necessarily all-inclusive. CONTRACTOR may not rely upon this listing for determination of scope of work. Other sections of the specifications, not referenced in individual sections shall apply as required for proper pert'ormance of the work. Command type sentences may be used in the Contract Documents. These sentences refer to and are directed to CONTRACTOR, Symbols for vadous elements and systems are shown on the drawings. Should there be any doubt regarding the meaning or intent of the symbols used, a written interpretation shall be obtained from ENGINEER, Use of Documents: 1. CONTRACTOR shall examine all specifications and drawings for the work, including those that may pertain to work CONTRACTOR does not normally perform with its own forces. 2. CONTRACTOR shall use all of the project drawings and specifications: a. For a complete understanding of the project. b. To determine the type of construction and systems required. c. For coordination with other contractors. d, To determine what other work may be involved in various parts or phases. e, To anticipate and notify others when work by others will be required. f, And all other relevant matters related to the project. 3. CONTRACTOR is also bound by all requirements of the Contract Documents which are applicable to, pertain to, or affect its work, as may be shown or inferred by the entire set of project drawings and specifications. Section 01010-1 1.04 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS General Information and Requirements: 1. Currently, wastewater treatment at the City of Oshkosh wastewater treatment facility consists of influent screening, pumping, aerated grit removal, primary sedimentation, activated sludge biological treatment, and disinfection using gaseous chlodne and liquid sodium bisulfite. Sludge management includes dissolved air flotation thickening of waste activated sludge, anaerobic digestion of primary and waste activated sludge, centrifuge dewatering of polymer conditioned digested sludge, and loading and transportation to rural storage and land application. 2. Electrical power is provided to the treatment facility by WPS Resources Corporation. Two 3 phase 12,470 V feeders are provided to exterior transformers which reduce the 3 phase power to 4160 V prior to connection to the service entrance switchgear and subsequent distribution to 4 unit substations. Unit substations are double-ended and distribute 480 V power to motor control centers. Power is further reduced in the motor control centers to 3 phase, 120/208 V. 3. The existing SCADA system is a distributed control, PLC and personal computer based system that uses lntellution Fix 32 for operator interface. Other software used for maintenance and data analysis purposes is as provided by FMT 4. Wastewater treatment power distribution, motor controls and instrumentation and process control dudng construction must be continuous and the treatment efficiency must be equal to that achieved prior to the start of construction. 5. It shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to not in any way impair the normal treatment or operating efficiency of the facilities, regardless of the work underway. No bypassing of raw or partially treated wastewater to receiving stream shall occur at any time as a result of construction. In general, this requires that new facilities be complete and ready for service, or that temporary facilities be provided, pdor to removing existing units from service for modification or repair. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary wiring, piping, bypass pumping, and temporary construction required to complete the work. 6. Operation of existing treatment facilities will be the responsibility of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with OWNER's staff at all times. A minimum of 48 hours prior to making any process control or electrical connections to existing facilities or modification or demolition of existing facilities, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing At the time of notification, CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule for completion of the work, including a description of measures that wil be taken to minimize the impact to existing facilities. 7. Access: CONTRACTOR shall maintain roadways open at all times to meet OWNER's requirements, including access for sludge hauling vehicles and chemical deliveries. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining roadways in driveable condition, including placement of temporary stone and gravel and providing drainage as necessary. All city-owned roadways around the treatment facility shall be cleaned of construction site materials, soil, and debris as necessary. Construction Sequence: 1. The following construction sequence is provided as a general guideline for the information and for the benefit of CONTRACTOR. This construction sequence is not intended to dictate means, method of construction or direct construction activities. This construction sequence is a conceptual general construction sequence with minimum recommended outage, shutdowns, and operating units to be maintained in service. The general construction sequence is projected to allow the work to be completed while maintaining treatment of the wastewater treatment plant. It is not intended to be Section 01010-2 1-382-636/03-04 F all inclusive and does not list all work elements or details that are required to complete the work, complete treatment processes, or place unit processes in service. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementing any additional details required, including temporary piping, bypass pumping, or temporary construction at no additional cost to OWNER. The construction sequence may require modification depending on the time of year construction activity is initiated. a. Relocate existing Utility Co. primary conductors to the north two transformers as required to allow for construction of new generator building. b. Construct new interceptor improvements eliminating flow beneath the new generator building. Construct laboratory HVAC improvements. Install new electrical duct bank for feeders to USS No. 2/3 and USS No. 4. (1) Only one side of each USS may be taken out of service at a time. (2) Splice existing conductors as required for extension to new service entrance switchgear. (3) Temporary feeds back into existing service entrance switchgear without impeding OWNERs use of existing facilities. e. Begin development of SCADA system modifications. f. Construct new generator building and including gas, water and other utilities. g. Install new service entrance switchgear. h. Review SCADA system modifications with OWNER and ENGINEER. i. Startup r~ew generators, paralleling switchgear, and service entrance switchgear. Power new service entrance switchgear from generators. j. Disconnect Utility Co. Pearl Avenue feed to existing service entrance switchgear. (1) Provide temporary feed from new service entrance switchgear to bay in existing service entrance switchgear that was fed from Pearl Avenue feed. (2) Verify proper operation of existing service entrance switchgear on feed from new service entrance switchgear/generators. (3) Remove existing Utility Co. transformers (2) associated with feed from Pearl Avenue extend new conduits up into transformer pad where these transformers have been removed, (4)Provide new Utility Co. transformer. k. Energize new service entrance switchgear from new Utility Co. transformer. (1) Ver'r[y proper operation of transfer scheme between Utility Co. and generators. I. Cut-over loads on existing service entrance switchgear to new service entrance switchgear. (1) Only one side of each USS and one set of influent pumps may be taken out of service at a time. (2) Disconnect temporary feed from new service entrance switchgear to existing service entrance switchgear (last). m: Disconnect Utility Co. 12th Avenue feed to existing service entrance switchgear. (1) Remove existing Utility Co. transformers (2) associated with feed from 12th Avenue. n Remove existing service entrance switchgear. o. Complete installation of SCADA Modifications. 2. CONTRACTOR may propose alternate sequence or modifications to this sequence. OWNER will review the proposed modification and determine if such modification of the sequence interferes with the proper operation of the treatment plant activities. Any modifications to this general construction sequence Shall be proposed in wdting and shall be approved by OWNER prior to their implementations. Section 01010-3 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. General: 1. The "area of the site" referred to in these specifications shall be as shown on the drawings. If the "area of the site" is not shown, OWNER's property lines, the project right-of-way or the easements obtained for the project shall be considered the "area of the site." 2.Construction activities shall be confined within the "area of the site" limits. 3. From the start of work to completion CONTRACTOR is responsible for the care of the site and the premises which are affected by operations of work of this Contract. 4. Except for permanent site improvements provided under the Contract, CONTRACTOR shall restore property disturbed during the work, to the conditions which previously existed. 5. Work in occupied spaces shall be restricted to specified work and essential activities, such as making necessary connections and extending services or constructing temporary access ways. Such work shall be scheduled in advance with OWNER. B. Parking and Deliveries: 1. CONTRACTOR is responsible for control of traffic by vehicles and persons within the limits of its operations. 2. Parking for employees, subcontractors, and agents of CONTRACTOR shall be in areas subject to approval of OWNER. 3. Access to the site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be subject to approval of OWNER. 1.06 EXISTING SERVICES, STRUCTURES AND UNDERGROUND FACILITIES Interruption of existing services and systems including heating, ventilating, air conditioning, water, sanitary, lighting and power, signal and security systems, and similar work shall be kept to an absolute minimum and shall be limited to times approved by OWNER. B. If deemed necessary by OWNER, such work shall be accomplished after OWNER's normal office hours. C. Work shall not commence until all labor, materials and equipment are available so work can continue without interruption or delay. D. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted p~pmg or other utilities be encountered dudng installation, notify OWNER and consult with utility owner immediately for directions. E. Cooperate with OWNER and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation and repair any damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. F. CONTRACTOR shall not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by OWNER or others, except when permitted in writing by OWNER. G. Any accidental interruption of services shall be repaired immediately, including provision of temporary facilities until permanent repairs can be made. Wisconsin Statute 182.0175(2) requires, among other provisions, that before excavation or demolition begins reasonable advance notice not less than three working days prior to the start of the excavation or demolition of the intent to excavate or demolish and the Section 01010-4 ~ commencement date be provided to the owners of the underground facilities in and near the construction area Whose facilities may be affected by the excavation or demolition. As part of this notification requirement, CONTRACTOR shall contact Digger's Hotline. CONTRACTOR shall be aware that not all owners participate in the Digger's Hotline program. A call to this agency shall not absolve CONTRACTOR of the requirements of this statute. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all other provisions of the statute though not enumerated herein. CONTRACTOR shall keep an accurate and complete rebord of all such structures and facilities encountered and shall provide OWNER a copy of this record. The record shall include a description of the item encountered, opinion as to conditions, and adequate measurements and depths so that the item can be located in the future. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all structures and underground facilities for C°nditi0n and soundness. Unsound conditions shall be reported to the structure or facility owner immediately after exposing. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the work until the structure or facility owner has been notified. OWNER shall then be given time to inspect and correct, if required, the structure or underground facility. CONTRACTOR may make claim under the previsions of Articles 11 and 12 of the General Conditions should CONTRACTOR feel a price or time adjustment is justified. K. Any additional costs incurred because of failure of CONTRACTOR to report the condition of any and all existing structure or facility encountered shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. Whenever ENGINEER feels it is necessary to explore and excavate to determine the location of existing structures and underground facilities, CONTRACTOR shall make explorations and excavations for such purposes. If CONTRACTOR is required to perform additional work in making the explorations and excavations, extra compensation will be allowed as provided for in the General Conditions. 1.07 PROTECTION OF WORK AND IMPROVEMENTS CONTRACTOR shall protect the property of OWNER, existing improvements, and work installed by CONTRACTOR and others from abuse, damage, dust, debris, moisture and other objectionable materials resulting from construction activities. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable covers, partitions, or other dust and fume containment devices to suit construction operations. C. CONTRACTOR shall keep property, existing improvements and the work, including structures, mains, fittings and accessories free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. CONTRACTOR shall provide temPorary plugging of openings, holes and pipe ends that are existing or that CONTRACTOR has installed. E. Property, improvements and work damaged by CONTRACTOR shall be repaired or replaced by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of OWNER. If more than one contractor is responsible, the cost shall be shared. ENGINEER will determine responsibility for damages. All repair and replacement methods shall be approved by OWNER. section 0i010,5 1-382-636/03-04 1.08 AVAILABILITY Of LANDS A. Easements were not obtained for this project. CONTRACTOR shall contain its operation to within the rights-of-way or lands upon which the work is to be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01010-6 1.-382-636/03-04 SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Cash allowances. 2. Inspecting and testing allowances. 3. Measurement and payment - lump sum. 1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES Allowances: 1. See paragraph 11.02 of the General Conditions for costs to be included in allowances. 2. See individual specification sections for allowances to be included in the Bid. B. Inspection and Testing Allowances: 1. Costs Included in Inspection and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspection or testing firm; execution of inspection and tests; and reporting results. 2. Costs Not To Be Included in the Inspection and Testing Allowance But To Be Included in the Contract Price. a. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspection or testing firm. b. Costs of testing laboratory services used by CONTRACTOR separate from Contract Document requirements. c. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests. d. Costs of tests specified to be provided by CONTRACTOR. 3. Payment Procedures: Submit one copy of the inspection or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment. 4. Refer to technical sections of specifications for required testing and any associated allowances. 5. Difference between final cost and allowance will be adjusted by Change Order. Contingency Allowance: 1. Include in the lump sum bid an allowance of $100,000. 2. Do not include additional amounts for overhead or profit in your lump sum bid. Change orders will include such additional amounts as provided in the conditions of the Contract. 3. Use of Allowance: Contingency allowance will be used for changes in the Contract upon approval by OWNER and issuance of written authorization from ENGINEER. 4. Adjustment of contingency allowance sum: a. The contingency sum will be adjusted accordingly by change orders. b. The amount of the change orders will include handling costs at the site, labor installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by the change order. c. At completion of the project, the amount remaining in the contingency sum shall be credited to OWNER via a change order. Section 01019-1 Supplemental Unit Prices: 1. Supplemental unit prices shall be provided as indicated in the Bid form. 2. Refer to sections of the specifications identified in the Bid form for specific information on use of supplemental unit prices. 3. Where quantities are specified, the Bid shall include the amount equal to the specified quantity times the supplemental unit price. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT- LUMP SUM A. No separate measurement for payment will be performed for lump sum work. B. CONTRACTOR shall estimate percentage of work completed. ENGINEER will review CONTRACTOR's estimate of quantity of work completed. C. Payment will be made based on the percentage of the Contract completed less retainage and/or liquidated damages. D. Unless noted othen~vise, all work described in the specifications and/or shown on the drawings shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01019-2 ~ SECTION 01039 COORDINATION, FIELD ENGINEERING. AND MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Coordination. 2. Field engineering. -3. Progress meetings. 4. Preinstallation meetings. 5. Examination. 6. Preparation. 1.02 COORDINATION CONTRACTOR shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. See Section 01010 - Summary of Work for specific construction sequence. B. CONTRACTOR shall vedfy utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on drawings and shall follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. n finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, CONTRACTOR shall conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction and coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate sections m preparation for substantial completion and for portions of work designated for OWNER's occupancy. After OWNER occupancy of premises, CONTRACTOR shall coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of OWNER's activities. 1.03 FIELD ENGINEERING CONTRACTOR shall locate and protect property stakes, legal survey monuments, benchmarks, and survey control and reference points. CONTRACTOR shall pay for replacement of disturbed property stakes and legal survey monuments by a Registered Section 01039-1 1-382-636/03-04 Land Surveyor acceptable to OWNER and for replacement of benchmarks and survey control and reference points by ENGINEER. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide field engineering services as required to establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. If existing property stakes, not within the limits of the trench, are removed or damaged by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of replacement. Replacement shall be made by a legal survey performed by a licensed Land Surveyor hired by OWNER. Cost for survey shall be deducted from the Contract Price. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of buildings, structures, piping, utilities, and other work executed by CONTRACTOR under the Contract. CONTRACTOR must exemise proper precaution to verify figures before laying out the work, and will be held responsible for any error resulting from its failure to exercise such precaution. E. See Specifications for additional requirements concerning layout of the work. 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings will be held throughout prOgress of the work at intervals agreed to by OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR. Interval will generally be monthly. CONTRACTOR's project manager, jOb superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers shall attend as appropriate to agenda topics fOr each meeting: CONTRACTOR's representatives shall have authOrity to bind CONTRACTOR to decisions at the meetings. At the meetings, CONTRACTOR shall submit typed reports detailing progress of the work, compliance with submitted progress schedules and future construction plans affecting the schedule of the work. D. ENGINEER will prepare and distribute minutes to all attending parties. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification sections, CONTRACTOR shall convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the section. B. CONTRACTOR shall require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section C. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER seven days in advance of meeting date. CONTRACTOR shall prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. CONTRACTOR shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to ENGINEER, participants, and those affected by decisions made. Section 01039-2 ~'~ PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01039-3 SECTION 01045 CUTTING, PATCHING AND ALTERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, patching, and other alterations required to complete the work as specified herein or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to install improperly sequenced work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide penetrations of surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 7. Rehabilitate or renovate existing spaces. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al0 Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition. 1.03 QUALiTY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all cutting, patching, and alterations in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of these specifications. Except as modified by governing codes, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the applicable provision and recommendations of ANSI Al0. 1.04 SUBMI'FI'ALS CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request to OWNER well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects the following: 1. Work of OWNER or any separate contractor· 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. The request shall include: 1. Description of affected work. 2. The necessity for cutting, patching, or alteration. 3. Effect on work of OWNER or any separate contractor, or on the structural or weather-proof integrity of the project. 4. Description of proposed work to include: a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration. b. Trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. Section 01045-1 ~ 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. C. Submit written notice to OWNER desig'nating the date and the time the work will be uncovered or executed. 1.05 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. Ail work under this section shall be coordinated with OWNER's work forces and those of other contractors and shall be accomplished at times acceptable to OWNER. Before starting any work relating to existing utilities (electrical, sewer, water, heat, gas, fire lines, etc.) that will temporarily discontinue or disrupt service to the treatmei~t plant, notify ENGINEER and OWNER 72 hours in advance and obtain OWNER's approval before proceeding with this phase of the work. Temporary facilities, if required, shall be in place prior to disruption of service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW MATERIALS A. For replacement of work removed, CONTRACTOR shall use materials which comply with the pertinent sections of these specifications. B. All new materials for patching and extending work shall match existing products and work. C. CONTRACTOR shall determine type and quality of existing products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of existing as the standard. 2.02 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Materials or items designated to be reinstalled or to become the property of OWNER shall be as specified or as shown on the drawings. B. CONTRACTOR shall remove such items with care under the supervision of the trade responsible for reinstallation. C. OONTRACTOR shall store these materials (off-site if necessary) and protect from damage until they are incorporated into the new work. Items which are not to be reinstalled but are to become the property of OWNER shall be removed by CONTRACTOR with care, cleaned, and stored in a location at the site to be approved by OWNER E. Materials or items damaged in its removal shall be replaced by CONTRACTOR with similar new material at no additional cost to OWNER. F. Where existing equipment or fixtures are indicated to be reused, CONTRACTOR shall repair such equipment and refinish as specified elsewhere. Section 01045-2 1 o382-636/03-04 2.03 UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Materials or items demolished and not designated to become the property of OWNER or not designated to be reinstalled shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site and legally and properly disposed of by CONTRACTOR. B. Materials shall be removed by CONTRACTOR in a manner that will avoid damage to materials or equipment to remain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall inspect existing conditions including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, patching, and other alterations. B. After uncovering the work, CONTRACTOR shall inspect conditions affect!ng installation of new products or performance of new work. CONTRACTOR shall repod unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to ENGINEER in writing. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work 'until unsatisfactory or questionable conditions are resolved. Beginning of cutting, patching, and alterations work means acceptance of existing conditions by CONTRACTOR. 3.02 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary bracing, shoring, needling, and support of the structure during alterations work as necessary to prevent collapse, settling, or deflection and to protect persons and property from injury or damage. B: Temporary supports must adequately carry all existing and imposed load. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary protection of surface finishes, equipment, and adjacent work designated to remain where demolition, removal, and new work is being done, connections are being made, materials are being handled, or equipment is being removed. CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary partitions or barriers to contain all dust, moisture dirt and debris from entering into finished areas or areas where OWNER is operating, stodng, or manufacturing products. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate fire protection in accordance with local Fire Department requirements. CONTRACTOR shall provide waterproofing, weather protection, heat, and other facilities for that portion of the work which may be exposed by cutting and patching, demolition, or other alterations. SeCtion 01045 1 --382-636/03-04 CONTRACTOR shall cut, move, or remove itemS as necessary for access to alterations and renovations w6rk and replace and restOre at completion of work~ H. CONTRACTOR shall prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to the existing structure or its contents directly or indirectly by its crews or those of its subcontractors. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall accomplish all work of cutting, removal, demolition, patching or other alterations using only persons skilled in the appropriate trade. B. CONTRACTOR shall execute the work in a careful and orderly manner, with the least possible disturbance to the public and to the occupants of the building. CONTRACTOR shall execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. D. CONTRACTOR shall execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. E. CONTRACTOR shall fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean and prepare all surfaces to receive new finish or covering to completely remove all dirt, dust grease, oil, paint, loose materials, and soil. CONTRACTOR shall refinish entire surface as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 3.04 : DEMOE T~N, (~'UTTiNG~ AND'IS, EMOVAL -- ' ..... A. Cutting and removal of construction shall be performed by CONTRACTOR so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work. B. CONTRACTOR shall cut out embedded anchorages and attachment items as required to properly provide for patching and repair of the respective finishes. C. CONTRACTOR shall not cut structural work in a manner resulting ~n a reduction of load-carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio. D. CONTRACTOR shall not cut operational elements and safety components in a manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life, or increased maintenance. E. CONTRACTOR shall not cut work exposed to view (exterior or interior) in a manner resulting in noticeable reduction of visual qualities as determined by OWNER. Section 01045-4 Construction that is to remain which is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced as a result of careless cutting or demolition and is unsuitable for use intended shall be removed and replaced at no additional cOst to OWNER. G. CONTRACTOR shall clean demolished areas and remove debriS, waste, and rubbish from the building at the conclusion of each day's work. 3.05 H. CONTRACTOR shall not let piled waste material endanger the strUCture. PATCHING, EXTENDING, AND MATCHING A. Patching work shall conform to the standards of the specifications where applicable and , where not specified, work shall conform to the highest standards of the applicable trade. B. CONTRACTOR shall patch construction to match adjacent work unless nOted otherwise. C. Patching or restoration shall be carded to natural breaks (e.g., corners) wherever possible. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate support to substrate for patching finishes. E. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, CONTRACTOR shall patch floors, walls, and ceiling with finish material to match adjacent surfaces. Transitions: 1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, CONTRACTOR shall make the transition as smooth as possible. 2. Patched work shall match adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of 3 feet. 3. Where masonry, tile, plaster, metal or other finished surface is cut in such a way that a smooth transition is not possible, CONTRACTOR shall terminate the existing surface in a neat fashion along a straight line at a natural line of division and provide trim appropriate to the finished surface. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, CONTRACTOR shall rework floors and ceilings so that horizontal planes are without breaks, steps, or bulkheads, unless shown otherwise. In case of extreme level changes (3 inches or more) review condition with ENGINEER prior to making transition. CONTRACTOR shall restore existing work that is damaged dudng patching operations to a condition equal to its construction at the time of the start of work. 3.06 UNANTICIPATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED Where unanticipated mechanical piping or electrical conduit is exposed during removal of partitions or walls, removal or rerouting shall be accomplished by CONTRACTOR as applicable. 1. Rerouted piping shall be located and shall be connected to maintain all functions in proper operations. 2. Abandoned piping may be left in place where it is buried in floors or walls, providing that it is completely disconnected from its source. 3. There shall be no "dead end" gas, water, sewer, or Vent piping existing in the completed work. Section 01045-5 ~;~ 1-382-636/03-04 Unless otherw'se shown, abandoned P'p'ng, ductwork, conduit, or other mechanical Or electrical items in chases, vertical enclosures, or concealed above ceilings shall be completely removed. B. Removals, capping, or otherwise terminating services which are abandoned shall be accomplished without additional cost to OWNER. C. Relocation of services resulting from unanticipated conflicts of new and existing work in concealed spaces shall be paid for in accordance with the General Conditions. END OF SECTION Section 01045-6 1-382-636 03-04 SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. OSHA Requirements. 2. Permits. 3. Wage Rates. 1.02 OSHA REQUIREMENTS A. All work including site safety, equipment, materials, and fabricated items provided under the Contract shall comply with the provisions of the "Occupational Safety and Health Act". 1.03 PERMITS No permits were obtained by OWNER for this project. CONTRACTOR shall obtain required permits. Where the requirements of any permit are more restrictive than the drawings or the specifications, the permit requirements shall govern. B. A building permit will be required from OWNER. However, OWNER will waive fees associated with the permit. C. Any permits required for dewatering operations shall be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. For dewatering operations, if dewatering wells singly or in aggregate produce 70 or more gallons per minute, CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources, in accordance with Paragraph 281.17(1), Wisconsin Statutes, a permit for dewatering. The Department's private water supply section's address for Well Permits is: Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources, Private Water Supply Section, Box 7921, Madison, Wisconsin 53707. All wells shall be drilled and closed in accordance with DNR requirements for installing and abandoning wells. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 283, Wisconsin Statutes, regulating the discharge of effluent from construction pit trench dewatering. These provisions provide for the removal of suspended solids from dewatedng effluent pdor to the direct discharge to surface waters or wetlands. CONTRACTOR shall apply as necessary to the Department of Natural Resources for a permit to discharge effluent from construction pit or trench dewatering. This discharge may be covered by an existing state general permit for discharging contaminated storm water runoff/or construction pit dewatering. Information about and application forms for this permit(s) may be obtained at the address shown below. Section 01060-1 Northeast Region Department of Natdral Resources 1125 North Military Avenue P.O. Box 10448 Green Bay, WI 54307 (414) 492-5800 1.04 WAGE RATES A. Not less than the prevailing wage rates for this area shall be paid to the workers employed to do the work under this Contract. B. CONTRACTOR si'iall comply with all provisions of Section 66.0903 and Section 103.49 of the Wisconsin Statutes, and Wisconsin Administrative Code Chapter DWD 290. Unless . ' ~' exemPted by St~itu~e, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the follbwing: 1. Subsection 66.0903(10)(a) requires that records be kept of employee's names, trades or occupation, hours worked and wages paid. 2. Subsection 66.0903(8) requires that a copy of the wage rate determination, if issued ' for this project, be posted in at least one conspicuous and easily accessible place at the site of the project. 3. Subsection 66.0903(9)(b) requires that each agent or Subcontractor furnish evidence to CONTRACTOR of compliance with Subsection 66.0903(10). 4. Subsection 66.0903(9)(c) requires that upon completion of the project and prior to final payment, CONTRACTOR must file with the municipality an affidavit stating that it has complied fully with.the provisions and requirements of the wage rate determination and that CONTRACTOR has received evidence of compliance from each of its agents and Subcontractors. A municipality may not authorize final payment until such an affidavit is filed in proper form and order. See attached form. C. See Wage Rate Forms bound at the end of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01060-2 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Reference Standards: a. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics. b. Where materials or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard, it is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed that specifically named code or standard. c. It is als0 CONTRACTOR's responsibility, when so required by the Contract Documents, to deliver to ENGINEER all required proof that the material or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard. 2. Definitions: a. A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including the drawings which must be : recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon, b. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this section to supplement definitions of the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other general contract documents. c. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work. Related Work Described Elsewhere: The specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the drawings and in other sections of these specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards: 1. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to verify the requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that the items procured for use in this work meet or exceed the specified requirements. 2. When required by individual sections of these specifications, CONTRACTOR shall obtain a copy of each pertinent code or standard and maintain the copies at the job site during submittals, planning, and progress of the work until substantial completion of the work is attained. Overlapping or Conflicting Requirements: .1. Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements are specified, and the overlapping of those standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (which is Section 01090-1 generally recognized to be also most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless more detailed language wdtten directly into Contract Documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer all uncertainties to ENGINEER for decision before proceeding: 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Applicable standards of the construction industry are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith. See Article 3.3 of the General Conditions for additional provisions regarding references. ~[a'nd&?d~ re~'&i:e~8 81~:ectly i'n"'(h~& Cbntr~'~t' D6cumehts 0r by gov~hing regulation, have precedence over nonreferenced standards which are recognized in industry for applicability to work. Nonreference standards are hereby defined to have no particular applicability to the work except as a general measurement of whether work complies with standards recognized in the construction industry. Reference standards and codes listed in these specifications may include, but are not necessarily limited to, standards or codes published by the following agencies and organizations: Aluminum Association 818 ConnecticutJ~venue, NW; Washington, DC 20006 2. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association 35 E~st-Wa~ker'D~;iV~; Chicago, ff 60601' 3. AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, NW; Washington, DC 20001 4. ACl American Concrete Institute Box 19150;'Redford station; Detroit, MI 48219 5. Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building, College Park, MD 20740 6. AlEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers 7. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020 8. AlSl American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street NW; Washington, DC 20036 Section 01090-2 1-382-636/0~)4 9. ANSI 10. APA 11. APl 12. ARI 13. ASHRAE 14. ASME 15. ASSE 16. ASTM 17. AWl 18. AWPA 19. AWS 20. AWWA 21. BHMA 22. BIA 23. CRSI 24. EJMA 25. FGMA American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway; New York, NY 10018 American Plywood Association Box 11700; Tacoma, WA 98411 American Petroleum Institute 211 North Ervay, Suite 1700; Dallas, TX 72501 Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute 1815 North Fort Myer Ddve; Arlington, VA 22209 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating; and Air Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE; Atlanta, GA 30329 American Society of MechanicaI Engineers 345 East 47th Street; New York, NY 10017 American Society of Sanitary Engineers P.O. Box 9712; Bay Village, OH 44140 American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street; Philadelphia, PA 19103 Architectural Woodwork' Institute South Walter Reed Drive; Arlington, VA 22206 American Wood-Preserver's Association Old Georgetown Road; Bethesda, MD 20014 American Welding Society LeJune Road; Miami, FL 33135 AmeriCan Waterworks Association West Quincey Avenue; Denver, CO 80235 Builder's Hardware Manufacturers Association East 42nd Street; New York, NY 10017 Brick Institute of America 1750 Old Meadow Road; McLean, VA 22101 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road; Schaumburg; IL 60195 Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue; White Plains, NY 10604 Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison; Topeka, KS 66611 Conditioning Section 01090-3 '~ 26. FM 27. FS 28. FTI 29. GA 30. lES 31. MIL 32. NAAMM 33. NBS 34. NCMA 35. NECA 36. NEMA 37. NFPA 38. NRCA 39. NSF 40. QSHA 41. PCA Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike; Norwood, MA Federal Specification (General Services Admin.) Bldg. 197, Washington Navy Yard; Washington, DC 20407 Facing Tile Institute Box 8880; Canton, OH 44711 Gypsum Association 1603 Ordngton Avenue; Evanston, IL 60201 Illuminating Engineering Society 345 East 47th Street; New York, NY 10017 Military Specifications Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue; Philadelphia, PA 19120 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 National Concrete Masonry Association Box 781; Hemdon, VA 22070 National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue; Washington, DC 20037 National Electrical Manufacturers Association 2101 L Street NW; Washington, DC 20014 National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park; Quincy, MA 02269 National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue; Chicago, IL 60631 National Sanitation Foundation Occupational Safety & Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Pdnting OMce; Washington, DC 20402 Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road; Skokie, IL 60077 Section 01090-4 1-382-636~03-04 42. PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wells Street; Chicago, IL 60606 1.04 1.05 43. SAE Society of Automotive Engineers 44. SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 3812; St. Louis, MO 63122 45. SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center N.; Cleveland, OH 44107 46. SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assoc. 111 East Wacker Drive; Chicago, IL 60601 47. SJI Steel Joist Institute 1703 Parham Road; Richmond, VA 23229 48. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's NatiOnal Association 8224 Old Court House Road; Vienna, VA 23229 49. SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 4400 Fifth Avenue; Pittsburgh, PA 15213 50. TCA Tile Council of America Box 326; Princeton, NJ 08540 51. UBC Uniform Building Code 5360 South Workman Mill Road; Whittier, CA 90601 52. UL SUBMITTALS Underwriters' Laboratories 333 Pfingston Road; Northbrook, IL 60062 For OWNER's records, CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with COmpliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work; DEFINITIONS A. Indicated: 1. The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes, or schedules on the drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents, 2. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation is intended except as specifically noted. Section 01090-5 Bo Approve: 1. Where used in conjunction with ENGINEER's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports, and claims by CONTRACTOR, the meaning of the term "approve" witl be held to the limitation of ENGINEER's responsibilities and duties as specified in paragraph 3.4 of the General Conditions. 2. In no case will "approval" by ENGINEER be interpreted as a release of CONTRACTOR from responsibility to fulfill req ~irements of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR: If anywhere in these Documents, General, Mechanical, Plumbing or Electrical Contractor is mentioned, it shall be considered to mean General Contractor for this Contract. Minimum RequirementS: 1. Indicated. requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality or quantity, as recognized in the industry. 2~ Actual work must comply with (or within specified tolerances) or exceed minimums. 3. CONTRACTOR shall refer uncertaintie§ to ENGINEER before proceeding. Abbreviations: Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents. will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology. PART2-PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART3-EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END QF SECTION Section 01090-6 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL .01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Whenever possible throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog number or by reference to recognized industry standards. 2. To facilitate CONTRACTOR's understanding of the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review or rejection by ENGINEER. 3. The type of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, samples, and other miscellaneous work related submittals. Related work described elsewhere: Additional requirements for submittals are described in other sections of these specifications. Submittals shall conform to Article 6 of the General Conditions. 1.02 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS CONTRACTOR shall completely identify each submittal and resubmittal by showing at least the following information: 1. Name and address of submitter, plus name and telephone number of the individual who may be contacted for further information. 2. Name and location of project and identification number. 3. Drawing number and specifications section number to which the submittal applies. 4. Include the date of each submittal or resubmittal. 1.03 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS Unless otherwise specifically permitted by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals in groups containing all associated items so that information is available for checking each item when it is received. B. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.04 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates of installation to provide required time for reviews, for securing necessary approval, for possible revision and re-submittal and for placing orders and securing delivery. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this project including drawings, diagrams, pedormance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard Section 01300-1 F printed form for general application to a range of similar projects; ShOp drawings shall be submitted for all manufactured or fabricated items. See individual technical sections for special requirements. CONTRACTOR Shall make all shop drawings accurately toscale and sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the work. C. ShOp drawings shall be checked, approVed, and stamped by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the General Conditions before transmittal to ENGINEER for review and approval. D. Complete shop drawings and descriptive data Shall be submitted on all manufactured or fabricated items prior to 25% completion of the work. Except as noted, nine copies of shop drawings and descriptive data shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval. For reinforcing and structural steel shop drawings, only six copies need to be submitted. Three copies of these will be returned to CONTRACTOR if approved. If shop drawings are not approved or if they are stamped "Approved as Noted-Resubmit," two corrected copies will be returned to CONTRACTOR for use in resubmittal. If CONTRACTOR desires more than three approved copies, submitted quantity-shall be increased accordingly. E. When shop drawing sheets have both border dimensions exceeding eleven inches, shop drawings shall be submitted in a reduced size suitable for binding or folded and provided in a jacket suitable for binding in an eleven inch format, Reduced shop drawings shall have sheet dimensions as large as practical to avoid over-reduction, but shall have either a vertical or horizontal border dimension of eleven inches or less. Shop drawings shall be submitted in 3-ring binders or 3-tab report covers. This requirement'does not apply to reinforcing and structural steel shop drawings, or electrical single line schematic diagrams. Shop drawings submitted to ENGINEER will be reviewed and stamped "Approved," "Approved as Noted," "Approved as Noted - Resubmit," or "Not Approved." CONTRACTOR shall resubmit the above number of corrected shop drawings for all shop drawings stamped "Approved as Noted - Resubmit" and "Not Approved" and will continue this process until shop drawings are stamped "Approved" or "Approved as Noted." If drawings are stamped "Approved as Noted-Resubmit," fabrication may proceed in accordance with the marked up shop drawings. Installation shall not proceed until shop drawings have been resubmitted and stamped "Approved" or "Approved as Noted." If shop drawings are stamped "Approved as Noted" or "Approved as Noted - Resubmit" and CONTRACTOR does not agree with revisions or cannot conform with revisions, fabrication shall not proceed and shop drawings shall be resubmitted with explanation of CONTRACTOR's position. H. All shop drawings used for construction site activities shall bear the "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" stamp of ENGINEER. I. Arrangements may be made between CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER to provide additional copies of "Approved" shop drawings for field activity purposes. Shop drawings shall include verification that the item meets applicable codes and standards, such as NFPA 30, ASTM, OSHA, and others. Section 01300-2 1.06 COLORS AND PATTERNS Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product CONTRACTOR shall submit accurate color charts and pattem charts to ENGINEER for OWNER's review and selection. Unless all available colors and patterns have identical wearing capabilities, and are identically suited for the installation, CONTRACTOR shall completely describe the relative capabilities of each. 1.07 SAMPLESAND FIELD MOCK-UPS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide samples and field mock-ups where noted or specified. B. Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the work will be judged. C. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, and full range of color, texture, and pattern. Samples shall have labels firmly attached, bearing the following information: 1. Nam~. of project. 2. Description of product and finish. 3. Name of CONTRACTOR. 4. Trade name and number of product. 5. Standards met by the product. E. Approval of samples must be obtained prior to proceeding with any work affected by material requiring sample approval. F. Samples, unless otherwise noted, become the proper~ of OWNER. G. In situations specifically approved by ENGINEER, the retained sample may be used in the construction as one of the installed items. Field mock-ups: 1 CONTRACTOR shall erect field mock-ups at the project site in a location acceptable to ENGINEER and OWNER. 2. When accepted by ENGINEER, the mock-up will become the basis for comparison of the actual work. 3. Remove mock-up at conclusion of the work if it was not incorporated into the work. 1.08 PRODUCT DATA A. CONTRACTOR shall provide product data as required to supplement shop drawings. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by CONTRACTOR to illustrate a material, product, or system for some portion of the work. C. CONTRACTOR shall collect required product data into one submittal for each unit of work or system. Section 01300-3 CONTRACTOR shall include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for_ application and use, compliance with standards, performance characteristics, wiring and piping diagrams and controls, component parts, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and other special coordination requirements. E. CONTRACTOR shall mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, models, options, and other data. F. CONTRACTOR shall supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to the work. 1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by ENGINEER. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Itemize in a cover letter any changes which have been made other than those requested by ENGINEER. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be stored, commissioned, operated, applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer, unless specified to the contrary. Wherever specifications call for work to be performed, or materials to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's pdnted instructions or directions, CONTRACTOR shall furnish copies as required for shop drawings of those instructions or directions to ENGINEER before installing the material or performing the work. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Prior to 50% completion of the Contract, CONTRACTOR shall furnish to ENGINEER four complete copies of a maintenance manUal for all equipment fumished. The manuals shall include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance and operation for each item of mechanical and electrical equipment. Manuals shall contain: operation instructions, lubrication schedules, types and quantities, preventative maintenance program, spare parts list, parts lists, I.D. No. and exploded views, assembly instructions, parts supplier location, trouble shooting and startup procedures and, where applicable, test data and curves. All sheets shall have reduced dimensions as described for shop drawings, and shall be furnished in 3-ring binders or 3-tab report covers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE Section 01300-4 1.382.636/03.04 PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01300,5 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Quality assurance - control of installatio~ 2. Tolerances 3. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. D. CONTRACTOR shall comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. CONTRACTOR shall secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. 1.03 TOLERANCES A. CONTRACTOR shall monitor tolerance control of installed products to produce acceptable work and shall not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding. C. CONTRACTOR shall adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. Section 01400-1 1-382-636/'0304 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS When specified in individual specification sections or when requested by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, and quality of workmanship. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit qualifications of observer to ENGINEER 30 days in advance of required observations. CONTRACTOR shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. CONTRACTOR Shall submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to ENGINEER for information. PART2-PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART3-EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01400-2 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Temporary utilities. 2. Temporary stairs and access. 3. Temporary support facilities. 4. Construction sign. 5. Removal of temporary facilities. B. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for and provide temporary facilities as specified herein and as required for proper and expeditious prosecution of the work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs, except as otherwise specified, until final acceptance of the work unless OWNER makes arrangements for use of completed portions of the work after substantial completion in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. 1.02 D. CONTRACTOR shall make all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to OWNER and local authorities having appropriate jurisdiction. 1. Furnish all necessary labor and materials. 2. Make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such authorities and OWNER. 3. Maintain such connections. 4. Remove temporary installation and connection when no longer required. 5. Restore services and sources of supply to proper operating conditions. TEMPORARY UTILITIES Temporary Toilets: CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain sanitary temporary chemical toilets located where approved by OWNER and in sufficient number required for the work force employed by CONTRACTOR. Temporary Electrical Services: 1. OWNER shall make temporary service available to CONTRACTOR from four locations in the existing facilities for construction occurring in existing facilities: The influent pump motor room, the Maintenance Building, and Electrical Control Buildings A and B. The service at each location shall be a maximum of 200 amperes, 3 phase, 4 wire, 120/208 volts or 277/480 volts. CONTRACTOR shall submit for OWNER approval the details of the service to be provided and OWNER shall identify to CONTRACTOR the exact location of the service. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, tools, gear, devices and accessories, required to complete temporary service, in accordance with OSHA Requirements for Construction Projects. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for not overloading OWNER's electrical power system at any of the four locations. Temporary power service to construction trailer, storage buildings, and other facilities brought on site by CONTRACTOR shall be provided through separate service from utility, not from OWNER's facilities. Installation of the temporary power and lighting Section 01500-1 system is to begin upon notification to proceed and shall be installed and routed in a manner so as not to interfere with construction of the project. All safety equipment required for temporary electrical facilities shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall remove all temporary services when Project is complete. 2. The temporary light and power system shall include temporary service poles, metering facilities, driven ground, fused main disconnect switch, panelboards, branch circuits, outlets, and lamps and the maintenance thereof. 3. Construction areas, aisles, stairs, and ramps shall be illuminated to 5 fc. Construction shops, storerooms, mechanical and electrical rooms shall be illuminated to 10 fc. Offices illuminated to 30 fc. 4. Temporary lights shall be equipped with heavy-duty electric cords and lamp guards. They must not be suspended by the power supply cord unless it is designed for this use, 5. Provide one general purpose, 20 ampere, 120 volt, single phase, grounding type receptacle outlet for every 1,000 feet of floor space and tank area. The maximum length of a 20 ampere, 120 volt lighting or power circuit shall not be greater than 200 feet from panelboard to farthest outlet. All single phase receptacle.outlet circuits shall have approved ground-fault circuit interrupter protection. 6. All utility charges for installation of the temporary services shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. All metedng installation charges and all energy charges for electric current used for temporary lighting and power are to be paid by CONTRACTOR. 7. No permanent electrical equipment or wiring shall be used without express wdtten permission of OWNER. Such approval, if given, shall not affect guarantee period. If OWNER authorizes use of permanent service facilities, CONTRACTOR shall pay all metedng costs until acceptance or occupancy (whichever occurs first) of building by OWNER. Weather Protection and Temporary Heat: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide weather protection to protect the work from injury due to freezing, rain, snow and other inclement weather. 2. Within buildings, CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary heat, without cost to OWNER from the time the buildings or portions thereof are enclosed until the project is accepted or occupied by OWNER, whichever occurs first. The building work is to be heated during construction so a minimum temperature of 50°F is maintained at all times: The temporary heating equipment shall be of a type approved by ENGINEER. 3. No permanent heating equipment shall be used on a temporary basis without express wdtten permission 9y OWNER. Such approval, if given, shall not affect the guarantee period. If OWNER authorizes use of permanent heating equipment, CONTRACTOR shall pay all related energy costs until acceptance or occupancy (whichever occurs first) of the building by OWNER. Temporary Telephone Service: CONTRACTOR shall provide, without extra cost to OWNER, telephone services for phones and facsimile machines specified in Section 01590 - Field Offices and Sheds for the duration of the work at the site. Also provide service as required for CONTRACTOR's use. Party making toll cells shall pay for same. Temporary Water: CONTRACTOR shall supply its own water during construction. CONTRACTOR shall also provide its own piping, valves and appurtenances for its requirements. Connection to the existing water system shall be coordinated with OWNER and shall meet all code rec~ uirements including disinfection and backflow prevention. Section 01500-2 1-382~36/03-04 Temporary Fire Protection: CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor(s) who maintain or provide an enclosed shed or trailer shall provide and maintain in operating order iq each shed or trailer a mimmum of one fire extinguisher. More extinguishers shall be provided as necessary. Fire extinguishers shall be minimum dry chemical, nonfreezing type, UL rating 2A-30BC, with 10 pound capacity for Class A, B and C fires. 1.03 TEMPORARY STAIRS AND ACCESS CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, runways, chutes, and so on. as required for proper execution of the work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing its own scaffolds, hoists, etc. All such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet all requirements of OSHA, the labor laws and other applicable State and local laws. Provide stairs with handrails. As soon as possible and where applicable, permanent stairs shall be installed. C. As soon as permanent stairs are created, provide temporary protective treads, handrails, and shaft protection. D. Provide barricades at hazardous locations, complete with signs, temporary general lighting warning lights and similar devices as required. 1.04 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES CONTRACTOR shall provide whatever facilities and services which may be needed to propedy support pdmary construction process and meet compliance requirements and governing regulations. B. CONTRACTOR shall not use permanent facilities except as otherwise indicated, unless authorized by OWNER. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION SIGN A. Furnish and erect a construction sign to be maintained and kept in place until completion of the Contract. The sign shall be minimum 4-feet high by 8-feet wide, constructed by a professional sign painter, and shall show the name of the project, OWNER, all prime contractors and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will furnish a sketch showing the printing and colors of paint required. General sign layout shall be as shown on Drawing 01-975-158A attached at the end of these specifications. 1.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction as soon as practicable but no later than just prior to final completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities and restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original, condition. Section 01500-3 1-382-636/034)4 C. Minor temporary facilities which interfere with OWNER's operations shall be removed at the end of each work period. PART2-PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01500-4 SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Dust control. 2. Water, erosion and sediment control. 3. Noise control. 4. Traffic control. 5. Site security. 6. Daily cleanup. 7. Pollution control. PART 2 -PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUST CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide partitions, enclosures, etc., within buildings as necessary to confine dust and protect adjacent areas. 3.02 WATER, EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall grade site to drain and shall maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. CONTRACTOR shall protect site from puddling or running water. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide erosion control measures as necessary to control discharge of sediment laden water to surface waters and wetlands. D. Erosion control measures shall comply with the following document: Best Management Practices Handbook of the State of Wisconsin Except as provided for in the document, overland discharge of water from dewatering operations shall not be allowed4 Depending on water quality, such water shall either be piped directly to the surface water or shall be Section 01560-1 directed to sedimentation basins or other such structures or features prior to discharge to surface waters so as not to cause damage to existing ground and improvements, erosion, or deposition in the discharge area. CONTRACTOR shall use jute or synthetic netting, silt fences, straw bales, dikes, channels, and other applicable measures to prevent erosion of soils disturbed by its construction operation. Restoration of the site shall proceed concurrently with the construction operation. See drawings and specifications for erosion control measures in addition to that which may be required above. 3.03 NOISE CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. 3.04 TRAFFIC CONTROL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all signs, barricades, flagmen and other traffic control devices in the construction zone. Alt traffic control measures shall meet the requirements of Part VI of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices of the State of Wisconsin. B. Do not close or obstruct roadways without approval of OWNER. C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to roadways. 3.05 SITE SECURITY Ao CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility of safeguarding the construction site perimeter to prevent unauthorized entry to the site throughout the duration of the project. CONTRACTOR shall at all times provide such permanent and temporary fencing or barricades or other measures as may be necessary to restdct unauthorized entry to its construction area including construction in public rights-of-way or easements. Site secudty measures shall include safeguards against attractive nuisance hazards as a result of construction activity. CONTRACTOR shall at all times be responsible for the secudty of work including materials and equipment. OWNER will not take any responsibility for missing or damaged equipment, tools, or personal belongings. CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility of safeguarding its work and work area throughout the duration of the project. 3.06 DAILY CLEANUP A. CONTRACTOR shall clean uP its work and its waste and remove all rubbish on a daily basis. Section 01560-2 CONTRACTOR shall clean uP publiC streets and highways and remove any dir~, mud or other materials due to project traffic on daily basis and shall comply with all local and state ordinances and permit requirements, END OF SECTION Section 01560-3 SECTION 01590 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Temporary field offices and sheds. 2. Maintenance and cleaning. 3. Removal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS A. Materials, equipment and furnishings shall be serviceable, new or used, and adequate for required purpose. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Portable or mobile buildings, and other construction related buildings shall be constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide structurally sound, secure, weathertight enclosures for office and storage spaces. C. Temperature transmission resistance of floors, walls, and ceilings shall be compatible with occupancy and storage requirements. D. Exterior materials shall be weather resistant. E. Interior materials in offices shall consist of sheet type materials for walls an~ ceilings, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and bases. F. Lighting for offices shall be 50-foot candles minimum at desk top height, with exterior lighting at entrance doors. G. Provide appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office and each storage area. H. Interior materials in storage sheds shall be as required to provide specified conditions for storage of products. 2.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. Heating, cooling, and ventilating for offices shall consist of automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions; 70°F heating and 78°F cooling. Section 01590-1 2.04 Heating and ventilation for storage spaces shall be as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents and to provide adequate lighting for maintenance and observation of products. CONTRACTOR OFFICE AND FACILITIES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities tO m~et CONTRACTOR's needs and to provide space for project meetings. B. Provide telephone as required for CONTRACTOR's needs. Provide furnishings in meeting area. As a minimum, provide conference table and chairs to seat at least eight persons; racks and files for Contract Documents, submittals, and project record documents. 2.05 ENGINEER OFFICE A. CONTRACTOR need not supply separate space for ENGINEER's office. ENGINEER will occupy space provided by OWNER. 2.06 STORAGE AREAS AND SHEDS Provide storage areas and sheds of size to meet storage requirements for products of individual sections, allowing for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for observation of products to meet requirements of Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CONTRACTOR shall fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. CONTRACTOR shall install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed or as agreed upon by ENGINEER. B. Provide two hard surfaced parking spaces for use by ENGINEER, connected to office by hard surfaced walk. 3.03 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING A. CONTRACTOR shall provide weekly janitorial services for offices and periodic cleaning and maintenance for office and storage areas. B. CONTRACTOR shall maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow. Section 01590-2 1-382-636/03-04 3.04 REMOVAL A. Upon final acceptance, completion of work, CONTRACTOR shall remove field offices, foundations, utility services, and debris, and shall restore areas. END OF SECTION SectiOn 01590,3 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the delivery, handling, storage and protection of all material and equipment required to complete the work as specified herein. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Specific requirements for the handling and storage of material and equipment are described in other sections of these specifications. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. B. CONTRACTOR shall not use materials and equipment removed from existing construction, except as specifically required, or allowed by the Contract Documents. When any construction deviations I'rom the drawings and/or specifications necessary to accommodate equipment supplied by CONTRACTOR, result in additional costs to CONTRACTOR or other contractors such additional costs shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by ENGINEER. D. Each major component of equipment shall bear a nameplate giving the name and address of the manufacturer and the catalogue number or designation. E. OR EQUAL INFORMATION. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly containerized, packaged, boxed, and protected to prevent damage during transportation and handling. B. CONTRACTOR shall not overload any portion of the structure in the transporting or storage of materials. C. CONTRACTOR shall not damage other construction by careless transportation, handling, spillage, staining or ~mpact of materials. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products, including those provided by OWNER, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. E. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. Section 01600-1 t -382-636103-04 F. CONTRACTOR shall handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at designated lift points. 1.04 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING A. CONTRACTOR shall arrange deliveries of ~roducts in accordance with construction progress schedules, allowing time for observation prior to installation. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site; work of other contractors or OWNER; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment and OWNER's use of premises. C. CONTRACTOR shall deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. D. CONTRACTOR shall cleady mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly. Immediately on delivery, CONTRACTOR shall inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Accessories, and installation hardware are correct. 4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible. Products are protected and undamaged. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. CONTRACTOR shall store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with all seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Available storage space at the job site is limited. Any additional off-site space required shall be arranged by CONTRACTOR. 3. CONTRACTOR shall allocate the available storage areas and coordinate their use by the trades on the job. 4. CONTRACTOR shall arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for observation. B. In enclosed storage, CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Provide suitable temporary weather tight storage facilities as may be required for materials that will be damaged by storage in the open. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in manufacturer's instructions. 3. Provide ventilation for sensitive products as required by manufacturer's instructions. 4. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items. 5. Store solid materials such as insulation, tile, mechanical and electrical equipment, fittings, and fixtures under shelter, in original packages, away from dampness and other hazards. 6. Store liquid materials away from fire or intense heat and protect from freezing. Section 0! 600-2 At extedor storage, CONTRACTOR shalt: 1. Store unit materials such as concrete block, bdck, steel, pipe, conduit, door frames. and lumber off ground~ ou[ Of reach of dirt, water, mud and splashing. 2. Store tools or equipment that carry dirt outside. 3. Store large equipment so as not to damage site or present a fire hazard. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet material and provide ventilation to avoid condensation 5. Completely cover and protect any equipment or material which is prime coated or finish painted with secured plastic or cloth tarps. Store out of reach of dirt, water, mud and splashing. 6. Store loose (3ranular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid sheet ~mate¢i~ls, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 7. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 8. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 9. Cover aggregates such as sand and gravel in cold wet weather. 10. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials at completion of work and return site to original or indicated condition. 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. CONTRACTOR shall verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements, and verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually. CONTRACTOR shall verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected and that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall perform scheduled maintenance of equipment in storage as recommended by the manufacturer. A record of the maintenance shall be kept and turned over to ENGINEER when the equipment is installed. .07 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by the respective manufacturers, unless otherwise specified. B. After installation, CONTRACTOR shall protect all materials and equipment against weather, dust, moisture, and mechanical damage. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damages that occur in connection with the care and protection of all materials and equipment until completion and final acceptance of the work by OWNER. Damaged material and equipment shall be immediately removed from the site. Section 01600-3 1-382-636/03-04 1.08 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASE Ao Cast-in-place concrete equipment bases shall be provided for ail new and relocated equipment including electrical control panels, generators, remote mounted radiators, motor control centers, etc. Concrete equipment bases shall be provided by CONTRACTOR except where specifically noted to be provided by others. Bases shall be 3-1/2 inch minimum height and shall be a minimum of 3 inches larger than equipment being supported. Grouting of equipment bases shall be as recommended by equipment manufacturer. B. Concrete and grout shall comply with Section 03300 - CaSt-In'Place Concrete. Provide all anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates to be cast in concrete or used to form concrete for support of equipment. See DivisiOn 11 - Equipment for anchor bolts to be provided with equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01600-4 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Starting equipment and systems. 2. Demonstration and instructions. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. CONTRACTOR shall perform the work described in the following subsections. 1.02 STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start up of various equipment and systems. B. Notif7 ENGINEER and OWNER a minimum of seven days prior to start up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, ddve rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage. D. Vedfy that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Vedfy widng and support components for equipment are complete and tested F. Execute start ,,up under supervision of applicable manufa,c!urer's representative and CONTRACTOR ~ personnel in accordance with manufacturers instructions. G. Require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation pdor to start up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering checkout, testing, ~nspections, and start up and shall identify any deficiencies noted. Report shall be submitted to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting all deficiencies noted in report. I. Provide lubricants as recommended by manufacturer appropriate for start up conditions. 1.03 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to OWNER's personnel. B. For all mechanical equipment or systems, demonstrate project equipment and instruct in a classroom environment at a location acceptable to the OWNER and instructed by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the project. Section 01650-1 1-382-636/03-04 C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for noncurrent season at start of noncurrent season. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with OWNER's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Demonstrate start up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent dudng instruction. Supervision and Start Up: Installation of all equipment furnished under this contract shall be supervised as required by a qualified representative of equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer and the plant staff shall be trained to the satisfaction of OWNER by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. OWNER may videotape training presentations given by manufacturer's representatives. Final payment for vadous items of equipment will not be made by OWNER until the equipment is operating to OWNER's satisfaction. Where items of equipment are placed into service at different times or sequence, manufacturer's services for start up, field testing, and supervision shall be provided for each time or sequence. Training shall be provided prior to or at the time the first similar item of equipment is placed in service. 1.04 START UP AND TESTING Pdor to acceptance of any portion of the work, start up and testing of all equipment and testing of all materials furnished on the project by CONTRACTOR shall have been conducted in the presence of representatives of CONTRACTOR, OWNER and ENGINEER and also manufacturer if requested by OWNER or ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall provide whatever temporary installations and conditions are necessary in order to perform start up and testing operations on all equipment and materials furnished under the Contract. Temporary connections and equipment necessary during start up and testing operations shall include, but not be limited to, temporary piping and electrical equipment and devices, temporary connection from various parts of the systems and any other labor, materials, fuel, devices or items that may be required for start up and testing operations. C. All temporary installations and conditions shall be removed by CONTRACTOR upon completion of start up and testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE Section 01650-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01650-3 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Project record documents. 5. Warranties. 6. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals to ENGINEER that are required by governing or other authorities. CONTRACTOR shall comply with General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and complete the following before requesting ENGINEER's observation of the work, or designated portion thereof, for substantial completion. 1. Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, inspection certificates, and similar required documentation for spedfic units of work, enabling OWNER's unrestricted occupancy and use. 2. Submit record documentation, maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts, keys, and similar operational items. 3. Submit consent of surety (if surety required in Contract). 4. Revise and submit evidences of Completed Operations Liability Insurance, complying with insurance requirements. 5. Complete final cleaning, touch-up work of marred surfaces, and remove temporary fadlities and tools. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to completely clean up the inside and outside of all buildings and the construction site at the completion of the work. CONTRACTOR shall clean areas of the building in which painting and finishing work is to be performed just prior to the start of this work, and maintain these areas in satisfactory condition for painting and finishing. This cleaning includes: 1. Removal of trash and rubbish from these areas. 2. Broom cleaning of floors. 3. Removal of any plaster, mortar, dust, and other extraneous materials from finish surfaces, including but not limited to exposed structural steel, miscellaneous metal, masonry, concrete, mechanical equipment, piping, and electrical equipment. Section 01700.1 In addition to the cleaning specified above and the more specific cleaning that may be required ~n various technical sections of the specifications, CONTRACTOR shall prepare the project for occupancy by a thorough cleaning throughout, which shall include the following: 1. Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. 2. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. 3. Replace filters of operating equipment. 4. Clean debds from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 5. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 6. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.04 ADJUSTING A. CONTRACTOR shall adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CONTRACTOR shall maintain on site, one set of the following record documents to record actual revisions to the work: I Drawings. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the Contract. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. CONTRACTOR shall ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by OWNER. C. CONTRACTOR shall store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. CONTRACTOR shall record information concurrent with construction progress. Specifications: CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by addenda and modifications. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 4. Field Changes of dimension and detail. section 01700-2 1 *382*636/03-04 Details not on original Contract drawings. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. CONTRACTOR shall Provide warranties beyond project one year warranty as required by technical sections and as follows. Submit warranty information as follows: 1. Provide notarized copies. 2. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, and provide Table of Contents and assemble in three dng binder with durable cover. 3. Submit with request for certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. For items of work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty pedod. 1.07 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION Section 01700-3 F WAGE RATES Jim Doyle Governor Roberta Gassman Secretary Micabil Diaz-Martinez, Esq, Division Administrator EQUAL RIGHTS DIVISION 201 East Washington Avenue, Room A300 P.O. Box 8928 Madison, WI 53708 Telephone: (808) 266-6860 Fax: (608) 267-4592 3-FY': (608) 264-8752 State of Wisconsin http://www.dwd.state.wi,us/ Department of Workforce Development DEPARTMENTAL ORDER David Pa~k, Director of Public Works City of Oshkosh 215 Church Street Oshkosh, WI54903 RE: Oshkosh WWTP Standby power and SCADA Upgrade Oshkosh, Winnebago County, Wt Determination No. 200301269 Project No. 03-04 The application which ~ou filed or was filed on your behalf, by the person copied below, for a prevailing wage rate determination applicable to the above-referenced project has been received. A survey was conducted to determine the prevailing wage rate for the trade(s) or occupation(s) needed to complete the project. The findings of the survey are set forth in the enclosed determination. If you believe that the wage rate for any trade or occupation does not accurately reflect the prevailing wage rate in the city, villaCe or town in which the project is located, you have the right to request the department to conduct an administrative review regarding such wage rate. Your request must be made, in wdting, within 30 days from the date indicated below and at least 10 days before the date a construction contract(s) is to be awarded or negotiated. Your request must also include wage rate information on at least three (3) similar projects located in the city, village or town where the proposed project is located on which some work was performed by the contested trade(s) or occupation(s) during the current survey period and which was previously considered by the department in issuing the enclosed determination. See s. DWD 290.10 of the Wisconsin Administrative Code and either s. 66.0903 (3)(br) or s. 103.49 (3)(c), Stats. for a complete explanation of the administrative review process. Now, therefore, it is hereby ORDERED that the prevailing wage rates set forth in the enclosed determination shall only be applicable to the above referenced project. This ORDER shall be deemed a FINAL ORDER of this department unless a timely request for an administrative review is filed with the department or a construction contract(s) is not awarded or negotiated before the determination's expiration date. DATED 8/07/2003 Enclosures cc: Thomas L. Foltz, Project Engineer Strand Associates 910 West Wingra Drive Madison, WI 53715 Audc Gold, Investigator Labor Standards Bureau Construction Wage Standards Section (608) 266-3148 WR-1 r- PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION Issued by the State of Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development Pursuant to s. 66.0903, Stats. Issued On: 8/07/2003 DETERMINATION NUMBER: 200301269 · EXPIRATION'DATE: Prime Contracts MUST Be Awarded Or Negotiated On Or Before 2/02/2004. If NOT, You MUST Reapply. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: Oshkosh WWTP Standby Power and SCADA Upgrade PROJECT NO: 03-04 LOCATION OF PROJECT: Oshkosh, Winnebago County, WI CONTRACTING AGENCY: City of Oshkosh CLASSIFICATION: ' Contractors are required to call the Department of Workfome Development if there are any questions reqarding the proper trade or classification to be used for any worker on a public works pmiect. OVERTIME: Time and one-half must be paid for all hours worked over 10 hours per day and 40 hours per calendar week and for all hours worked o0 Saturday, Sunday and the following six (6) holidays: January 1; the last Monday in May; July 4; the 1st Monday in September; the 4th Thursday in November; December 25; the day before if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls orJ a Saturday; the day following if January 1, July 4 or December 25 falls on a Sunday. FUTURE INCREASE: If indicated for a specific trade or occupation, the full amount of such increase MUST be added to the "TOTAL" indicated for such trade or occupation on the date(s) such increase(s) becomes effective. PREMIUM PAY: If indicated for a specific trade or occupation, the full amount of such pay MUST be added to the "HOURLY BASIC RATE OF PAY" indicated for such trade or occupation, whenever such pay is applicable. SUB JOURNEY: Wage rates may be available for some of the classifications indicated below with the exception of laborers, truck drivers and heavy equipment operators. Any employer that desires to use any subjourney classification on this project MUST request the applicable wage rate from this department PRIOR to the date such classification is used on this project. Form ERD-10880 is available for this purpose. BUILDING OR HEAVY CONSTRUCTION r- Includes sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for the purpose of housing persons, employees, machinery, equipment or supplies and non-sheltered work such as canals, dams, dikes, reservoirs, storage tanks, etc. A sheltered enclosure need not be "habitable" in order to be considered a building. The installation of machinery and/or equipment, both above and below grade level, does not change a project's character as a building. On-site grading, utility work and landscaping are included within this definition. Residential buildings of four (4) stories or less, agricultural buildings, parking lots and driveways are NOT included within this definition. Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On Al/HOurs Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS TOTAL Acoustic Ceiling Tile Installer 23.19 8.88 32.07 Boilermaker 26.25 12.95 39.20 Future Increase(s): Add $1.95 on 7/1/03 Bricklayer, BIocklayer or Stonemason 24.18 9.36 33.54 Future increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/2/03 Add $1 50 on 6/7/04 Cabinet Installer .......................................................................................................................... ~_3.:.~.2.... 0.83 13.95 Carpenter 23.19 ................. ~;~' .............. '~:~'" Future Increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/1/03; Add $1.40 on 5/30/04; Add $1.35 on 5/29/05; Add $1.35 on 5/28/06; Add $1.35 on 5/27/07 Curlier Laver or Soft Floor Coverer .................................................. ................................................................................................................ 23.19 8.88 32.07 WR-2 Determination No. 200301269 Page2 r- Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On Al__! Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS ' TOTAE ................. $ $ $ Future Increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/1/03; Add $1 40 on 5/30/04 Cement Finisher 24.18 9.30 33.48 Future Increase(_s}: Add $1.45 on 6/2/03 Add $1.50 on 6/7/04 D. _r)/y(__all TaBer or Finisher 21.94 3 48 25 40 Electrician 24.70 10 61 35 31 Elevator C o n.s_ .t~_ ~_t 9__r' ..................................................... .2..6.:.9.8. ...................................................... . . 8.68 35 66 Fence Erector 17.21 4 01 21 22 Fire .S.~rinkler Fitter 28 04 8 60 36 64 Glazier 18.15 . 3.21 21 36 Heat or FrOst Insulator . . 23.65 10.21 33 86 insulator (Batt or Blown) 22.40 11 50 33 90 Ironworker . .. 24.11 1258 3669 Lather .... ......................................... 13.~5- ..................................................... 0.00 1395 Line Constructor (Electrical.) 27.18 9 51 36 69 Marble Finisher. ............................... ~.2_:~ ..................................................... 8.25 30 45 Marble Mason ............................................ _2._7_:5_8. ..................................................... .... 7.50 35 08 Metal Buiidin9 Erector 17 07 1 71 18 78 Millwright 24.79 8.88 33.67 Future Increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/1/03; Add $1.40 on 5/30/04; Add $1.35 on 5/29/05; Add $1.35 on 5/28/06; Add $1.35 on 5/27/07 Overhead Door Installer _ . 17.65 ................................................. .... 3.37 21 02 Painter . 18 63 2 99 21 62 Pavement Marking O,gerator 18 00 0 00 18 00 Piledriver 23.11 ..................................................................................... .7...9..9. .............. .3.!..!.0._ Pij~eline Fuser or Welder {Gas or Utili~) 22 25 2 69 24 94 Plasterer 24.18 9.30 33.48 Future Increase(_s~: Add $1.45 on 6/2/03 Add $1.50 on 6/7/04 Plumber. .. .................................................................................................... 26.65 8.99 35 64 Refrigeration Mechanic 26 16 8 25 34 41 .R_.o..o.(?.(..o?._.W_ a_~r ~r_o..o._f~ ..................................................................................... ~ _8.. ~ .................... ~ _5-_2_ .............. .2.!. ,6..! .... Sheet Metal Worker 24.14 11 39 35 53 Steamfitter ........................................... .26.~ ~ ..................................................... . _ . 8.25 34.44 Teledata Technici~P-°-L!.n-.s-t.~!~r.- ................ !~:~ ..................................................... 5.01 24 69 Temperature Control Installer 26 78 7 76 34 54 TerraZZo Finist~£ ............................................................................................ 23.68 8 36 32 04 Terrazzo_ _Me_~_h.~.(~).c. ............................................................................................ 23.68 8 36 32 04 Tile Finisher ........................................................................................................... 16.70 4 10 20 80 Tile Setter 24.18 9.30 33.48 ..... ~.u..ty re_ I.n crea s e ( .s): _,~ .d_._$_~l.:~:~..o..n. _6/.2_/~ 3_**.A...d..d. $_ ] :~. 9~. ~(~ ................................................................................... Tuck[~ointer Caulker or Cleaner 24 00 8 36 32 36 .q .q .d..e.~.a..t.e. r_ ~ !¥.~ .(.E..x.c.~.~! ._o_n...a. r~ a. LL..a..k..e.¢. ....................................................... .2.2.~.5- .................... .9.._4.~ ............... ..S2..0.~... ..W.9~.L..D. dL~.r_ 9.~..P.?..p_.Ln~!! .e?. ............................................................................. _2. q..5-~. .................... .0.._0.~. .............. .20..S.~_.. Siding} tnstaTler 15 50 5 45 20 95 .171.~.a_¥,y.~.g.u.]prg~E,!.(~[~e_Egtor - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCT ON ONLY 18 00 0.75 18.75 ~: . WR-3 De{ermination No. 200301269 Pag¢3 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On Al! Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS T__OTAL. ........ ~.._:......__~ ........................... :_: ................................ $ $ $ Light Eguip_ment Operator-ELECTRICAL L NE CONSTRUCTION ~l'~ ......... -~i~ .................... .................. .................... ........... .............................. .................... ............... .... TRUCK DRIVERS S in gi;'~l; -(~[~'¥~; -'~]-~- .................................................... 15.05 6.50 ........ '~-i~'~ .... Three or More Axle ........................................................................................................ ......................................................... 10.00 0 00 10 00 Arliculated, Euclid or DumBtor .................... '~.~ .................... (~i(~ ............... i~-~'" Pavement Markin9 Vehicle 18.46 7.55 26.01 Truck Mechanic ........................................ 1500 000 1500 LABORERS General Laborer ......................................................................................................... 18.87 7.10 25.97 Future Increase(s): Add $1.20 on 6/2/03; Add $1.17 on 5/31/04 Asbestos Abatement Worker ................................................................................ 17.29 5.46 22 75 Landsca er -': ................................................................................................ ............. ~! ...... 13 20 I 66 14 Gas or Utili~ Pip__eline Laborer (Other Than seWer and Water) 18.02 ...... 7.,~' ........... Fiber O tic Laborer Outside Other Than Concrete Encased ............ P- ................. _( ............................................................. ) ............. .1..9_ :_0..3. 2.07 .............. .~.!:.!.0_... Railroad Track Laborer ............................................. 18 48 6 29 24 77 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS SITE PREPARATION, UTILITY AND LANDSCAPING WORK ONLY Gradall (Cmz-Aire Type); Mechanic or Welder; Bulldozer or Endloader; Grader or Motor Patrol; Scraper; Power Subgrader; Asphalt Milling Machine; Boring Machine (Horizontal, Vedical or Directional); Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine; Trencher; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Tug or Launch (not performing work on the Great Lakes) Future Increase(s): Add $1.50 on 6/1/03; Add $1.50 on 6/6/04 Farm ~-~ Indu;i;ial T~ Tra~;-t-~-~; ~7;;;er; ~;'[~p;;;;;-'i-~;El~;;~;ii;'~t'~; ............. ~;~ .................. i'i';~- .............. '~'~-.~ '- Broom or Sweeper; Environmental Burner Future Increase(s): Add $1.50 on 6/1/03; Add $1.50 on 6/6/04 Crasher, Screening (~;'~ash ~lant; Xi; Comp;';sso¢'i~0~'6'~'~-;-~'(~;;;iZ ........... ~;~' i i';¢(~' .............. ';~ Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Refrigeration Plant or Freeze Machine; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Skid Rig; Stump Chipper; Mulcher; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor Future Increase(s): Add $1 50 on 6/1/03 Add $1 50 on 6/6/04 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS EXCLUDING SITE PREPARATION, UTILITY, PAVING AND LANDSCAPING WORK Crane, Tower Crane or ~errick, ~,;ith o;"~ithoui'Xttac~'r~;-~i;i'~/~i;~'g-~i~ti~'""~ ~:~ ............ Capacity of Over 100 Tons; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measur n9 176 Feet or Over WR-4 Determination No. 200301269 Page'4 Fringe Benefits Must Be paid On Alii Hours WOrked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS TOTAL ........................................... $ $ $ Future Increase(.s~: Add $1.50 on 6/1/03 Add $1.50 on 6/6/04 . Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Eifting 26.27 11.70 37.97 Capacity of 100 Tons or Under; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Feet or Under; Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Traveling Crane (Bridge Type); Caisson Rig; Pile Driver; Dredge (Not Performing Work on the Great Lakes) . Future Increase(¢~): Add $1.50 on 6/1/03; Add $1.50 on 6/6/04 Crane (Go-Devil Type) or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or 25.17 10.40 35.57 Under); Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 Lbs.; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Mechanic or Welder; Bulldozer or EnSIoader; Grader or Motor Patrol; Scraper; Concrete Pump, Grout Pump or Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwel~ Type); Concrete Breaker (Manual or Remote); Concrete Batch Plant; Power Subgrader; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Paver; Concrete Grinder or Planing Machine; Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Slipform Placer; Curb and Gutter Machine; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Shouldering Machine; Boring Machine (Hodzontal, Vertical or Directional); Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Forklift (Machinery Moving or Steel Erection); Manhoist or Elevator; Material or Stack Hoist; Trencher; Sideboom; Hydro-Blaster (10,000 PSI or Over); Post Hole Digger or Driver; Railroad Track Rail Leveling Machine, Tie Placer, Extractor, Tamper Stone Leveler or Rehabi itation E u ment Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Greaser; Compactor (Self-Propelled); 22.87 10.55 33.42 Concrete Saw (Vermeer Type); Concrete Bump Cutter or Grooving Machine; Tining or Curing Machine; Roller (5 Tons or Under); Broom or Sweeper; Hoist ~.T. ugge~-.) Environmental Burner Crusher, Screening Or Wash Plant; Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; 21.34 10.25 31.59 Air Compressor (400 CFM or Over); Generator (150 KW or Over); Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Refrigeration Plant or Freeze Machine; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Robotic Tool Carrier (With Or Without Attachments); Skid Rig; Stump Chipper; Mulcher; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor ........... ' ............................ - 11.70' .............. Future Increase(s): Add $1.50 on 6/1/03 Add $1 50 on 6/6/04 Gas or Utility Pipeline, Except Sewer and Water (Primary Equipment) 22_57 11.30 33.87 Future Increase(s): Add $1 35 on 3/1/03 Gas or Utility Pipeline, Except Sewer and Water (Secondary Equipment) 23.07 11.30 34.37 Future Increase(s): Add $1.35 on 3/1/03 Fiber OBtic Cable EQuipment 18 92 7 22 26 14 F SEWER. WATER OR TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION Includes those projects that primarily involve public sewer or water distribution, transmission or collection systems and related tunnel work (excluding buildings). .B_ .r.i.c. ~i _a ~. _e£,..B.[(29.1~! 9 ~( .e£ .~ (. ~ ! ~ .n..e...m..a..s.9.0. ............................................................... ~ .2_:.9..8. .................... _1.: .6..4_ .............. .!_4. :_6..2_ Carpenter 23.19 8.88 32.07 Future Increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/1/03; Add $1.40 on 5/30/04; Add $1.35 on 5/29/05; Add $1.35 on 5/28/06; Add $1.35 on 5/27/07 WR-5 Determination No. 200301269 Page5____ Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid Ce AI_~I Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY TRADE OR OCCUPATION BASIC RATE FRINGE OF PAY BENEFITS T__OTA~L ---: .......................................................................................... $ $ $ Cement Finisher - ................... = ................................. 21.80 ....................................................................................................................8.05 29.85 Electrician ~i~ .................. i'(~.'~- .............. '~';~],~ Fence Erector ................... ............................................................................................................ 17.21 4.01 21.22 Ironworker ...................................................... : ................. .......................................................................... 25.92 12 58 38.50 Line Constructor IElectrical.) .................................... ~-',~ .................... ~'~i ............... '~-~-" Piledriver ---. ....................................................................................................................... _2__3..1..1_ _ 7.99 31.10 Plumber ........................ ........................................................................................ 20.50 1.90 22.40 Steamfitter ......... .................................................................................. 25.15 9 72 34 87 Teledata Technician or Installer ........................................ ',~-~ .................... ~]~'i ............... ~'~'-' -----------------------------.-- -----. -__._.__Tuckp-°inter' Caulker or Underwater Diver (EXCe et °n'Great-Lakes'~-,-- :_:¢_ ................... 22.65 - "9.41 ' -~2.~-' Well Ddller or PumB Installer 20.51 0.04 20 55 TRUCK DRIVERS ~hree or More Axte ...................................................................... 15 27 3.42 18.69 Articulated Euclid or DumBtor .................................... '~'~.~ .................... ~-~';~ .............. Pavement Marking Vehicle 18.46 7 55 26 01 Truck Mechanic ...................................................................... ............................................................................ 15.00 0 00 15 00 LABORERS General Laborer 20.61 7.11 27.72 Future Increase(s): Add $1.25 on 6/2/03; Add $1.25 on 6/7/04; Add $1.25 on 6/6/05; Add $1.25 on 6/6/06 Premium Pay: Add $.20 for blaster, bracer, manhole builder, caulker, bottomman and power tool; Add $.55 for pipelayer; Add $1.00 for 0-15 lbs. compressed air; Add $2.00 for 15-30 lbs. compressed air; Add $3.00 for over 30 lbs. comDressed air Landscaper 20.61 7.11 27.72 Future Increase(s}: Add $1.25 on 6/2/03; Add $1.25 on 6/7/04 Add $1.25 on 6/6/05; Add $1.25 on 6/6/06 FIagp_erson or Traffic Control Perso~ ............................. Fiber Ogtic Labo;;r (.5~isid;]Et~;~'-~h;-~-~on~;;te-I~c-~;;~) ........................ ~ ....................~]~ .............. -~'i']~ Railroad Track Laborer ............................................................................ 20.16 6 31 26 47 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Capacity of Over 100 Tons; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Feet or Over; Backhoe O-rack _T_Y_[~)_..H_.a_¥~]3.g ~ .M..f.9_r .s..l~.a. ted Cal~acit~ of 130 000 Lbs or Over WR-6 Determination No. 200301269 Page 6 Fringe Benefits MuSt Be Paid On Alii Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS TOTAL ..... _F..u_~ r~jp ~r¢ 9 .s..e.(_s%_A..d.~d.~$.~:.5~.~-~6!~1~/.~.3..;~.A.~d.~.$.~1:.5~.~.~6../~(~ ............................................................................. Crane, Tower Crane or Derdck, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting 22.63 7.19 29.82 Capacity of 100 Tons or Under; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Feet or Under; Traveling Crane (Bridge Type}; Caisson Rig; Pile Driver; Dredge (Not Performing Work on the Great Lakes); Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of U.nd. er ~l_3__0.~)._0_0.___L_.b.s. .......................................................................................................................................................... Truck Mounted Hydraulic Crane (10 Tons or Under); Tractor or Truck 24.05 9.28 33.33 Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Mechanic or Welder; Bulldozer or Endloader; Grader or Motor Patrol; Concrete Pump, Grout Pump, or Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Breaker (Manual or Remote); Concrete Batch Plant; Power Subgrader; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Paver; Concrete Grinder or Planing Machine; Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Slipform Placer; Curb and Gutter Machine; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Shouldering Machine; Boring Machine (Horizontal, Vertical or Directional); Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Manhoist or Elevator; Material or Stack Hoist; Trencher; Sideboom; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Tug or Launch (Not .P.. _e..fi_ .o_?_Ln_g. ~ .o_ .r.k...o._n_ _t__h.~..G_ r~_t_ .L_ a_ k_ ~ .s)_ ............................................................................................................................. Farm or Industrial Type Tractor;, Greaser; Compactor (Self-Propelled); 23.17 11.70 34.87 Concrete Saw (Vermeer Type); Concrete Bump Cutter or Grooving Machine; Tining or Curing Machine; Roller (5 Ton or Under); Broom or Sweeper; Hoist (Tugger); Environmental Burner ..... ................................................................................... Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Air, Electric or Hydraulic Jacking System; 21.00 10.63 31.63 Air Compressor (400 CFM or Over); Generator (150 KW or Over); Pump (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Refrigeration Ptant or Freeze Machine; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Robotic Toot Carrier (With or Without Attachments); Skid Rig; Stump Chipper; Mulcher; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor ........................................................................................................................................................................................ O.!te..r.;..F..o..r.k..~.~ ...................................................................................................... .2_::.O..0. .................. ~_.0..:~..3. . .............. 3%6_.3_ .... LOCAL STREET OR MISCELLANEOUS PAVING CONSTRUCTION Includes roads, streets, alleys, trails, bridges, paths, racetracks, parking lots and driveways (except residential or agricultural), public sidewalks or other similar projects (excluding projects awarded by the Wisconsin Department of Transportation). Carpenter 23.19 8.88 32.07 Future Increase(s): Add $1.45 on 6/1/03; Add $1.40 on 5/30/04; Add $1.35 on 5/29/05; Add $1.35 on 5/28/06; Add $1.35 on 5/27/07 Cement Finisher 24.18 9.30 33.48 .. F.utur.e..~.n.`cre.a.s.e.(s.~..A.~.d..~.~4..5..~..~§~?/g.3.~.A..d.~$.~1:5...~.~.~.~6.~ .................................................................................... Electrician 23.78 11.91 35.69 . F-.uture Increase(s): Add $1.65 on 6/!1C~_3 A..d.~:.2.~.~1~/.~/.~..3..~.5.d..d.~.J~7.5..~..~6.~1/.~.~4..~:~1~ ................ .F..e..n.c.~..E.r.e__c. !.o..r .................................................................................................... J 7.: ~ J. .................... _4_ :_0. _~ ............... Z! :~.2._.. ].r_o. _0~ .qk..e.~. ......................................................................................................... .2.5.: ~..2. .................. .t.2_ .._5.8_ .............. ..3_8_:5..O. _Lj _n. _e._q.o_ .n..s..t~ p.!.o.r.(EJ ~.c_~fi ;.g J)_ .............................................................................. _2. 7_:~} .................... ~:.5._~ ................ ?~:6. ~.... _P..aj.n_.te.r. .............................................................................................................. :6.:~.3_ .................... ~:9_.~ ............... 1. Z..¢.7._._ WR-7 Determination No. 200301269 Page Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On AI__I Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS TOTAL .................................. $ $ $ pavement Marking Oj~erator .............................. 2~.~6 - 8~)- .............. '3~)~ , .P. iJ.e.driver .................................................... ?..3.:.!.6. .................... .7.: .9_~_ ............ 31 08 Ro ;i;;';;;'~; at;;?~ii_;io_'."~_;ii ........................................ 18.85 6.31 --'~'~];~-" Teledata Technician or l~;-~;ii;;;] ...... : ........................... 19.~ ........~i ............... -~]~ Underwater Diver-it~;cepi-~ ~raat Lake_s.) 22.65 9.41 :~-~-- Hea.v~. Equip_merit Ol~erator - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCT ON ONLY 29 27 10 38 39 63 Light Epui~ment .O_~perator -ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCT ON ONLY 25 02 10 25 35 27 Hea _vl/----.--.----.- - --_____.._..........______.______.____._Truck Driver - ELECTRICAL LINE CONSTRUCTION ONLY 12.00 I 46 13:46 ~i~i---~------. ---~,,., ~, ,. ~._~_,.,,, .,.,.~_.,..,. ,_,,,,,__ Tru n k F~ rlV':'r-" ~"~NTI;'I P ~' ' '/'IU ~' P'~I"I q T ~ I ' r'~--~-'~;; '~'I~;; -~: ......... : .......... -~ ~ .................... ~i ............... '~-~-" TRUCK DRIVERS ~.-~.~ ~.~ ~.--~,,~~-'~;~'~ ~;~-~:*:;::::'~-::~ ................................ ~ .................................................... 'G'~ .................... ;F~' ............... i'~'~ :~'~';a-;-;;7 ~;'&"~i'; .................................................................................. : .................. ; ....................... : ...... ................................. 17.34 7 82 25 16 Articulated, Euclid or Dumptor ............................... ]~]~;~ ............. 9]~9 ........... ~-~]]~'~ Future Increase(_s.~: Add $1.60 on 5/1103 Add $1.35 on 5/1/04 Add $1 40 on 5/1/05 Pavement Marking Vehicle 18 46 7 55 26 01 Shadow or Pilot Vehicle ........................................................................ .................................... 13.99 4 69 18.68 Truck Mechanic 15.00 0.00 15.00 LABORERS General Laborer .............................. .................................... 17.09 7 35 24 44 Landsc_a~er 17 59 3 96 ?~ 5~ Fla~person or Traffic Control Person .................................................. ................................................................................................. 16.33 6.32 22.65 Fiber Ol~tic Laborer ~.O. utside Other Than Concrete Encased) 19 03 2 07 21 10 Railroad Track Laborer .................................... 17.09 7 35 24.44 HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CONCRETE PAVEMENT OR BRIDGE WORK ONLY Capacity of Over 100 Tons; Crane, Tower Crane or Derdck, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 176 Feet or Over Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting 27.50 10.97 38.47 Capacity of 100 Tons or Under; Crane, Tower Crane or Derdck, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Feet or Under; Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Caisson Rig; -P- .~!-e- --D--r-?. e_r;.. _D. r_e..d- ~ ~. ( _N. __°_t. _P_e. Co_ r. _m_! ~ g.. _W_. ~ r.k._ ?. _n__t .h ~ .~.r.~_~&~ ~ ~ ) ........................................................................................ Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 25,72 11.70 37.42 Lbs.; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Mechanic or Welder; Bulldozer or Endloader; Grader or Motor Patrol; Scraper; Concrete Pump, Grout Pump or Concrete Conveyor (Rotec or Bidwell Type); Concrete Breaker (Manual or Remote); Concrete Batch Plant; Power Subgrader Concrete Sp_reader; Concrete Paver Concre e Gr nder or WR-8 Determination No. 200301269 Page8 Fringe Benefits Must Be Paid On AI___[I Hours Worked HOURLY HOURLY BASIC RATE FRINGE TRADE OR OCCUPATION OF PAY BENEFITS TOTAL ....................................................................................................................... .$. ........................... $_ ................... .~. ............ Planing Machine; Concrete Conveyor System; Concrete Slipform Placer; Curb and Gutter Machine; Air Track, Rotary or Percussion Drilling Machine; Straddle Carrier or Travel Lift; Trencher; Post Hole Digger or Driver; Tug or Launch (Not Performing Work on the Great Lakes) __ _.F_~ r~_! ~. ~r ff.a. ~( .~).; ~.d_.d__.$_ ~.:~ q _.o_~_.~L! !_0_.3_.. ~. _d.~..$_ ~ ,.2_ 5__ o_ 9. ~_0_~q4.: .................................................................................. Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Greaser; Compactor (Self-Propelled); 23.27 9.05 32.32 Concrete saTM (Vermeer Type); Concrete Bump Cutter or Grooving Machine; .T..i.n.!.n.g~..o.r._C_t~_r_i.0~_._M_9.c_~ine; Environm. ental Burner ....................................... Oiler; Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Air Compressor; Generator; Pump 26.57 11.78 38.35 (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Forklift; Skid Steer Leader (With or Without Attachments); Skid Rig; Stump Chipper; Mulcher; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor F_! b_ ~ r_. _0_ p_t_i_ _c_ ~ .a..b. Le...E.g .u_ip_ [0. _e.r~~ ............................................................................. .1__8.:.9.~ .................... ~,.2..2. .............. .2..6_.~ 4. .... HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS ASPHALT PAVEMENT OR OTHER WORK Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With or Without Attachments, With a Lifting 25.21 10.55 35.76 Capacity of Over 100 Tons; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measurin9 176 Feet or Over ......................... T~ ......................................................................................................................................................... Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, with or Without Attachments, With a Lifting 27.50 10.97 38.47 Capacity of 100 Tons or Under; Crane, Tower Crane or Derrick, With Boom, Leads and/or Jib Lengths Measuring 175 Feet or Under; Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of 130,000 Lbs. or Over; Caisson Rig; P. iLe_~ dv..e_r__.~.re, d.9 .e._(.N.__o_t_.~e.¢.o..rB Ln.g_ W..o_ r.k.. 2 9.~hff.¢¢_~.~.~9.~ff~) ....................................................................................... Backhoe (Track Type) Having a Mfgr.'s Rated Capacity of Under 130,000 19.15 10.30 29.45 Lbs.; Tractor or Truck Mounted Hydraulic Backhoe; Gradall (Cruz-Aire Type); Mechanic or Welder;, Bulldozer or Endloader; Grader or Motor Patrol; Scraper; Concrete Breaker (Manual or Remote); Power Subgrader; Concrete Grinder or Planing Machine; Concrete Slipform Placer; Curb and Gutter Machine; Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Paver; Asphalt Screed; Asphalt Milling Machine; Roller (Over 5 Ton); Shouldering Machine; Trencher; Post Hole Digger or Driver ..... ?.~_t.u_ r.e_ _ !_n__c_r_e_ ~ _s.e_Ls}:._ _A. _d__d_. $_ ~ :~ _5__ _o. _n_ .6! ! ./.0..3_ ..................................................................................................................... Farm or Industrial Type Tractor; Greaser; Compactor (Self-Propelled); Roller 19.15 10.30 29.45 (5 Ton or Under); Broom or Sweeper; Environmental Burner ..... .F.?r.e.J.,..c_r_e_.a__s_e.(.s )LA..d..d___$.~.:.2_.5_..o_e..6./~_/.g.3. ..................................................................................................................... Oiler; Crusher, Screening or Wash Plant; Air Compressor; Generator; Pump 21.00 10_63 31.63 (3 Inch or Over) or Well Points; Forklift; Skid Steer Loader (With or Without Attachments); Skid Rig; Stump Chipper; Mulcher; Vibratory Hammer or Extractor ........................................................................................................................................................................................ _Fj_b_ _e_r. 0. p. _ti.;.. _c__a_ _b. Le.._E.~q~.~.m.e.~. ............................................................................ .~.§:.9..2. .................... 7_:2.[ .............. .2..~,.!.4___. This document MUST BE POSTED by the CONTRACTING AGENCY in at least one conspicuous and easily accessible place on the site of the project. A locat governmental unit may post this document at the place normally used to post public notices if there is no common site on the project. This document MUST remain posted during the entire time any worker is employed on the project and MUST be physically incorporated into the specifications and all contracts and most subcontracts. If you have any questions, please write to the Equal Rights Division, Labor Standards Bureau, P.O. Box 8928, Madison, Wisconsin 53708 or call (608) 266-3148. WR-9 Determination No. 200301269 Page 9 The following statutory provisions apply to local governmental unit public works projects and are set forth below pursuant to the requirements of s. 66.0903 (8), Stats. Each contractor, subcontractor or agent thereof performing work on a project that is subject to this section shall keep full and accurate records cleady indicating the name and trade or occupation of every person described in sub. (4) and an accurate record of the number of hours worked by each of those persons and the actual wages paid therefor. Any contractor, subcontractor or agent thereof, who fails to pay the prevailing wage rate determined by the department under sub.(3) or who pays less than 1.5 times the hourly basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of the prevailing hours of labor determinded under sub.(3), shall be liable to any affected emp[oye in the amount of his or her unpaid wages or his or her unpaid overtime compensation and in an additional equal amount as liquidated damages. An action to recover the liability may be maintained in any court of competent jurisdiction by any empioye for and in behalf of that employe and other employes similarly situated. No employe may be a party plaintiff to any such action unless the employe consents in wdting to become such a party and the consent is filed in the coud in which the action is brought. Notwithstanding s. 814.04 (1), the court shall, in addition to any judgment awarded to the plaintiff, allow reasonable attorney fees and costs to be paid by the defendant. WR-10 WR-11 State of W~sconsin Department of Woridorce Development Equal Rights Division Agent or Subcontractor Affidavit of Compliance With Prevailing Wage Rate Determination Personally identifiable information may be used for secondary purposes. (See Section 15,04(?)(m), Wisconsin Statutes for details.) This form must ONLY be filed With the Awarding Contractor indicated below. State Of } )SS County Of .) P~:oj ect Name! Project #: Determination #: Date Determination Issued: Awarding Contractor:. Date Of Subcontract: Date Work Completed: After being duly swom, the perSOn whose name and signature appearS below hereby states under penalty of perjury that , I am the duly authorized officer of the corporation, partnerShip, sole proprietorship or business indicated below and have recently completed all of the work required under the terms and conditions of a subcontract with the above-named awarding contractor and make this affidavit in accordance with the requirements set forth in Section 66.0903(9)(b) or 103.49(4r)(b), Wisconsin Statutes and Chapter DWD 290 of the Wisconsin Administrative Code in order to obtain FINAL PAYMENT from such awarding contractor. · I have fully complied with all of the wage and hour requirements applicable to this project, including alt of the requirements set forth in the prevailing wage rate determination indicated above which was issued for such project by the Department of Workforce Development on the date indicated above. I have received the required affidavit of compliance from each of my agents and subcontractorS that performed work on this project and have listed each of their names and addresses on page 2 of this affidavit. I have full and accurate records that cleady indicate the name and trade or occupation of every worker(s) that I employed on this project, including an accurate record of the hourS worked and actual wages paid to such worker(s). · I will retain the records and affidavit(s) described above and make them available for inspection for a pedod of at least three (3) years from the completion date indicated above at the address indicated below and shall not remove such records or affidavit(s) without pdor notification to the awarding contractor. Name of Corporation, PartnerShip, Sole Proprietorship or Business Address (Include Street or P.O. Box, City, State and ZtP Code PRINT Name of Authorized Officer Date Signed ). Signature of Authorized Officer Telephone Number The statutory authority for the use of this form is prescribed in Sections 66.0903(9)(b) and 103.49(4r)(b), Wisconsin Statutes. The use of this form is mandatory. The penalty for failing to complete this form is prescribed in Section 103.005(12), Wisconsin Statutes. ERD-10584 (R. 02/2001) WR-14 List of Agents and Subcontractors Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( WR-15 Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number (__) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number (__) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) State of Wisconsin Department of Workforce Development Equal Rights Division Prime Contracto Affidavit of Compliance With Prevailing Wage Rate Determination Personally identifiable information may be USL:~d for secon~ry Purposes. (See Section 15.04(1 )(m), Wisconsin Statutes for details.) T~ f0rr~ n~u~ ~LY be filed with tl~ A~J~di'ng AgenCy ir~dicated below. State Of )ss County Of Project Name: Project #: Date Determination Issued: Awarding Agency: Determination #: Date of Contract: Date Work Completed: After being dulY sworn, the person whose name and signature appears below hereby states under penalty of perjury that · I am the duly authorized officer of the corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship or business indicated below and have recently completed all of the work required under the terms and conditions of a contract with the above-named awarding a~ensy and make this affidavit in accordance with the requirements set forth in Section 66.0903(9)(c) Dr 103.49(4r)(c), Wisconsin Statutes and Chapter DWD 290 of the Wisconsin Administrative Code in order to obtain FINAL PAYMENT from such awarding agency. · I have fully complied with all of the wage and hour requirements applicable to this project, including all of the requirements set forth in the prevailing wage rate determination indicated above which was issued for such project by the Department of Workforce Development on the date indicated above. · I have received the required affidavit of compliance from each of my agents and subcontractors that performed work on this project and have listed each of their names and addresses on page 2 of this affidavit. I have full and accurate records that Ciea~iy indicate the name and trade or occupation of every worker(s) that I employed on this project, including an accurate record of the hours worked and actual wages paid to such worker(s). I will retain the records and affidavit(s) described above and make them available for inspection for a period of at least three (3) years from the completion date indicated above at the address indicated below and shall not remove such records or affidavit(s) without prior notification to the awarding agency indicated above. Name of Corporation, Partnership, Sole Proprietorship or Business Address (include Street or P.O. Box, City, State and ZiP Code PRINT Name of Authorized Officer Date Signed Signature of Authorized Officer Telephone Number The statutory authority for the use of this form is prescribed in Sections 66.0903(9)(c) and 103.49(4r)(c), Wisconsin Statutes. The use of this form is mandatory. The penalty for failing to complete this form is prescribed in Section 103.005(12), Wisconsin Statutes. ERD-5724 (R. 08/2002) WR~12 List of Agents and Subcontractors mi Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number (__.) WR-13 Name Address City, State, Zip Code Telephone Number ( ) DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION Work Included: All demolition, removal, and salvage work as shown on the drawings or specified herein to include, but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Block knockout wall in Chemical Building. 2. Concrete slab sections in Chemical Building. 1.02 B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit permits and notices, if required, authorizing building demolition. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR shall perform demOlition, removal, and salvage in conformity with applicable federal, State, and local safety practices and code requirements. 1.04 SEQUENCE No demolition, rernbval, °r salv~ge WOrk shall commence until appr0~)al to proceed has been granted by OWNER. Such work shall be completed in accordance with the construction sequence included in Division I of these specifications and in accordance with the construction phases of this project and work to be done by other contractors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Compacted fill shall meet the requirements of Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BREAKING DOWN AND REMOVING STRUCTURES General: 1. All existing structures, with all attached pads and connections, shown on the drawings or specified to be removed, or that interfere with the new construction, shall be entirely removed within the limits shown or specified, unless otherwise provided. Section 02050-1 I ~82~$6/o3~4 When a portion of an existing structure is to be retained, CONTRACTOR shall take care during construction operations so as not to impair the value of the retained portion. a. Complete all operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure, which might endanger the new construction, prior to the construction of the new work. b. Do not use any equipment or devices which might damage structures, facilities, or property which are to be preserved and retained. Pavement, Curb, Gutter, Sidewalk, Driveways, Crosswalk, and Similar Structures: 1. Where portions of the existing structure are to be left in the surface of the finished work, CONTRACTOR shall remove the structure to an existing joint, or saw and chip the structure to a true line. 2. Sufficient removal shall be made to provide for proper grades and connections in the new work. C. Walls, Piers, Surface Drains, Foundations, and Similar Masonry Structures: Remove existing construction as required to clear new construction. 3.02 ABANDONING STRUCTURES Manholes: 1. CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean structures to be abandoned. 2. CONTRACTOR shall plug existing pipe connections with brick or concrete block masonry or with any grade of concrete having a 28 day compressive strength in excess of 2,000 psi. 3. CONTRACTOR shall remove the walls of the structures to an elevation at least 2 feet below the finished grade line, or to such elevation that may be designated on the drawings or as necessary to clear new construction. 3.03 ABANDONING AND REMOVING UTILITIES AND UNDERGROUND PROCESS PIPING 3.04 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the turning off or unhooking of all utilities and process piping before starting the demolition work. Remove all utility lines, including electrical services and process piping that are shown or specified to be removed. Remove utility lines that are to be abandoned as needed to clear new construction. The ends of utility lines and process piping shown or specified to be abandoned that are exposed by excavation shall be plugged with concrete to prevent soil infiltration into the pipes. BACKFILL CONTRACTOR shall fill all abandoned structures and excavations resulting from removal of structures and utilities with compacted fill. See Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading for required degree of compaction. B. Prior to filling, CONTRACTOR shall break one opening in the floor or wall near the base of each compartment to allow groundwater to freely migrate through the structure. END OF SECTION Im Section 02050-2 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING AND STRIPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Removal of surface debris. 2. Removal of paving, curbs, and sidewalks. 3. Removal of trees, shrubs, and other plant life. 4. Strip and stockpile topsoil. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. CONTRACTOR shall identify existing plant life to remain and shall tag accordingly. 3.02 PROTECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall protect from damage utilities and structures that are to remain. B. CONTRACTOR shall protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as final landscaping. C. See Division 1 for protection of survey monumentation. 3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Clearing and grubbing shall consist of cutting and disposing of trees, brush, windfalls, logs, and other vegetation, and the removing and disposing of roots, stumps, stubs, grubs, logs and other timber from within the cleadng limits as defined on the drawings, designated to be removed on the drawings or in the specifications or fall within the excavation, embankment or improved areas of the site. All roots and stumps shall be removed to a depth of not less than 12 inches below the original ground surface in embankment areas. In cut areas, such material shalt be removed to a depth of not less than 12 inches below the subgrade. s~'(~ti~n 02110:1 i -382;'636ib3~04 3.04 REMOVALS CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site all trees, brush and other vegetation, debris and rocks which fall within the excavation and grading limits, as well as any paving, curb and gutter, and sidewalks shown on the drawings to be removed. 3.05 STRIPPING A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be built upon, cut or filled or to have surface improvements, including roadways and walks. B. Stockpile topsoil on site and protect from erosion. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional topsoil as required. C. OWNER waives claim to excess topsoil, CONTRACTOR shall remove it from the site. END OF SECTION Section 02110-2 1~382436/03-04 SECTION 02140 DI:WATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: ;i Rembv~l of groundwater to allow belOW grade'c0n's~ru~tion: 2. Site grading to prevent surface water from entering the excavation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 C. Payment: 1. The expense for making all extra excavations necessary to prevent water from interfering with the proper construction of the work and for forming all dams or diversions, digging of sumps or pump wells, bailing, and installation and pumping of wells shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 2. The cost for removal of groundwater and surface water shall be included in the prices bid for the work. No separate payment will be made for dewatering whether accomplished by use of sumps and pumps, well point systems, deep wells, or any other method. REFERENCES A. Wisconsin Administrative Code Chapter NR 141 and NR 811. B. See Division ii Regulatory Requirement~ for permit requirements and waterl erosion, and sediment control. 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall at its own expense, keep the excavation clear of water while structures, mains, and appurtenances are being built, utilities are being installed, and fill and backfill are being compacted. Under no conditions shall the work be laid in or under water. No water shall flow over the work until the joints are complete orthe concrete has set. B: Dew~tering shall be sufficient to lower the piezometric level to at least 2 feet below the · bottom of the excavatiOn. Additional lowering shall be provided as necessary to create a · stable subgrade. In areas where roCk is encountered, the water level shall be kept at Or below toP of rock, but at least 6 inches belOw bottom of concrete. Additional rock shall be removed as needed to provide clearances. D. The control of groundwater shall be suCh that softening or heaving of the bottom of excavations or formation of "quick" conditions or "boils" shall be prevented. Secti0n' 02i 40-1 1-382-636/03-04 E. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated so as to prevent the migration or removal of soils. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All dewatering shall be done in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local code requirements. In particular, groundwater observation wells shall be provided and subsequently abandoned in accordance with NR 141. CONTRACTOR shall complete all observation well construction and abandonment forms as required by NR 141 and shall submit the forms to OWNER within 15 days of construction or abandonment activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING Dewatering shall be started and the water level shall be lowered as specified herein prior to beginning excavation and shall be continued until structure, main, or appurtenance has been completed and fill has been placed and compacted to final grade. CONTRACTOR shall provide at least two groundwater observation wells near each area to be excavated to aid CONTRACTOR in determining whether the minimum specified requirements have been met prior to excavation. The observation well shall be a minimum 2-inch diameter slotted PVC pipe. The observation well shall be installed and backfilled in such a way as to allow an accurate determination of actual groundwater levels. The observation well shall be properly abandoned after use unless specified otherwise. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary materials and equipment to keep the excavation free from water during construction. CONTRACTOR shall at all times have on hand sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages, and shall have available at all times competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment. The dewatering systems shall not be shut down between shifts, on holidays or weekends, or during the work stoppages. D. CONTRACTOR shale meet all requirements of applicable DNR permits for construction pit or trench dewatering. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in such a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted fill or backfill and prevent fioatation or movement of all structures and pipelines. Section 02140-2 1-382-836/03-04 3.02 PROTECTION · D. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions during the dewatering operation to protect adjacent structures against subsidence, flooding or other damage. The dewatedng system shall be installed and operated so that the groundwater level outside the excavation is not reduced to the extent that would damage or endanger adjacent structures or property. Any such facilities and structures damaged shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of their owner. Prior to dewatedng, CONTRACTOR shall take into account the effect of its proposed dewatering operation on existing pdvate water supply systems and shall make arrangements with property owners for protecting their supplies or providing alternative means of supply. In the event that CONTRACTOR's dewatering operation adversely effects private water supply systems, CONTRACTOR shall provide property owners with alternative potable and nonpotable supplies until dewatedng operations are ceased and groundwater levels return to normal. If the water in private water supply wells is contaminated, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, after restoration of odginal groundwater levels, OWNER will provide measures to restore water potability. CONTRACTOR is responsible for restoration of the water supply, not its potability after restoration. In areas where continuous operation of dewatering pumps is required, CONTRACTOR shall avoid noise disturbance to nearby residences to the greatest extent possible by using electric driven pumps, intake and exhaust silencers or housing to minimize noise from engine driven generators or engine driven pumps. END OF SECTION Section 02140-3 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, AND GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: Excavating, filling, backfilling and grading for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Excavating for footings, foundations, roads, and utilities. 2. Placing and compacting all fill and backfill. 3. Placement of granular mat vapor barrier and granular cushion below interior slabs on grade. 4. Placement of crushed stone mat below tank slabs and manhole/vault slabs, basement floors, or other structures where required. 5. Rough and finish grading prior to paving, seeding, etc. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. Allowances: 1. CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the cost of replacing 25 cubic yards of unsuitable foundation matedal for structures and roads as defined in this section. The unit price shall include the cost of dewatering and slope stabilization and other incidental items associated with this work. Payment to CONTRACTOR for unsuitable foundation material for structures and roads will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual unsuitable material excavated (more or less than 25 cubic yards) and the Supplemental Unit Price for replacing unsuitable foundation material. Volume shall be as measured in the ground. Extra payment will not be made for specified undercutting and filling or gravel bedding material required for placing concrete above water level as required under the concrete specifications. The Bid shall include any removal and replacement of excavated material so indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 2. CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the cost of replacing 25 cubic yards of unsuitable foundation material for utility trenches as defined in this section. The unit price shall include the cost of dewatering and slope stabilization and other incidental items associated with this work. Payment to CONTRACTOR for unsuitable foundation material for utility trenches will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual unsuitable material excavated (more or less than 25 cubic yards) and the Supplemental Unit Price for replacing unsuitable foundation material. Volume shall be as measured in the ground. Extra payment will not be made for specified undercutting, filling, or bedding. The Bid shall include any removal and replacement of excavated material so indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 3. CONTRACTOR shall INCLUDE in the Bid the cost of removing, hauling, and disposing of in a licensed landfill 100 tons of excavated solid waste fill material as defined in this section. The cost shall include excavation, any testing required by the landfill, transportation, additional safety considerations, and disposal fees. Payment for fill material excavation and disposal will be adjusted, add or deduct, based upon the actual amount of fill material excavation and disposal (more or less than 100 tons) and the Supplemental Unit Price for Excavation and Disposal of Solid Waste Fill Materials. Landfill tonnage shall be based on weight tickets. Copies of all weight Section 02222-1 1-382-836/o3-04 ticke:ts for iandfiiled ~a~erial shaii be' ~ro~ided to ownER ~o~ dbc~mentation purposes to calculate actual quantities. Weight tickets shall be duly and accurately completed. Weight tickets with incomplete or illegible information shall not be acceptable. D. Payment: 1. General excavation shall include all excavation specified, undercutting, fill, backfill and grading, except rock excavation and unsuitable foundation material, as hereinafter described. 2. All general excavation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. Changes which require additions to or deductions from the excavation will be adjusted on the basis of the unit price for changes contained in the Contract. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures using 10 pound Rammer and 18-inch drop. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications within this section shall refer to the State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, current edition, including all issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 SU BMI'I-]'AES CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of materials proposed for use as fill to soils testing lab(~ratory for analysis of their suitability and for recommendations on moisture content during compaction, comPaction methods, or other appropriate information. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient samples of each different type or classification of soil to obtain representative values. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS The elevations shown for existing work and ground are reasonably correct, but are not guaranteed to be absolutely accurate. No extras will be allowed because of variatiOns between drawings and actual grades. B. Soil borings were made and the logs are included in the Appendix to these specifications. The information contained on the b0dngs is not guaranteed to be indicative of conditions to be encountered during construction. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to make his own investigations. The complete soil report is available for review at the office of ENGINEER, 910 West Wingra Drive, Madison, Wisconsin, and at the Oshkosh City Engineer's office, 215 Church Avenue, Oshkosh, Wisconsin 54903. PART2 15RODOC-FS 2.01 COMPACTED FILL All fill and backfill material designated to be compacted fill shall be granular with no stones larger than 4 inches and shall be reasonably well graded throughout the particle size range. Of that portion of the material passing the No. 4 sieve, not more than 25% shall pass the No. 200 sieve and material shall have less than 5% clay content. When placing Section 02222:2 fill during wet weather or in wet areas, this requirement shall be modified to not more than five percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Adequately dewatered areas are not defined as wet areas. Native material may be used as compacted fill if it meets the above specification. CONTRACTOR shall determine whether native material meets the above specification. CONTRACTOR shatl provide all needed fill material whether from on-site or off-site at no additional cost to OWNER. 2.02 CRUSHED sTONE MAT A. Crushed stone mat below foundation slabs and footings shall be 3/4-inch clear crushed stone and shatl meet all requirements of ASTM C33 size No. 67. 2.03 GRANULAR CUSHION A. Granular cushion beneath floor slabs-on-grade shall meet requirements of Section 304 of Standard Specifications for Crushed Aggregate, Wisconsin DOT Gradation No. 3. 2.04 EMBANKMENT FILL A. Embankment fill shall contain no stumps, brush, rubbish or other perishable material. The top 12 inches of the earth embankment shall be earthy material free from large stones. 2.05 CONCRETE FILL A. Concrete fill shall be Class X concrete as defined in Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2.06 CLAY FILL A. Clay fill shall contain at least 25% clay minerals (material finer than 0.002 mm). PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to all excavating, CONTRACTOR shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and site conditions. 3.02 PROTECTION CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary sheeting and shoring including all labor, material, equipment and tools required or as necessary to maintain the excavation in a condition to provide safe working conditions, to permit the safe and efficient installation of all items of Contract work, and to protect adjacent property. CONTRACTOR shall be held liable for any damage which may result to property from excavation or construction operations. Sheet piling and timbers in excavations shall be withdrawn in a manner so as to prevent subsequent settlement of structures. Section 02222-3 3.03 C. D, B. Nothing in this specification shall be deemed to allow the use of protective systems less effective than those required by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other applicable code requirements. UTILITIES Before s!arting eXcaVations, CONTRACTOR shall lOcate existing Underground utilities in all areas of the work. If utilities are to remain in place, CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with OWNER and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation and repair any damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. E. CONTRACTOR shall not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by OWNER or others, except when permitted in writing by OWNER. F. CONTRACTOR shall demolish and completely remove from the site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed after utility has been capped and sealed. G. CONTRACTOR shall accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines rerouted Or extended on project record drawings. 3.04 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES A. CONTRACTOR is resPonSible for setting and establishing finish elevations and lines. 3.05 EXCAVATION A. After the site has been cleared and striPped, the site shall be cut and filled to the indicated subgrade as shown or specified. All excavated material which does not meet the specification for compacted fill or embankment fill, or meets the specification, but is not required for backfill or fill shall be classified as excess material and shall be removed from the site and disposed of at CONTRACTOR's expense. Co OWNER maintains first claim against all excess material. If OWNER chooses to utilize this option, CONTRACTOR shall place the excess material on the site in locations as designated by OWNER. If OWNER desires to keep the excess material, but have it removed to a remote site, the hauling cost shall be at the OWNER's expense unless otherwise specified. D. All material other than suitable bearing soil or bedrock, as determined by the Project Soils Engineer, shall be removed from under concrete to be poured on ground. E. Excavation for all footings, foundation walls, pits, etc. shall be large enough to provide adequate clearance for the proper execution for the work within them. Section 02222-4 Each of the soil borings encountered an uncontrolled fill material that extended to depths of 7.4 feet to 19.0 feet below grade. Below the fills, natural silty clay soils were encountered to the termination depths of the borings at 25 feet. In addition to uncontrolled fill materials, there is also an abandoned sewer line at the site. Straight shaft caissons shall be used to support the structure. Caissons shall extend through the existing fill materials and a minimum of 2 feet into the under lying natural silty clay soils. The bearing depths will most likely fall within a range of 10 to 21 feet. A minimum 3-foot diameter caisson is required. See Section 02375 for caisson specification. H. Excavations scheduled to extend below groundwater shall not be started until the area has been dewatered. See Section 02140 - Dewatedng. No footings or slabs shall bear on the top 2 feet of existing soil. Where planned subgrade is within 2 feet of existing grade, remove soils to 2 feet below existing grade and backfill with compacted fill up to subgrade elevation. When excavations reach subgrade elevations as shown on the drawings, or as specified herein, the Project Soils Engineer will observe the bottom material. Where, in the opinion of the Project Soils Engineer, unsuitable foundation material is found at the level of the subgrade, original material below the excavafion necessary for construction according to grades shown or specified, shall be removed and replaced with material and placing methods as specified under compacted fill and backfill. Excavations that are undercut beneath the foundation shall extend beyond the perimeter of the foundation one foot plus a distance at least equal to the depth of undercut below footing grade. L. CONTRACTOR shall backfill and compact all overexcavated areas. 3.06 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE After the site has been cleared, stripped, and excavated to subgrade, thoroughly compact subgrade to the requirements specified for compacted fill below. Scarify and moisture condition the subgrade as recommended by the Project Soils Engineer. B. Remove all ruts, hummocks, and other uneven surfaces by surface grading prior to placement of fill. Co All slab on grade and road subgrades shall be proofrolled with a heavy rubber-tired construction vehicle (such as a fully loaded, tandem-axle dump truck) in the presence of the Project Soils Engineer. 3.07 COMPACTED FILL AND BACKFILL All fill and backfill, except as otherwise specified, shall be compacted fill placed to within 4 inches of the bottom of the topsoil, or to the bottom of the structure, or other improvement. B. Unless otherwise noted, structures with a top slab shall not be backfilled until the slab is in place and has reached its specified 28-day strength. Section 02222-5 C. In fill ~s:Ab0~e e~isting grudge ~Qncl sti:U~:tUres, ~°~pa~e~ fili ~h~il be placed within a minimum of 10 feet from the structure. D. No fill shall be Placed under water or ever unsuitable subgrade conditions. All fill and backfill except embankment fill and clay fill ~hall be compacted as follows: 1. Class 1 Compaction- This class of compaction shall apply to all fill areas under buildings, structures, Piping, bituminous roadway and parking areas, curb and gutter, and backfill within ten feet of structure walls. All compacted matedal shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding eight inches in loose thickness prior to compaction. Each layer shall be uniformly compacted to a dry density at least 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by a laboratory compaction test at the optimum moisture content (ASTM Test Designation D1557). Compaction shall be obtained by compaction equipment appropriate for the conditions. 2. Class 2 Compaction - This class of compaction shall be used in excavated areas beyond 10 feet of structures without any piping, or adjacent foundations. Material for backfill shall be granular material as specified above. The matedal shall be deposited, spread and leveled in layers generally not exceeding 12 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer of the fill shall be compacted to at least 90% of the maximum dry density (testing same as Class 1). Compaction shall be obtained by compaction equipment appropriate for the conditions. F. No frozen material shall be placed nor shall any material be placed on frozen ground. G. Four inches of clay fill shall be placed and compacted to at least a firm consistency in ~ areas (o De S~eded or sodded pdor to plaCement of topsoil. 3:08 EMBANKMENT FILL Embankment fill may be placed in fill areas to be seeded or sodded if no piping exists in the fill, and the areas are at least 10 feet from any structure. Embankment fill shall be deposited, spread, and leveled in layers generally not exceeding 12 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer shall be compacted to the degree that no further appreciable consolidation is evidenced under the action of the compaction equipment. The required compaction shall be obtained for each layer before any matedal for a succeeding layer is placed thereon. Compaction shall be obtained using the hauling and leveling equipment and in addition tamping rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, vibratory rollers, or other types of equipment required to produce the desired results. 3.09 CONCRETE FILL A. In areas where there is inadequate room for compaction equipment and in other areas as shown or specified, Class X concrete shall be used as fill material. 3.10 GRADING A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all rough and finish grading required to attain the elevations shown on the drawings. Section 02222-6 1-382-836/03-04 B. Grading Tolerances: 1. Rough Grade: Buildings, parking areas, and sidewalks - +_0.1 feet. 2. Finish Grade: Granular cushion or crushed stone mat under concrete slabs - _+0.03 feet. 3. Lawn areas away from buildings, parking areas, and sidewalks - +0.25 feet. 3.11 PLACING GRANULAR CUSHION AND VAPOR BARRIER A. When subgrade is prepared for slab on grade areas, CONTRACTOR shall place the vapor barrier. B. A 6-inch layer of granular cushion shall then be placed, compacted, and finish graded. 3.12 PLACING CRUSHED STONE AND GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. The same day that the subgrade is exposed, place geotextile fabric on subgrade and place 12 inches of crushed stone mat below tank slabs, manholes, vault slabs, and basement floors. Compact in place. 3.13 COMPACTION TESTING A. Compaction tests shall be done by the Project Soils Engineer. Location and frequency of the tests shall be as recommended by the Project Soils Engineer and paid for by OWNER. 3.14 EXCAVATED SOLID WASTE FILL MATERIALS TO BE LANDFILLED A. If any solid waste fill materials are encountered, they shall be excavated and removed to a licensed sanitary landfill. Solid waste fill material is defined as any debris, refuse, glass, ash, or other material not native to the site but having been placed on-site during past filling operations, and mixed with soil Allowance as specified shall apply. See Section 00400 - Bid. END Of SECTION Section 02222-7 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 02231 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. A~gregate base COurse for roads and parking areas. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. C. Repair or replacement of aggregate base course shall be considered incidental and included in the price bid. 1.02 D. CONTRACTOR is cautioned that existing private and public roads and shoulders may not hold up to typical construction traffic or activities. CONTRACTOR shall repair ail roads, shoulders, and gravel areas damaged in accordance with this section. Ail paved areas shall also be repaired in accordance with Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving. REFERENCES Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the state of WiSconsin Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction current edition, including alt issued supplemental specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Street or road shall include streets, roads, driveways, and parking lots. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit sieve analySis for proposed materials in accordance with Section 01300 SUbmittals. 1.05 DRAINAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the provisions of Section 205.3.2 of the Standard Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATES A. Aggregate for base course shall meet the requirements of Section 304 of the Standard Specifications. B. Base course shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to Gradation No. 2. sec~ion 0223i:1 C. Material for top layer of shoulders shall meet Gradation No. 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION The subgrade shall be graded and rolled to provide uniform density and shall comply with the profile and cross sections contained in the drawings. All street subgrade in cut areas and all areas to receive fill shall be proof-rolled in the presence of OWNER or ENGINEER with a heavily loaded tri-axle dump truck or similar equipment prior to the placement of any fill materials or base course. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 211 of the Standard Specifications. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Base course grade shall be set to allow placement of thickness of asphaltic pavement shown or specified. B. Depth of base course shall be provided according to the standard cross-sections provided on the drawings. C. Depth of base course shall be 12 (twelve) inches, whichever is greater. D. Each layer of base course shall be wetted and rolled to provide maximum compaction in accordance with Section 304 of the Standard Specifications. E. The finished base course shall be fine graded in preparation for paving. F. After final grading, CONTRACTOR shall maintain the base course until asphaltic paving work has been completed. END OF SECTION Section 02231-2 1-382-636/o3434 SECTION 02270 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL .01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Erosion control devices. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 PAYMENT A. All costs associated with slope protection and erosion control shall be included in CONTRACTOR's Bid. This work shall include, but is not limited to, erecting fence, excavation, placing posts, backfilling, attaching woven wire and geotextile fabric; placing ditch checks; installing sediment traps; for removing the fence at completion of project; for cleaning and repairing; for removing or spreading accumulated sediment to form a surface suitable for seeding; for replacing silt fence and damages caused by overloading of sediment material or ponding of water adjacent to silt fence; and for furnishing labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work in accordance with the Contract. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Wisconsin Construction Site Best Management Practice Handbook (WCSH). 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR is required to obtain a permit for erosion control. The permit requirements are CONTRACTOR's responsibility and shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. B. Comply with laws prohibiting pollution of any lake, stream, dver, or wetland. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Construct and maintain erosion sediment control measures in accordance with the Wisconsin Construction Site Best Management Practice Handbook. ~ ~B'~ :(~h~k; fa~;iiiti~§"~eei~i~ ~ncl~'~cte~r any ~'~in6ii event' an~d~m~k~' ~e~ed ~epai~ within 24 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EROSION MATS Uniform web of interlocking wood exCelsior fibers, with a net backing on one side. The wood from which the blanket is produced shall have been properly cured to achieve adequately curled and barbed fibers. The blanket shall be of uniform thickness with the Section 02270-1 wood fibers evenly distributed over the entire area of the blanket. The blanket shall be furnished in rolled strips. The width of the strips shall be 48 inches, _+l-inch. Weight of blanket measured under average atmospheric conditions shall be 78 pounds per 80 square yards, _+10%. Net backing shall have mesh size not exceeding 1-1/2 by 3 inches and may be woven from twisted paper, cotton cord, a biodegradable plastic or other alternate approved by ENGINEER. The blanket shall be nontoxic to vegetation. 2.02 SILT FENCE Use geotextile fabric consisting of either woven or nonwoven polyester, polypropylene, stabilized nylon, polyethylene or polyvinylidene chloride with the following requirements. Fabric shall have the minimum strength values in the weakest principal direction. Nonwoven fabric may be needle punched, heat bonded, resin bonded or combination thereof. VALUE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS (4) Test Method ~ Silty Soils (4/ Sandy Soils Grab Tensile-strength Mullen Burst strength (psi) Equivalent Opening Size U.S. Standard sieve Water Flow Rate (gal/min/ft.2 at 50 MM Constant head Ultra Violet Radiation Stability (percent) ASTM D-1682(2) 100 100 ASTM D-3786 200 200 CW-02215-77 50-140 20-50 Corps of Engineers ASTM D-4491(3) 10 10 ASTM D-4355 90 90 All numerical values represent minimum average roll values (i.e., the average of test results on any roll in a lot should meet or exceed the minimum values in the table.) ASTM D-1682 Grab Test, Method 16, using a 4-inch by 8-inch sample, 3-inch gauge length clamped in l-inch by 2-inch long grip, tested at a strain rate of 12-inch/min. Water Flow Rate in gal/min/ft shall be determined by multiplying Permittivity in sec. as determined by ASTM D-4491 by a conversion factor of 74. Silty Soil: More than 15% by weight passing No. 200 sieve. Sandy Soil: Less than 15% by weight passing No. 200 sieve. B. Furnish geotextile fabric in a wrapping which will protect the fabric from ultraviolet radiation and from abrasion due to shipping and handling. Keep geotextile dry until installed. 2.03 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC - TYPE R For subgrade reinforcement under riprap: Either woven or nonwoven polyester, polypropylene, stabilized nylon, polyethylene or polyvinlidene chloride. Fabdc shall have the minimum strength values in the weakest principle direction. Nonwoven fabric may be needle punched, heat bonded, resin bonded, or combinations thereof. B. Insect, rodent, mildew, and rot resistant. J Section 02270-2 C~ Furnish in a WraPping wl~ich wiil prOtect fabric from uitravi01et radiatiOn and from abrasion , dug to shipping and hauling. Keep geotextile dry until installed. D. Clearly mark fabric rolls showing fabric type. E. If sewn seams are used, fUrnish a field sewn seam sample produced from the geotextile fabric and (h~ead and with the equipment to be Used on the project, prior to installation. F. Comply with the following physical proPerties: Test Method Value Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) Puncture Strength (lbs) using 5/16-inch Flat-tipped Rod Mullen Burst (lbs/in2) Elongation at Required Strength (percent) Equivalent Opening Size (U.S. Standard Sieve) Water Flow Rate (gal/min/f¢) at 50 mm Constant Head ASTM D-4632 200 min. Modified ASTM D-3787 80 min. ASTM D-3786 ASTM D-4632 ASTM D-4751 ASTM D-4491 250 min. 20 min. 30-140 10 min. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install devices before construction activities begin. B. Proceed carefully with construction adjacent to stream channels to avoid washing, sloughing, or deposition of materials into the stream. If possible, the work area should be diked off and the volume and velocity of water that crosses disturbed areas be reduced by ;:;~" means of planned engineering works (diversion, detention basins, berms). C. Unless noted on drawings, do not remove trees and surface vegetation. 3.02 D. Expose the smallest practical area of soil at any given time through construction scheduling. Make the duration of such exposure before application of temporary erosion control measures or final revegetation as short as practicable. EROSION MAT INSTALLATION ~" A. Place erosion ~iat irnmedi~iely after seeding Or Sodding operations haVe been completed. Before mat placement, remove all material or clods over 1-1/2 inches in diameter and alt ,-, organic material or other foreign material which interfere with the mat bearing completely ~ .. On the soil or sod. B. Any small stones or clods which prevent contact of the mats with the soil shall be pressed in the soil with a small lawn-type roller or by other effective means. The mat shall have its lateral edge s© impressed in the soil as to permit runoff water to flow over it. Section 02270'3 The matting strips shall be rolled on or laid in direction of flow. Spread mat evenly, smoothly, in a natural position without stretching and with all parts bearing on soil and place blanket with netting on top. Overlap adjacent strips at least 4 inches. Overlap strip ends at least 10 inches. Make overlaps with the upgrade section on top. D. Bury upgrade end of each strip of fabric or blanket at least 6 inches in a vertical slot cut in the soil and press soil firmly against the embedded fabric or blanket. Anchor mats in place with vertically driven staples, driven until their tops are flush with the soil. Space staples at 3-foot centers along mat edges and stagger space at 3~foot centers through the center. Place staples at 10-inch centers at end or junction slots. F. Reseed areas damaged or destroyed during erosion mat placing operations as specified for original seeding. G. Dispose of surplus excavated materials, and all stones, clods or other foreign matedal removed in the preparation of the seeded soil or sodded surface before placing mat. H. Following mat placement, uniformly apply water to the area to moisten seedbed to 2-inch depth and in a manner to avoid erosion. Maintain erosion mat and make satisfactory repairs of damage from erosion, traffic, fires or other causes until work acceptance. 3.03 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC - TYPE R A. Before placing fabric, grade area smooth and remove stones, organic matter, or other foreign material which would interfere with fabric being completely in contact with soil. Place fabric loosely and lay parallel to direction of water movement. Pinning or stapling is acceptable to hold geotextile in place. Overlap or sew together separate pieces of fabric. Overlap joints a minimum 24 inches in the flow direction. After placement, do not expose fabric more than 48 hours before covering. C. Cover damaged areas with a patch of fabric using a 3-foot overlap in all directions. 3.04 SILT FENCE INSTALLATION A. Erect silt fence before starting construction operations which might cause sedimentation or siltation at site of proposed silt fence. Construct silt fence in an arc or horseshoe shape with ends pointing up slope. Construct silt fence to the dimensions and details shown on drawings. Remove silt fences after slopes and ditches have been stabilized and turf developed to the extent that future erosion is unlikely. Dispose of materials remaining after removal. Inspect all silt fences immediately after each rainfall and at least daily. Correct deficiencies immediately. Where construction activity changes the earth contour and drainage runoff make a daily review to ensure that silt fences are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, install additional silt fences. Section 02270-4 Remove and dispose of sediment deposits. Sediment deposits remaining in place after the silt fence is no longer required shall be dressed to conform with the existing grade and the area topsoiled, fertilized and seeded as required. END OF SECTION Section 02270-5 SECTION 02276 MODULAR RETAINING WALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Interlocking modular concrete retaining wall units and accessories. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C90 - Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. B. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. C. ASTM C145 - Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. D. ASTM D4475 - Apparent Horizontal Shear Strength of Pultruded Reinforced Plastic Rods by the Short-Beam Method. E. ASTM D2339 - Strength Properties of Adhesives in Two-Ply Wood Construction in Shear by Tension Loading. F. G.R.L - Geosynthetic Research Institute. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Masonry units, when delivered to the site, shall be thoroughly cured and shall be dry. When stored on the site, they shall not be in contact with the ground and shall be kept clean. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit gradation of base leveling pad matedal and unit fill material. C. Submit color samples for OWNER's selection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MODULAR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Masonry units shall be Keystone Retaining Units, or equal, as manufactured by Madison Block and Stone in accordance with ASTM C90 and ASTM C140. Section 02276-1 B. Masonry units shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. The concrete shall have a maximum moisture absorption of 8%. Units shall have angled sides capable of concave and convex alignment curves with a minimum radius of 3.5 feet. For straight walls, cap units shall have nonangled straight sides. D. Standard units shall be 8 inches high by 18 inches wide, with sculptured rock face texture. 2.02 CONNECTING PINS A. Units shall be interlocked with noncorrosive fiberglass pins. B. Connecting pins shall be 1/2-inch diameter thermoset isopthalic polyester resin-pultruded fiberglass reinforcement rods. C. Pins shall have a minimum flexural strength of 128,000 psi and short beam shear of 6,400 pounds per ASTM D4475. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Construction adhesive shall be Keystone Kapseal, or equal, and shall meet requirements of ASTM D2339. 2.04 BASE LEVELING PAD A. Base leveling pad material shall be 6 inches of Compacted crushed stone, 3/8-inch to 3/4-inch. Pea gravel shall not be alloWed. 2.05 UNIT FILL A. Unit fill shall be free draining, well graded crushed stone, 3/8-inch to 3/4-inch, with no more than 5% passing the No. 200 sieve. 2.O6 BACKFILL A. BaCkfill fOr use beyond drainage zone behind units shall be as specified in Section 02222 - ~ Excavation, Fil~, Backfill and Grading. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Foundation soil shall be excavated as required for leveling pad dimensions shown on the drawings. Subgrade shall be approved by the Project Soils Engineer to confirm that the actual foundation soil conditions meet or exceed assumed design strength. Soils not meeting required strength shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material. Section 02276-2 3.02 BASE LEVELING PAD A. Leveling pad materials shall be placed as shown on the drawings, to a minimum thickness of 6 inches. Materials shall be compacted so as to provide a level surface on which to place the first course of units. Compaction shall be to 95% of standard proctor for sand or gravel type materials. For crushed rock, material shall be densely compacted. C. Leveling pad shall be prepared to ensure complete contact of retaining wall unit with base. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Units shall be installed to conform to elevations shown on the drawings. Place first course of concrete wall units on the base leveling pad. The units shall be checked for level and alignment. Ensure that units are in full contact with base. Bottom of wall shall be minimum 8 inches below finished grade and shall be lower if required by design. C. Units are placed side by side for full length of wall alignment. Alignment may be done by a string line or offset from base line. D. Units shall be interlocked with fiberglass pins. Provide l-inch setback. Pins shall protrude into adjoining courses above a minimum of 1-inch. Two pins required per unit. Fill all voids inside and between units and drainage zone behind units with unit fill material. Tamp fill. Do not use automated compaction equipment directly over the units. Walk behind mechanical compaction equipment may be used to compact soils that are placed beyond the drainage zone behind the unit. Mobile mechanical compaction equipment shall not be used within 5 feet of the wall face. F. While placing material behind first course of units, replace the passive soil wedge at the front of these units. G. Sweep all excess material from top of units and install next course. Ensure each course is completely unit filled, backfilled, and compacted prior to proceeding to next course. Place next course, pull each unit forward, away from the embankment, against pins in the previous course, and backfill as the course is completed. Repeat procedure to the extent of wall height. Provide permanent mechanical connection of cap units to wall units with construction adhesive. Apply adhesive to top surface of unit below, and place cap unit into position. Place cap units over projecting pin from units below. Pull forward to setback position. Backfill and compact to finished grade. As appropriate where the wall changes elevation, units shall be stepped with grade or turned into the embankment with a convex return end. Minimum of three units shall be installed into the grade on compacted leveling pad in area of convex return end. Units shall be laid to create the minimum radius possible. END OF SECTION Section 02276-3 -- SECTION 02375 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS (CAISSONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Machine drilled shaft and placement of shaft liner. B. Placing concrete, reinforcement and dowel bars. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02222 - Excavating: Excavating to working level. B. Section 02356 - Pile Load Tests: Requirements for pier load tests. C. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Requirements for concrete reinforcement. 1.03 D. Section 03300 - Cast-in,Place Concrete: grade beams. SUPPLEMENTAL UNIT PRICES Requirements for concrete and placement of CONTRACTOR shall fill in a unit price for "Drilled Concrete Piers: Additional Length," "Drilled Concrete Piers; Deduct" and "Drilled Concrete Piers; Obstruction Time," including all elements in this section, in the blank space provided in the Bid to apply in the event of any deductions'from Or'additions to the work. All drilled concrete piers shown or specified shall be included in the lump sum bid. B. Determination of Unit Measurements: Identified by site measurements and verified by ENGINEER. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AASHTO M36- Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe. B. ACl 336.1 - Construction of End Bearing Drilled Piers. C. ASTM A252 - Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. A record of soil borings is included in the Specifications solely for the information of the CONTRACTOR. The Drilled Concrete Pier CONTRACTOR is responsible for visiting the site, ascertaining the condition thereof, and the COnditions under which work is to be done. Section 02375-1 1-382-636/03-04 B. Drilled Concrete Pier CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for his interpretation of soil boring data and for the conclusions he draws from his inspection of the site. Drilled concrete Pier CONTRACTOR shall familiarize himself with the geological information in the area of the project and to the possibility of encountering water or other difficult conditions in the excavation of the augercast piles. Claims for extra compensation or extensions of time because of variations in the ground water table will not be honored. D. It shall be assumed for purposes of this contract that the soil materials are not sufficiently stable for the drilled holes to retain their shape without support from the steel liner. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The equipment shall be capable of accurately boring holes of the sizes and depths shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Shaft Liner: ASTM A252, Grade I 2 3; single length steel pipe with plain lapped ends, of diameter and wall thickness indicated. B. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03300. C. Reinforcement: Specified in Section 03200. D. Equipment: Appropriate to dewater excavated shaft as needed. PART 3 - EXECUTION PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. PREPARATION A. Use placement method which will not cause damage to nearby structures. B. Ail excavated material shall be removed and disposed of at a site obtained by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to the OWNER. C. Protect structures near the work from damage. D. Prepare to place piles from existing site elevations. 3.01 3.02 3.03 Section 02375-2 1-382.836/03-04 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Construct piers in accordance with ACl 336.1. B. Drill vertical pier Shafts to diameters and depths indicated. C. Place steel liners during drilling operations. Set firmly in place. Use shaft liner if free water is encountered. D. Clean shaft and bottOm of loose material. Maintain shafts free of water. E. Allow inspection of shaft and liner Prior t© placement Of reinforcement and Concrete. F. Place reinforcing Steel in accordance with Section 03200. G. Place concrete in single pour, in accordance with Section 03300 with equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. H. Progressively raise shaft liner during concrete placement. Do not permit top of pier to deform to a mushroom shape due to premature removal of liner. I. Provide dowels for connection of grade beams. J. Set tops of piles to elevations indicated. K. Under conditions of paragraph 1.06 D, adjacent piers shall not be placed closer than 7 feet center to center until the concrete in the piers has set for 24 hours. Drilled Concrete Pier CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for insudng that Icad from pier- placing equipment does not shear the soil and damage the top of the pile. This may require maintenance of a certain distance between the pile and loads by cribbing. If obstructions including, but not limited to, boulders and timbers are encountered which shall prevent placing the pile to the depth required, or shall cause the pile to drift from the required location, the pile shall be completed and a record made of the actual pile length and alignment. If required by the ENGINEER, an additional adjacent pile shall be placed and paid for at the supplemental unit price. N. Reinforcing for the piers shall be as shown on the drawings. All pile reinforcing shall be furnished and placed by the Augercast Piling CONTRACTOR. Acceptable methods shall be provided to facilitate proper centering of reinforcing installed in piers. O. In advancing the caissons at the construction site, it is possible that the abandoned sewer lines will be encountered. These sewer lines will need to be broken up and excavated such that the caissons can reach their required bearing elevations. Any additional time required to advance the caissons through these obstructions is covered in the supplemental unit pdces for obstruction time (See Section 00400 - Bid). 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From VerticaI: I in 48. SectiOn 02375~3 B. Maximum Variation From Design Top Elevation: Plus 1 inches (25 mm), minus 1~inch (25 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 2inches (50 mm). D. Maximum Out-of-Position: ACI 336.1 Category A B C. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL The Drilled Concrete Pier CONTRACTOR shall prepare a report on all foundations placed. The report shall include date, pier dimensions, pier locations, actual top and bottom elevations, and any other pertinent information. This report shall be signed by the DdIled Concrete Pier CONTRACTOR's superintendent and submitted to the ENGINEER daily. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400-Quality Control. C. Project soils engineer shall verify pile bearing capacities during caisson drilling. 3.07 UNACCEPTABLE PIERS A. Unacceptable Piers: Piers that fail, are placed out of position, are below elevations, or are damaged. B. Provide additional piers or replace piers failing to conform to specified requirements. END OIF SECTION Section 02375-4 SECTION 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes asphaltic concrete paving, and tack coat. Related Sections and DivisiOns: Applicable 2rovisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. CONTRACTOR is cautioned that existing private and pUblic roads and shoulders may not hold up to typical construction traffic or activities. CONTRACTOR shall repair all roads, shoulders, and paved areas damaged during the project in accordance with this section. Gravel shoulders, graVel roads, and parking areas shall be repaired in accordance with Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course. Payment: Payment for asphaltic concrete paving Shall bb considered incidental to the project and included in the unit prices bid. 1.02 REFERENCES ~ A. Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to ~ ! the State of Wisconsin Department of TranspOrtatiOn, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction, current edition, inCluding all issued supplemental ~ specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Street or road shall include streets, roads, driveways, and parking lots. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to the commencement of paving, mix designs and aggregate sieve analysis shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Asphaltic pavement shall be Type LV. Asphaltic material for binder course and surface course shall be asphaltic cement type AC in the penetration range 120 - 150. B. Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Section 407.2.1.1 of the Standard ~ : SPecifications. Aggregate for the binder course shall be Gradation No. 2~ Aggregate for the surface course shall be Gradation No. 3. Section 02510-1 1-382~36103-04 Replacement of paved surfaces shall be 3 inches in thickness or existing thickness, whichever is greater. Binder course shall be 1-3/4 inches minimum. Surface course shall be 1-114 inches minimum. Materials for tack coat shall conform to the requirements of Section 402 and shall be MS-2, SS-l, SS-lh, or CSS-1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TACK COAT A. All work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications. If asphaltic surface course is applied to an existing street, or is not applied the same day as binder course, the existing street or binder surface shall be tack coated prior to surface paving. Prior to placement of tack coat the streets shall be thoroughly cleaned and broomed. Tack coat shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 gallons per square yard immediately prior to placement of asphaltic surface course. C. In situations where traffic must be maintained, tack coat shall not be placed on the traveled half of the street until traffic can be switched to the new pavement. 3.02 JOINTS Ao Joints between old and new pavements or between successive day's work shall be constructed and treated as to insure thorough and continuous bond between the old and new mixtures. Transverse construction joints shall be constructed by cutting the material back for its full depth so as to expose the full depth of the course. Where a header is used, the cutting may be omitted provided the joint conforms to the specified thickness. These joints shall be treated with tack coat material applied with a hose and spray nozzle attachment to fully coat the joint surface. Bo The longitudinal joint shall be made by overlapping the screed on the previously laid material for a width of not more than 2 inches, and depositing a sufficient amount of asphaltic mixture so that the finished joint will be smooth and tight. Longitudinal joints in the Surface course shall at no time be placed immediately over similar joints in the Binder course beneath. A minimum distance of 12 inches shall be permitted between the location of the joints in the Binder course and the location of similar joints in the Surface course above. C. All costs for furnishing and applying tack coat to butt joints as specified above shall be considered incidental. 3.03 FINISHING ROADWAY The finished base course shall be fine graded in preparation for asphaltic concrete paving. Base course ramps at all existing pavement shall be removed to provide a full depth butt joint. Base course around manhole castings and valve boxes shall be hand trimmed and compacted with a vibratory plate compactor. Section 02510-2 B. This item shall include all of the following preparatory and finishing items and any other incidental items of work, required for construction. Asphaltic ramps around manholes on existing binder course to receive surface course shall be removed. Asphaltic ramps shall be installed on all manholes and at all butt joints in areas to receive binder course only. C. Finishing roadway shall be considered incidental to asphaltic paving. TESTING ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A. ENGINEER may require samples of asphaltic concrete for testing. CONTRACTOR shall cUt samples from the finished pavement Where marked by ENGINEER and patch the sample area. Samples for sieve analysis and asphalt content will be taken by ENGINEER prior to placement. 3.05 ASPHALTIC PAVING Asphaltic paving work shall include the construction of plant mixed asphaltic concrete pavement in the areas shown on the drawings. All work shall be performed in accordance with Section 407 of the Standard Specifications. B. Prior to commencement of paving operations, CONTRACTOR shall examine the finished road bed. CON~RAC'FOR shall notify ENGINEER of any areas of suspected instability. C. The pavement structure for new roads shall be determined from the standard cross-sections provided on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 02510-3 SECTION O26OO BURIED PIPING AND APPURTENANCES PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. All underground piping and valves of every description. 2. Excavation, dewatedng, and backfilling for all work under this section unless otherwise noted. 3. Concrete foundations, and anchor bolts for all equipment furnished under this section. 4. Underground piping connections to all equipment, whether furnished under this section or not. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMI'I-rALS Ao Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01300 - Submittals for shop drawing submittal procedures. 2. General arrangement drawings of 3-inch or larger exterior (below ground) ductile iron, piping shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval. Drawings shall include proposed length, location and elevation of pipe, fittings, valves and appurtenances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION All materials used in the manufacture, assembly and painting of piping and valves in contact with water shall be compatible with potable water supplies and in contact with chemical feed systems shall be compatible with the chemicals being used. All glues, solvents, solders, etc., shall likewise be compatible. For instance, no lead base solders shall be used. All materials in contact with water to be used for potable water supplies shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Bo Size and Type: 1. All materials shall conform to the size and type shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications. 2. In joining two dissimilar types of pipe, standard fittings shall be used when available. In the event standard fittings are not available, the method of joining shall be standard selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted for review by ENGINEER. Piping appurtenances shall be made of the materials specified. All appurtenances not designated as to type shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted for review by ENGINEER. 2.02 MANHOLES A. General: All provisions of Drawing 01-975-43A, enclosed in these specifications, except those contrary to provisions delineated herein or on the drawings shall apply. Section 02600-1 1'382-636/03-04 Unless Otherwise specified or shown on the drawings for special manholes, all manholes shall be reinforced concrete precast manholes. Reinforced concrete manhole base sections, riser sections; cones, and flat slabs shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-478. Solid precast manhole bottoms shall be provided except where shown on the drawings. Manholes shall be provided with minimum diameters as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. Diameters shall be increased from the minimum for the following: To provide between adjacent pipe a minimum distance equal to one-half the outside diameter of the largest pipe measured circumferentially along the inside face of the manhole. To accommodate flexible manhole connections used. To accommodate multiple valves or valve assemblies. C. Manhole top sections shall be precast reinforced eccentric cones unless precast reinforced fiat slabs are specifiCally required or shoWn on the drawings, or are necessary beCause of shallow depth. Flat slabs shall have opening offset unless Otherwise required or shown. Flat slabs shall be designed for HS20 loadings. Manhole sections shall be provided in such combinations as to conveniently make up the required depth of the manholes. A maximum of two handling hOles per length of pipe will be permitted. All joints shall be tongue and groove and shall be sealed with rubber o-ring gaskets of circular cross section or mastic compounds. Gaskets shall conform to . ASTM C~43. Mastic compounds shall be Ram-nek, Kent-Seal, Mas-stik, or equal. E. ExCept as otherwise specified, connection of pipes to manholes shall be with KOR-N-SEAL, A LOK, Interpace, PS-X, or equal joint. The joint shall provide a flexible, watertight connection between pipe and manhole. Manhole connections for storm sewer mains and leads may be made with poured-in-place concrete during completion of manhble interioi: in lieu of above. F. Manhole Steps: ' '1: Manho'le steps shall be provided as shown on the drawings by manhole manufacturer. Manhole steps shall be M.A. Industries, Inc. PS1-PF with 1/2-inch diameter steel reinforcing rod, conforming to ASTM A-615, Grade 60, With molded co-polymer polypropylene covering conforming to ASTM D4101 Type PP200B33450Z02, or equal. 2. Manhole steps shall be inserted in manhole riser, cone and fiat slab sections prior to the initial set of the concrete in accordance ?vith ASTM C478 and shall have maximum embedment and PUll,out resistance in accordance with ASTM C478. 3. The top step shall be located 10 inches or less from the top of the cone section. Steps shall be a maximum 16 inches apart. G. Manhole Frames and Covers: 1. Manhole frames and covers shall be provided for the openings indiCated on the '':;drawings. 2. For standard manholeS, frames shall be Neenah R-1550, or equal, with Type B lid, with two concealed pickholes equipped with self-sealing gaskets. Frames for valve manholes shall be Neenah R-6065 with Type B lid, with two COncealed pickholes eqUipped with self-sealing gaskets, or equal. Catch basin grates in paved areas shall be Neenah R-2668, catch basin frame and Type C grate, or equal. Catch basin grates in other areas shall be Neenah R4340-B, or equal. Section 02600-2 Valve boxes shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Valve boxes shall be Neenah R-7506-B, or equal. CONTRACTOR shall verify that all valve boxes are targe enough to accommodate all operating nuts and wrenches. Provide one "Tee" valve key operator for each valve manhole, and one for each tank with tank or channel drain. Area drains as shown on the drawings shall be constructed using a section of 24-inch diameter RCP bell and spigot joint pipe. The frame for the area drain at the sludge storage tanks 3 and 4 shall be Neenah R-2300 with Type C grate or equal. Castings for area drains shall be Neenah R-4353 beehive grate with frames. The pipe bell I.D. shall be greater than the casting O.D. so that the casting will fit within the bell without becoming wedged against the side of the pipe. 2.03 BURIED PiPiNG Ductile Iron Piping and Ductile Iron Fittings: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, ail underground piping 3 inches in diameter or larger shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical joints or push-on joints. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping shall be minimum Special Thickness Class 53 with a minimum rated working pressure of 250 psi. Pipe wall thickness shall be furnished as required by: AWWA C150 for buried piping with the depth of cover as shown on the drawings for laying condition 4; Special Thickness Class 53 minimum unless otherwise shown or specified. 2. Except as otherwise specified, underground pipe shall have mechanical joints or push-on joints conforming to AWWA C110 and C111 with vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA Cl 11. Bolts on exterior joints shall be high-strength Iow-alloy steel (Corten, or equal) conforming to AWWA Cl 11. Certificate to that effect shall be provided. 3. Mechanical joints shall be restrained with Meg-A-Lug Series 1100 or 1100SD, by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., or equal, restraint. Push-on joints shall be restrained with Meg-A-Lug, Sedes 1100HD or 1700, by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, TR Flex by U.S. Pipe Company, or equal. Underground pipe shall have mechanical joint or push-on joint ductile iron fittings conforming to AWWA C110 and C111 or AWWA C153 compact fittings with a minimum rated working pressure of 150 psi. Gaskets for fittings shall be as specified for underground piping. All ductile iron fittings shall be American, Clow, Griffin, Tyler, U.S. Pipe, or equal. The words, "Ductile Iron" and the weight and class of pipe shall be plainly marked on each piece of pipe. Unless otherwise specified, all ductile iron piping and fittings shall be cement mortar lined and asphaltic coated inside. Unless otherwise specified, underground piping and fittings shall be asphaltic coated outside. Cement mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C104. Asphaltic coating shall conform to applicable standards herein for the pipe and fittings. Drainage Piping: All process drain piping and all underground piping designated as drain (D) shall be ductile iron. All underground drainage piping more than 2 feet from building walls shall be ductile iron as specified. Connections to drainage piping from buildings shall be made within 2 feet from the building wall and shall be made with a Fernco, or equal, flexible coupling. All buried ductile iron piping and appurtenances shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with AWWA C105. Polyethylene encasement shall be Class C (black) and shall be minimum 8 mil thickness. Section 02600-3 1-382-636/03-04 B. Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe: 1. Reinforced concrete pipe for sanitary sewer and storm sewer (STS) shall meet the requirements of ASTM C76 for circular pipe and ASTM C507 for elliptical pipe. Strength and class of the pipe shall conform to the drawings and as specified herein. All reinforced concrete pipe used in the work shall be minimum Class V pipe and shall be of adequate strength to suppor~ the trench loads applied. 2. Standard and special fittings shall be of approved manufacture and shall conform to requirements of the trade and these specifications. All fittings shall be of a strength at least equal to that of the sewer main and shall be jointed with the same type of joint as used in the sewer main. 3. Not more than one lift hole per length of pipe shall be used in storm sewer. Lift holes will not be permitted in sanitary sewers. 4. Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be joined with Type R-4 joints which meet the requirements of the ASTM C443. All pipe shall be specifically built to fit the gasket used. Gaskets for sanitary sewer shall be continuous O-dng of circular cross section. Gaskets for storm sewer shall be Tylox, or equal. Provide precast concrete endwalls on all storm sewers. C. Copper Piping: 1. Copper piping shall conform to the requirements of the "Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube," ASTM B88. 21 All underground water supply piping 2 inches and smaller shall be Type K soft copper with compression fittings. Joints shall not be used under floor slabs. 3. Shutoff valves shall be placed on each branch for all underground piping. Galvanized Iron Piping: Unless otherwise shown or specified, all piping smaller than 3 inches shall be extra strong galvanized iron pipe, with galvanized malleable iron fittings. Pipe shall conform to the "Specifications for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Uses," ASTM A-53. E. Gas Piping: 1. All natural gas piping shall be provided in accordance with all state, local and utility codes pertaining to natural gas service or service requirements. 2. All underground natural gas piping shall be Chevron Plexco yellow pipe PE 2406 polyethylene pipe for gas service, or equal. Pipe material shall be polyethylene resin, Type II, Class B, Category 5, Grade P24 classified according to ASTM 1248, Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion Materials. The cell classification shall be PE 2B5333E according to ASTM D 3350, Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe Fitting Materials. Pipe shall have a minimum SDR of 11.0. Pipe shall have a minimum burial depth of 3.0 feet. Joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Alt buried gas pipe shall be wrapped with a 12 gauge tracer wire routed with pipe to above ground at each end of pipe. All entrances to building shall be above grade and use a riser pipe connection to below grade structures with transition fitting by Lwall Manufacturing, or ~qual, t~) ~rahsiti~n from PE pipe to steel pipe. Steel section shall be epoxy coated with threaded end. ~.04 VALVES (VALVES FOR UNDERGROUND SERVICE ARE SpECiFiED IN DIVISION 15) A. Valves shall conform to Section 15040 - Piping and Appurtenances. Section 02600-4 2.05 CONCRETE A. All concrete poured under this Contract, unless shown or specified otherwise, shall conform to the requirements of Division 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Ac Underground Piping: 1. Except where noted or specified, all ductile iron underground piping shall be laid in accordance with AWVVA C600 with the conditions that a) blocking shall not be used to support pipe, and b) all bends and fittings shall be restrained as specified below, and pipe joints shall be restrained in all directions from all bends and fittings to the length as specified below. 2. For restrained pipe joints, all underground ductile iron pipe joints shall be restrained to the length listed below in all directions from all bends and fittings. Where wall penetrations occur at less than the length indicated below, the wall fittings shall also be restrained. Additional restraint shall be provided inside of structures as required. MINIMUM LENGTH (IN FEET) RESTRAINED PIPE FROM BENDS OR FITTINGS Pipe Size, Inches Test Pressure, psi 10 25 50 100 150 3-12 5 18 18 36 14-18 5 18 36 54 20-24 5 18 36 54 30 10 36 36 72 36 10 36 36 72 42 10 36 54 90 48 10 36 54 108 54 72 9O 108 3. Except where noted or specified, reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid in accordance with ASTM C12. 4. Gas piping shall be installed in accordance with state, local and utility codes and the National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA No. 54. All natural gas piping shall be tested in accordance with all state, local and utility codes pertaining to natural gas service or service requirements. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for natural gas service and shall coordinate service size and location, and shall furnish and install all shut-off valves and pressure reduction as required. 5. Plumbing system shall be installed and tested in accordance with local and state plumbing code requirements and applicable portions of Wisconsin Enrolled Commercial Building Code. Where requirements conflict, the stricter standard shall apply. 6. CONTRACTOR shall excavate and lay all pipe to the line and grade shown on the drawings with bell ends uphill wherever possible. If not possible, CONTRACTOR shall excavate and lay pipe to the line and grade shown on the drawings with bell ends in the direction of laying. Grade stakes will be required for all lines. Water piping and Section 02600-5 1-382-636/03-04 chemical solution piping shall have a minimum of 6-1/2 feet of cover. Unless shown otherwise, drainage piping shall clear floor slabs or footings by a minimum of 6 inches. 7. Where piping is laid in native soil, the width of trench below the top of the pipe shall not exceed the nominal diameter of the pipe ptus 2 feet for all pipelines. Where the maximum trench width is exceeded, the pipe shall be placed in a concrete cradle or a stronger pipe used. If the maximum trench width is exceeded for any reason other than as otherwi,s,e specified, the concrete cradle or the stronger pipe shall be placed at : ~' : CONTRACTORS expense. 8. ExCept as otherwise specified, all underground pipe shall be bedded in crushed stone or crushed gravel aggregate. Copper and polyethylene encased piping shall be ':: .' : bedded in compacted sand. Ductile iron piping, except as otherwise specified, shall be placed using Class "C" Bedding Details as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. All other piping shall be placed using Class "B" Bedding Details as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A. CONTRACTOR shall perform all necessary excavation and shall provide all required materials to provide this bedding. Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-33. The material shall be hard, tough and durable, and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Crushed Stone · Aggregate Percentage by Weight Passing Crushed Stone Crushed Gravel Chip~ Agg~:eg~e Bedding Sand 1-inch 100 -- 100 -- 3/4-inch 90 to 100 -- 90 to 100 -- 1/2-inch -- 100 -- 3/8-inch 20 to 55 90 to 100 20 to 55 100 No. 4 0 t© 10 -- 0 to 10 95 to 100 No. 8 0 to 5 0 to 15 0 to 5 80 to 100 No. 30 ~- 0 to 5 ~- 25 to 60 No. 100 ...... 5 to 20 Passing No. 200 ...... 2 to 10 9. CONTRACTOR shall furnish ENGINEER with a sieve analysis of the bedding material for approval prior to construction. 10. No materials native to the trench shall be used as bedding material unless they meet the above sPecifications. 11. Any pipe or fittings cracked in cutting or handling or otherwise not free from defects shall not be used. Pipe must be kept clean of mortar, cement, clay, sand or other material. 12. Trenches shall be kept water-free and dry during bedding, laying and jointing. CONTRACTOR shall provide, operate and maintain all pumps or other equipment necessary to drain and keep a~l excavation pits and trenches and the entire subgrade area free from water under any and all circumstances that may arise. 13. Material which is to be placed from the bedding material around and to I foot above the top of all pipes shall be termed cover material. Except as Otherwise specified, a) cover material shall consist of durable granular particles ranging in size from fine to coarse in a substantially uniform combination, (b) unwashed bank run sand and crushed bank run gravel will be considered generally acceptable for cover material, c) no stones larger than 3/4'inCh in their greatest dimension shall be allowed in the cover material and d)native materials may be used if they conform to the above specifications. Cover material for copper piping shall be sand. ~ '. SectiOn 02600-6 1-382-636/03-04 14. Cover material for polyethylene encased piping shall be sand, unwashed bank run sand, or river gravel. Crushed stone or crushed gravel or other bedding or cover material that will damage polyethylene encasement will not be acceptable and shall not be used. 15. Cover material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width on each side of the pipe, fittings and appurtenances simultaneously. Cover matedal shall be placed over the top of the pipe to the height as shown on Drawing 01-975-43A for Class "B" (12 inches) or Class "C" (6 inches) Bedding. This backfill shall be placed by hand in 6-inch layers and shall be compacted using hand tamping bars and/or mechanical tampers. If bedding material conforming to any of the above three crushed stone or crushed gravel gradations is used as cover material, it need not be tamped. The remaining 6 inches to make up the required 1 foot of select cover material for Class "C" Bedding shall be granular material specified previously with no stones larger than 3/4-inch. 16. All cover material shall be placed in maximum 6-inch layers and compacted by hand tamping. Compaction shall be equivalent to that described under "Compacted Fill and Backfill" as specified in Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. 17. No trenches shall be backfilted until the piping has been observed by ENGINEER prior to closing the ditch. Except as otherwise specified, all backfill above 1 foot above the pipe shall be "Compacted Fill and Backfill" as specified in Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. 18. The locations and elevations of existing piping and manholes are approximate. Where necessary, existing piping shall be exposed by CONTRACTOR to confirm location and elevation prior to installing new piping. Any changes in pipe location or elevation shall be approved by OWNER. 19. Polyethylene encasement of ductile iron pipe and appurtenances shall be in accordance with AWWA C105. Use Method A for pipe and Method C at valves. All tapping locations shall be taped and copper pipe shall be polyethylene encased within 3 feet from connection to ductile iron pipe. Repair any rips or punctures prior to backfilling pipe. General Excavation: 1. CONTRACTOR shall do all excavation, undercutting, dewatering, and backfilling necessary for work under this contract unless otherwise noted. All trees, shrubs and improved areas outside the excavation shall be protected from damage. 2. Work shall conform to other sections of Division 2, except where modified by this section. 3. Pipe shall be placed only on dry foundations. No extra payment will be made to CONTRACTOR for dewatering. 4. Excavation shall include all necessary clearing of excavated areas, tree removal, all grubbing, all wet, dry, fill and rock excavation, the removal of pavement, filling and alt incidental work such as tunneling, sheet piling, shoring, underpinning, pumping, bailing, transportation and all fill and backfilling. All above work shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. 5. CONTRACTOR shall excavate whatever materials are encountered as required to place at the elevations shown, ali pipe, manholes, and other work as required to complete the project as shown. The bottom of the excavation shall be leveled off, all loose and disturbed soil shall be removed, and it shall be hand tamped prior to pipe, manhole, etc., installation. Where requested by ENGINEER, original material below the excavation necessary for construction according to grades shown or specified shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. Payment will also be in accordance with Section 02222 - Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Grading. 6. The excavation at the crossing of all underground utility services in place shall be as narrow as practicable. All underground services shall be protected from damage and Section 02600-7 ~-382~36~o3-04 ~ rn~aintained in service at their original location and grade during the process of the ' work. Any damage to underground services shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to OWNER or to the owner of the service. The present underground services shown on ¢-- the drawings are located in accordance with available data. Encountering these ~ services at a different location or encountering services not shown shall not release CONTRACTOR from the above stated conditions. ~ 7. Excavated native material that is unsuitable or not required for filling shall be removed from the site. MaterialS to be used for fill and sUitable for this purpose shall be deposited where required, except that no fill shall be placed where trenches for ~: sewers, water lines or other services will be located until after the trench work is I .... completed. 8. CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate shoring, sheet piling and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing into the excavation, and shall do ali shoring and ?. underpinning necessary to properly support adjacent or adjoining structures. All . shoring, sheet piling and underpinning must be maintained until permanent support is provided. ,'~ 9. Any water, drainage, gas, sewer or electric lines encountered in the excavation which ~. are not to be disturbed shall be properly underpinned and supported. Any service %' connections encountered Which are to be removed shall be cut off at limits of the excavation and capped in accordance with the requirements of or permits governing ~ ' ~ "'' Such rer~ovalsl Any permits required for this work will be obtained by OWNER upon · . request of CONTRACTOR. C. Valve Boxes: The valve box shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve With the box cover flUSh with the finished ground elevation. Solid 4-inch concrete blocks shall be placed under the base of valve boxes so that the bottom of the base is about 2 inches away from contact with the valve bonnet. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Aj' ' ~O~T~?0'~ sl~aii' ~l~de'th~' c~st ~)f al-i t~ti~g, '~lea'n'ih~ ancJ disinfection in the price Bid. All work shall be inspected, tes(ed, and approved in aCcordance With federal, state and local rules and regulations. All work shall also be tested as specified in this section. Unless indicated in wdting before testing begins, ali tests shall be witnessed by ENGINEER, and ~ ~-others as necessary. Test results shall be recorded and reports or appropriate certificates shall be submitted to ENGINEER in triplicate. C. All new piping shall be tested. All underground piping shall be backfilled or properly . secured to avoid damage during testing. Should underground piping fail test, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for removal and replacement of backfill. All piping, .. interior or exposed, shall be subject to test before being covered with insulation, or paint. i '!' ~' ~,11 Pipiii~'and appurtenances shall be watertight or airtight and free from visible leaks. D. All piping shall be flushed or blown out after installation pdor to testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary piping connections, water, air, test pumping equipment, water meter, bulkheads, valves, pressure gauge and other equipment, materials and facilities necessary to complete the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary .sectionalizing devices and vents for testing. E. Pressure Tests: The test pressure in all lines shall be held for one hour during which time . the leakage allowance shall not exceed that specified. In case repairs are required, the Pressure test shall be repeated until the pipeline installation conforms to the specified Section 02600-8 requirements. Pumps, air compressors, instrumentation, and similar equipment shall not be subjected to the pressure tests. Fluid Abbreviation or Name Minimum Test Test Pressure in psi Medium Leakage Allowance Designation Wastewater and Drains 10 Water "A" (Gravity Flow) Natural Gas "C .... C .... C''(2) (2) Leakage allowance designation "A" shall mean not more than 0.002 gallon per hour per inch diameter per 100-feet of buried pipe for all piping except buried mechanical joint or push-on joint pipe. Buried mechanical and push-on joint pipe shall meet the leakage specifications of AWWA C600. Leakage allowance Designation "C" for natural gas piping shall be in accordance with local gas utility leakage allowances. Minimum test pressure and test medium shall also be in accordance with local gas utility requirements. Prior to making final connection between new and existing piping, new piping shall be tested as specified above. Infiltration/Exfiltration Tests: 1. Infiltration/exfiltration tests for all gravity sewers and drains will be as follows: If ground water is above the pipe, measurements shall be taken to determine the rate of infiltration into the pipe. If ground water is below the pipe, the stretch of pipe shall be plugged at its downstream end and water shall be placed inside the pipe to fill the pipe. Measurements shall then be taken to determine the rate of leakage out of the pipe by filling the pipe. Concrete pipe shall be filled with water at least 8 hours before measurements are taken. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, water, and materials necessary for making the tests. The rate of infiltration or leakage shall not exceed 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per day for any stretch of pipe measured. CONTRACTOR shall immediately make all necessary repairs to bdng infiltration or leakage within the above acceptable limits. 2. Air test procedure may be used, when allowed by ENGINEER, for the above listed pipe designations and shall be conducted as follows: a. Clean pipe to be tested. b. Plug all pipe outlets with suitable test plugs. Brace each plug securely. Add air slowly to the portion of the pipe installation under test until the internal air pressure is raised to 4.0 psig. c. After an internal pressure of 4.0 psig is obtained, allow at least two minutes for air temperature to stabilize, adding only the amount of air required to maintain pressure. d. When pressure decreases to 3.5 psig, start stop-watch. Determine the time in seconds that is required for the internal air pressure to reach 2.5 psig. Minimum permissible pressure holding times for runs of single pipe diameter and for systems of 4-inch, 6-inch, or 8-inch laterals in combination with trunk lines shall be as recommended by National Clay Pipe Institute. e. If the pipe to be tested is submerged in groundwater, determine the height of groundwater above the crown of the sewer. This is the back pressure due to groundwater submergence over the sewer. All gauge pressures in the test should be increased by the pressure head of water above the pipe. f. ENGINEER may elect to test sewers in groundwater by measuring the infiltration through the use of a weir provided in the manhole at the downstream end of the sewer being tested. Section 02600-9 1-382-636/03~)4 g. The air test may be dangerous if a line is improperly prepared. It is extremely important that the vadous plugs be installed and braced in such a way as to prevent blowouts. Inasmuch as a force of 250 pounds is exerted on an 8-inch plug by an internal pipe pressure of 5 psi, it should be realized that sudden expulsion of a poorly installed plug or of a plug that is partially deflated before the pipe pressure is reteased can be dangerous. h. As a safety precaution, pressurizing equipment should include a regulator set at 10 psi to avoid over-pressurizing and damaging an otherwise acceptable line. No one shall be allowed in the manholes during testing. 3.03 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION All equipment and materials shall be clean before installation. CONTRACTOR shall disinfect and flush the potable water system before it is put on-line. Water main shall be disinfected according to AWVVA C651. 3.04 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Tree Removal: Tree removal and grubbing necessary for installing sewer, water, and other work shown shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid: Pavement Repair: Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall replace all bituminous and concrete pavement removed or damaged during performance of the work. Concrete pavement replacement shall conform to Division 3. Bituminous pavement replacement shall conform to Division 2. Cleanup: 1. Upon completion of the work, all 2. 3. improvements disturbed by CONTRACTOR's operations shall be repaired or replaced. Broken concrete, rubble fill, and other excess material shall be removed from the site and wasted. All areas used for the storage of materials or the temporary deposit of excavated earth shall be leveled off and cleaned up. All surplus material, tools, and equipment shall be removed, and the premises shall be left free of everything of the kind. All pipes and manholes shall be flushed until clean and all debris and mud shall be removed. 3.05 DEMOLITION All exterior piping removals, including manholes and appurtenances and abandonment, shall be by CONTRACTOR. The locations and elevations of existing piping are approximate. Where necessary, existing piping shall be exposed prior to installing new piping. Any changes in pipe location or elevation shall be approved by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall remove or abandon all existing piping and appurtenances as noted. Unless otherwise shown or specified, piping and appurtenances to be removed shall become the property of CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site for salvage or disposal. Unless otherwise shown or specified, piping shown or specified to be abandoned shall have each end plugged with nonshdnk mortar. Nonshrink mortar shall be as specified in Division 3. Wherever excavations cross piping to be abandoned, piping shall be removed to the limits of the excavation and the ends shall be filled as specified above. Valve boxes and exposed valves and operators on piping to be abandoned shall be removed. All concrete surfaces to remain shall be patched as required to provide a smooth surface. Repiping and connections to new piping shall be as specified for new piping. seCtion 02600-10 It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to remove the following, including piping and appurtenances, as specified, and patch all holes resulting therefrom unless specified or shown otherwise. The intent of these specifications is to require that the removal of materials, patching of all existing holes, and repiping be done in a workmanlike manner. All costs shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. END OF SECTION Section 02600-11 1-382-636103-04 iai SECTION O2831 CHAIN LINK FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 sUMMARy A. Work includes providing a gate complete as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. 1.02 REFERENCES Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in A. ASTM A121 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire. B. ASTM A392 - Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. ASTM A428 ' weight of coating 0n Aluminum,coated iron Or s~el Articles. D. ASTM A491 - Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric. E. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality. F. ASTM A585 - Aluminum Coated Steel Barbed Wire. G. ASTM F626 - Fence Fittings. H. ASTM F567 - Installation of Chain-Link Fence. I. ASTM F900 - Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. J. ASTM F1043 - Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. K. Chain Link FenCe ManUfactUrers' Institute (CLFMI) ' ProdUct ManUal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GATES General: 1. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members as necessary to assure proper gate operation and attachment to fabdc and hardware. 2. Provide diagonal braces made of crossed adjustable length 3/8-inch diameter truss rods on nonwelded gate frames and on welded frames where corner dgidity is not sufficient to prevent sag. Section 02831-1 1-382-636/03-o4 Gate frames shall be covered with the same fabric as the fence. Weld or assemble gate frames with malleable or pressed steel fittings and rivets to provide rigid connections. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Attach to frame at 15 inches o.c. all sides. Provide caps for all gate frame work ends. Gate Hardware: 1. Provide spring latch for all sliding gates. Provide padlock eye as an integral part of all latches. 2. Provide heavy duty track, ball bearing hanger sheaves framing and supports, guides, stays stops and bracing necessary for sliding gates. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. General: All accessories, except tie wires and barbed wire, shall be galvanized to comply with ASTM F626. Barbed Wire: 1. Provide three strands of barbed wire at top of fence. 2. Barbed wire shall be 2-strand, 12-1/2 gauge wire with 14 gauge, 4 point round barbs spaced approximately 5-inch o.c. 3. Finish shall be galvanized to meet ASTM A 121, Class 3 or aluminized to meet ASTM A 585, Class 2. C. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: 1. Arms shall be heavy pressed steel, complete with provisions for anchorage to tubular end, comer, and pull posts attaching three rows of barbed wire to each arm. 2. Arms not required on roll formed terminal posts. 3. Single arms shall be integral with a post top weather cap. 4. Intermediate arms shall have hole for passage of top rail. 5. Arms shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, 250 pounds of downward pull at outermost end of arm. Post Tops: 1. Material shall be pressed steel or malleable iron. 2. Topshall beweathertight. 3. Top shall permit passage of top rail. Stretcher Bars: 1. Stretcher bars required for tubular end, comer, pull or gate posts. 2. Bars shall be one piece lengths equal to full height of fabdc with minimum cross section of 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch. 3. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post and two stretcher bars for each comer and pull post. Stretcher Bar Bands: 1. Material shall be heavy pressed steel. 2. Spacing shall be 15 inches maximum o.c. to secure stretcher bar to tubular end, corner, pull and gate post. Section 02831-2 1-382-636103-04 Gl Tension Wire: 7 gauge, Zinc-cOated steel wire. Ground Rods: Provide a 1/2-inch diameter 6-foot long copper clad rod to provide a ground. Provide one for each 1,000 feet of fence and one for each separated fence Section. 2.O3 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be Type A or A-FA as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE WORK A. Prior to fence construction remove and dispose of all trees, brush, logs, stumps and other debris for a width Of at least i2 inches each Side of the prop0S'ed fenCe alignment. 3.02 CONCRETE FOOTINGS A. Excavate holes for footings to neat dimensions in firm ground to insure the post wilt be centered. Remove rock or other obstructions encountered to the required depth. Use forms in unstable soil and allow them to remain in place for at least 24 hours after concrete is poured. Backfill, after forms are removed, with suitable material thoroughly compacted in place in layers to prevent settlement. B. F00[ ngs Shal be 4.':0" deep and 16" minimUm diameter. The bottom of the Post shall be 3 inches above the bottom of the hole. Corner, gate and end post bases shall be 18 minimum diameter. Gate posts larger than 4 inches o.d. shall have a base with a minimum diameter of 18 inches. ConCrete baseS shall be domed at the post and have a smooth troweled finish. Concrete footings shall cure for seven days before placing tension wires. 3.03 pOSTSAND BRACES Set posts in a vertical position at the required location and alignment. Set tops at the required elevation to provide a smooth profile at the top rail or tension wire without abrupt changes and in conformity with the general contour. All end, corner, gate and brace posts must be set in concrete. 3.04 POST BRACING ASSEMBLY A. Post bracing assemblies consist of one or more brace rails and a 3/8-inch truss rod as hereafter'specified. Provide brace rails the same size as the top rail Provide truss rods With an adjustable take'uP adapter. B. Install a single bracing assembly at each gate and end post location. C. Install a double bracing assembly at each comer post and all intermediate braced posts. secti°n 02831-3 Provide the bracing assembly with one horizontal brace rail and one diagonal truss rod on all fences which have a top rail. Locate the horizontal brace rail in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Provide the bracing assembly with one horizontal brace rail and one diagonal brace rail and one diagonal truss rod on all fences which do not have a top rail. Locate the horizontal rail in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 3.05 STRETCHER BARS Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post and two for each corner and pull post, except roll form posts with integral loops. Attach to posts with heavy duty pressed steel or malleable iron bands spaced at 15 inches c.c. 3.06 GROUND RODS A. Connect at least three fence wires to the ground rod by clamping, bolting or brazing. Ground rod shall be installed on line with fence. B. Install ground rods as specified for each run of fence and install additional rods for each 1,000 feet on long runs of fence. 3.07 FABRIC Install, stretch, and anchor tension wires to each end, corner, gate and brace post and properly attach to each line post before the fabric is placed. Pass top tension wire through the post top rail opening. Install top, intermediate and bottom rails at proper locations. Attach the end of the fabric to the end, corner, gate or brace posts (except roll form posts with integral loops) by means of a stretcher bar threaded through the end loops of the fabric and stretched to remove all slack with proper stretching equipment. Secure the stretched fabric to posts, rails and tension wires with specified fabric fasteners. Install fabric fasteners on all posts at not greater than 14 inches c.c. and on rails and bottom tension wires at not more than 24 inches c.c. Where a top tension wire is installed, fasten to the fabdc at not more than 18 inches c.c. C. Make splices in fabric by interweaving a wire picket through each end Iccp of each piece of fabric. Each splice shall be subject to ENGINEER's approval. 3.08 GRADE CLEARANCE A. Clearance of fabric shall match existing clearance. 3.09 GATES A. Install gates plumb and level and adjust for smooth operation as intended, without binding or hanging up. 3.10 BARBED WIRE A. Install barbed wire properly fastened to the rampart arms. Section 02831-4 ~ 3.11 CLEANUP After chain link fence construction is completed clean up all storage and work areas. Replace or repair as required all landscape features damaged or disturbed under this Contract. END OF SECTION SECTION 02936 SEEDING AND SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Preparation of subsoil. 2. Placing topsoil. 3. Seeding, sodding, mulching and fertilizing. 4. Maintenance. Except for paved, riprapped, or built-up areas, all areas of the site which are disturbed and areas noted on the drawings shall be seeded or sodded. Surfaces on 3 to I slope or less may either be seeded or sodded , but surfaces on greater than 3 to 1 slope shall be sodded. C. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial Standard Specifications: Unless otherwise indicated, Standard Specifications shall refer to the State of Wisconsin Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Structure Construction. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. Sod: Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that will support its own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners. Submit sod certification for grass species and location of sod source. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. B. Deliver sod on pallets or in rolls. Protect exposed roots from dehydration. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours. C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. Section 02936-1 1-382-636/03-04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SEED MIXTURE Seed mix No. 40 per Standard Specifications. Use blue tag certified seed. Do NOT use bent or Poa Annua. Each seed lot will be subject to sampling and testing by the state seed laboratory. B. Weed content shall not exceed 0.5% in mixture. 2.02 SOD A. Follow Section 631.1.2.1 of the Standard Specifications. B. Netting or fabric for sod reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 631.2.2 of the Standard Specifications. C. Anchorage staples shall be in aCcOrdance With section 631~12.3 of the Standard Specifications. 2.03 SOIL MATERIALS Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growthl taken from drained Site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0. B. Topsoil from the site may be used if it meets the above requirements. Additional topsoil shall be provided as required by drawings and specifications. ~:04 ' A~CESSOR(ES' ' A. Mulching material shall be oat or wheat straw, free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to piant life, and dry. Hay or choPPed c0ms[alkS are not acceptable. Fertilizer shall be FS O-F-241, Type I, Grade A; recOmmended for grass, with 50% of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions~ Nitrogen 10%; phosphoric acid 10%, soluble potash 10%. Submit composition deviations to suit site conditions for ENGINEER's approval. C. Water shall be clean, fresh and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous gro~iY0f gi-ass: D. Erosion fabric shall be jute matting, open weave. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section. Section 02936;2 1-382-636/03-04 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas and Iow spots. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where topsoil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted sub-soil. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches over area to be seeded. Rake until smooth. B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade. C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading. D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, Iow or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage. E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants, and buildings to prevent damage. F. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 17 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of seed or sod, no more than 18 hours before seeding or 48 hours before sodding. C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 SEEDING A. Apply seed at a total rate of 3-1/2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Apply evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly or roll the seeded area after seeding. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day. C. Planting season shall be between April 15 and June 15 or between August 15 and October 15. D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy pedods. Section 02936-3 1-382-636/03-04 Immediately fslioWing seedingl apply mulch. 1. Minimum Spread Rate: 1-1/2 tons per acre. 2. Maximum Depth: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched and on a daily basis to keep straw in place. Seeding shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR until grass is well established. Grass is well established when it covers the entire seeded areas to a height of 2 inches. Place erosion control mats per Section 02270 - Slope Protection and Erosion Control. 3.06 LAYING SOD Ao Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Place top elevation of sod ll2-inch below adjoining edging, paving or curbs. F. On slopes 4 to 1 and steeper, sod will be secured with wooden pegs at a maximum of 24 inches on center. G. On slopes 2 to 1 and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod. H. All sod placed in ditches, flumes, or other appurtenances, where a concentrated flow of water may be expected shall be staked regardless of the slope. L Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4-inch depth of soil. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. B. Immediately remove clippings after mowing. C. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. D. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. E. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. Section 02936-4 1-382-636/03-04 H. 1. J. K. Immediately reseed areas which fail to show adequate catch. Bare spots shall not exceed 5 square feet in area and not exceed 3% of the total seeded areas. Immediately replace sod in areas which show bare spots or deterioration. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. Immediately reseed areas which do not show a satisfactory stand of established grass, and resod areas that do not show satisfactory establishment. Correct damage resulting from erosion, gullies, rills, or other causes by filling with topsoil, tamping, rerertilizing, and reseeding if damage occurs prior to acceptance of work. Maintain seeded lawns for not less than 60 days after substantial completion. If seeded in fall and not given full 60 days of maintenance, or if not considered acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn is established. Maintain sodded lawns for not less than 30 days after substantial completion. Maintain lawns by watering, fedilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas. END OF SECTION Section 02936-5 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: Formsfor cast-in-place concrete. 2. Form accessories. 3. Openings for other work. 4. Form stripping. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. Supplemental Unit Price: CONTRACTOR shall fill in a unit price for "Forming" in the blank space 9r0Vided in the Bid to apply in the event of any deductions from or additions to the work. The unit prices shall include all elements of work specified in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. D. PS1 - Construction and industrial Plywood. 1.03 DESIGN A. All formwork shall comply with ACl 347 and ACI 301. B. CONTRACTOR shall assume the responsibility for the complete design and construction of the formwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings ~n accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals for form ties, form coatings, form liners (if any) and any other form accessories. B. Submit geometry of forms for circular structures. section 03100-1 1-382-636/03-04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS Forms shall be of wood, plywood, steel, fiberboard lined, or other approved materials which will produce concrete which meets the specified requirements, The type, size, quality, and shape of all materials of which the forms are made are subject to the review of ENGINEER. Caution shall be exercised in the use of wood or composition forms or form liner to be certain that no chemical reaction will take place which causes a damaging effect on the concrete surface. 2.02 FORM TIES - NONREMOVABLE Internal wall ties shall contain positive stops at the required wall thickness. The extedor clamp portions of the tie shall be adjustable in length. Ties shall have cones on the water side of water containing structures. Ties shall also have cones on the exterior side of all structures which have PVC water-stopped construction joints. Ties shall provide a positive disconnection on both ends 1 to 1-1/2 inches inside the finished face of the concrete. All wall ties used in the placement of structures which have water-stopped construction joints shall contain integral waterstops. All such ties shall be crimped or deformed in such a manner that the bond between concrete and tie cannot be broken in removal of the outer units. This portion of the tie shall not be removed prior to 24 hours after completion of the concrete placement. C. The use of wood spacers and wire ties will not be approved. 2.03 FORM TIES - REMOVABLE A. Taper ties which are designed to be removed entirely from the wall may be used with forms designed for this tie type and spacing. B. Tie holes shall be plugged with a neoprene plug, Dayton Superior, inc., Sure-Plug, or equal. C. Cementitious waterproofing for patching taper tie holes shall be Hey 'DJ K-11, Xypex, or equal. 2.04 FORM COATINGS A. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 2.05 CHAMFER STRIPS A. Provide 3/4-inch by 3/4-inch wood or plastic chamfer strips at all exposed corners, except as noted. Section 03100-2 2.06 KEYWAYS A. Keyways shall be formed with wood inserts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION Forms shall conform to the shape, line, grade, and dimensions as shown on the drawings. They shall be mortar-tight and sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement or sagg;ng between supports and shall support the loads and pressures without deflection from the prescribed lines. They shall be properly braced or tied together so as to maintain position and shape and insure safety to workmen and passersby. Spacing of ties shall be recommended by the tie manufacturer. Formwork shall be constructed to meet the tolerances and intentions specified below for the indicated applications: 1. Flat surfaces shall be formed in accordance with tolerances indicated in ACI-347 for buildings. 2. Curved surfaces shall also meet ACI-347 for buildings. All exposed curved surfaces shall be formed to the continuous surface of the radius specified. Where segmented forms are proposed, a form system which deviates more than 3/8-inch from a circle through pan edges will not be allowed. Architectural surfaces and surfaces to be fitted with equipment shall be formed to match the shape intended. Where indicated on the drawings, the form shall be lined with minimum 3/8-inch masonite and shimmed as required. Variation from plumb shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10-feet and variation in linear lines shall not exceed 1/2-inch in twenty feet. These and other tolerance specified in ACI-347 shall be considered a part of this specification. Co When forms are placed for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean concrete surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. At the request of ENGINEER, temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before depositing concrete. Eo Pr°vide inserts and provide openings in concrete form work to accommodate work of other trades. Verify size and location of openings, recesses and chases with the trade requiring such items. Securely support items to be built into forms. F. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where the slope is too steep to place and vibrate concrete. Bevel wood inserts for forming keyways (except in expansion joints where inserts shall have square edges), reglets, recesses, and the like, to assure ease of removal. Inserts shall be securely held in place prior to concrete placement. Unless otherwise shown, chamfer strips shall be placed in the angles of the forms to provide 3/4-inch bevels at exterior edges and corners of all exposed concrete. Section 03100:3 The forms shall be oiled with a field applied commercial form oil or a factory applied nonabsorptive liner. Oil shall not stain or impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. The forms shall be coated prior to placing reinforcing steel. Oil on reinforcement will not be permitted. All form surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, patched, and repaired before reusing and are subject to the approval of ENGINEER. 3.02 FORM REMOVAL A. Suppoding forms and shoring shall not be removed until the member has acquired sufficient strength to suppor[ its own weight and the construction live loads on it. B, All form removal shall be accomplished in such a manner that will prevent injury to the concrete and will ensure complete safety of the structure. Forms shall not be removed before the expiration of the minimum times as stated below unless specifically authorized by ENGINEER. These times may be increased by ENGINEER. 1. Wall and vertical faces: 24 hours 2. Columns: 24 hours 3. Beams and slabs: 14 days END OF SECTION Section 03100-4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes providing complete, in-place, all steel and fibers required for reinfomement of cast-in-place concrete as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. Supplemental Unit Price: CONTRACTOR shall fill in a unit pdce for "Reinfoming," including all elements of work in this section, in the blank space provided in the ~3id to apply in the event of any deductions from or additions to the work. All reinfomement shown or specified shall ~)e included in the Lump Sum Bid. 1.02 REFERENCES Applicable standards listed in this section include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinfomed Concrete Structures." 2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. ASTM A 82 "Standard Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement." 4. ASTM A 185 "Standard Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement." 5. ASTM A 615 "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement." 6. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Provide complete shop drawings of all material to be furnished and installed under this section: 1. Before fabrication of the reinforcement is begun, CONTRACTOR shall obtain the approval of ENGINEER on reinforcing bar lists and placing drawings. 2. These drawings and lists shall show in detail the number, size, length, bending, and arrangement of the reinforcing. Reinforcing supports shall also be located on the shop drawings. 3. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with ACI 315. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked. 2. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. Section 03200-1 1-382-636/03-04 B. Storage: Store reinforcement at the job site on blocks and in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing bars shall comply with ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Reinforcing bars required to be welded shall be ASTM A 706 Iow alloy. B. Steel wire shall comply with ASTM A 82. C. Welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A 185. Reinforcement supports including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place, shall be: 1. Wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For slabs on grade, supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces or where the concrete surface will be exposed to weather or moisture, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, supports with either hot-dipped galvanized or plastic protected legs. 4. When supports bear directly on the ground and it is not practical to use steel bar supports, precast concrete blocks may be used to support only the bottom lift of reinforcement. The precast blocks must be solid, be of an equal or higher strength than the concrete being placed, must provide adequate support to the reinforcement, and be of proper height to provide specified reinforcing cover. The use of face bricks, hollow concrete blocks, rocks, wood blocks, or other unapproved objects will not be permitted. E. Fibrous Reinforcing: 1. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be manufactured by Fibermesh, a division of Synthetic Industries, or equal. 2. Reinforcement shall be 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated, MD graded, fiber containing no reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use on concrete secondary reinforcement. 3. Physical Charactedstice: a. Specific Gravity: 0,91. b. Fiber Length: Multi-design gradation. 2~02 FABRICATION General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances which comply with CRSl Manual. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. 3. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all end hook dimensions shall conform with "ACl Standard Hooks." Section 03200-2 Reinforcement with any of the following defects shall be deemed unacceptable and will not be ~)ermitted in the work: 1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances. 2. Bend or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings. 3. Bar with "educed cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 NSPECTION A. Examine the substrate, formwork, and the conditions under which concrete reinforcement is {0' be 51aced, B. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.02 NSTALLATION General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for details and methods of placing reinforcement and supports. 2. Clean reinfomement to remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. B. Placing Reinforcement: 1. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with Contract drawings and with shop drawings Stamped and approved by ENGINEER. 2. Position, support, and secure reinforcing against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. 3. Support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as needed. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the reinforcement is to be so detailed and placed as to allow the following concrete protection: a. Three inches of cover where the concrete is placed directly against ground. b. Two inches of cover where the concrete is placed in forms, but is to be exposed to weather, liquid,"b~ th~'~roundi c. One-inch cover in slabs and walls not exposed to weather, liquid, or the ground. d. One and one-half inch cover in beams, girders, and columns not exposed to weather, liquid, or the ground. This cover applies to beam stirrups and column ties where applicable. 5. Reinforcement shall be positioned within +_3/8-inch for members with depth to tension reinforcing from COmpression face less than or equal to 8 inches. Tolerance shall be -': '; '+l/2-i~ch for members with depth to tension reinforcing from compression face greater than 8 inches; Tolerance on dimension between adjacent bars in slab and wall reinforcing mats shall be 'l-inch. Secure against displacement by anchoring at the supports and bar intersections with wire or clips. section 03200:3 6. Bars shall be securely tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction, when alternate intersections shall be tied. To avoid interference with embedded items, bar spacing may be varied slightly as approved by ENGINEER. Tack welding of reinforcing will not be permitted. 7. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces. 8. If reinforcing must be cut because of openings or embedded items in the concrete, additional reinforcing must be provided adjacent to the opening at least equal in cross sectional area to that reinforcing which was cut and it shall extend a minimum of 36 bars diameters beyond the opening on each side or as shown on the drawings. At sumps or depressions in slabs, bars shall be bent and/or extended under sumps or depressions. 9. Wall reinforcing mats shall be secured in a vertical plane by providing clearance from forms with bar supports and by using Z-shaped bars at _+4 feet on center wired between two mats of steel, spacing and staying both of them, Nails shall not be driven into the forms to support reinforcement and neither shall wire for this purpose come in contact with the forms. Alternate top transverse bars in slab shall be supported by individual bar chairs at approximately 3-foot O-inch centers. Bottom longitudinal bars shall be supported by continuous bar chairs at approximately 4-foot O-inch centers. 10. If carrier bars are to be used, CONTRACTOR shall provide reinforcing bars for this purpose in addition to the reinforcing called for by the drawings and specifications. Reinforcement Supports: 1. Strength and number of supports shall be sufficient to carry reinforcement. 2. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. 3. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Install welded wire fabdc in as long of lengths as practicable. 2. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh. Splices: 1. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying. 2. Splices in reinforcing shall be avoided wherever possible. Splices shall be Class B, Category 1 in accordance with ACI 318 and adjacent splices shall be staggered a minimum of 40 bar diameters unless otherwise shown. 3. Mechanical splices and threaded dowel bar inserts may be used where approved by ENGINEER; Splices shall be capable of developing at least 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bar. Embedded Items: 1. Allow other trades to install embedded items as necessary, 2. Particularly, after bottom layer of reinforcing is placed in slabs, allow electrical contractors to install conduit scheduled for encasement in slabs prior to placing upper layer of reinforcing. Minimum Reinforcing: Where reinforcing is nOt shown, provide a minimum of ~4 at 8-inch centers each way in members 10 inches or less in thiCkness and #5 at 12-inch centers each way in each face in members greater than 10 inches thick. Section 03200-4 Fibrous Reinforcing: 1. Fibrous concrete reinforcing shall be used in all slab-on-grade concrete, all sidewalks, and all precast concrete topping. 2. Add fibers at a minimum rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard. 3. Mix concrete in stdct accordance with reinforcement manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION Section 03200-5 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. All cast-in-place concrete as shown except as noted otherwise. 2. PVC and bentonite waterstops, expansion joint fillers, bonding agents, patching mortars, curing compounds, nonshrink grout, grout topping, and other related items and accessodes. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. Supplemental Unit Price: CONTRACTOR shall fill in a unit price for "Concrete" in the blank space provided in the Bid to apply in the event of any deductions from or additions to the work. All concrete shown or specified shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete. B. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACI 304 - Recommended PractiCe for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R - HotWeather Concreting. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Cudng Concrete. G. ACI 309 - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. I. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. J. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. K. ASTM C39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. L. ASTM C40 - Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. M. ASTM C94 - Ready~Mixed Concrete. N. ASTM C143 - Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. O. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. Section 03300-1 R. S. T. ASTM C156 - Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials. ASTM C231 -Air Content of FreShly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for COncrete. ASTM C309 - LiqUid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. Mo ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. V. ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). W. ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansior Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit the following information: 1. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate - ASTM C33. 2. Specific gravity and dry rodded density of each aggregate. 3. Test of deleterious substances in fine and coarse aggregate-ASTM C33, 4. Design mix of each individual concrete mix to be used. 5. Previous test results or thai batch results with 7- and 28-day compressive strengths for each concrete mix proposed, 6. Certified mill test results for cement identifying brand, type, and chemistry of cement to be used. 7. Branct, type, principal ingredient, and amount of each admixture to be used. C. It is important that the above data be submitted to ENGINEER well in advance of anticipated concreting operations to avoid any delay in construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT A All cement used shall be Portland Cement and shall conform to ASTM C150 and shall be Type I or Type IlL Type I11 shall be used only when permitted by ENGINEER, All cement shall be the product of one reputable manufacturer and mill. B, Cement shall be stored in a dry, weather-tight, propedy ventilated structure with the floor raised not less than I foot above the ground. 2.02 FLY ASH A, All fly ash used as an admixture in Portland cement concrete shall be Class C or F Conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618. Section 03300-2 2.03 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be washed and shall consist of natural sand, gravel or crushed rock, and shall have clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains of strong minerals. The amounts of deleterious substances present in the fine and coarse aggregate expressed in percentages by weight shall not exceed the following: Deleterious Substance Aggregate Fine Coarse Do Clay Lumps and Friable Particles Coal and Lignite Mineral finer than No. 200 sieve Soft Fragments Chert* Sum of Chert and Clay Lumps 3.0 3.0 0.5 0.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 --- 5.0 5.0 Matedal classified as chert and having a bulk specific gravity of less than 2.45. The percentage of chert shall be determined on the basis of the weight of chert in the sample retained on a 3/8-inch sieve divided by the weight of the total sample. The combined amount of all deleterious substances in an aggregate shall not exceed five percent of the weight of the aggregate. If required by ENGINEER, sodium sulfate soundness tests (ASTM Designation C88) shall be performed on the aggregate. When the aggregate is subjected to 5 cycles, the weight loss shall not exceed 12%. Samples of proposed aggregates shall be submitted to an independent laboratory for testing in advance of concrete work. All testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM Designation C33. Certified test results sha~l be submitted to ENGINEER confirming that aggregate complies with all stated specifications. Report shall identify source of aggregate and absorbed water. Fine aggregate shall be Well graded from coarse to fine, and shall conform to the following requirements: Percentage by Weight Passing 3/8-inch sieve 100 Passing No. 4 sieve 95-100 Passing No. 8 sieve 80-100 Passing No. 16 sieve 50-85 Passing No. 30 sieve 25-60 Passing No. 50 sieve 10-30 Passing No. 100 sieve 2-10 Gradation of fine aggregate shall be reasonably uniform and not subject to the extreme percentages of gradation specified above. The fineness modulus shall be not less than 2.3 or more than 3.1, nor shall the fineness modulus of any sample vary by more than +0.20 from the fineness modulus of the representative sample used in proportioning the concrete. Section 03300-3 ,~ Go If required by ENGINEER, fine aggregate shall be subjected to the color-metric test for organic impurities (ASTM C40) and shall not produce a color darker than Figure 1, unless they pass the mortar strength test. Aggregate producing color darker than Figure 2 shall not be used in any event. Coarse aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine, and when tested by laboratory sieves having square openings, shall conform to the following requirements: Percentage by Weight Aggregate 3/4-inch Stone 1-1/2 inch Stone Passing 2-inch sieVe --- Passing 1-1/2 inch sieve Passing 1-inch sieve 100 Passing 3/4-inch sieve 90-100 Passing 3/8~inch sieve 20-55 Passing No. 4 s~eve 0-10 Passing No. 8 sieve 0-5 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 0-5 The 3/4-inch aggregate shall be used in concrete members no thinner than 4 inches and less than 10 inches thick. Proper proportions of 3/4-inch and 1-1/2 inches aggregate shall be used in members 10 inches thick and thicker. When members thinner than 10 inches are placed monolithic, ally with members thicker than 10inches, the aggregate requirements for the thinner member shall apply. Aggregates must be allowed to drain for at least 12 hours before being used. The ground upon which aggregates are stored must be hard, firm, well drained and free from all vegetable matter. Various sizes of aggregates must be stored separately, and if they have become contaminated or merged with each' other, they shall not be used. 2.04 WATER A. Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. 2.05 ADMIXTURES Water Reducing Admixture shall be Pozzolith 220N by Master Builders Company, Daracem 19 by Grace or equal. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A and Type F. Water reducing admixture shall not reduce durability, shall increase Strength 10% and shall not affect bleeding characteristics over reference mix. Air Entraining Admixture shall be equal to MB AE90 Standard by Master Builders, Darex by Grace Construction Products or equal. Air entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C260. C. No other admixture will be allowed without written approval of ENGINEER. All admixture shall be compatible with cement, aggregate, and water used. Section 03300-4 1..382-636/03-04 2.06 PROPORTIONING The proportions of aggregate to cement shall be such as to produce a workable mixture which con be thoroughly compacted and which will work readily in the forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or excess water to collect on the surfaces. The combined aggregates shall be such that when separated on the No. 4 sieve, the weight passing the sieve shall not be less than 30% nor greater than 50%. Concrete of various classes shall have the following maximum watedcement or water(cement + fly ash) ratio minimum compressive strengths at 28 days, and minimum cement and fly ash contents: Class Maximum Water/Cement or Water (Cement+ Fly Ash) Minimum 28 Day Strength-Pounds per Square Inch Cement Content-Pounds Fly Ash-Pounds per per Cubic Yard Cubic Yard Type C Type F ) A 0.45 4,000 564 ...... A-FA 0.45 4,000 480 110 125 B 0.53 3,500 517 ...... C 0.53 3,000 517 ...... X --- 2,000 376 ...... Except as otherwise indicoted on the drawings or specified, all concrete shall be Class A or Class A-FA concrete. All concrete mixes shall be designed for a strength of 15% above that specified to allow for job variations. All mixes shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211.1 by a competent COncrete engineer or competent laboratory technician. Required materials test data shall be submitted with design mixes for review and approval by ENGINEER. Mix computations shall be submitted if requested by ENGINEER. The slump for all concrete shall be 3 inches and COncrete with a slump within the range of 2- to 3-1/2 inches will be acceptable unless otherwise stated. A water reducing admixture shall be used in all concrete. A qualified representative of the manufacturer shall be available to assist in proportioning the concrete, advise on the proper addition of the admixture to the concrete, and advise on adjustments of concrete proportions to suit job conditions. An air-entraining admixture shall be used in all concrete except at patches. Air content shall be tested by the pressure method as outlined in ASTM C231 and shall be between four to seven percent by volume. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER compressive strength of concrete cylinder test results for the same concrete mixes proposed on a previous project. If this information is not available, one cubic yard trial batches of each individual mix proposed for use shall be made prior to use in the work. Four test cylinders shall be made for each trial batch, two to be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. The trial batches shall be made preceding actual placement operations so that the results of the 7-day tests can be obtained. All costs for Section 03300-5 materiai,':equiPment and labor inCurred during design of concrete miXeS shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. .I. All aggregates shall be measured by Weight. The concrete mixer is to be equipped with an automatic water measuring device which can be adjusted to deliver the desired amount of water. All measuring, mixing, and proportioning equipment is subject to the approval of ENGINEER. 2.07 JOINT FILLER Expansion joints shall have standard 1/2-inch thick cork expansion joint filler; Grace, W. R. Meadows, or equal; meeting ASTM D1752 -Type I1. Exceptions to this are expansion joints in exterior concrete walks and between concrete walks and other structures which shall be asphalt expansion joint filler, 1/2-inch thick; Grace. W.R. Meadows, or equal; meeting ASTM D994. 2.08 BONDING AGENT A. Acceptable manufacturers include Thorobond by Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., Sonocrete by Sonneborn Contech Co., Sonoprep by Sonneborn Contech Co., or equal. 2.09 PATCHING ADDITIVE 'A. Acc~pf~abl~ manufacturers include ACRYL 60 '~y Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., Sonocrete by Sonneborn Contech Co., or equal. 2.10 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Acceptable manufacturers include Dayton Superior, Master Builders, or equal. Grout shall be nonshrink, nonmetallic and shall achieve a strength of 7,500 psi in 28 days. 2.11 SEALER A. Chemical/gasoline anc oil resistant sealer shall be Day-them Tuf Seal by Dayton Supenor, or equal. PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 MIXING A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed ant delivered in accordance with ASTM C94 and ACI 304 from an approved batching plant. In general, concrete shall be mixed 50 revolutions at plant, 20 upon arrival at site, and 20 each time water is added; maximum of 110 revolutions at mixing speed. Concrete shall be delivered and discharged within 1-1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved ~300 times after introduction of water to the cement'and aggregates, or the cement to the aggrega{es. Truc~ ~nixers shall be equipped with drum revolution counters. In no event shall concrete which has taken its initial set be allowed to be used. Retempering of concrete is not permitted. B. A representative of ENGINEER may be at the batching plant periodically to observe the batching and mixing. Section 03300,6 3.02 C. No water shall be added on the job unless authorized by ENGINEER; the amount of water, if added, shall be recorded on all copies of the delivery tickets. D. Concrete shall have a temperature not less than 60°F nor more than 80°F as delivered to the job site. With each load of concrete CONTRACTOR shall obtain delivery tickets and shall make these tickets available for review by ENGINEER. Delivery tickets shall provide the following information: 1. Date. 2. Name of ready-mix concrete plant, job location, and CONTRACTOR. 3. Type of cement and admixtures, if any. 4. Specified cement content in sacks per cubic yard of concrete and approved concrete mix number or designation. 5. Amount of concrete in load, in cubic yards 6. Water added at job, if any. 7. Truck number and time dispatched. 8. Number of mixing drum revolutions. For job mixed concrete, all concrete materials shall be mixed in a machine batch mixer for at least 1-1/2 minutes after all ingredients are in the mixer and shall continue until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is uniform in color and homogeneous. The mixer shall not be loaded beyond the capacity given by the manufacturer, and shall be rotated at the speed recommended by the manufacturer. The mixer is to be provided with positive timing device which will positively prevent discharging the mixture until the specified mixing time has elapsed. JOINTS CONTRACTOR shall place all joints as shown on the drawings or specified herein. If approved by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR may, at his own expense, place construction joints in addition to and at places other than those shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise shown, all joints shall be straight, truty vertical or horizontal, and proper methods shall be employed to obtain this result. Where joints are not shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere, CONTRACTOR shall provide joints as follows: 1. Walls shall have vertical joints at 30-feet on center maximum but not more than 15 feet from corners or intersections and shall have horizontal joints at 15 feet on center maximum. 2. Slabs shall have joints at 20 feet on center maximum in each direction. Immediately after completion of the first pour at a joint, the concrete surface, reinforcement, and waterstop projecting beyond the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and laitance removed. The waterstops shall not be disturbed after the concrete in the first pour at a joint has set. Concrete around water stops shall be thoroughly compacted by hand spading and vibrating. Immediately before the second pour, all extraneous matter shall be removed from the joint, the waterstop and steel cleaned and the surface thoroughly wetted. Concrete at all joints shall have been in place at least 24 hours before abutting concrete is placed. At least 2 hours must elapse after depositing concrete in columns or walls before depositing in beams, girders, or slab supported thereon. Beams, girders, brackets, column capital and haunches shall be considered as part of the floor system and shall be placed integrally therewith. Section 03300-7 3.03 WATERSTOPS A. PVC waterstops shall be provided as shown on the drawings PVC waterstops shall be made continuous by splicing. Waterstops shall be spliced using a comer, tee, or cross splice as applicable at intersections. Water-stops shall be mitered to maintain the continuity of the ribs and center bulb. Splices shall be made using a hot metal plate or an electric splicer and full butt weld. Direct flame will not be allowed. Sample field splices shall be submitted to ENGINEER for approval pdor to construction. PVC waterstops placed in all joints shall be securely held in place by an approved method or as shown on the drawings. PVC waterstops shall be installed and secured prior to concrete placement. PVC waterstops shall be installed and secured prior to concrete placement. PVC waterstops shall not be inserted into wet concrete. No nails will be permitted through the water-stop. Great care shall be taken when concrete is placed to ~nsure that the waterstop remains erect and is not bent over. Unless noted otherwise, bentonite waterstop shall be provided as shown on the drawings at joints between new and existing concrete. Waterstop shall be placed as shown on drawings. 3.04 BONDING TO EXISTING CONCRETE When placing new concrete adjacent to existing concrete, the existing concrete shall be thoroughly roughened, cleaned and saturated with water 24 hours before poudng new concrete. Existing concrete is defined as concrete more than six months old. At time of new pour, remove any standing water and apply bonding agent. Bonding agent shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer"s recommendations. When patching existing concrete, remove poor concrete until firm hard concrete is exposed, roughen and clean surface of the existing concrete and clean any exposed reinforcing bars, and pour new concrete. Concrete finish to match existing concrete. New concrete shall be 4,000 psi 28-day strength mixed with patching additive, mixed according to manufacturer's instructions. Concrete shall not be air entrained. 3.05 EMBEDDED ITEMS IN CONCRETE A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting. All contractors whose work is related to the concrete or must be supported, by it, shall be given ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before the concrete is placed, C. Embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Reinforcing bars shall clear embedded items a minimum of 2 inches. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE Before placing concrete, all equipment, forms, ground, reinforcements, and other surfaces with which the concrete will come in contact are to be thoroughly cleaned of all debris, ice, and water. Ground shall be wetted pdor to placement of concrete on it. SectiOn 03300-8 1-382-636/03-04 After reinforcement is placed and before concrete is placed over it, ENGINEER shall be allowed sufficient time to observe the reinforcing. Unless otherwise authorized by ENGINEER, all concrete shall be placed in the presence of ENGINEER. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of materials. Chuting concrete directly into the form will not be allowed. Chuting for conveying purposes will be allowed only upon approval by ENGINEER, and must be accomplished in such a manner as to prevent segregation or loss of materials. Receiving hoppers shall be installed at the chute discharge and at no point in its travel from the mixer to place of final deposit shall the concrete pass through a free vertical drop of more than 3-feet. Elephant trunks or tremies shall be used in all wall pours to prevent coating of forms and reinforcing bars. Care shall be taken to avoid an excess of water on the concrete surface. Excess water shall be drained or otherwise removed from the surface. Dry cement or a mixture of cement and sand shall not be sprinkled directly on the surface to absorb water. Concrete in wall and beam pours shall be deposited in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 18 inches in thickness. Each layer shall be well worked into the preceding layer while both layers are still soft. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. The maximum allowable lateral movement of the concrete after being deposited is three feet. When concreting is once started, it shall be carded on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section or panel is completed. All concrete shall be placed with the aid of mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with ACI 309. In congested areas vibration shall be supplemented by hand spading adjacent to the forms. Vibration should secure the desired results within 5 to 15 seconds at intervals of 18 inches apart maximum. The vibrator shall penetrate the preceding layer of concrete. Vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than 10,000 impulses per minute when in operation submerged in concrete. A sufficient number of spare vibrators shall be kept in ready reserve to assure adequate vibration in case of breakdown of those in use. In placing concrete in beams where it is intended to be continuous and monolithic with the slab above, a delay to provide for settlement of the deep concrete shall be scheduled before placing the upper concrete in the slab. The length of delay shall be as long as possible and still permit the re-vibration of the deep concrete. Concrete is not to be placed under water. A suitable means shall be provided for Iowedng the water level below surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed. This may require excavating approximately 12 inches below the bottom of the concrete surface and refilling with gravel, and compacting; The ground water shall not be allowed to dse to the bottom of the concrete until 24 hours after the concrete pour has been completed. Water shall not be allowed to fall upon or run across the concrete during this period. L. No extra payment will be allowed for dewatering, undercutting, and gravel fill. Section 03300-9 3.07 MOIST CURING A. All concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for at least 7 days after being - deposited, except that for high-early strength concrete a 3-day period will be sufficient. Moist cudng shall be accomplished by one of the following methods: 1. Wood forms left in place and kept wet at all times. If the forms are not going to be kept wet, they shall be removed as soon as practicable and other methods of moist cuf~ng shall be started without delay. 2. Use of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type I as approved by ENGINEER. Curing compound shall be applied at a uniform rate as indicated by the manufacturer sufficient to comply with the requirements of the test water retention of ASTM C156. Curing compound applied to vertical concrete surfaces after forms are removed shall be specially adapted to provide required coverage on the vertical surface. On nonformed surfaces the curing compound shall be applied immediately after the disappearance of the water sheen after finishing of the concrete. Curing compound shall not be used on concrete surfaces which are to be painted, receive ceramic tile or resilient flooring, or be waterproofed unless approved by ENGINEER. Care shall be taken not to get curing compound on construction joints, reinforcing steel and other surfaces which new concrete will be poured against. 3. Use ofplastic film. Plastic film shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mils. It shall be · ' pladed over the wet surface of the fresh concrete as soon as possible without marring the surface and shall be weighted so that it remains in contact with all exposed surfaces of the concrete. All joints and edges shall be lapped and weighted. Any tears in the film shall be immediately repaired. 4. Application of wet coverings weighing 9 ounce per square yard such as burlao, cotton mats, or other moisture-retaining fabdcs. The covenng system shall include two layers and shall be kepi continuously moist so that a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout the cudng pedod. 5. Use of an approved waterproof curing paper, Edges of adjacent sheets shall be overlapped several inches and tightly sealed. 6, Ponding of water or continuous sprinkling of water is permitted. Sprinkling at intervals will not be permitted. 7. Construction joints shall be moist cured by one of the methods listed above except by Method "22 The use of moist earth, sand, hay, or an other method that may discolor hardened concrete will not De permitted. 3.08 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. When the atmospheric temperature exceeds 80°F dudng concrete placement, this section and ACl 305 shall apply in addition to all other sections of the specifications. B. The temperature of the delivered concrete shall not exceed 85°F. Care shall be exercised to keep mixing time and elapsed time between mixing and placement at a minimum. Ready-mix trucks shall be dispatched so as to avoid delay in concrete placement and the work shall be organized to use the concrete promptly after ardval at the job site. The subgrade, forms and reinforcing shall be sprinkled with cool water just pdor to placement of concrete. Prior to placing concrete, there shall be no standing water or puddles on the subgrade. Section 03300-10 E. If approved by ENGINEER, an admixture for retarding the setting of the concrete may be ~ used. ~ F. Exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully protected from drying. Continuous water curing is preferred. Curing compounds shall be white pigmented. 3.09 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING Conditions of this section shall apply in addition to all other sections of the specifications when placing concrete in cold weather. Cold weather is defined as a period when for more than three successive days the average daily temperature drops below 40°F. When temperatures above 50°F occur dudng more than half of any 24 hour period, the period will no longer be regarded as cold weather. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature dudng the period from midnight to midnight. Cold weather concreting shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306,1, Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by the requirements of these specifications. Detailed procedures for the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather shall be submitted to ENGINEER. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until these procedures have been accepted. All concrete materials, forms, ground, mixing equipment, and other surfaces with which the concrete is to come in contact shall be free from frost and the temperature of contact surfaces shall be 35°F or above. Ground upon which concrete is to be placed shall not be frozen at any depth. The mixing water and aggregates shall be heated and when entedng the mixer shall have temperatures not exceeding 175°F, and 80°F, respectively. Concrete temperature as mixed shall not exceed 80°F and shall typically be between 55°F and 70°F. Concrete, when placed in the forms, shall have a temperature of not less than 50°F. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected by adequate covering, insulating, or housing and heating. If heating is used, ambient temperature inside the housing shall be maintained at a minimum of 70°F for 3 days or 50°F for 5 days. The maximum ambient temperature during curing shall not exceed 80°F. If insulating methods are used, recommendations contained in ACI 306R-78 shall be followed. Surface temperature shall be maintained at 50°F for 7 days. After the curing period, the temperature of the concrete shall be reduced uniformly at a rate not to exceed 40°F per 24 hours until outside air temperature is reached. Heating of enclosure shall continue if it is anticipated that the outside air temperature will drop more than 20°F in the next 24 hours. The concrete temperature shall be obtained by attaching a thermometer provided by CONTRACTOR to the concrete surface. Concrete shall be kept moist. If heating is used, the housing shall be constructed weather-tight and shall be constructed in a manner that will provide uniform air circulation and air temperatures over the complete concrete area that is being cured. Special attention shall be given to the edges and ends of a concrete pour with the housing extending at least 5 feet beyond any concrete surface being protected. The housing shall be in place and heat applied within 2 hours after concrete placement. Section 03300-11 1-382-636/03-04 Heating may be by steam or hot air. Heaters shall be vented to outside of the housing. Open burning salamanders will not be permitted. Heating devices shall not be placed so close to the concrete as to cause rapid drying or discoloration from smoke. If heating is used, CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient 24-hour inspection of the heaters to insure compliance with the above specified temperature requirements dudng the cudng period. CONTRACTOR shall provide maximum-minimum thermometers for ENGINEER's use. The use of calcium chloride, salts, or other chemical admixtures for the prevention of freezing is prohibited. J. Salts or other deleterious materials shall not be used on temporary or permanent structures above concrete surfaces that are being placed, finished, or cured. 3.10 FINISHING A. Flat Work: 1. Floated Finish - Place. consolidate, strike off, and level concrete, eliminating high spots and Iow spots. Do not work concrete further until it is ready for floating. Begin floating with a hand float, a bladed power float equipped with float shoes, or a powered disk float when the bleed water sheen has disappeared and the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation Immediately refioat the slab to a uniform texture. 2. Light Troweled Finish - Float concrete surface, then power trowel the surface. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. 3. Hard Troweled Finish - Float concrete surface, then power trowel the surface. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. Continue hand troweling until a ringing sound is produced as the floor is troweled. 4. Tolerance for concrete floors shall be 1/4-inch within 10 feet in any direction. Straight edge shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR. 5. Broom or Belt Finish - Immediately after concrete has received a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. 6. The above finishes shall be used in the following locations: a. Float Finish - Surface to receive roofing, waterproofing, or sand bed terrazzo. , b. Light Troweled Finish - Submerged tank slabs. ' c. Hard Troweled Finish - Building floors. . d. Broom or Belt Finish - Exterior slabs, sidewalks, tops of wails, and tank slabs to receive grout topping. B. Formed Surfaces: 1. 'Within twO days after removing forms, and pdor to application of a curing compound, all concrete surfaces shall be observed and any poor joints, voids, stone pockets or other defective areas shall be patched at once before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Defective areas shall be chipped away to remove all loose and partially bonded ~ aggregate. The area shall be thoroughly wetted and filled with as dry as practical mortar mix placed to slightly overfill the recess. Mortar shall include a bonding agent. After partial set has taken place, the excess mortar shall be removed flush with the surface on the concrete using a wood float. All patching shall be cured, protected, and covered as specified for concrete. All cracks, leaks or moist spots which appear shall be repaired to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. No extra compensation will be allowed CONTRACTOR for such work~ Section 03300-12 The extedor or removal portion of nonremovable ties shall be removed with the use of a special tool designed for this purpose. Cutting or chipping of concrete to permit removal of exterior portion will not be permitted. For nonremovable ties, tie rod holes left by the removal of the exterior portion of the tie and cone shall be thoroughly wetted and filled by ramming with as dry as practical mortar mix in such a manner as to insure complete filling of the hole. Mortar shall include a bonding agent. All patching shall be cured, protected, and covered as specified for concrete. The holes are to be filled immediately after removal of the exterior portion of the tie. Holes left by removable ties shall be filled by installing a neoprene plug near the center of the wall. The balance of the hole shall be filled with mortar as specified above to within 1-inch of the face of the wall. The remainder of the hole shall be filled with a waterproofing compound. All finished or formed surfaces shall conform accurately to the shape, alignment, grades, and sections as shown or prescribed by ENGINEER. All surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness. All sharp angles, where required, shall be rounded or beveled. Any formed surface to be painted shall be free of any matedal that will be detrimental to the paint. The surface of the concrete shall be given one of the following finishes immediately after form stripping: a. Finish A shall be referred to as a sack finish. Surfaces shall be free of contaminants prior to sacking. After wetting the surface, a grout shall be rubbed in using a rubber float or budap. After the grout hardens sufficiently, it shall be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel without disturbing the grout in the air holes. After further drying, the surface shall be rubbed with burlap to remove all surface grout. The entire surface shall be finished to secure a continuous, hard, dust-free and uniform texture surface free from pinholes and other minor imperfections. Finish A will be required for all painted surfaces, intedor surfaces of equipment rooms, operation areas, and permanently exposed vertical surfaces. Where steel faced forms are used to form walls, the portion of wall to receive the sack finish shall first be roughened by brush blasting or other approved method to achieve a texture similar to 40-60 grit sandpaper. b. Finish B shall be the same as Finish A, except that the final burlap rubbing may be omitted, providing the steel trowel scraping removes the loose buildup from the surface. Finish B shall be provided for waterproof and moistureproof coated surfaces. c. Finish C shall be referred to as a finish which has surface imperfections less than 3/8-inch in any dimension. Surface imperfections greater than 3/8-inch shall be repaired or removed and the affected areas neatly patched. Finish C or smoother shall be provided for interior surfaces of wet wells, tanks and channels from 1 foot below minimum water surfaces and down and otherwise unfinished interior surfaces. d. Finish D shall be the finish for surfaces which may be left as they come from the forms, except that tie holes shall be plugged and defects greater than 1/2-inch in any dimension shall be repaired. Finish D shall be provided for surfaces to be buried or covered by other construction such as masonry veneer. C. All precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete from stains or abrasions and any such damage shall be removed or repaired under this Contract. 3.11 LOADING OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES No concrete structure or portion thereof shall be loaded with its design load until the concrete has obtained its specified 28-day compressive strength. This shall include but not be limited to vertical live load, equipment loading, water loading, groundwater loading, and Section 03300-13 F backfill load. Concrete strength at time of loading shall be determined by testing field cured concrete cylinders. B. Extreme care shall be taken to insure that construction loads do not exceed d&sign loading of the structure. 3.12 NONSHRINK GROUT Nonshdnk, nonmetallic grout shall be used for filling recesses and pockets left for equipment installation and for setting of base plates. The matedal used shall be approved by ENGINEER. Store, mix, and place the nonshrinking compound as recommended by the manufacturer. The minimum compressive strength shall be 5,000 psi at age 7 days and 7,500 psi at age 28 days. 3.1-3 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. The following tests of fresh concrete shall be performed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall prepare, protect, transport and have tested all cylinders at his expense. 1. Cylinders: a. Three test cylinders shall be made for each pour less than 25 cubic yards, 4 test cylinders shall be made for each pour between 25 and 100 cubic yards, and 8 test cylinders made for each pour in excess of 100 cubic yards. Each concrete mix shall be represented by at least 4 cylinders for the entire job. Concrete for cylinders shall be collected near the middle of the load and/or as. requested by ENGINEER. b. Cylinders shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39, respectively. The cylinders must be kept moist and at temperatures between 60°F and 80°F, and shall remain undisturbed and stored in a location free - from vibration. In hot weather, the cylinders shall be covered with wet burlap and stored in a shaded area. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide a suitable protected location for stodng cylinders on the job site. - c. Afte[' 24 hours, the cylinders shall be transferred to an independent testing laboratory acceptable to OWNER. The cylinders shall be packed in sawdust or other cushioning material for transit to avoid any bumping or jarring of the · cylinders. d. Cylinders shall be broken at 7 and 28 days or as requested by ENGINEER. Test result shall be mailed immediately and directly to ENGINEER. Test data shall include date and location of pour and concrete mix used. 2. Slump Test: COKITRACTOR shall make one slump test at the beginning of all pours with two tests being made for all pours in excess of 25 yards or as requested by ENGINEER. Slump tests shall conform to ASTM C143. CONTRACTOR shall furnish ENGINEER with a slump cone and rod to use in performing extra tests. 3.Air Test: a. When air-entrained concrete is used, the air content shall be checked by CONTRACTOR at the beginning of all pours with at least two checks being made for all pours in excess of 25 cubic yards. b. The air contents shall be checked using the pressure method (ASTM C231). The pocket-sized alcohol air indicator shall not be used unless it is first used in conjunction with the pressure method test. c. CONTRACTOR shall furnish, and make available to ENGINEER, all necessary .. equipment for making extra tests of the air content. Section 03300-14 B. All costs of additional testing and sampling of fresh or hardened concrete needed because of suspected or actual violation of the specifications shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 3.14 RECORDS A record is to be kept of all concrete work. The record shall include the date, location of pour, concrete mix, slump, air content, test cylinder identification, concrete temperature, and ambient air temperature. In addition, for cold weather concreting the record shall include the daily maximum-minimum thermometer readings of all thermometers during the entire curing period for all concrete pours. The project representative will keep this record and CONTRACTOR shall assist in obtaining needed information. 3.15 SIDEWALKS AND EXTERIOR SLABS Sidewalks shall be constructed where shown on the drawings. They shall be a minimum of 5 inches thick and shall slope away from buildings or structures at a rate of 1/4-inch per foot. Concrete shall be as previously specified. Sidewalks shall be constructed on 3 inches of compacted granular fill. They shall have tooled joints of 1-inch minimum depth at approximately 5-foot centers with 1/2-inch preformed expansion joint filler at approximately 25-foot centers with one at all comers, and located anywhere sidewalks abut structures and buildings. 3.16 CONCRETE REMOVAL AND PATCHING A. All areas disturbed due to concrete removal or repair shall be patched as specified in ~' Bonding to Existing Concrete. 3.17 SEALING A. Apply one coat of sealer as soon as practicable after finishing. If a curing compound is used, CONTRACTOR shall vedfy compatibility with sealer. B. At completion of project, clean surface thoroughly with detergent and rinse. Apply a second coat of sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If detergent and rinse does not remove all dirt and staining, acid etch or shot blast surface to obtain clean and uniform surface. Apply two coats of sealer following manufacturer's directions. D. CONTRACTOR is responsible for protection of flOOr slabs from staining or other damage dudng the construction period. ? END OF SECTION Section 03300-15 ~ 1-382-636/03-04 ~ SECTION 03415 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Precast concrete hollow core planks. 2. Connection plates and hangers. 3. Grouting plank joint keys. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. B. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. C. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. D. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. PCI - Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs. PCI MNL-116 - Manual for' Quality ConSol for Plants and 'Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products. G. PCI MNL-120 - Design Handbook - Precast and PrestressEd Concrete. H. PCI MNL-123 - Manual on Design of Connections for Precast Prestressed Concrete. i. PCI - Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. J. PCI ~ Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. ' 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. SiZb Cbmp0nents to Withstand deSign loads i~ an unr~straihed condition as follows: Roof Assembly: All dead loads plus 37 psf live loads plus concentrated loads shown on the drawings. At pitched roof structures, the loads will be transmitted to the panels through the attic stud walls. Increased loading due to Snow ddffing at obstructions and changes in roof elevation shall be included in the design. B. Plank shall be designed in acCordance with the pCI - Manual For The Design Of Hollow Core Slabs and PCI - Design Handbook. C. Plank shall be capable of resisting shear forces as a diaphragm. Diaphragm chords will be the masonry bond beams. Section 03415-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, openings intended to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials. 1.05 B. Product Data: cambers. QUALIFICATIONS A. Indicate standard component configuration, design loads, deflections, and Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacturing the work of this section with three years experience. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast planks. Make records available upon request. B. Erector: Company specializing in erecting the work of this Section approved by fabricator. C. Design precast concrete members in accordance with PCI Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs, under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Wisconsin. D. Welder: Qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ACI 318 and Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002 for design load and on-site construction requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall submit additional copies of shop drawings for submittal to the [building code official] by ENGINEER. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039 - Coordination, Field Engineering and Meetings. B. Discuss anchor and weld plate locations, sleeve locations, and cautions regarding cutting or core drilling. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lifting or Handling Devices shall be capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection. B. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work of framing components not post tensioned but directly associated with the Work of this section. Section 03415-2 mi F' B. Coordinate field cut openings With affected section. C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work. Di C0o~dinate Io~.~ti°n of anchors` to be placed in masonry walls. PART2,pRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. The plank shall be prestressed hollow-core precast concrete plank as fabricated bY the Spancrete Company, Flexicore Company, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ma{~aiS ~h~ii~mPiYwith ProviSions ~f A~i 3i81 B. Cement grout for grouting joints shall be one part Portland Cement per ASTM C150, three parts Sand and water. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. connecting and supporting devi'ces Shall be A36 Steel Unless noted otherwise. Bearing pads shall be high density plastic, 1/8-inch thick. C. Caulk as approved by plank manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Conform to AWS D1.4., PCI MNL-116, and PCI MNL-120, and PCI MNL-123, B. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated. C. Cut exposed ends flush. 2.05 FINISHES A. Plank to be painted on underside shall be field abrasive blasted and painted as specified in Section 09900 - Painting. B. Connecting and supporting steel devices shall be prime painted Der Section 09900 ~ Painting. Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or surfaces requiring field welding. Refer to Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications, 3.06 for repair of galvanized areas damaged by welding. 2.06 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to PCl - Tolerances for Precast and Prestressed Concrete. Section 03415-3 1-382-636/03-04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Vedfy that site conditions and supporting structure are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair damaged members. B. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints, as erection progresses. C. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from staining. D. Install bearing pads at bearing ends of planks as indicated. E. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and grouting. F. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment. Grout plank joints, trowel smooth. Any grout that may have seeped through to the ceiling below shall be removed before it hardens. Grout shall also be placed between masonry and underside of roof plank in spaces created by roof plank camber over all extedor walls and bearing walls. On nonbearing interior walls, a void over 1/2-inch shall be filled with 1/2-inch expansion material and grout the remainder. This grout shall be applied following roofing. It is the intent that a space of 1/4-inch to 1/2-inch be left for caulking as required in Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealants. H. Underside of joints between planks that remain exposed shall be caulked with the plank manufacturer's material. Potable water reservoir planks shall not be caulked. I. Secure units in place. Perform welding, where shown, in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-116. 3.05 CUTTING OPENINGS Cooperation shall be extended all trades in permitting the insertion of anchors, hangers, vents, electrical outlets, etc. Holes needed for such devices shall be cut in the field by the various trades. Cuts shall be made with a masonry saw or core drill. The various trades shall be present during installation of the roof deck. All openings not dimensioned or shown on the drawings shall be located by the trades requiring the openings. All openings Section 03415-4 larger than 8 inches in any dimension shall be made by the roof slab supplier and, where necessary, hangers shall be furnished by the supplier. All spalling shall be repaired by the roof plank supplier pdor to caulking. It is essential that plank which will remain exposed from below have a neat finished surface. Particular care shall be given to appearance of holes and openings. END OF SECTION Section 03415-5 1-382-636/03-04 F ? ? DIVISION 4 - MASONRY F F SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The work includes mortar and grout for masonry. 1,02 B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. REFERENCES Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in A. Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002. B. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. D. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. E. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. F. AsTM C476 - Grout for Masonry G. ASTM C979 - Pigments for Integrally Colored MortadConcrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. ~3u~mit Under pro~}isions ~f Section 0~300 - Subi-nittais, B. Submit information on Portland cement, integral waterproofing compound, and hydrated lime for mortar. Include design mix with proportions of materials being used. Submit gradation on aggregates. C. Submit design mix for grout including gradation of aggregates, D. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that aroducts meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All cement shall be stored in a dry, weatherproof, properly ventilated structure which will pi-6tect it ~r0m d~mpness and freezing. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System, for cold weather requirements. Section 04100-1 1-382-636/03-04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I or III with an approVed integral waterproofing compound added, Dry-Block by W.R. Grace Company, or equak Masonry cements will not be permitted. B. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar aggregate for ordinary tile, brick, stone, and block shall consist of clean, sharp sand, conforming to ASTM C144. The sand shall be graded within the following limits: Sieve Number Percent by Weight Passing 2.02 4 100 8 95 to 100 16 70 to 100 30 40 to 75 50 10 to 35 100 2 to 15 200 --- Sand from any one source shall not vary over the extreme limits shown above. For unusually thin joints, such as occur with a unit having cut or ground edges, the aggregate used shall conform to these specifications except that 95% shall pass a No. 16 sieve. E. Water used in mixing water shall be clean and free of injurious materials. Mortar shall be Type S with proportion restrictions as stated in the Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code. Mortar shall be thoroughly mixed until of uniform color and consistency. Only sufficient mortar to meet the immediate requirements of the work shall be mixed at one time. No mortar shall be retempered after it has begun to set, and no partially set mortar shall be used. No anti-freeze material shall be used in the mortar to lower the freezing point. Colored mortar shall be provided for the brick banding. Colored mortar shall be Western Colored Masons Blend, premixed and colored as manufactured by Western Lime and . Cement Company, or equal. Color shall be selected by OWNER. Colored mortar shall contain white cement and white sand. GROUT A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 - Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. B. Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. Grout shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi with the following proportions: 1. Fine Grout: 1 Portland Cement: 0 to 1/10 lime: 2-1/2 to 3 fine aggregate. Section 04100-2 2. Coarse Grout: 1 Portland:Cement: 0 to 1/10 lime: 2-1/2 to 3 fine aggregate: I to 2 coarse aggregate. Fine grout shall be used in spaces with least horizontal dimension greater than 3/4 inches and less than 2-1/2 inches. Coarse grout shall be used in all spaces with least dimensions 2-1/2 inches or greater. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities. C. Where joints occur in grout, they shall be made 2 inches below the block joint so that a key is provided. D. Grout full masonry walls from top of floor to underside of all lintels at Openings for a distance of 16 inches adjacent to each side of opening, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 04100-3 SECTION 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Concrete block. 2. Concrete sound absorptive block. 3. Bdck. 4. Reinforcement, anchorage, control joints, and accessories. 5. Cold weather requirements. Ao B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. 1.02 ALLOWANCES Applicable ~rovisions of Division I shall govern work in 1.03 1.04 A. The bricks to be used shall be of the following size, bond, and assumed net price to purchase and deliver. Modular size (7-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 3-5/8) running bond assumed price of $400 per M, f.o.b. Installation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid. B. Face bdck shall be included in CONTRACTOR's proposal at assumed net price as indicated per M, f.o.b, delivered to the job site. Should net cost of brick be more or less than assumed amount, OWNER will adjust amount of Contract at time of final payment based on number of brick used in the work and actual net price paid to supplier by CONTRACTOR for brick delivered as noted above. REFERENCES A. Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002. B. ASTM C67 - Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. C. ASTM C90 - Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. D. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick. E. ASTM C744 - Pre-Faced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. F. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns and walls shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10 feet, 3/8-inch in a story height or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/2-inch in 40 feet or more. Variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, shall not exceed 1/4-inch in any story or 20 feet maximum nor 1/2-inch in 40 feet or more. Section 04300-1 F F Variation from the level of 't'he grades indicated on the drawing for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed 1/4-inch in any bay or 20 feet, nor 1/2-inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of the linear building line from an established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions shall not exceed 1/2-inch in any bar or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4-inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls shall not exceed ~ minus 1/4~inch, nor plus 1/2-inch from the dimensions indicated on the drawings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.06 A. Masonry units, when delivered to the site, shall be thoroughly cured and shall be dry. When stored on the site, they shall not be in contact with the ground, shall be kept clean, and shall be covered with waterproof cover. COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS All masonry units delivered to use in freezing weather shall De fully protected by a weather- tight covering to prevent accumulation of ice on the units. Loose board covering will not be permitted. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. 2. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. 3. Perform the following construction procedure while the work is progressing. When air temperature is from 40°F (4°0) to 32°F (0°C), heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°0) and 120°F {49°0): a. When air temperature is from 32°F (0°C) to 2§°F (-4°C) heat sand or water to produce mortar temperature between 40°F (4°0) and 120°F (49°0); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. b. When air temperature is from 25°F (-4°0) to 20°F {-7°0) heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°(:;) and 120°F (49°0); maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing; use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction; use wind breaks when wind is in excess of 16 mph. c. When air temperature is from 20°F (-7°C) and below, heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F (4°C) and 120°F (49°C); provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature abOVe 32oF (0cC); do not lay units which have a surface temperature of 20°F (-7°0). 4. Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. When the mean daily air temperature is from 40°F (4°0) to 32°F (0°C), protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather- restrictive membrane. b. When the mean daily a r temperature is from 32°F (0°Cl to 2§°F (-4°0), completely cover masonry with weather-restrictive membrane for at least 24 hours. c. When the mean daily air temperature is from 25°F (-4°0) to 20°F (-70C), c~mpletely cover masonry with insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours. Section 04300-2 d. When mean daily temperature is 20°F (-7°C) and below, maintain masonry temperature above 320F (0°C) for 24 hours using enclosures, blankets and supplementary heat. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETEBLOCK A. Concrete block shall be Icad bearing and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C90, Grade N, and the Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002. Bond shall be running bond. Concrete block shall be the two-cell type and shall be made with normal weight aggregate. Unless otherwise indicated, interior concrete block at window sills and lintels, pilasters, and the top course of walls at roof lines shall be constructed of solid concrete block, lintel block filled with grout, or the cores of the block filled with grout. Interior block at window sills shall be solid concrete block unless otherwise noted. Bullnose block shall be USed at all door, window, and wall corners that remain exposed. All interior concrete block walls shall extend to the underside of roof deck or floor above unless noted otherwise. 2.02 CONCRETE SOUND ABSORPTIVE BLOCK A. The masonry block on the wails of the Generator Room shall be constructed of sound absorptive concrete masonry units as shown on the drawings. Manufacturers of all sound absorptive masonry units shall be licensed by Proudfoot Company, Inc. to produce SOUNDBLOX; by Warren Sales Co., to produce Sound Control Bloc; or equal. Sound absorptive masonry units shall meet the current ASTM C-90 requirements for hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units. All units shall have one end of the cavities tightly closed. Slots and edges shall be straight and clean. Filler elements supplied by the licenser shall be installed in the cavities of the blocks at the block plant. The fillers shall be of specially fabricated incombustible fibrous material, cut accurately to size and installed as recommended by the licenser, SOUNDBLOX fillers shall have metal septa laminated to one side of the fibrous matadals and shall be installed with the septa facing away from the slots. Fillers supplied by other licensors shall be equal in rigidity and sound absorption. C. Concrete masonry units shall be 8-inch by 16-inch nominal face size. Thickness shall be 8". Masonry units shall be SOUNDBLOX Type RSC, Sound Control Bloc, or equal. D. Provide open cavity units where vertical reinforcing in wall is required. Install sound absorptive units in the same manner as standard concrete masonry units. Care should be exercised to avoid the intrusion of mortar or debris in the cut outs. Chipped or broken units should not be incorporated into the work. Units should not be cut; standard concrete masonry units should be used as fillers. Concrete blocks at lintels, around openings and at top of walls shall be standard concrete block. The first course at all finished floor elevations shall be standard concrete blocks. Section 04300-3 2.03 BRICK Face bdck shall be ASTM C-216, latest edition, Grade SW, Type FBS, made from clay, shale, fine clay or mixture thereof. All brick shall be free from cracks, 'laminations, and other defects which may interfere with proper laying of bdck or impair the strength or permanence of the structure. New brick shall match brick on existing buildings of the Wastewater Treatment Facility. Brick shall be Belden Bdck Co., modular size Colony Blend A, or equal. Brick at parapet Shalt be Belden Bdck Co., Alaska White Velour, or equal. C. A certificate of conformance as to grade and type shall be supplied by the manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall submit brick samples to ENGINEER for selection. The bricks to be used shall be of Modular Size (7-5/8 by 2-1/4 by 3-5/8) ~ and running bond. E. Provide all brick masonry to complete work, including face brick for walls and face brick for parapet at top of walls. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE For concrete block walls, masonry wall reinforcement shall be Dur-O-Wal Truss Design manufactured by Dur-O-Wal Products, Blok-Trus manufactured by AA Wire Products Co., or equal. B. For cavity walls, masonry wall reinforcement shall be Dur-O-Wal Truss/Dur-O~Eye Design, or Econo-Cavity Blok-Trus AA 680, or equal, C. Wall reinforcement and ties shall be hot dipped galvanized having a minimum 1.50 ounce/square foot zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A153 Class B2. D. Side rods shall be 9 gauge wire and cross rods and tabs shall be 9 gauge wire. Maximum spacing of tabs shall be 24 inches. E. Prefabricated comer and tee sections ~hall be used to form continuous reinforcement around corners, and for anchoring abutting walls and partitions. Masonry Ties '1'(~' Concrete Backing: For tying masonry to concrete, unless noted otherwise, use individual dove-tail fiat bar or wire anchors, the equivalent of not less than 3/16 inch diameter steel rods, inserted in slots built into concrete with one tie for not more · than 4-1/2 square feet of wall area. Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The maximum vertical distance shall not exceed 16 inches. The maximum horizontal distance shall not exceed 36 inches. Ties shall be galvanized. G. Masonry Ties to Stud Wails: 'i'i~s' Shall be rnir~imum 22 gauge corrugated sheet steel, 7/8-inch wide with one tie per 2 square feet of wall area. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cellular or honeycomb ceil vents, 2-1/2 inches high, shall be provided at weep holes. Cell vents shall be U.V. resistant polypropylene, Durowall D/A 1006, or equal. Section 04300-4 1-382-636/03-04 Vertical expansion control joints shall be located as shown on the drawings. Control joints shall be constructed with a factory extruded section of rubber equal to Dur-O-Wal Rapid Control Joint, AA Wire Products Co. Titewall, or equal and shall extend for the entire height of the wall. Care shall be taken to insure that the gap is free of mortar or debris. Control joint shall be caulked on exposed faces with caulk of a color to match mortar, C. See Section 07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal for masonry flashing specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MASONRY WORKMANSHIP A. All masonry shall be laid plumb and true to lines: Brick shall be laid with complete full mortar joints~ Mortar beds shall be spread smooth or only slightly furrowed. The ends of brick shall be buttered with sufficient mortar to fill the end joint. The vertical longitudinal joint in solid brick walls shall be completely filled by parting, by pouring the vertical joint full of grout, or by shoving. Closures shall be rocked into place with the head joints thrown against the two adjacent brick in place. B. All masonry shall be laid in running bond, unless specified otherwise. In laying brick and block masonry, the mason shall avoid over-plumbing and pounding of the corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has started to harden, the mortar shall be removed and replaced with fresh mortar. In building cavity walls, the cavity shall be kept clean by slightly beveling the mortar bed to incline toward the cavity or by placing wood strips with attached wire pulls on the metal ties. The strips shall be withdrawn and cleaned before placing the next row of metal ties. Any mortar fins which protrude into the cavity space as the wall is built, shall be troweled fiat onto the inner face of the wythe. Where cutting of exposed masonry is necessary, the cuts shall be made with a motor-driven masonry saw, or by other methods which provide cuts that are straight and true. Where flashing is to be laid on or against masonry, the surface of the masonry shall be smooth and free from projections which might puncture the flashing material. Through-wall flashing shall be placed on a bed of mortar and mortar shall be placed above the flashing. G. Weep holes spaced 32-inch on center, 2,1/2 inches high, shall be provided in the first course immediately above all flashing. Weep holes shall be kept free of mortar droppings. Outside joints around the perimeter of extedor door and window frames or other wall openings shall be not less than 1/4-inch nor more than 3/8-inch wide, and Shall be cleaned out to a uniform depth of at least 3/4-inch ready for placement of caulk. I. All walls shall be adequately braced until they are completed and anchored to the roof construction. Section 04300-5 :~ 1~382-636/03-o4 I~. Jo Construction designated as requiring "special observation" shall be constructed only in the presence of ENGINEER. K. All brick having initial rates of.absorption in excess of 0.25 ounce per square inch per miniJte'sl~all be wetted sufficiently so that the rate of absorption when laid does not exceed this amount. Wetting of units shall be such as to insure that each unit is nearly saturated, surface dry when laid. Dudng freezing weather, units that require wetting shall be sprinkled with warm water just before laying. 3.02 MORTAR JOINTS Alt joints shall be laid plumb to lines. Unless specified otherwise, mortar beds shall be full 3/8-inch thick, and shall be spread smooth or only slightly furrowed. Vertical joints shall be shoved not Over 3/8-inch thick, unless otherwise shown. All joints shall be completely filled. Interior and exterior joints shall be tooled concave. All joirff~ shall be toel~d to uniform depth and shall be straight and true. Mortar joints shall be cut flush with masonry where rigid thermal insulation will be applied to intedor masonry surfaces. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE Reinforcement shall be installed in the first and second bed joint 8 inches apart immediately above lintels and below sills at openings. Elsewhere, spacing shall be at 16-inch vertical intervals or as shown on the drawings. Reinforcement in the second joint above and below opemngs shall extend 2 feet beyond the jambs. All other reinforcing shall be continuous. Side rods shall be lapped 6 inches minimum at splices. Reinforcement units shall be of widths required for wall thicknesses as shown. Reinforcement shall be placed to assure a 5/8-inch mortar cover on the exterior face of walls and 1/2-inch mortar cover on interior faces. 3.04 BUILT-IN WORK A. AS work pr~Jgresses, install all built-in work (such as: window and door frames, anchor bolts, plates, lintels, etc.) to be provided by other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb and level. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Grout all steel door frames full with mortar except those called for to be "removable." D. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.05 PARGING A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging. B. Steel members embedded in exterior masonry shall be "buttered" with not less than 1/2-inch of setting mortar on all surfaces° Section 04300-6 3.06 JOINING OFWORK Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set or totally set, the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned and lightly wetted so as to obtain the best possible ~ bond with the new work. All loose brick and mortar shall be removed, If it becomes mi necessary to "stop-off" a horizontal run of masonry, this shall be done only by racking back bdck in each course and, if grout is used, stopping grout four inches back of the rack. ' Toothing will not be permitted. ~ 3.07 PROTECTION OFWORK During erection, all walls shall be kept dry by coverinq at the end of each day or shutdown pedod with a canvas or waterproof covering. Partially completed Wails not being worked on shall be similarly protected at all times. All covering shall overhang at least two feet on each side of the wall and shall be securely anchored. 3~08 MASONRY CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide vertical masonry control joints in bdck and block as detailed on the drawings. B. Where control joint locations are not shown on the drawings, they shall be provided as follows: Distance from wall comer (maximum) Spacing between joints (maximum) Brick Veneer Block Veneer 15 feet 12 feet 30 feet 20 feet C. Where possible, joints shall be located at edges of door, window, and louver openings, and at changes in wall height. 3.09 CLEANING NEW WORK Masonry faces to remain exposed shall be wiped with a damp cloth as the work progresses and thoroughly cleaned and pointed upon completion. If stiff brushes and water will not suffice, the surface shall be thoroughly wetted with plain water and then scrubbed with a 5 or 10% solution of hydrochloric acid. Alternatively, a commercial cleaner such as Sure Klean, or equal, may be used. immediately after, the surface shall be washed to remove all traces of acid. All surfaces not being cleaned shall be protected from the acid. All mortar shall be removed from surfaces other than masonry. 3.10 EXISTING MASONRY A. Openings in existing walls which are to be filled shall be filled with masonry units to match existing. B. Where possible new openings in existing masonry shall be sawcut. C. Provide all necessary removals and repairs required for installation of new louvers, fans, openings, etc. Section 04300-7 1-382-636/03-04 F D. At lintel bearings of all new openings grout masonry full for 16 inches full height on both sides of opening. E. Repair all masonry damaged dudng construction. F. All existing joints, intedor and exterior, shall be pointed. Pointing mortar shall be prehydrated Type N. All adjacent surfaces shall be dampened. Joints shall be finished to match existing. G. All existing masonry which will remain exposed shall be cleaned as specified for new masonry. H. New units shall be toothed into existing units. I. Masonry reinforcing shall be carried through new units. END OF SECTION Section 04300-8 DIVISION 5 ~ METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: I Structural carbon steel framing members. Steel base plates and bearing plates. 3. Structural steel bolted connections and anchor bolts. 4. Welding of structural steel. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AISC - Code of Standard Practice - Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design (ASD). B. ASTM A36/A36M - Structural Steel. C. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvan zed) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded standard Fasteners. G. ASTM A325 - High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. H. ASTM A500 - Cold-F0rmed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. I. AWS A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 1.03 K. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Painting Manual. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Provide shop drawings with complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of weld. Section 05120.1 3. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages. 4. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail number on the drawings. Unless shown otherwise, all connections shall be designed and detailed by the fabricator to support one-half of the total uniform load capacity shown in the tables for uniform load constants in the AISC Specifications. D. Except as shown otherwise, structural steel details shall conform to standard practice as illustrated in Structural Shop Drafting Textbook of the AISC. E. Indicate all temporary bracing or cabling required to stabilize the structural frame during erection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice. B. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength and composition. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders emploYed on the Work, Verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedures." CONTRACTOR shall design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the Wisconsin. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver all materials to job site propedy marked to identify the structure for which it is intended and at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Marking shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. B. Store all members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures. D. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to OWNER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36/A36M. Section 05120-2 1-382-636/03-04 B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A153. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; E70XX electrodes. G. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 and A153 for structural steel plates, shapes and bars, and structural steel tubing. ASTM A53 for steel pipe. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for identification as to structure and site for which intended. 3. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 4. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly; including Welding of units, before start of finishing operation 5. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Bolts and washers of all types and sizes shall be provided for completion of all field erection. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of Welds used in correcting welded work. 3.Assemble and weld built-up sections to produce true alignment of axes without warp. 4.Welding Shall be done by the shielded arc process. All Welds shall be chipped, ground smoOth, and primed immediately after fabrication. c. H01es fo~ Other WOrk: 1. FiNISH A. 2.03 Provide holes for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members as indicated. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to receive °ther work. Ddll, cut, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning, Ddll holes in all bearing plates. Before shipping, prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 10. sectiOn 05120-3 1-382-636/03-04 Bo Immediately after surface preparation, shop prime structural steel members in accordance with Section 09900 ~ Painting. Do not pdme surfaces that will be field welded, galvanized, or high strength bolted with fdction type connection. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly or erection shall be field finish coated prior to assembly or erection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3,01 EXAMINATION A. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completiOn of the work. B° Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ERECTION A. General: Comply with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as specified herein. Surveys: 1. Establish permanent bench marks necessary for the accurate erection of structural steel. 2. Check elevations of concrete and masonry, bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar items, before erection proceeds~ Temporary Shoring and Bracing: 1. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connection of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. 2. Provide temporary guidelines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. 3. Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide anchor bolts and other connectors for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 2. Provide templates and other devices as needed for the pre-setting of bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean beadng surfaces free from bond-reducing materials and then roughen to improve bond to surface. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and beadng plates for structural members using wedges, leveling nuts, or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but if protruding, cut off flush with the edges of the base or beadng plates pdor to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between beadng surfaces and bases to ensure that no voids remain. Section 05120-4 5. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before fastening permanently. Clean the bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanen! contact before assembly. 3. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment. 4. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. 5. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Gas Cutting: 1. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabricating errors in the structural framing. 2. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to ENGINEER. 3. When gas cutting is permitted, finish the sections equal to the sheared appearance. H After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop pdmed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all field bolted connections in accordance with the AISC Specifications. Field Welding: 1. CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect all welds and test during erection of structural steel. 2. CONTRACTOR shall certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required by applicable standards. 3. CONTRACTOR shall record types and locations of defects found and record the work required and performed to correct deficiencies. Correction: 1. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which insDecfions and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. 2. CONTRACTOR shall perform all additional testing required to show compliance of corrected work. END OF SECTION Section 05120-5 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Shop fabricated carbon steel, stainless steel, and aluminum items, including lintels, guard post, metal stairs, and ladder with cage. 2. Stairtreads and nosings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel pipe. c. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A143 - Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement. E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A176 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. G. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. H. ASTM A384 - Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. I. ASTM A385 - Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dipped). J. ASTM A570 - Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Stdp, Structural Quality. K. ASTM A611 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality. L. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. M. ASTM B211 - Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. N. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape and Tube. O. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. Section 05500,1 ~-3s~-~3~/o3-o,~ ~ P. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1.04 A. All fabrications shall meet applicable code requirements including OSHA. SUBMI'i-I'ALS FOR REVIEW A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, sections, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections Using standard AWS A2.0 Welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate steel members in accordance with AISC Code of standard practice. B. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength and composition. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS 1.07 A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedures." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job site properly ~arked to identify the strUCture for which it is intended and at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Marking shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. Store all members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Do not Store materials on the structure in a manner {h'~{ mig'~t:'~Us~ d~i~t0r~ion or damage to the members of the supporting structures: In the event of damage, imm~diately make all rePairs and rePlaCements necessary at no additional cost to OWNER. 2.01 PART 2 -PRODUCTS MATERIALS - CARBON STEEL A. Steel Sections: 1. ASTM A36 (channels, angles, plates). 2, ASTM A992-50 (wide flange sections). SeCtion 05500-2 B. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A570 orA611. D. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel complying with FS FF-W-92. E. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307 Grade A, or galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components for exterior use and where built into extedor walls. F. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel complying with FS FF-W-84. G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; E70XX electrodes. N. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 2.02 MATERIALS - STAINLESS STEEL A. Unless otherwise noted, all stainless steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM A240 and shall be Type 316L. B. If components are not available in Type 316L, other 300 Series type shall be used as approved by ENGINEER. 2.03 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM 2.04 A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061, Temper T6. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3005. C. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B211, Alloy 6061, Temper T6. D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. FABRICATION Fabrication and assembly: 1. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings. 2. Propedy mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for identification as to structure and site for which intended. 3. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 4. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operation. 5. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. ,J Section 05500-3 Connections: 1. Bolts and washers of all types and sizes shall be provided for completion of all field erection. 2. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds used in correcting welded work. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections to produce true alignment of axes without warp. 4. Welding shall be done by the shielded arc process. 5. All welds shall be chipped, ground smooth, and palmed immediately after fabrication. Workmanship: I Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown of size and thickness to produce strength and durability in the finished product. 2. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on the Shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. 3. Form bxposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and with straight sharp edges. 4. Form bent metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing works. 5. Cap all open ends of pipe and structural tubing. 6. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush; match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 7. Provide for anchorage of the type shown. Coordinate with supporting structures. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 6. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive hardware and similar items. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATION 2.06 Aluminum Ladder and Cage: Provide fixed aluminum ladder and cage as shown on the drawings. Aluminum ladder shall have serrated surface on rungs. Cage shall have hasp to allow it to be locked. Lock by OWNER. FINISHES Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing as specified in Section 09900 - Painting. Do not prime surfaces where galvanizing or field welding is required. Immediately after surface preparation, prime paint items with one coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Section 09900 - Painting. Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to the requirements i~n this section and ASTM A123. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly or erection shall be finish painted prior to assembly or erection. Section 05500-4 Galvanizing: 1. All items except piping, designated to be galvanized shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM Specification A123 and A153. Piping Shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A53. Furnish a Certificate of Compliance stating that the galvanizing complies with ASTM Specifications and Standards and all other applicable requirements specified herein. 2. Fabrication of items to be galvanized shall be in accordance with ASTM A143, A384, and A385. Structural steel shall be fabricated generally in accordance with Class 1 guidelines as shown in "Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures" as published by the American Hot Dip Galvanizer's Association, Inc. 3. Galvanized items shall be handled, transported and stored to prevent damage or staining to the coating. Maintain adequate ventilation and continuous drainage. 4. Steel shall conform to ASTM A36 except that the silicone content shall be in the range of 0 to 0.04%. 5. Steel work shall be pre-cleaned utilizing a caustic bath, acid pickle and flux or shall be blast cleaned and fluxed. In either case, all surface contaminants and coatings shall be remove& 6. All welding shall be performed in accordance with the American Welding Society publication D19.0-72, '~/elding Zinc Coated Steel." All uncoated weld areas shall be touched up. Aluminum shall have a mill finish unless otherwise specified: Any aluminum in contact with concrete or dissimilar metal shall be coated with multiple coats of bituminous paint, minimUm 10 mils dry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete construction. B. Coordinate delivery of such items to project. C. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION Setting Precast Anchorages: 1. Clean beadng surfaces free from bond reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates. 2. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten and anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims; but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Section 05500-5 F 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. CuEing, Fitting and Placement: 1. Perform cueing, drilling, and fitting for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. 2. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, and make Plumb, level, true, and free from rack, measured from established lines and levels. 3. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. 4. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, grind joints smooth, and touch up shop paint coat or galvanizing repair. Weirs and Baffles: 1. Provide watertight splice plates at joints between sections of weirs and baffles. 2. Weirs and baffles shall be installed level with a tolerance of +_1/8-inch. 3.04 FIELD wE[_'~ING A. Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of weld made, and methods in correcting welding work. 3.05 TOUCH-UP PAINTING Ac Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. 3.06 GALVANIZING REPAIR Areas damaged by welding, flame-cuEing or during handling, transport or erection shall be repaired by one of the following methods whenever damage exceeds 3/16-inch in width. 1. Cold Galvanizing Compound: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-rich paint shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease and corrosion products. b. Areas to be repaired shall be power disc sanded to bright metal. To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, surface preparation shall extend into the undamaged galvanized coating. c. Touch-up paint shall be an organic cold galvanized compound having a minimum of 94% zinc dust in the dry film. d. The paint shall be spray or brush applied in multiple coats until a dry film thickness of 8 mils minimum has been achieved. A finish coat of aluminum paint shall be applied to provide a color blend with the surrounding galvanizing. e. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 2. Zinc Based Solder: a. Surfaces to be reconditioned with zinc-based solder shall be clean, dry and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. b. Areas to be repaired shall be wire brushed. Section 05500-6 c. Heat shall be applied slowly and broadly dose to, but not directly onto the area to be repaired. The zinc-based solder rod shall be rubbed onto the heated metal until the rod begins to melt. A flexible blade or wire brush shall be used to spread the melt over the area to be covered. The zinc based solder shall be applied in a minimum thickness of 2 mils. d. Coating thickness shall be verified by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. B. Guard Posts: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized and field finish paint per Division 9. Lintels: Shop prime paint finish for interior wall lintels; galvanized finish for extedor wall lintels. Lintels approved by ENGINEER shall be placed over all masonry openings, even though not shown on the drawings. See lintel schedule on the drawings. D. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Angle sections; shop prime paint finish. END OF SECTION Section 05500-7 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 05560 ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION BOLTS, AND RESIN ANCHORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Anchor bolts, expansion bolts, and resin anchors. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36/A36M - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Steel Fasteners. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts complete with washers and nuts shall be fabricated as shown or as specified by the equipment manufacturer and, unless otherwise indicated, shall be hot-dip galvanized carbon steel or 316 stainless steel. Anchor bolts shall, as a minimum, conform to the requirements of ASTM A307. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be used in all submerged locations, below final grade and in contact with aluminum and other items not to be painted. Galvanized anchor bolts shall be used elsewhere. 2.02 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Expansion bolts shall be Power-Bolt by Powers Fastening Systems, or equal. B. Expansion bolts will not be permitted as substitutes for embedded anchor bolts except with the prior written acceptance of ENGINEER or where otherwise specifically called for. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or specified, use the following bolt matedal for the vadous installation situations: 1. Stainless Steel: For all submerged locations, below final grade, and in contact with aluminum appurtenances and other items not to be painted. Also for anchoring equipment, unless otherwise specified. 2. Steel: In other locations in contact with items to be painted or encased in concrete. 2.03 RESIN ANCHORS A. Resin anchors shall be Powers Fastening Systems Power-Fast, or equal. Section 05560-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts for structural members shall be located as shown and specified. B. Anchor bolts for mechanical equipment shall have embedment length, edge distances, and spacing as required by the equipment manufacturer. C. All dirt or foreign materials shall be removed pdor to embedding into concrete. After anchor bolts have been embedded, their threads shall be protected by grease and by installing the nuts, or by other means until the time of installation of the equipment or metal work. 3.02 EXPANSION BOLTS A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, expansion bolt edge distance and spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Bolt embedment shall at least equal six bolt diameters. C. All procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Where location of anchors is adjustable, reinforcing steel shall be located pdor to ddlling holes and bolts shall be located to clear reinforcing steel. 3.03 RESIN ANCHORS A. At locations shown on the drawings, reinforcing bars or threaded rod shall be provided in existing concrete by drilling holes, injecting vinyl ester resin and inserting the reinforcing bar. B. All existing surfaces to receive resin anchors including the entire area in contact with the new concrete shall be cleaned and roughened to amplitude of 1/4-inch. C. All procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Where location of anchors is adjustable, reinforcing steel shall be located pdor to ddlling holes and bolts and shall be located to clear reinforcing steel END OF SECTION Section 05560-2 "' DIVISION 7 -THERMAL MD MOIS~_'I'_ ~.~,E~, .PR~O~.T~!~.,N- ................................................ SECTION 07191 VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes vapor barrier under concrete floors on grade, in exterior construction, in roof construction, and on top of precast roof plank. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisiOns of Division I shall govern work in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ~.~ V~r b;~rri~ ~l~ic~r{~ist 0f6 mii 'P~iy~ihylene sheeting PART'3. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - UNDER CONCRETE FLOORS ON GRADE A. Provide continuous vapor barrier under concrete floors on grades that are 8 inches or less in thickness. B. Lap all joints a minimum of 12 inches. C~ Place 6 inches of granula~ c0shiOn 0Var val~0~ ba~ier.' END OF SECTION section 0719i.1 1..382-636i0~04 SECTION 07212 BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes board insulation for cavity wall construction, for perimeter foundation wails and under floor slabs-on-grade, , B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govem work in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Cavity wall insulation shall be 1-1/2 inch thick polyisocyanurate foam board with foil facing on both sides. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 72°F shall be a minimum of 10.0. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal. Celotex Thermax by Celotex Corporation. C. Adhesive for adhering insulation to backup wall shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.02 FOUNDATION AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION Foundation and under-slab insulation shall be 2-inch thick extruded polystyrene closed cell dgid foam board with continuous skins on both sides. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 75°F shall be a minimum of 10.0 Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Styrofoam Square Edge by Dow Chemical Company. 2. Foamular 250 by UC Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - CAVITY WALLS A. Insulation shall be installed horizontally within the cavity space between masonry wythes. B. Take care dudng installation to ensure all insulation boards are butted and installed between ties, and fit flush against inner wythe or backup wall. C. Cut insulation neatly to fit around obstructions across the cavity such as vents, louvers, pipes and conduits. SectiOn 07212-1 D. Secure insulation in place against backup wall with mastic adhesive and observe label directions. 3.02 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATION WALLS AND UNDER FLOORS Rigid insulation shall be laid dw against the foundation walls as backfill is placed. Insulation shall be located at all perimeter and basement walls of buildings and structures containing areas that may be occupied by personnel. Perimeter wall insulation used on buildings without basements shall be 40 inches high located on the inside of f~)undafi0n walls. Insulation shall also be placed under edge of slabs on grade, 24 inches wide. END OF SECTION sectiOn 07212-2 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Silicone firestopping foam for sealing annular spaces around ductwork penetrations through fire rated assemblies. 2. Silicone firestopping sealant for sealing annular spaces around piping and conduit penetrations through fire rated assemblies, and to seal gaps at intersections of walls and floors/ceilings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. B. UL - Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping materials and installation shall conform to the Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002 requirements, including fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance from local building inspector indicating approval of firestopping materials and installation. 1,04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. A small amount of hydrogen gas is released as the firestopping foam cures. Use forced air ventilation when installing if areas of installation have less than 2 cubic feet of free air for each pound of liquid mixture being formed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING FOAM A. Firestopping foam for duct penetrations through fire-rated assemblies shall be a foamed-in-place silicone elastomer produced from two liquid components. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fire Barder 2001 Silicone RTV Foam by 3 M Corporation. Section 07270-1 2.02 FIRESTOPPING SEALANT A. Firestopping sealant for piping and conduit penetrations through fire-rated assemblies shall be a single-component silicone elastomer. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV Foam by 3 M Corporation. 2.03 DAMMING MATERIAL A. Damming material shall be fire:resistant mineral fiber (if left in place) or other combustible material (if removed) as directed by the appropriate fire-tested designs. 2.04 PRIMER AND WRAP STRIP A. Primer for firestopping sealant shall be 3 M Corporation, or eq ual. B. Wrap stdp for firestopping sealant shall be 3 M Fire .Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Firestopping foam and sealant shall be applied according to manufacturer's written instructions, and shall achieve a fire rating equal to rating of construction which is penetrated. Substrate shall be free of all combustible materials (except damming material for later removal), loose impediment, oil, and other free liquids. Install damming material to establish the thickness and hold the firestopping foam/sealant in place. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. All gaps or cracks left after damming materials are in place must oe sealed. Firestopping Foam: Immediately after m~xing, dispense liquid foam into the penetration opening in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Do not overfill penetration openings with liquid foam. Foam expands approximately three times its original volume during cure. Follow manufacturer's guidelines. If the opening is not filled when the cured foam has completed its expansion, repeat the installation and cure procedure until the opening is filled to the desired level. Allow 15 minutes between application of each shot. Firestopping Sealant: Apply primer and wrap strip in accordance with manufacturer's instructions pdor to installing sealant. Apply sealant to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches and with uniform density and texture. E. Remove combustible damming material after foam/sealant has cured. Non-combustible damming matedal may be left in place. section 07270-2 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL Firestopping Foam: 1. Perform manufacturer's four-step, in-line quality control check at least once daily and upon changing to a new lot of material, in order to ensure performance of both dispensing equipment and foam product prior to installing penetration seals. The four-step quality check includes evaluation for: snap time (cure rate); foam color and uniformity; foam cell structure; and foam density (weight). 2. Check cured penetration seal after 24-hour cure by removing damming materials to examine seal. 3. Cured foam should completely fill penetration. Fill all remaining gaps with freshly mixed foam or firestopping sealant. 4. Re-check after added material has cured 24 hours. 5. Damming materials required to achieve a fire rating must be returned to the penetration. 6. Clean up spills of liquid components with high-flash mineral spirit solvent, following manufacturer's instructions. 7. If necessary; trim excess cured foam with a sharp knife or blade. Firestopping Sealant: 1. Check completed work for complete adhesion and seal 48 hours after sealant application. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces of excess sealant using a compatible solvent in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Section 07270-3 SECTION 07531 SINGLE PLY ROOFING- FULLYADHERED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: I Vapor retarder. 2. Rigid roof insulation. 3. Protection board. 4. Membrane roofing and related accessories. 5. See drawings for locations of adhered roofing. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FM 4470 (Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation) - Roof Assembly Classifications. B. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors' Association) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. UL 790 - Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300- Submittals for general submittal requirements. B. Submit the following: 1. Tapered insulation layout plan. 2. Roofing layout plan. 3. Flashing, joint, and termination details. 4. Product data for all products specified in this section. 5. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 6. Copy of system warranty. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF INSTALLER A. RoOfing system shall be inStalled by a manufacturer authorized roofing applicator who is thOrOughlY familiar With the system, and has extens ve experience in performing the work of this section. ;i:0~: REGUEATi::)F~Y REQUi~MEN-Fs ~ A. The roofing system shall meet UL Class B fire hazard classification, Section 07531,1 1.06 WARRANTY Fumish to OWNER the roofing manufacturer's 15-year total system warranty covering the costs of all labor and materials required to repair any leaks and any defects in the roofing system. All products and applications required by the roof manufacturer to obtain the warranty shall be included in the Bid. OWNER will not pay for the roofing system unless the warranty is issued by the manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR RETARDER A. Vapor retarder shatl be constructed of two layers of heavy duty kraft laminated with fire retardant adhesive and containing glass fibers placed along each edge for added strength. Vapor retarder shall conform to UL construction No. I fire resistance requirements. B. Vapor retarder shall be approved by roofing manufacturer for use in the roofing system. Unless prohibited by the roofing manufacturer, acceptable products include the following, or equal: Pyro-Kure 600 by Fortifiber Corporation. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION Roof insulation shall be Type 2, 1.35 pcf extruded polystyrene tapered board insulation as required, over polyisocyanurate board insulation. Minimum thickness of polyisocyanurate board insulation shall be 4 inches at roof drains. Aged thermal resistance (R-value) at 75°F shall be a minimum of 5.0 per inch of thickness of polyisocyanurate board. B. Roof insulation shall be approved by roofing manufacturer for use in the roofing system. 2.03 PROTECTION BOARD A. Protection board shall be minimum 1/2-inch structural wood fiberboard approved by the roofing manufacturer for use in this system. 2.04 MEMBRANE, FLASHING, AND ACCESSORIES A. Roofing membrane shall be nonreinforced EPDM, 0.060 inches thick. Acceptable systems include the following, or equal: 1. Sure Seal, Design A Adhered System by Carlise SynTec Systems, Division of Carlise Corporation. 2. Rubberguard Adhered System by Firestone Building Products Company. Flashing shall be minimum 0.060-inch thick neoprene or EPDM sheet flashing provided by the roofing manufacturer. All adhesives, sealants, splicing tape, fastening strips, fastenerS, pipe flashing boots, walkway pads, and all accessories necessary to complete the system shall be provided by the roofing manufacturer. Provide precast concrete splash pads at all new roof drain downspouts. Splash pads shall be of 3,000 psi concrete. Section 07531-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surfaces on which the roofing system is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign materials, oil, and grease and all Contaminants that would be detrimental to the bonding of the roof system. The condition of the roof deck shall be approved by the roofing manufacturer before the membrane is applied. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The thermal insulation shall be adhered to the concrete deck with a flood coat of Type III steep asphalt, minimum 40 pounds per square, as approved by the roofing manufacturer. The insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around all roof penetrations and projections. Fiberboard shall be placed over and adhered to insulation per manufacturer's recommendations. Any other requirements of the roofing manufacturer shall be complied with. Care shall be taken to prevent asphalt from contacting the roof membrane. The roofing membrane and accessories shall be furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Lap adjacent sheets a minimum of 3 inches. Seams shall be sealed with splicing cement. A bead of lap sealant shall be applied to completely cover the splice edge providing a second independent seam seal. All seams shall be taped with a~ approved seam tape and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Flashing shall be provided at all vertical surfaces, roof interruptions and penetrations in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations and Contract Documents. All flashings and terminations shall be securely fastened in the plane of the roof deck with fasteners recommendeC by the system manufacturer. Membrane edges or flashing shall be mechanically fastened to the nailer at maximum of 8-inch centers. No unit having defects shall be installed. In no event shall more insulation be placed on the surface to be roofed than can be covered with roofing membrane prior to the onset of inclement weather, or termination of the day's work. Water must not be allowed beneath any completed section of roof. Temporary water cutoffs may be made by extending the membrane beyond the insulation and setting the end of the membrane in a sealant. All water cutoffs shall be removed prior to proceeding with the next day's work. END OF SECTION Section 07531:3 SECTION 07620 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes masonry-wall flashing; custom fabricated sheet metal flashing, and counter flashing at parapet walls, scuppers, roof mounted equipment, and other locations. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1'.02 REFERENCES : A: ASTM A653 - steel Sheet, Zinc coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot,Dip Process. B. ASTM A924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip : Process. C. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal, D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate. 1.03 E. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos - Free. F. SMACNA - Architectural sheet Metal Manual. suBMITTALS . A~ See Section 01300 - Submittals for general submittal requirements. B. Shop drawings: Submit fabrication details, jointing details, fastening methods, and termination details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and installer shall be a company specializing in sheet metal fabrication work with a minimum of five years of verifiable experience in that field. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Kynar 500 coating shall be provided with a 20-year guarantee against cracking, chipping, peeling, and fading. Section 07620-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Masonry-wall flashing and flashing around windows, doors, and other openings shall be 32 mil of self-adhesive rubberized, asphalt integrally bonded to 8 mil of cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film to provide a minimum 40 mil thick membrane. Flashing shall be PERM-A-BARRIER. Wall flashing as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal. Provide pdmer or surface conditioner as recommended by manufacturer. B. Galvanized steel sheet: 26-gauge meeting ASTM A525, Grade A with G90 zinc coating. C. Aluminum sheet: 0.032-inch thick meeting ASTM B209. D. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing sheet. Stainless steel fasteners may be used with any flashing material. Provide soft neoprene washers with fasteners. E. Primer: Zinc chromate type. F. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type. G. Sealant: See Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealants. H. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt or butyl type. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I or I1. Reglets: Galvanized steel or PVC, surface mounted or recessed, or as shown on the drawings. K. Solder: ASTM B32. Soldering is not permitted on aluminum or stainless steel sheet. 2.02 FABRICATION A. All flashing and fascia shall be formed to the configurations shown on the drawings and/or the applicable manufacturer's details, or in accordance with SMACNA standard details where not shown on the drawings or in manufacturers details. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from buckles, kinks, or other defects. B. All exposed edges shall be folded or returned on themselves at least 1/2-inch. Comers shall be mitered and seamed. C. Form pieces in the longest possible lengths. Form material with flat lock seams. D. All sections shall be provided with slip joints at 8 feet on center. E. Cleats shall be fabricated of the same materials as the flashing sheets and shall be interlockable with the sheets. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4-inch and hemmed to form a drip. Section 07620-2 G. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18-inch long legs. Seam or solder for rigidity and seal with sealant. 2.03 FINISH A. Back paint all sheet metal with asphaltum paint where sheet metal surfaces come in contact with masonry or steel. B. Flashing and fascia shall be painted Where exposed to view from the ground. Galvanized steel shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. Aluminum shall be coated with a Kynar 500 coatin9 system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Through-wall flashing shall be installed 1/2-inch back of the outside face of the wall, carried through the outside wythe, turned up in the collar, and adhered to back-up wall as shown on the drawings. At no time should any portion of the flashing be allowed to hang or drape beyond the width of the wall. All laps shall be sealed and shall not be less than 3 inches in width. Flashing around openings shall extend at least 3 inches beyond each side of opening. B. Fit flashing tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and line accurate to profiles. Seal metal joints watertight. C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted by ENGINEER. D. Insert flashings into reglets where shown on the drawings. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. Counter flashing shall be provided at all vertical masonry and/or concrete walls which extend above the roof line: The counter flashing shall be installed in a reglet unless otherwise shown. Surface-mounted reglets shall be used where noted. END OF SECTION section 07620-3 SECTION O79OO CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Caulking and sealants on the project, including primers and backer rod material. B. Related sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C920 - Elastomedc Joint Sealants 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall comply with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit color chart for each sealant used on project. Colors will be selected by ENGINEER. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Caulked joints shall be weather-tight and guaranteedwater[ight for five years from date of final payment. Deliver original guarantee to OWNER with copies to ENGINEER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CAULK - NONSUBMERGED APPLICATIONS - GENERAL A. Caulk for nonsubmerged applications in all locations except floor joints shall be a one part polyurethane sealant. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Sonnebom NP1 by Sonneborn - Chem Rex, Inc. 2. Vulkem 116 by Mameco International. 2.02 CAULK- NONSUBMERGED APPLICATIONS - FLOOR JOINTS A. Caulk for floor joints in nonsubmerged applications shall be a one-part, self leveling, polyurethane sealant. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Sonnebom SL1 by Sonneborn - Chem Rex, Inc. 2. Vulkem 45 by Mameco International. Section 07900-1 1-382-636/03-04 2.03 ACCESSORIES Backer rod shall be flexible, closed cell polyethylene rod stock sized to be under at least 25% compression when positioned in the joint. In shallow joints and where backer rod is not used, polyethylene bond breaker tape shall be used. It is essential that the caulk bond to the side of the joint but not to the base of the joint. Primer(s) shall be used where required by the manufacturer for the specific product(s) used and the specific application(s) intended. Specific product(s) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Cleaning fluid shall be methyl ethyl keytone (MEK), methyl tone (MIKS), or similar solvent material which will not etch or mar metal finishes, and shall be the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer, of type expressly recommended for use with the caulking or sealant compound used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Seal completely all joints around entire perimeter of all openings in all exterior walls (inside and outside faces), including joints at all exterior doors, windows, louvers, sills, and elsewhere as noted on the drawings and as necessary to seal all open joints in the building in a complete manner. Joints in exterior walls shall be caulked in a completely weather-tight manner. Joints between interior walls and concrete ceilings and other interior joints shall be caulked as indicated on the drawings. Caulking not specified in other sections shall be performed under this heading. B. All caulking shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's spedfications. Allow' minimum 28-day curing period for concrete, grout, or mortar prior to caulking unless requested otherwise. Caulking work shall be done before the final coat of paint is applied except at moving joints which shall be finish painted before caulking or caulking shall be protected during painting, All Caulking shall occur only when the temperature is above 40OF. C. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and palmed before caulking in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unless otherwise shown, joints shall be square in cross section 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch and shall comply with manufacturer's joint width/depth ratio limitations. Eo Backer rod shall be used in all openings 3/4-inch or more in depth and shall be tightly packed to completely fill the space to 1/2,inch back of face. The 1/2-inch shall then be filled with caulking compound. Caulking shall be done by hand gun. Compound shall be driven into joint grooves with sufficient pressure to force out all air and fill joint grooves solidly. Caulking where exposed shall be free of wrinkles, and shall be uniformly smooth. At completion of caulking, clean off all excess material from adjoining surfaces and material. Entire installation shall be left in a perfect appearing, weathertight condition. END OF SECTION Section 07900-2 SECTION 08110 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. 1.02 REFERENCES 1.03 Work included: Thermally insulated and fire rated steel doors and frames, Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in A. ANSi/SD1-100 - Standard Steel DoOrs and Frames. B. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. SUBM TTAILS A. Submittals shall be in accordance w th provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.04 verity compatibility with field paint system specified. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B. In addition to shop drawings and product data, indicate type of pr mer pa nt to be used and PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMALLY INSULATED DOORS A. Thermally insulated doom shall be hollow full flush, 1-3/4 inch thick, 16 gauge steel sheet in accordance with ANS!!SDI~100, with polyurethane core rigid reinforcing full thickness. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Ceco Imperial. 2. Amweld 15LE Series. 2.02 FIRE RATED DOORS Fire rated doom shall be hollow full flush, 1-3/4 inch thick, 16 gauge Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100, with honeYcomb core full thickness. Fire doors shall carry Underwriters' Label On the door. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Ceco Regent. SectiOn 081!0-1 1-382-636/03-04 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 FABRICATION - DOORS Doors shall be welded construction with all surface welds, joints, and seams filled and ground smooth. Tops and bottoms of doom shall be completely closed with 16 gauge channels. No inverted channels will be allowed. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors to receive hardware. Reinforcement shall be welded within the stiles and rails. Reinforce top rails to accommodate closerS on either side and reinforce bottom for kickplate. D. All Underwriters' fire doors shall be constructed to meet Underwriters' Laboratories specific approval according to current procedure for the indicated class. E. Glass in exterior doom shall be 1-inch thick. FRAMES Steel door frames shall be made of 14 gauge cold rolled prime quality steel in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100. Fire rated frames shall carry Underwriters' label on the frame. Frames shall be remOvable where shown on the drawings. FABRICATION - FRAMES Fabricate frames as welded unit. Mullions for double doom shall be removable type, of same profiles as jambs. Frames shall be 2 inches by 5-3/4 inches. Frames shall have 4-inch head member at 7-foot O-inch doors in masonry walls. D. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. E. All Underwriters' fire rated frames shall be constructed to meet Underwriters' Laboratories specific approval according to current procedure for the indicated class. F. Provide anchors appropriate to wall type. G. Provide frames for all steel doom. FINISH A. Doors and frames shall receive one coat of rust inhibitive, shop applied primer paint. Primer paint must be compatible with field paint System specified. B. Frames shall be finish painted as specified in Section 09900 - Painting prior to installation. This includes back sides of door frames. Section 08110-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - FRAMES A. B. Install frames in accordance with ANSI/SD1-100. Coordinate installation of frames with wall construction for anchor placement. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of doors, hardware, joint sealers, and field painting. D. Set all frames as supplied by manufacturer. E. Frames in masonry walls shall be grouted full. 3.02 INSTALLATION - DOORS A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/SD1~100. B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames, hardware, glass and glazing, and field painting. C. Set all doors as supplied by manufacturer. Hang all doors allowing for expansion and contraction at time of setting. D. Set all hardware in accordance with templates as supplied by hardware supplier. E. Cover all exposed hardware until completion of painting and finishing. F. Examine hardware at completion; test, oil, grease, and adjust for perfect operation. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08110~3 SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes insulated overhead coiling door with electric operation, operating hardware, controls, and supports. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A525/A525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the Wisconsin Enrolled CommerCial Building Code for mOtor and motor control requirements. B. Products requiring electrical connection shall be listed and classified by underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Overhead Door Co. Series 625 Insulated Stormtite door. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: 1. Curtain slats shall be Type F-265 fiat crown, pitch 2-5/8 inch 22 gauge galvanized steel. Back cover shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Slat system shall be integral and foamed in place with polyurethane foam nominal 2 pound density, applied between the slat and back cover, rising to bond the slat and back cover into an integral member with a thickness of 3/4-inch. 3. Endlocks shall be used on alternate slats. Provide windlocks as required for 25 psf design wind Icad. Bottom Bar: The bottom bar shall be two steel angles, minimum thickness 1/8-inch, bolted back-to-back to reinforce the curtain in the guides, and shall have a loop type weather seal. Section 08331-1 ' ~ 1-382-636/03-04 ~ 2.03 Co Guides: 1. Guides shall be three galvanized structural steel angles with a minimum thickness of 3/16-inch 2. Guides shall be equipped with full door height PVC weather seals contacting the extedor and interior curtain surfaces to minimize air flow. 3. Guides shall be insulated full height and shall be equipped with windlock bars to meet 25 psf design wind load Brackets: 1. Brackets shall be minimum 3/16-inch thick steel plate to support the barrel, counterbalance, and hood. 2. Provide intermediate support brackets as necessary. Counterbalance: 1. Counterbalance shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with a deflection limited to O.03-inch per foot of width. 2. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an extemal adjusting tension wheel. Hood: 1. The hood shall be 24 gauge galvanized steel minimum. 2. The hood shall have an internal baffle and an external lintel baffle to retard a~r infiltration. Locking: Manual chain hoist operated doors shall have chain keeper locks suitable for padlocking. Electric Operator: 1. Electric operator shall be Model RDB by Overhead Door Co., or equal, 1 hp, 480 volt; 3 phase. Operator shall be equipped with quick release equipment for manual operation in case of emergency or power failure. 2. Provide one interior NEMA 12 3-button control station for each door, open/close/stop, 24 volt circuit. 3. Provide one NEMA 4X exterior, surface mounted, keyed open/close/stop control station for each door. Control station shall be keyed to match key for existing overhead door at Dewatedng Building. 4. Each door with electric operator shall have an electric safety edge, Miller Edge Company, Model ME123, or equal. Electdc edge shall consist of aluminum foil contact strips mounted to opposing surfaces of a hollow, compressible foam rubber matedal and enclosed by a vinyl-coated nylon moisture barrier. 5. Doors shall have a photoelectric switch, Omron Type E3K, or equal, mounted 6 to 12 inches above the floor. 6. For intedor overhead doors provide two NEMA 12 3-button control stations for each door, open/close/stop, 24 volt circuit. One control station shall be installed on each side of door. 7. Wiring for safety edge and photoelectric switch shall be intrinsically safe to meet Class 1, Division 2 explosion-proof construction. FINISHES The curtain and hood shall be galvanized per ASTM A525 standards and shall receive a baked on pdme coat of manufacturer's standard primer and 0.6 mils thick powder coated top coat. Section 08331~2 All nongalvanized, exposed, ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of manufacturer's standard factory applied rust inhibitive primer compatible with field paint per Section 09900 - Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Door shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and standards by an authorized representative. B. Upon completion of installation, operating devices and controls shall be adjusted and lubricated to operate properly. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 08331-3 F- I SECTION 08520 PART 1 - GENERAL ALUMINUM WINDOWS 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes extedor and interior extruded aluminum window frames, B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of DiviSion I Shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA 101 - Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doom. B. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows Curtain Walls,.and Doors. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. F. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum, 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand a design pressure of 90 psf for exterior windows and 60 psf for interior windows in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Limit member deflection to 1/175 with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, with out damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.10 cfm/miNsq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. E. Water leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 10 psf. 1.04 SUBMI'I-FALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Section 08520-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR WINDOWS A. Exterior window frames shall be 2-inch deep extruded aluminum, in accordance with ASTM B221, with thermobreak. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Kawneer Sealair 8225T Isolock, Fixed. 2. Modu-Line Sedes 12P Fixed. 2.02 INTERIOR WINDOWS A. Interior window frames shall be 2-inch deep extruded aluminum in accordance with ASTM B221. B. Acceptable products include the following, or equal: Kawneer Sealair 7200 Series. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Aluminum extrusions shall be not less than 0.125-inch thick. B. All fabrication and erection fasteners shall be 18-8 stainless steel. Unless shown otherwise, provide 0.040-inch aluminum sill plates on exterior of window. Finish shall match window. D. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. E. Nominal window height and length for all windows shall be as shown in the schedule. CONTRACTOR shall measure all openings and coordinate sizes with window supplier. 2.04 FINISH A. Finish on all exterior aluminum shall be architectural Class 1, anodic coating, dark bronze color, conforming to AAMA 608.1. All interior windows shall be clear aluminum color. PART 3 - EXECUTIQN 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Field vedfy wall opening sizes. B. Frames shall be securely attached manufacturer. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. See Window Schedule on the drawings. to masonry as recommended by the window END OF SECTION Section 08520-2 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Hardware to fully equip all doors. 2. Thresholds and weatherstripping. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Hardware shall conform to Wisconsin Enrolled Building Code 2002 for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. Hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and shall be propedy stamped or labeled for easy identification. 1.03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKS AND LATCHES Locks, latches, and dead locks shall be Sargent Cylindrical Locks, Sedes 8 Line, Style CC, Schlage D Line, or equal, to match existing at WWTP (vedfy with OWNER), with 2-3/4 inch backset. Strikes shall be curved lip. Lockset and latchset numbers specified in paragraph 3.02 are Sargent. Provide brass 6 or 7 pin cylinders. 2.02 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices shall be Sargent 8813 x ETL Series, or equal, and shall be equipped with reinforced cross bars and functions as indicated on the hardware sets. The exit device shall be operated by a Iockable knob from the exterior side. 2.03 HINGES Butth nges shall be Stanley FBB 191, Hager BB 1191, or equal, full mortise, ball bearing, nonferrous, nonrising, loose pin, fiat bottom tip, unless otherwise specified. Provide three 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch butts per door for doors 7 feet or less in height with one additional butt for each additional 30 inches or fraction thereof, unless otherwise specified. Provide additional bUtt or heavy weight hinges for all doors that are over 36 inches wide, unless specified otherwise. section 08710-1 1-382-636/03-94 2.04 CLOSERS A. Door closers shall be LCN Series 1460 or 4110 for exterior doors and 1461 for interior doors, or equal. Provide aluminum finish on closers. Provide full covers. Door closers for locations noted as (ss) shall have the SRI pdmer for corrosion resistance. Door closers specified in paragraph 3.02 are LCN. (H-Hold Open) 2.05 OVERHEAD HOLDERS A. Door holders shall be Glynn Johnson G J80 Series, or equal unless otherwise specified. Holders for locations noted as (ss) shall be fabricated with stainless steel components. Numbers specified in paragraph 3.02 are Glynn Johnson: 2.06 KICKPLATES A. Kickplates shall be Rockwood, or equal, 6-inches high. Kickplate width shall be 2 inches less than door width. 2.07 DOOR STOPS A. Provide wall or floor mounted door stops at all interior doors. Stops shall be Glynn Johnson GJFB-13, GJ60C, GJ60W for locations noted as (ss), or equal. 2~08 THRESHOLD AND WEATHERSTRIPPING A. All exterior doors shall be weatherstdpped with Reese DS106, National Guard Products, Inc. 190, or equal, weatherstripping. Provide Reese 323C, Pemko 315AN, or equal sweeps; and Reese Sl04A, Pemko .175A, or equal thresholds. Intedor Doors No. 4 and 5 and shall be weatherstdpped and have sweeps and thresholds as specified for extedor doors. Exterior doors without mullion shall have Reese No. 87, Pemko 352A, or equal positive sealing astragal. 2.09 PUSH/PULL BARS A. Push bar shall be Brookline 220; door pull shall be Brookline 807 x 18-inch. 2.10 KEYING A. Door keys shall be keyed to match existing WWTP key system. Provide two keys per lock. Doors shall have temporary construction cylinders. Provide permanent cylinders at project completion. 2.11 FINISH A. Finish for all hardware, except as noted below shall be US 26D or US 32D where stainless steel (ss) hardware is specified in paragraph 2. B. Finish for kickplates shall be 32D. C. Where stainless steel (ss) is specified, all hardware including threshold and weather stripping shall be installed with stainless steel fasteners. Section 08710-2 .~ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide finish hardware to fully equip all doOrs. B. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 SCHEDULE Provide the follOWing hardware groups in the amounts indicated on the dOor schedule or required for a complete and proper installation. Group 1 Lockset - 8G05 (sS) Door Closer - 1460 (ss) (Parallel Arm) Butts & Kickplate (ss) ':'GrOup 2 Exit Device - 8813 x PRK Door Closer - 1460 (Parallel Arm) Butts & Kickplate END OF SECTION Section 08710~3 1-382-636/03q34 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes glass and glazing for windows and door lights. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association, "Glazing Manual." 1.03 WARRANTY A. Exterior insulating glass shall be provided with a 10-year warranty against failure of the seal. B. Coated glass shall be provided with a 10-year warranty against peeling, cracking, or deterioration of the coating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR GLASS A. Glass in extedor metal windows and exterior door lights shall be l-inch thick insulating glass consisting of two pieces of 3/16-inch float glass separated by a 5/8-inch air space. B. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Interpane Glass Company. C. Glass shall be Low-E with gray tint ILE374, bronze tint ILE 474, or equal. D. Extedor windows adjacent to doom and exterior door lights shall have tempered glass in compliance with the governing building code. 2.02 INTERIOR GLASS A. Glass in interior windows and interior door lights, except as noted, shall be 1/4-inch thick float glass, fully tempered. B. Acceptable manufacturers include the following, or equal: Interpane Glass Company. 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND ACCESSORIES A. Glazing system shall consist of a polyisobutylene - butyl tape, liquid polymer sealant, and vinyl roll-in stdp. Section 08800-1 Acceptable products include the following, or equal: 1. Tremco Vision Strip System. 2. General Electric Sitglaze. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Glazing of windows shall be from the interior. B. Accessories such as setting blocks, clips, etc., shall be provided to properly set glass. Obtain sizes from work at the site or from the manufacturer of work into which the materials will be set. Responsibility for the correctness of measurements shall be assumed by CONTRACTOR. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA), except as spec'E~cally recommended otherwise by manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. B. Completed installation shall be water and air tight. END OF SECTION Section 08800-2 -DIVISION 9": FINISHES ? F SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Surface preparation and application of paints and coatings. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section, 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D4060 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. B. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Puli-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. C. ASTM D3363 - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. D. ASTM D2247 - Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. E. ASTM D4585 - Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled Condensation. F. ASTM B117 - Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. G. SSPC - The Society for Protective Coatings - Steel Structures Painting Manual. H. Federal Register - Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). I. Federal Register - Resoume Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA). Federal Register - Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Shop pdmer proposed for use shall be submitted with all material and equipment submittals. All shop primers shall be of the same generic type and quality as those specified herein. Submit two copies of manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each type of paint with each shop drawing submittal. MSDS sheets shall be posted at the construction site at all times painting is in progress. D. SubstitutiOn submittals shall include performance test data, as certified by a qualified testing laboratory, for the ASTM tests specified in paragraph 2.01. Section 09900-1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: 1. All paints, surface preparation and application methods shall conform to Federal requirements for allowable exposure to lead and other hazardous substances. 2. All paints shall be NSF Standard 61 approved when they are in contact with potable water or within potable water reservoirs. Pre-Painting Meeting: 1. A pre-painting meeting shall be held immediately following the project preconstruction conference. The pre-painting meeting is to be held pdor to any matedal and equipment that requires painting is delivered to the site. 2. CONTRACTOR, the paint Subcontractor, and the paint manufacturer's representative shall be present to review the specifications and project scope. 3. The paint manufacturer's representative shall review progress at the site as requested by ENGINEER. These are generally expected to be prior to monthly progress meetings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. Drop cloths shall be used in all areas where painting is done to fully protect other surfaces. C. Oily rags and waste must be removed from the building each night or kept in an appropriate metal container. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACTOR shall dry-heat, dehumidify and ventilate to obtain painting conditions recommended by the paint manufacturer during surface preparation, application and cure. Relative humidity conditions as specified by the Paint manufacturer's data sheet shall be adhered to. This includes times in which supplemental heat is used. Supplemental heat shall be indirect-fired hot air furnaces or electric heat. Open flame heaters shall not be used. No unprotected, unheated exterior painting shall be undertaken when damp weather appears probable, nor when the temperature of the substrate is below 55°F, unless approval in writing is received from the paint manufacturer. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one gallon of each component of paint/coating. Label with color, type, and room location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All materials required for painting shall be types and quality as manufactured by Mautz Paint Co., or equal, unless noted otherwise in the schedule. Section 09900-2 t -382-636/03-04 Where thinning is necessary, omy the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint will be allowed. Ali such thinning shall be done stdctly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Paint and paint products of Mautz Paint Co. listed in the following specifications are set up as standard of quality. Other manufacturer's products will be considered as a substitution if CONTRACTOR and paint manufacturer certify that the products offered are recommended for the service intended, are compatible with the shop primers used, are equal in solids content and composition, and are of the same type. r- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION General: 1. All surfaces to be painted shall 2. 3. 4. 5. be prepared as specified herein and by the manufacturer's published data sheet and label directions. The objective shall be to obtain a uniform, clean and dry surface. No field painting shall be done before the prepared surfaces are observed by ENGINEER. Sur[aces painted without such observation shall be abrasive blast cleaned and repainted. Prior to field blasting, a sample of the blast abrasive shall be provided to ENGINEER for pH testing. Additional samples of subsequent deliveries or batches of blast abrasive shall be provided to ENGINEER for :)H testing. For on-site abrasive blasting, Iow-dust, Iow-silica content material shall be used. Coal slag abrasive shall be used on pipe and ferrous materials. Staurolite abrasive shall be used on concrete. Quality of surface preparations listed below are considered a minimum. If paint manufacturer requires a better preparation for a particular application, it shall be considered a requirement of this specification. B. Ferrous Metal: 1. All ferrous metal to be pdmed in the shop shall have all rust, dust, and scale, as well as all other foreign substances, removed by abrasive blasting. Cleaned metal shall be primed or pretreated immediately after cleaning to prevent new rusting. 2. All ferrous metals not palmed in the shop shall be abrasive blasted in the field prior to application of the palmer, pretreatment or paint. 3. Abrasive blasting of metals in the shop shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blasting of metals in the field for immersion service shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. Abrasive blasting of metals in the field for nonimmersion service shall be in accordance with SSPC-PC6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 4. Prior to finish coating, all primed areas that are damaged shall be cleaned and spot primed. C. Concrete: 1. All concrete surfaces, including precast concrete to be painted, shall be cleaned of all form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter. 2. All new precast concrete ceilings shall be abrasive blast cleaned, in accordance with ASTM D4254, in order to prepare the surfaces for adherence of the painting systems as specified. Abrasive blasting of concrete shall result in a texture similar to 40-60 grit sandpaper. Bug-holes that are opened up shall have their sides made vertical. Section 09900-3 Bug-holes shall be filled as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete without placing a friable sand-cement surfaco overall. The dded surface shall be stoned down. Paint manufacturer shall observe and approve the surface preparation method and the prepared surface prior to painting. After cleaning, the surface shall be washed and all dust, sand and loose particles shall be removed by vacuuming. If CONTRACTOR elects to blow the surfaces off with air, it shall be oil free air and the methods shall conform to OSHA requirements. Existing Concrete and Concrete Block: 1. All previously coated walls and ceilings of concrete and concrete block of existing structures, except as noted, shall be pole-sanded and hand-sanded to remove all old peeling paints as well as roughen-up existing paints. Concrete floors containing oil and grease residues shall be cleaned with detergent to remove all residues. All existing floors, unless otherwise specified, shall be power-sanded with a Clark HD floor scrubber, or equal, with a rubber pad and abrasive disc, followed by vacuuming and removing all oil and grease contamination. Paint manufacturer shall observe and approve the surfaco preparation method and the prepared surface prior to painting. After cleaning, the surface shall be washed and all dust, sand, and loose particles shall be removed by vacuuming. If CONTRACTOR elects to blow the surfaces off with air, it shall be oil free air and the methods shall conform to OSHA requirements. Eo Galvanized: Where galvanized items are not submerged or buded, they shall be abrasive blasted in accordanco with SSPC-SP7 and then shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1 F. Copper: Where copper piping is not submerged or buried, it shall be lightly sanded and then shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1. G PVC and CPVC: All PVC and CPVC to be painted shall be lightly sanded and then shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1. H. Aluminum: Where listed in the Schedule to be painted, it shall be lightly sanded and then shall be solvent cleaned in accoordanco with SSPC SP 1. 3.02 APPLICATION A. All materials shall be used as specified by the manufacturer's published data sheets and label directions. No paint shall be applied on a wet or damp surface, and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard. Each coat shall be allowed to dry in accordance with manufacturer's data sheets before the next coat is applied. Co Drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions". Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times will be necessary. D. Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall units be returned to servico until paints are thoroughly dry and cured. E. Steel that will be inaccessible in the completed work shall reco~ve the final coat before enclosure. SectiOn 09900-4 1-382-636/03-04 Paint shall be applied to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Tops and bottoms of walls and areas that are "cut-in" by brush pdor to rolling shall have a uniform appearance in comparison with adjoining surfaces. G. Concrete block walls shall be back-rolled to achieve a pinhole-free SurfaCe coat. Crevices and other hard-to-apply areas shall be back-rolled/back-brushed in conjunction with application of the first field coat of primer or intermediate coat. This includes, but is not limited to: between pipe flanges, pipe flange/pipe barrel joints, equipment fittings, and other narrow openings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examination of work on the site by the manufacturer's representative shall be per[ormed when requested by ENGINEER. 3.04 CLEANING A. All stains and marks shall be removed from other surfaces upon completion of the work. 3.05 SCHEDULE General: 1. At the completion of the project, all painted surfaces which have been damaged shall be repainted or touched up. 2. See Finish Schedule on the drawings for an additional reference for areas to be painted. The painter shall use some discretion in what should and should not be painted. Do not paint over labels and other information, bronze or brass, machined surfaces, moving parts where painting may impair movement, hot surfaces which may peel. etc. If in doubt whether a part should be painted, ask ENGINEER. New Work: 1. All new work done by all trades shall be painted by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the following schedule and ~n accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendation. It is the intent of these specifications that all ferrous metal items scheduled for painting be shop pdmed If items are not shop coated, surfaces shall be prepared and painted in the field as specified. If any items of new construction are not listed, CONTRACTOR shall request paint system from ENGINEER, and the items shall be painted as part of this Contract without additional cost. 2. Interior Concrete Floors: Chemical/gasoline and oil resistant sealer per specifications Section 03300. 3. Interior Concrete Block Walls: One coat Block Filler 8-55 Two Coats Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 46-00 Note: Paint shall be roller or brush applied to concrete sound absorptive block. Secti0n 09900,5 4. All Exposed Concrete Ceilings: One coat of Block Filler 8~55 and Two coats of Interior Latex Semi. Gloss. 5. Cast Or Ductile Iron; Not Submerged or Buried: One shop coat of HP Universival Primer 1-681; Touch up prime coat prior to finish coating; and apply: Two coats of Industrial Enamel 89-00 6. Cast Or Ductile Iron, Tar Coated; Buried: Not painted Steel, Machinery, and Equipment; not Submerged: One shop coat of HP Universal Metal Palmer 1-681; Touch-up primer prior to finish coat; and: Two coats of Industrial Enamel 89,00. NOTE: Schedule 40 steel piping for the generator gas and engine cooling shall be painted. First field coat shall be applied prior to installation to surfaces inaccessible after installation, including back sides of door frames. See Division 8 for factory applied door palmers, 8. Galvanized, Copper, CPVC, and PVC; not Submerged or Buried: One coat of HP Universal Metal Palmer. Two coats of Industrial Enamel 89-00. 9. Insulation of Equipment, Pipes, and Ductwork: Two coats of Industrial Enamel 89-00. 10. Galvanized, Copper, CPVC, and PVC; submerged or Buried: NOt Painted 11. Aluminum Items: Exposed areas of structural items such as railings and grating shall not be painted. For structural items in contact with concrete; See Division 5. 12. Stainless Steel: Not painted Section 09900.6 13. Brick: Not painted Existing Areas: Existing areas damaged by removal of existing work and/or installation of new work shall be repainted to match existing and in accordance with the schedule for new work or below: 1. Painting of existing coated concrete block walls as noted on drawings: Two Coats interior Latex Semi-Gloss. 2. Painting of existing coated concrete floors as note on drawings: a. New Concrete Areas: One Coat (160 S.F./Gallon) Mult-E-Poxy 180 (by Diamond Vogel). t). Entire FloorArea: One Coat (200 S.F./Gallon) Mult-E-Poxy 180. Coverage: 1. Dry mil thickness conform to those specified. Mil test measurement shall conform to SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. The coatings listed will provide the mil thickness given when applied at the coverages listed Upon the request of ENGINEER, such surfaces shall be checked by the painter with a calibrated mil thickness gauge 'and any deficiencies found in the film shall be remedied by additional coat(s) at the expense of CONTRACTOR. 3. On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, ~n no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 4. Coverages reflect manufacturer's recommendations using spray application techniques. Where brushing or roiling ~s specified or performed at the discretion of the painter, one additional coat, minimum, will be required to achieve total DFT thickness as specified and recommended by the manufacturer. Dry Mil Sq. Ft.** Thickness Coverage Per Coat Mautz Product Block Filler 8-55 Interior Latex 46-00 HP Universal Metal Primer 1-681 industrial Enamel 89-00 100 3OO 4.0 3.0 1074 Endura-Shield II 2.5 Roller or brush application requires two or more coats to obtain recommended film thickness. No allowance is made here for overspray, waste in handling, mixing, or application. Final total dry film thickness (DFT) shall be equal to that specified. Paint submittals shall note where roller or brush application is proposed and the paint manufacturer's recommendations of number of coats to achieve the required thickness shall be noted. Primer, intermediate and/or final surface colors shall be of contrasting colors to assure coverage. SectiOn 09~00L7 Colors: 1. Colors are to be selected by OWNER, with the following piping colors used where applicable: Sludge line Gas line Sewage line Potable water line Nonpotable water line Compressed air line brown red gray blue blue with 6-inch red band at 30-inch centers green 2. Bands above may be similar to labels supplied as specified below. Colored tape will not be permitted. Labels: In addition to the color code, each pipe shall be labeled with a minimum of two labels in each room, crawl space or compartment. Labels shall be abbreviated as noted under fluid abbreviations on the drawings. Labels shall be painted with stencils, 2-inch letters on pipes 4 inches and larger and l-inch letters on pipes smaller than 4 inches. Labels shall include arrows indicating direction of flow. Snap on pipe markers with permanent tension built into each plastic marker to grip pipe firmly may be used instead of painted labels. Snap-on labels shall be Brady, System 3, or equal mechanically affixed pipe markers. All piping containing or transporting hazardous or corrosive chemicals shall be identified with labels every 10 feet and with at least two labels in each room, closet, or pipe chase. Color coding shall also be used. Shop Finish Painting: Items herein specified, shall have factory applied finishes and will not require field painting. CONTRACTOR shall field touch up any damaged areas with factory provided touch up coating. These shall be as specified with the equipment and materials listed. END OF SECTION Section 09900-8 1-382-636/03-04 ? ? : ' DIVISIOI~ t0 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Accessories. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 10- Portable Fire Extinguishers. SUBMITTALS Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in A. Submit under provisions of Sec{ion 01300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details and cabinet dimensions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide units conforming to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers. B. Provide fire extinguisher, cabinets, and accessories by single manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Product MP Series. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. 2.02 EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide 5 dry chemical type, Larsen's MP Series, 20 pound capacity fire extinguishers. Fire extinguishers shall be UL approved for Class A, Class B and Class C fires. Section 10522'1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place extinguishers in brackets where shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION Section 10522-2 1.382-636/03-04 DIVIS-ION~ :'C~ONVE¥1 NG-SyST EMS SECTION 14600 HOISTS AND CRANES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Hoists. 2. Trolleys. B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. B C. D. E. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.04 1.05 Applicable prowsions of Division I shall govern work in CMAA - Crane Manufacturers Association of Amedca. MHI - Material Handling Institute, Inc. ANSI -American National Standard Institute. HMI - Hoist Manufacturers Institute. MMA - Monorail Manufacturers Association. A. Monorail System: Monorail system shall include monorail beams(s) furnished under Division 5 and items specified in this section (excluding bridge cranes and por[able cranes) as appropriate and all others specified accessories necessary to provide a complete functioning system. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Underhung crane and monorail systems shall be designed and manufactured accordance with ANSI MH 27.1 - 1981 "Monorail Manufacturers Association Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems." Where design standards of the CMAA and MMA conflict, the CMAA standards shall govern. B. Hoists shall be designed and manufactured ~n accordance with the standards of the Hoist Manufacturers Institute. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Crane and Monorail Systems: CONTRACTOR shall conduct startup and testing of crane and monorail systems to demonstrate that Icad capacity and total system operation meet the requirements and intent of the Contract documents. Portable Hoists: CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that portable hoist operation meets the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. Section 14600-1 1-382-636/03-04 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit type, brand, and thickness of primer paint to be furnished on bridge cranes, runway beams and monorails. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOISTS A. Hoists shall be Coifing, or equal, manual chain hoists. Provide chain container with hoists. B. Hoist schedule is as follows: Load Motor Lift Building Model Capacity Size Speeds Height Generator Building CB3 3 Ton ...... 14 feet O-inch 2.02 TROLLEYS A. Trolleys shall be Coffing, or equal. B. Trolley schedule is as follows: Load Motor Building Model Capacity Size Speeds Generator Building Rail 1 CT-60P 3 Ton ...... Generator Building Rail 2 CT-60P 3 Ton ...... 2.03 FINISHES A. Hoists and trolleys shall be factory-finished painted with the manufacturer's epoxy paint finish system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as indicated and according to supplier's and manufacturer's instruction. B, CONTRACTOR shall inspect the units after delivery to the site for any damage to the units dudng shipping. Section 14600-2 lc='. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND DEMONSTRATION Provide manufacturer's services for the following: 1. Start-up. 2. Field Testing. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering checkout, testing, inspections, and start-up and shall identify any deficiencies noted. Report shall be submitted to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting all deficiencies noted in report. 3. Operator training and final adjustment. Supervision and Start Up: Installation of all equipment furnished under this Contract shall be supervised as required by a qualified representative of equipment manufacturer. All equipment shall be placed in operation and the plant operator shall be trained to the satisfaction of OWNER by a qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer. OWNER may videotape training presentation given by manufacturer's representatives. 3.03 FINISHING A. CONTRACTOR shall provide finish paint as required by Section 09900 - Painting. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION CONTRACTOR shall provide final adjusting, cleaning and protection in accordance with Division 1. CONTRACTOR shall make all final adjusting on equipment as required by manufacturer. CONTRACTOR shall leave equipment in a clean condition. 3.05 LUBRICATION CONTRACTOR shall furnish a one-year supply of grease and oils for all items of equipment requiring lubrication. Lubricants for all items of equipment shall be the same brand, when available, as recommended by the manufacturer to meet both warm and cold weather requirements. END OF SECTION Section 14600-3 1-382-636/0304 ' ' DiviSION ~15, MECHANICAL F SECTION 15040 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Above ground and exposed piping and valves of every description. 2. Wall pipes and fittings. 3. Piping connections to all above ground or exposed equipment, whether furnished -- under this section or not. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govem work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Shop drawing requirements are found in the General Conditions and Division 1. Drawings shall include proposed length, location and elevation of pipe, fittings, valves and other appurtenances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL All materials used in the manufacture, assembly and painting of piping and valves in contact with water shall be compatible with potable water supplies. All glues, solvents. solders, etc., shall likewise be compatible. For instance, no lead base solders shall be used. All materials shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS Copper Piping: 1. Copper piping shall conform to the requirements of the "Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube," ASTM B88. 2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all interior or above ground potable and nonpotable water supply piping 2 inches in diameter or smaller shall be Type K hard copper. 3. Fittings shall be copper sweat fillings with 95/5 tin antimony solder joints. 4. All underground water supply piping 2-1/2 inches or smaller shall be Type K soft copper with compression fittings. Joints shall not be used under floor slabs. 5, Shutoff valves shall be placed on each branch for all underground, above ground or intedor piping. Drain and Vent Piping: 1. Sanitary building sewer shall be of service weight cast iron conforming to ASTM A74 standards or plastic pipe conforming to ASTM D2665 or D3034 standards. 2. Storm Building Sewer shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A74 or Plastic Pipe conforming to ASTM D2665 or D1785. Section 15040-1 1-382-636/03-04 3. Sanitary and storm sewer lines that penetrate exterior poured concrete foundation walls shall be cast iron to 5 feet beyond wall or shall be installed through a sleeve 2 inches larger than the outside diameter of the pipe. 4. Underground sanitary drain and vent piping and fittings within the building shall be service weight cast iron conforming to ASTM A74 standards or PVC plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D2665 standards. 5. Above ground waste, conductor, clear water and vent piping and fittings within the building shall be service weight cast iron, Schedule 40 plastic conforming to ASTM D2665 standards, copper or galvanized steel pipe. C. Joints for Drain and Vent Piping: 1. Cast iron pipe shall have hub and spigot joints with neoprene gaskets underground and no-hub with stainless steel bands above ground. 2. Copper pipe shall have 50-50 solder joints soldered with paste flux, joints mechanically cleaned before soldering. Use wrought copper or brass fittings. 3. Plastic pipe shall have solvent solder joints. Solvent to be NSF approved and be compatible with material being used. Use heavy body solvent for large diameter fittings. Palmer shall conform to ASTM F656 standards. Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D2564 standards. Gas Piping: 1. In general, gas piping shall conform to all state, local and utility codes pertaining to natural gas service or requirements. 2. Natural gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe (ASTM A-53 with 150 psi steel welded fittings or 150 psi malleable iron screwed fittings). 3. Gas piping 2-1/2 inch and larger, above ground, may be welded. 4. Piping 1-1/4 inch and smaller shall be screwed. 5. Exposed gas piping 3-inch and larger shall be ductile iron as specified. 6. All underground gas piping shall be welded and coated with rust preventative and wrapped with vapor-proof covering. 7'. Pipe shall be upended before installation and cleared of scale. Internally clean all pipes before installation. Remove oil, grease, chips, rust, dirt, etc., by swabbing out all pipes with approved solvents (no sandblasting permitted). Clean all screwed joints with solvent before applying sealant to the threads. 8. Externally dean all lines after installation and prior to prime painting to remove all grease, oil, pipe joint compound, dirt, plaster, mortar, etc. 9. All pipe to be welded shall be furnished with beveled ends to provide a suitable welding groove, and the pipe shall be in proper alignment before the weld is made. Use clamps or other approved deviCeS for assuring proper alignment. Split backing rings with nubs shall be used on all pipe 1-1/2-inch and larger. 10. Joints for screw pipe shall be made by cutting pipe square and reaming inside. Pipe shall extend to shoulder of fitting with clean cut taper threads. Seamless welding fittings shall be used for all welded piping. Screwed joints shall be sealed with Teflon (tape or paste). 11. All natural gas piping shall be installed in accordance with State and local gas codes, and the National Fuel Gas Code, NFPA No. 54. 12. In addition to the above requirements, no interior gas piping shall be concealed, no pipe bends will be allowed, all pressure regulating valves shall be vented to the outside, and piping shall grade 1/4-inch per foot to drip pots, traps, or accumulator at Iow points. Section 15040-2 F 2.03 Radiator Piping: 1. Radiator piping 2 1/2 inches and smaller shall be Sch. 40 seamless or welded carbon steel and shall conform to ASTM A 53, Grade B, ANSI B 36.10. All joining matedal shall be screwed joints With Teflon tape or paste. Fittings shall be malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and shall be in compliance with ANSI B 16.22. Dielectric fittings shall be isolation flanges, unions and couplings. 2. Radiator piping 3 to 12 inches shall be Sch. 40, ERW, or seamless ~,arbon steel and shall conform to ASTM A 53. Fittings shall be steel butt welding fittings and be in compliance with ASTM A 234 and ANSI B 16.9. Flanges shall be 150-1b., forged steel, slip-on, flat or raised face to match equipment and shall be in compliance with ASTM A 105, Grade 2. Flange bolting shall be alloy steel bolt studs; thread full length with heavy hex nuts and shall be in compliance with ASTM A 193, Grade BT. Dielectric fittings shall be isolation flanges. F. Pro insulated piping systems: I Proinsulated piping systems shall be Xtru-Therm as manufactured by Perma-Pipe, or equal. 2. All straight sections, fittings, anchors, and accessories shall be factory-fabricated, insulated, and jacketed. Field insulation of fittings is not allowed. 3. Piping shall be standard weight ASTM A53 schedule 40 carbon steel. Joints shall be butt welded for piping 2 1/2-inch and larger and socket or'bbtt welded for piping 2-inch and smaller. 4. Insulation shall be polyurethane foam with 2 pcf minimum density, 90% m~nimum closed cell content, and maximum thermal conductivity of 0.16 Btu-in/hr-f~-°F. Open cell insulation is not allowed. Provide 1 1/2-inch insulation thickness for hot water supply and return lines and 1-inch insulation thickness for energy recovery piping. 5. Outer insulation jacket shall be minimum 0.125-inch thickness seamless high density polyethylene (HDPE) in accordance with ASTM D1248. G. ' Mechan'ical ~S~ls S~iali'b~ '316 SS Link Seal; or equal. Lihk'se~ils'~§h~ll be provided with 316 SS bolts, nuts, and fasteners. Sleeve diameter shall be provided and mechanical seals installed as recommended by manufacturer. VALVES Shutoff Valves: 1. Shutoff valves in potable water lines smaller than 1-inch shall be Milwaukee BA 100/15Q Nibco T-585 (threaded) or Nibco S-585 (solder joint) or equal, bronze 300 psi gate valves. 2. Shutoff valves in water lines 3 inches to l-inch in diameter shall be butterfly valves, cast iron body, stainless steel shaft, bronze disk, solid wedge disc, threaded, with a rising stem, Nibco LD 2000, Milwaukee Valve M or C series, or equal. Provide unions roi; ease of valve removal. 3. Corporations in potable water lines (3/4-inch or 1-inch) shall be Mueller H 15008 compression type fittings, or equal. Gas Cocks: 1. Crane, Walworth, Jenkins, Nibcc, Milwaukee or DeZurik are acceptable manufacturers. 2. One-half inch to 4-inch DeZurik Figure 435 gas valve, cast iron body, screwed or flanged ends, bronze bearings, bronze plug and resilient seal ring for drop tight shutoff to 175 psig working pressure. Section 15040-3 E~ Radiator Shut-off Valves (2 1/2-inch and smaller): Bail Valves for balancing and shutoff service shall be 250 lb., bronze body, ball type, threaded ends, with pressure taps, with memory stop slot. Joints shall be threaded or soldered. Radiator Shut-off Valves (3 to 12 inches): Ball Valves for shutoff service only shall be 150-1b, ball valve, cast steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, double TFE seal, flanged ends. Ball Valves for balancing and shutoff service shall be 150 lb., ball valve, cast steel body, stainless steel ball and stem, double TFE seal, flanged ends. Joints shall be butt welded. Gas Safety Relief: Kunkle, or Rego are acceptable manufacturers. ASME Standard for gas safety relief with stainless steel seat and disc. Gas Regulators: Fisher, Kunkle, or Rego are acceptable manufacturers. Regulation shall reduce gas pressure to scheduled pressure for equipment. Plug Valves: 1. Shutoff valves in cast or ductile iron lines containing wastewater, drainage lines, and 2-1/2 inch or smaller air piping shall be DeZurik Sedes PEC, Valmatic Cam Centdc Series, or equal. 2. Valves shall be of the nonlubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and end connections. The plug profile shall be of a cylindrical eccentric shape such that the vertical face of the plug is straight and the horizontal face is eccentrically curved in relation to the plug shafts. Segmented ball valves with spherical plugs shall not be acceptable. Port areas shall be at least 80% of full pipe area. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of chloroprene or Buna- N, suitable for use with wastewater. 3. Valves shall be furnished with corrosion resistant seats, replaceable oil impregnated permanently lubricated 316 stainless steel sleeve-type bearings and gdt shaft seals which comply with the latest edition of AVVWA Standards C507 and C504. Bodies of 3-inch and larger valves shall be furnished with a 1/8-inch machined smooth welded overlay seat of not less than 90% nickel. Seat area shall be raised surface completely covered with weld to ensure that the plug face contacts only nickel. Screwed-in seats are not acceptable. Valve shaft seals for valves 4-inch and larger shall be of the type utilizing a stuffing box and pull-down packing gland. Shaft seals shall be designed for replacement with the line pressurized at design pressure with the plug in both the open and closed position. 4. The design of the valve and stuffing box assembly shall be such that the packing can be adjusted or completely replaced without disturbing any part of the valve or operator assembly except the packing gland follower. Stuffing boxes shall have a depth sufficient to accept at least four rings of packing. Valve seating adjustment shall be accomplished without removing the valve from the pipe line and with pressure in the line. 5. Valve pressure ratings shall be 175 psi for valves through 12-inch and 150 psi for valves in sizes 14-inch through 24-inch. Valves shall provide drip-tight shutoff up to the full pressure rating. 6. All plug valves for buried service and all plug valves 8 inches in diameter or larger shall have worm gear actuators. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi-steel housing and be suitable for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. The actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be supported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuators shall indicate valve Section 15040-4 . position. Buried actuators shall be suitable for direct burial and shall be mounted on a gasketed and totally enclosed actuator mounting bracket and shall have a totally enclosed and gasketed cover. All other valves shall be furnished with lever actuators. Supply one lever for every four valves furnished. All valves 3 inches and smaller shall have individual levers. All underground valves shall be equipped with cast iron telescopic adjustable valve boxes and covers. Asphaltic varnish and coal tar coating are not allowed on interior valves. Extedor buried valves shall be fusion-bonded epoxy coated or epoxy coated as specified in Division 9. Interior and exterior exposed valves shall be furnished with all surfaces (except galvanized or stainless steel) prepared in accordance with near white grade SSPC Specification No. 10 removing all dirt, rust scale, and foreign materials. Surface preparation shall be done at such time during the assembly process as to preclude damage to the valves once assembled. Cleaned surfaces shall then be shop odmed. Shop priming shall be with one coat of Tnemec N69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, applied to a minimum of 5.0 mils dry thickness. Pdmer used shall be compatible with proposed finish coats; CONTRACTOR to verify. It is the intent of this specification that all valves, supports and appurtenances shall be furnished shop primed, clean and ready to accept finish painting by CONTRACTOR, with a minimal amount of surface preparation. Preparation and painting shall conform to all requirements and provisions specified in Division 9. 2.04 HOSE BIBBS Extedor hose valves shalrbe WOOdford Model 65, Ken-Ray Model 120, or equal freezeless wall hydrants with integral Nide134HA vacuum breaker, permanent valve seat and brushed chrome exterior face with 3/4-inch garden hose threads. Provide separate interior shut off valves as specified herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0'1 INSTALLATION Size, Type and Joining: All materials shall conform to the size and type shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications. In joining two dissimilar types of pipe, standard fittings shall be used when available. In the event fittings are not available, the method of joining shall be selected by CONTRACTOR and submitted to ENGINEER for review. B Unless shown otherwise, under floor piping shall clear floor slabs and footings by a minimum of 6 inches. Support: 1. All interior or exposed pipelines shall be securely supported by adjustable metal saddles, brackets, or adjustable hangers supported directly by concrete, masonry work, or tile. 2. Strap hangers, tin clips, or U-hooks will not be acceptable. 3. In general, the maximum spacing of supports shall not exceed 10 feet on centers unless approved by ENGINEER. 4. Plumbing system shall be installed with hangers and supports in accordance with the Plumbing Code. Section 15040-5 5. Insulation saddles shall be used at supports of insulated piping. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place hangers, supports, wall pipes, sleeves, and floor boxes in the forms before concrete is poured wherever needed or shown on the drawings. 6. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced to resist thrust at bends and joints. Use base elbows, poured concrete or md ties. 7. The weight of the piping shall be supported independently of connected equipment. Penetrations: 1. Where pipes 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. pass through concrete members without wall fittings shown, CONTRACTOR shall provide sleeves in the forms for the piping. The sleeve diameter shall not exceed the pipe O.D. (or flange O;D. where applicable) plus 2 inches, unless otherwise shown on drawings. For copper pipe provide an elastomeric sleeve on pipe where it passes through walls or slabs. Where pipes pass through nonwatertight walls, the annular space shall be grouted full. Where pipes pass through nonwatertight floors, the sleeve shall extend I inch above the finished floor elevation and the annular space shall remain open. Space :between wall sleeve or wall pipe and concrete shall be filled with nonshdnking mortar. The annular space between the wall sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with an approved mechanical seal. No chases or recesses shall be made in poured concrete for pipe installation and no pipe shall run in poured concrete unless called for in the drawings or specifications or permitted by ENGINEER. The cutting or core drilling of concrete for pipe shall be avoided wherever possible, and in no case where such cutting or core drilling is necessary shall reinforcing rods be cut or disturbed without prior consultation with ENGINEER. All openings for pipe work shall be neatly patched in a workmanlike manner. E. Layout: 1. Exposed piping shall run straight, in neat parallel lines, and shall be located far enough from walls, ceilings and floors to permit access for covering of pipe and painting work. 2. Care shall be taken in laying out piping that there is no interference with the proper location of piping for other purposes or other equipment, and shall be run with regard to the requirements of each service. 3.Piping shall not interfere with headroom or clear floor space. 4. Unless otherwise shown, small water piping shall be concealed in walls (except reinforced concrete walls) placed in piping pits, above suspended ceilings, or under floors where possible or as shown on the drawings. 5.Pipes under floors shall have a minimum of 6 inches of sand cover. 6. Plates shall be provided on all uncovered pipes passing through floors, walls and ceilings constructed of materials other than poured concrete. Plates shall be on exposed sides and shall be chrome plated, spring and snap type. 7. An ample number of unions shall be provided in all threaded, soldered and glued pipelines and at all equipment to facilitate removal and replacement. 8. Valves shall be located on all branches of water supply lines, as shown in the plans, and as required for easy accessibility. 9. Cleanouts shall be provided where located and as shown on the plans, or as required by code. Verify locations of cleanouts for all drainage runs and provide at space intervals specified by code. Section 15040-6 ~'" 3.02 FlEED QUALITYCONTROL Site Tests: 1. CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all testing, cleaning and disinfection in the pdce bid. 2. All piping, intedor or exposed, shall be subject to test before being covered with insulation or paint. All piping and appurtenances shall be watertight or airtight and free from visible leaks. 3. All piping shall be flushed or blown out after installation prior to testing. 4. CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary piping connections, water, air, test pumping equipment, water meter, bulkheads, valves, pressure gauge and other equipment, materials and facilities necessary to complete the specified tests. CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary sectionalizing devices and vents as required for testing. 5. Pressure Tests: The test pressure in all lines shall be held for one hour dudng which time the leakage allowance shall not exceed that specified. In case repairs are required, the pressure test shall be repeated until the pipeline installation conforms to the specified requirements. Pumps, air compressors, instrumentation, and similar equipment shall not be subjected to the pressure tests. 6. Test Requirements: Fluid Abbreviation or Name Minimum Test Test Pressure in psi Medium Leakage Allowance Designation Potable Water 150 Water "A" Natural Gas Piping "B" "B" "B" Radiator Piping 150 WatedGlycol "A" 7. Leakage allowance Designation "A" shall mean zero leakage for unbuded pipe and shall be not more than 0.002 gallon per hour per inch diameter per 100 feet of buded pipe for compression or solder joint pipe. 8. Natural gas piping, test pressure, test medium and leakage allowance designation "B" shall be tested in accordance with local gas utility requirements and leakage allowances. 9. Tests for all gravity sewers shall be as follows: Pipe will be plugged at its downstream end and water will'be placed inside the pipe to a minimum head of 10 feet. Water shall be held for 15 minutes without dropping. No leakage is allowed. 3.03 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .~' A. All equipment and materials shall be clean before installation. CONTRACTOR shall ~'~.~. disinfect and flush the sYstem before it is PUt on line. The system shall be filled with water chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water chlodne solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours. FollOwing the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable water until no chlodne remains in the water coming from the system. Section 15040-7 CONTRACTOR shall obtain water samples and arrange for analysis of water in potable systems for bacteria as part of the Lump Sum Bid. Copies of test results shall be submitted to OWNER and ENGINEER. END OF SECTION Section 15040-8 SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work ncluded: All new cold and hot potable water located above ground, exposed to view, or above suspended ceilings shall be insulated with :)reformed pipe insulation. All insulation damaged during construction shall be replaced in accordance with these sl~ecl, flcations. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work ~n this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Submittals for shop drawing submittal procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Except as otherwise specified, insulation shall be manufactured by the following: 1. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Knauf. 4. Armstrong. 5. Or Equal. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION All pipe covering, jackets, duct insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive and mastics shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and a smoke- developed rating of 50 or less in active return or supply air plenums. Insulation in all other areas within the building shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke-developed rating of 150 or less. Test method shall be ASTM E84. Water Piping: All new hot and cold water piping, fittings, valve bodies and flanges shall be covered with l-inch glass fiber (K-factor of 0.25 at 75°F mean), l-inch molded phenolic (K-factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean), or 3/4-inch rigid urethane (K-factor of 0.16 at 75°F mean) with all service jacket. Provide a PVC jacket for all exposed water piping. Roof Drains: Roof drain bodies, horizontal roof leaders and all associated storm water lines shall be covered with 1/2-inch flexible elastomeric pipe insulation (K-factor of 0.26 at 75°F mean). section i 5250-1 1-382-636/03-04 Piping in Slabs and Walls: All new cold and hot water piping and nonpotable water inside concrete slabs or inside walls shall be insulated with Armstrong Armaflex II, or equal, 1/2-inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. All valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation, or with "Zeston" type, pre-molded PVC fittings installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fittings are to be finished with 8 ounce glass mesh and mastic (use breather mastic on systems operating above 50°F; a vapor barrier mastic on systems operating from 50°F down). Jackets on pipe insulation may be stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4-inch in from the lap edge on systems operating at 50°F and above; below 50°F and on roof drain lines the laps are to be vapor sealed using self-sealing lap, lap-seal tape gun, or adhesive. All insulation ends are to be tapered and sealed regardless of service. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Pipe hangers are to be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. Load distributing corrosion-resistant metal shields shall be installed around the lower 1/3 circumference of the insulation. For each pipe hanger, provide a half-round, 12-inch long hanger block at the bottom half of the pipe in place of the fiberglass insulation. The blocks shall be molded foam glass insulation. Shields shall be 16 gauge. Shields shall be 12 inches long. END OF SECTION Section 15250-2 ~ SECTION 15290 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1 Pipe Insulation. 2. Ductwork Insulation. 3. Breeching and Generator Exhaust Insulation. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM C533 - Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Owens Coming, Knauf, Armstrong, Schuller International, or equal. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION All pipe covering, jackets, duct insulation, vapor barriers, adhesive and mastics shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, and a smoke- developed rating of 50 or less in active retum or supply air plenums. Insulation in all other areas within the building shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke-developed rating of 150 or less tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Hydronic Piping: 1. Insulation for hydronic and generator radiator piping shall be rigid molded glass fiber pipe insulation with ASJ type ~factory applied jacketing and a "k" factor of 0.25 at 75°F. mean. Insulation shall cover piping fittings, valves and flanges completely with thicknesses as specified below. Section 15290-1 1-382-636/03-04 2. Insulation Thickness Schedule: Fluid Temp *Runouts 1-in 1-1/4 5-in and Type of Range Up to 2-in and Less to 2-in 6-in System (F) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) Hot water supply and 120-200 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 return and piping Piping between generator 150-200 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 and radiator *Runouts are extensions to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length. 2.03 DUCT INSULATION 2.04 A. Rigid-Type: 1. Rigid-type duct insulation shall be Manville 814 Series Spin'Glas, or equal, 3-pound density, semi-rigid insulating board with FSK facing attached with mastic bands and mechanical weld pins with washers compatible with duct material. 2. Coverage: a. Intake and exhaust damper frames: 2 inches thickness. b. Exhaust air ducts from ceiling to 12 inches below damper: 2 inches thickness. BREECHING AND GENERATOR EXHAUST INSULATION Insulation for breeching and generator exhaust systems shall be Schuller Thermo 12, or equal calcium silicate in accordance with ASTM C533 and shall be asbestos-free, 12-14 pounds per cubic foot density, suitable for maximum temperatures of 1,200°F, and visual coded. Fitting covers shall be Schuller Thermo 12, or equal, premolded with a calcium silicate insert. The insulation shall be covered with a 0.016-inch aluminum jacket, Metal-Clad or equal. Coverage: 1. Breeching from equipment outlet to stack: 2 inches thickness. 2. Generator exhaust piping, silencer and fittings: 4 inChes thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All insulation shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pipe Insulation: 1. All pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. Ail valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation .equal in density and thickness to adjoining insulation, or with "Zeston" type, pre-molded PVC fittings installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fittings are to be finished with 8 ounCe glass mesh and mastic (use breather mastic on systems operating above 50°F; a vapor barrier mastic on systems operating from 50°F down). Jackets on pipe insulation may be stapled using outward clinch staples spaced 3 inches apart at least 1/4~inch in from the lap edge on systems operating at 50°F and above; below 50°F and on roof drain lines the laps are to be vapor sealed using self-sealing lap, lap-seal tape gun, or adhesive. All insulation ends are to be tapered and sealed regardless of service. Section 15290-2 1-382-636/03-04 2. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Pipe hangers are to be sized large enough to be installed over the outer surface of the insulation. Load distributing corrosion-resistant metal shields shall be installed around the lower 1/3 circumference of the insulation. For each pipe hanger, provide a half-round, 12-inch long hanger block at the bottom half of the pipe in place of the fiberglass insulation. The blocks shall be molded foam glass insulation. Shields shall be 16 gauge. Shields shall be 12 inches long. C. Ductwork Insulation Rigid-Type: 1. Brush on heavy coat of MEI Eco-Mastic 55-50, or equal, over first layer of canvas, embed second layer canvas mesh and smoothen. While still wet, brush on finish layer of Sealfas~ or equal. 2. Provide finished edges atall access doors and ends of insulation~ 3. Provide additional insulation trim pieces over flanged ductwork joints to completely insulate and seal to the thickness specified. 4. For exterior ductwork place an additional strip of fiberglass on the top-center of the duct prior to applying canvas to act as a water shed. Breeching and Generator Exhaust Insulation: 1. Tightly butt insulation with staggered joints and secure with metal bands or wire. 2; Cover insulation with aluminum jacket and secure per manufacturer's recommendations. ENDOF SECTION Section 15290-3 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. All matedal and piping for plumbing. 2. Concrete foundations, and anchor bolts for all equipment furnished under this section. 3. Piping connections to all plumbing equipment, whether furnished under this section or not. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable arovisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION All materials used in the manufacture, assembly and painting of piping and valves in contact with water shall be compatible with Potable water supplies shall be compatible with the chemicals being used. All glues, solvents, solders, etc., shall likewise be compatible. For instance, no lead base solders shall be used. All materials shall be National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. 2.02 PLUMBING PIPING AND APPURTENANCES A. Unless otherwise specified, piping shall be in accordance with Section 15040 - Piping and Accessories. 2.03 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be provided in accordance with Section 15040 - Piping and Accessories. Floor Drains: 1. Floor drains for piping 4 inches and under shall be Zum Z-551, Wade W-1300, or equal, and for piping larger than 4 inches Zurn Z-505, Wade W-1240, or equal. 2. Each drain shall be provided with a trap. A minimum of one cleanout and one backwater valve, Zurn Z-1095, or equal, shall be provided for each single or common leader. Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers shall be Zurn, Wade, Smith, Josam, or equal. 2. Each cleanout shall be gas and watertight. 3. Cleanouts that are elevated shall include a membrane flashing flange to prevent leakage to the lower floor. Section 15400-1 ~ _4.' in(e~-ior' Concrete Floor Areasi Enarn~Jed cast iron body with round o~ square - adjustable scodated polished nickel bronze cover, tapered threaded ABS closure plug. Zurn ZN-1400. 5. Exterior Paved Areas: Cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded ABS or PVC closure plug, cast iron frost sleeve and cover set in 24" square by 4" min. thick reinforced concrete pad top or surrounding pavement, crowned for drainage. Neenah R-1976 with non-ferrous secunng screw. .......... 6. Extedor Unpaved Areas: cast iron hub or plug with tapered threaded ABS or PVC closure plug, cast iron or PVC frost sleeve and cover set in 24' square by 4~ min. thick reinforced concrete pad top. Neenah R-1976 witd non-ferrous securing screw. Roof Drains: Roof drains shall be Zurn Z-100, Wade W-3000, Smith ;1010, Josam, or equal, with flashing clamp ring and gravel stop. Roof drains on reservoir shall be Zum Z-121, or equal, with flashing clamp nng and gravel stop. All components shall be made of cast iron. 2.04 MANUFACTURER'S PLUMBING FIXTURES A. All exposed metal fixture parts, piping, and yalves are to be chromium plated. B. The following fixtures shall be Kohler IK), American Standard (A), or equal. Service Sinks: (SS): K 6719 (24 x 20), A 7692.023, Chicago Faucets 782 for behind wall supplies fittings, wall brace, and wall hangers. Sink shall have supplies with vacuum breaker, Nidel 34H, or equal. Emergency Fixtures: (EEWS): Floor mounted combination emergency eyewash and shower with 10-inch ABS plastic shower head and twin ABS plastic anti-surge eyewash heads with dust covers. Unit shall be equipped with 1-1/4 inch supply, 1-1/4 inch waste, stainless steel pull rod and stay-open valve for shower operation, and push flag and foot treadle assembly for eyewash operation. The unit shall be finished with a CRP coating and meet the latest ANSI standards for emergency eyewash and shower equipment. Manufacturers shall be Haws 8346 CRP, Guardian, Bradley, or equal. 2.05 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. EleCtric Water Heater: Furnish and install electdc water heater ~ith minimum capacity listed below. Water heater shall be as manufactured by State Industries, Inc., A.O. Smith, Or equal. WH-01: A.O. Smith Model ELSF-10 Self-cleaning warranty on tank, parts and heating elements 1,500 watt, 120V, single phase, 60 cycle AC and listed by Underwriters Laboratones PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION _ A. Unless otherwise spec'~ed, installation of p~ping shall be in accordance with Section 15050 - Piping and Appurtenances Section 15040 - Piping and Accessories. Section 15400-2 1-382-636/03-04 Plumbing system shall be installed with hangers and supports in accordance with the Plumbing Code. Insulation saddles shall be used at supports of insulated piping. Plumbing system shall be installed in accordance with local plumbing requirements and applicable portions of Wisconsin Administrative Code. Where requirements conflict, the stricter standard shall apply. Install all piping, conduit, and accessories to permit access to equiPment for maintenance. Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor, making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Where access is required in plaster walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors to the General Contractor. Install plumbing equipment where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate equipment location with piping, ductwork, conduit and equipment of other trades to allow sufficient clearances. Locate equipment and arrange plumbing piping to provide access space for serVicing all components. Set commercial water heaters, commercial water softeners, storage tankS and booster pumps on concrete housekeeping pads. Adjust and level equipment. Pipe temperature and pressure relief valves to floor drain or floor as indicated. Startup and test equipment adjusting operating and safety controls for proper operation. Install plumbing fixtures ~n accordance with manufacturers instructions. Set level and plumb. Secure in place to counters, floors and walls providing solid beadng and secure mounting. Bolt fixture carders to floor and wall. Secure rough-in fixture piping to prevent movement of exposed piping. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Install fixture stops in readily accessible location for servicing. Each fixture shall have a stop valve installation to control the fixture. Stop valves shall be heavy duty type with brass stems and screwed or sweat inlet connections. Compression type inlets are not acceptable. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning units or components. Adjust valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, no~se or overflow. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Unless otherwise specified, testing shall be in accordance with Section 15040 - Piping and Accessories. B. Building drainage systems shall be tested and inspected in accordance with local requirements and Wisconsin State Plumbing Code. END OF SECTION SectiOn 15400-3 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 15510 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY' Work Included: 1. Hydronic piping. 2. Valves. 3. Thermometers and gauges. 4. Strainers. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govem work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A47-90 - Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. B. ASTM A53-90b - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. C. ASTM A183-83 (1990) - Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. D. ASTM A234/A234M-92a - Specification for Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. E. ASTM D2000-90 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRONIC PIPING Hydronic piping 2 inches in diameter and less, drain and air vent piping shall be Type L hard copper piping with wrought copper sweat fittings with 50/50 solder joints. Piping shall conform to ASTM AB-88 and fittings shall conform to ASTM B-88, Class 125. Mechanical grooved piping with fittings manufactured by Victaulic, Grinnell or equal may be used in lieu of welded piping. Grooved piping shall be schedule 40 black steel conforming to ASTM A53-90b with a mechanically cut or rolled square groove. Fittings shall be cast iron with EPDM gaskets conforming to ASTM D-2000-90 for water services from 30°F to 230°F. The fittings bolts and nuts shall be constructed of heat treated carbon steel conforming to ASTM A183-83 (1990) with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi. seCtion` 155i 0-1 1-382-636/03-04 2.02 VALVES A. Acceptable valve manufacturers are DeZurik, Apollo, Bell and Gossett or equal. Balancing Valves: 1. Balancing valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Bell and Gossett Model CB, or equal, with bronze body, brass ball orifice and glass and carbon filled seat rings. Ball orifice shall be calibrated and provide bubble tight shutoff. Valve shall have a position indicator with memory stop, pressure taps and a drain tap. Valve shall be rated for 300 psi at 250°F. Provide removable preformed insulation housing. 2. Provide Bell and Gossett, Model RO-2, or equal, portable balancing read out meter for differential pressure measurement. Ball Valves: 1. Shut-off valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Apollo 70 Sedes, or equal, ball valves with bronze body, 316 stainless steel ball and stem and Teflon seat. Valve shall be rated for 600 P516 WOG. 2. Provide stem extensions where necessary for access. 3. Provide a lever operator for each valve: Control Valves: 1. Provide Class 125 globe valve with bronze body. 2. Valves shall have two position electric operators supplied by the manufacturer which operate at 115 volts. Control of valve position shall be described in Section 15980- Temperature Controls and Instrumentation. Operators shall modulate the plug through the full range of motion. Triple Duty Valves: 1. Triple duty valves shall provide a combination vertical lift check valve, calibrated balancing valve and positive shut off. Valve shall have a cast iron body rated for 125 psig. 2. Valve shall be designed to allow repacking under full line pressure. Relief Valve: 1. Relief valves shall be as manufactured by Bell and Gossett or equal of bronze construction designed to ASME 125 psig standards. 2. Valve shall be sized for 30 psig relief pressure and gross equipment outlet capacity. Drain Valves and Gauge Valves: 1. Provide valve with threaded or sweat ends rated for 125 psig at 200°F. Valve shall have bronze body and Teflon seat. 2. Drain valves shall be full size of piping runouts. 2.03 THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES A. Acceptable manufacturers are Tredce or equal. All gauges and thermometers shall be mounted such that they can be read from the floor. Thermometers: 1. Thermometers shall have chrome plated brass fittings, aluminum case and glass enclosed mercury column. 2. Temperature range shall be from 30°F to 250°, adjustable 9-inch cast Section 15510-2 3. Furnish and install where shown on drawings. Co Gauges: I Pressure gauges shall have a cast aluminum case with a 4-1/2 inch dial. 2. Pressure range shall be from 0 to 100 psig. 3. Furnish and install gauges where shown on drawings. 2.04 STRAINERS Provide cast iron 'Y' type strainers with a 304 stainless steel strainer, 1/8-inch perforations, dirt leg, blow-off valve, and 125 psig rating. Strainer sizes and locations shall be as shown on the drawings, 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Provide twin spherical neoprene flexible connections with flange connections. Connector shall be constructed of multiple layers of rubber and fabric reinforced with internally spirally wound tempered steel. Connectors shall be rated for 125 psig and 250°F operation Flexible connection sizes and locations shall be as shown on the drawings. PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 NSTALLATION Install all hydronic piping and specialties in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Section 15040 - Piping and Accessories in locations as shown on drawings. B. Piping shall be run level, free of depressions or pockets. High points shall have manual air vents and iow points shall have drain plugs. C. Valves and strainers serving pumps shall be line size. D. Piping passing through exterior wails and roof shall be weatherproofed with flashing and silicone sealan~ watertight. Provide unions in supply and return connections to all equipment. Piping shall be arranged such that coils and equipment may be removed without dismantling piping beyond unions. Provide double swing joints at equipment connections. F. Connect piping tO equipment served without strain as shown on the drawings. Install pipe loops in piping to allow for expansion and contraction. END OF SECTION Section 155rl0-3 SECTION 15540 HVAC PUMPS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: In-line pump P-13101. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Bell and Gossett, Taco, or equal. 2.02 IN-LINE PUMPS A. Provide in-line circulating pumps with performance as shown on drawing schedule and in location shown on drawings. Pump shall be close coupled, single stage, iron body bronze fitted construction. The pump shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Standard mechanical seals and replaceable shaft sleeve shall be used. Casing shall be designed for 175 psig working pressure. Casing shall have gauge taps on suction and discharge and drain part. The impeller shall be enclosed bronze type tdmmed for operating conditions. Impeller shall be hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured with locking cap screen. Each pump and motor shall have a nameplate giving the manufacturer's name, serial number of pump, capacity in GPM and head in feet at design condition, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed and full Icad current. Motor shall be open drip-proof of RPM indicated with coupling guard motor bracket and oil field regreasable ball bearings. Submit pump curves with shop drawings. Motor shall be nonoverloading under any head or capacity condition. Pump shall be factory tested, cleaned and painted with enamel finish. Section 15540-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide all hanging and support hardware for in-line pumps. Co Provide all necessary flanged connections to hot water supply and retum piping. Section 15540-2 SECTION 15835 TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Hot water Unit Heaters (HWH). 2. Electric Heaters. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govem work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electdc Code. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOT WATER UNIT HEATERS (HWH) A. Acceptable manufacturers are Modine, Trane, or equal. Unit heaters shall meet the performance requirements of the drawing schedule. B. Cabinet shall be constructed of 18 gauge steel and shall be provided with a baked enamel finish in one of the manufacturer's standard colors. C. Furnish and install four-way diffusion louvers blades on horizontal units. D. Provide an aluminum propeller type fan that is balanced and protected with a safety guard. The hot water heating coil shall be constructed of copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. The coils shall be rated for a 250 psig working pressure and 270°F entedng water temperature. F. The motors shall be permanently lubricated with thermal overload protection. Equipment disconnect shall be provided by Division 16 contractor. Line voltage thermostat for control of unit shall be provided by temperature control contractor in accordance with Section 15980 - Temperature Controls and Instrumentation. Section 15835-1 2.02 ELECTRIC HEATERS CONTRACTOR shall provide electric heaters Of the type, size, capacity, and accessories as listed on the equipment schedule. All units shall be UL listed. B. All electric unit heaters shall be factory assembled and tested. C. Electric Duct Heaters (EDH): 1. Acceptable manufacturer isThermolec, or equal. 2. Coils shall be of Nickel-Chrome alloy and shall be insulated by floating ceramic bushings from the galvanized steel frame. Coil terminal pins shall be stainless steel insulated by nonrotating ceramic bushings. 3. Heaters shall be slip-in type, as shown on the plans, heaters Shall be suitable for insertion into the duct through an opening on its side and shall have a flange for securing it to the duct side. Mounting flanges shall be independent of the terminal box so as to allow installation without opening the box or drilling into it. 4. All duct heaters shall be equipped with fail,safe, automatic reset and manual reset disc-type thermal cut-outs. 5. Cut-outs Shall be shielded from impact and shall deenergize the heater in case of insufficient air flow. 6. Duct heaters shall be n0nsensitive to' air flow direction and interchangeable for horizontal or vertical ducts. Heaters shall be approved for zero clearance in horizontal duCtS. 7. Duct heaters shall be eqUipped with magnetic contactors, 24 volts transformer airflow sensor, SCR control, load fuses, solid state relays, pilot lights, and protective screens. 8. Heater shall be equipped with a built-in disconnect to switch the power off at the heater location. 9. Load fuses shall be supplied as required by local codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendatiOns and local codes including minimum mounting heights above floor. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all mOunting hardware and accessories necessary to complete inst~llati0n~ Drawings are based on the scheduled make and model number. Any changes due to substitutions shall be provided and coordinated at no additional cost to OWNER. END OF SECTION section 15835-2 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 15860 CENTRIFUGAL FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Hooded propeller fans. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this sectio~ 1.02 REFERENCES A. AMCA99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 ~ Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fans shall bear AMCA certified rating seals. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Motors, shafts and bearings shall be protected from weather and dust. 1.03 1.04 1.05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are Greenheck, Cook, or equal. Drawings and specifications are based on the scheduled manufacturer and model number. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any changes due to substitutions or alternates of other manufacturers or model numbers. CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for revisions of drawings by ENGINEER, Any changes shall be coordinated and provided at no additional cost to OWNER. Section 15860-1 2.02 HOODED PROPELLER Hooded propeller Fans shall be dual belt drive, roof mounted, hooded propeller exhaust fan with tall base, access door, roof curD, bird guard and disconnect. Fan performance shall be as indicated on drawings schedules. Fans shall be UL listed. Dampers shall meet requirements of Section 15980 - Temperature Controls and Instrumentation. B. The fan housing shall be spun aluminum with all fasteners either aluminum or stainless steel. The entire drive assembly shall be mounted on neoprene vibration isolators to provide quiet, vibration free operation. Fan performance shall include AMCA certified air and sound ratings and fans shall bear the AMCA seal. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled and shall be NEMA approved. Motors shall be fitted with lifting eyes. Motors shall have copper windings, have ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron, or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Beadngs shall be prelubricated and field regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall threaded and plugged or have grease fittings installed. Provide two-speed, two-winding motor where indicated on drawing schedules. Three phase starters shall be provided as a part of Division 16. Manufacturer shall provide a factory prewired NEMA 3R disconnect accessible without removing fan shroud. Toggle switches are not allowed. E. The fan shaft shall be mounted in cast ball bearing pillow blocks with field greasable bearings. Bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hours. Belt ddves shall have an adjustable motor plate for belt tensioning. Provide extended lubrication lines from shaft bearing to fan exterior. F. Provide an aluminum wire bird guard on the fan's discharge. Provide safety guard on fan inlet. G. Manufacturer shall provide a prefabricated, insulated roof curb with wood blocking to level curb on roof. The roof curb insulation shall be 1-1/2 inches thick, 3 pounds per cubic foot rigid fibergla'§§ board. {3ui'l~ height sh~l[ I~e nbminal 12'inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawings. B. CONTRACTOR to provide all mounting hardware and accessories necessary to complete installation. C. Provide flexible duct connections on inlet and outlet of all fans. D. Drawings are based on the scheduled fan make and model number. Any changes due to substitutions shall be provided and coordinated at no additional cost to OWNER. E. Secure fans to roof structure with cable tie downs from fan's tie down points. END OF SECTION SectiOn 15860:2 SECTION 15890 DUCTVVORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work ~ncluded: Metal ductwork. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. REFERENCES 1.02 1.03 1.04 A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Stdp. D. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. J. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, K. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. SUBMITFALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations and sizes of ducts and duct fittings. location sizes and types. Show additional fittings used. Record changes in fitting Section 15890-1 1-382-636/03-04 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those reCOmmended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain recommended minimum temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized steel ducts shall be ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. A525 and A527. B. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. Duct sealant shall be United McGill United Duct Sealer, or equal, for indoor applications and United McGill Uni-Weather, or equal, for outdoor applications. Sealant shall be UL classified for flame and smoke development and shall be suitable for mating materials. D. Hanger rdd shall be ASTM A36 g~il~,~inized §teel or 316 stainless steel for ducts other than galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 DUCTVVORK FABRICATION Field and Shop Fabricated Ductwork (Rectangular): 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material gages, reinforcing, and sealing in accordance with SMACNA Standards for 2-inch static rating, 2,500 fpm velocity and duct seal Class A. 2. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows may be used with turning vanes in accordance with Section 15910 -Ductwork Accessories. 3. Increase duct sizes gradually, r~ot exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. 4. Provide 45 degree expanded entry takeoffs unless otherwise indicated. Flange ductwork for attachment to grille registers and outlets unless otherwise detailed. section 15890-2 1-382-636/03-04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. D. Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate testing equipment and controllers. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install a metal insulation sleeve of same material as ductwork. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. Make all necessary incidental changes in cross section, offsets, etc., to avoid interference with other equipment and supports. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. G. Connect air diffusers, registers and grilles to supply and retum ducts directly, unless flexible ductwork is specifically indicated on the drawings. Where registers and gdlles are to be mounted on exposed ductwork provide flanged opening for finished appearance. H. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. I. Provide an experienced installer to go through the air distribution system with the balancer. J. Any modifications to the ductwork shown on the drawings must be approved by ENGINEER prior to installation. Any changes in the ductwork layout not approved by ENGINEER affecting static pressure shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to modify air handling equipment at no additional cost to OWNER. END OF SECTION Section 15890-3 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Duct access doors. 2. Duct test holes. 3. Flexible duct connections. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Record actual locations of access doors, fire dampers, flexible duct connections, dampers and screens. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ACCESS DOORS Provide Krueger, Cesco, or equal, duct access doors equal to Krueger Model DMAD for galvanized ductwork. Access door shall be constructed of material similar to that specified for ductwork. Provide insulated access doors where ductwork is insulated. 2.02 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Provide Ventfabrics, Inc. No. 699 Instrument Test Holes, or equal, complete with gaskets and screw caps. SeCtion 15910-1 1-382-636/03-04 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS All ductwork shall be isolated from fans, fan enclosures, etc., with flexible connections. Provide connections to air handling equipment (except as noted), with Venffabdcs, Inc., "Ventglass", or equal, neoprene coated glass fabric with a metal-to-metal gap of approximately 6 inches. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15890 - Ductwork for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated; Provide minimum 8 by 8-inch size for hand access, 18 by 18-inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. C. Provide duct test holes as necessary for testing and balancing purposes. D. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. END OF SECTION Section 15910-2 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Louvers. 1.02 1.03 1.04 this section. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. Related Sections and Divisions: ApPliCable provisions of DivisiOn 1 shall govern work in ADC 1062 - Certification Rating and Test Manual. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of 01300 - Submittals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance of air terminals shall be in accordance with ADC 1062. B. Louvers shall be tested and certified in accordance with AMCA 500 and shall bear the AMCA seal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS (EXTRUDED ALUMINUM) A. Acceptable louvers are Greenheck ESD 403, or equal. See drawing for sizes and locations. Blades and frame shall be extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy and 0.08-inch thickness. Blades shall be 45° drainable type spaced at 4 inches on center. Louver shall be capable of a velocity of 1,000 fpm with no water penetration. Performance shall include AMCA certified air and moisture penetration data and louver shall bear the AMCA seal. Vertical and horizontal mullions and connections between panels shall not be exposed. C. Provide Channel frame, unless nOted otherwiSe on the drawings. Section 15940-1 D. Provide aluminum insect screen. All fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum. E. Louvers shall be furnished with Kynar finish, with custom color selected by OWNER. Submit standard color chart with shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A: Clean surface of louvers after installation. B. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and drawing details. END OF SECTION Section 15940-2 ,'--} SECTION 15980 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Electrical components. 2. Thermostats. 3. Dampers and actuators. 4. End devices. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submittal shall include control schematics with widng and logic diagrams in addition to equipment information. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Temperature control equipment, including panels, and other standard marketed apparatus shall bear the nameplate of the manufacturer. The entire system, including temperature control wiring, shall be installed by mechanics employed by or under contract to the temperature control provider, a factory licensed distributor or factory licensed dealer. The provider shall be responsible for the quality and satisfactory operation of all materials. B. All control panels shall bear a serialized UL label. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Provide electrical work in accordance with Division 16. All line voltage wiring and conduit shall be provided by Division 16 contractor based on drawings supplied as a part of Division 15. All Iow voltage wiring (100 volts and below) shall be provided by temperature controls contractor and be installed in conduit provided by Division 16 contractor. Provide all components necessary to complete the work of this section including, but not limited to relays, transformers, motors, solenoid valves, switches, override controls, operator linkages and associated Iow voltage wiring. Exterior wiring and equipment shall be NEMA 4X, or as indicated. Provide auxiliary motor starter contacts or plug-in relays. Pig tail relays are not acceptable. secti°n 15980:1 1-382-636/03-04 All relays, time clocks, transformers, motors, operator linkages, widng, etc., not specifically mentioned herein but necessary to make the control system complete and operative in accordance with the sequence of operation shall be provided as part of this section. D. All raceways and boxes for thermostats and temperature control panels shall be provided by Division 16. 2.02 THERMOSTATS A. Line voltage thermostats for single stage heating shall be Honeywell T6051B, or equal. B. Line voltage thermostats for two stage cooling shall be Honeywell T6052, or equal. 2.03 DAMPERS AND ACTUATORS Outside Air Intake and Exhaust Outlet: 1. Dampers shall be TAMCO Series 9000, or equal, thermally insulated control damper with aluminum construction. 2. Dampers for open/closed control shall be parallel blade and modulating damper shall be opposed blade. 3. Extruded aluminum (6063T5) damper frame shall not be less than 0.080-inch thickness. Damper frame to be 4 inches deep and shall be insulated with polystyrene on four sides. Damper shall be rated at a leakage of less than 4.0 cfm per square foot at 4.0-inch of water column pressure differential. 4. Blades to be extruded aluminum (6063T5), internally insulate with nonCFC, expanded polyurethane foam and shall be thermally broken. Complete blade shall have an insulating factor of R-2.29 and a temperature index of 55. 5. Blade gaskets shall be extruded EPDM; blade seals shall be extruded TPE. 6. Shaft to actuator shall be hex-type, material to match damper construction. Actuators: 1. Actuators shall be Belimo AF 120-S Series, or equal, with auxiliary switch rated for 133-inch/lb of torque. Dampers shall be power to open, spring closed unless otherwise specified. 2. Generator associated intake and exhaust dampers shall be power to dose and spring to open on power fail. 3. Actuators shall be mounted out of the air flow for easy accessibility and service. 4. Provide one spare actuator to OWNER. 2.04 END DEVICES Temperature Sensors for interface with building control panel (BCP) shall have linear variable 4-20 mAdc output signals. Each sensor shall be specific for the application indicated. Sensors shall be loop powered with 10VDC maximum. Range shall be as follows: 1. Outside air temperature: -20°F to 100°F. 2. Room temperature: 40°F to 120°F. 3. Supply air temperature: 40°F to 120°F. 4. Mixed air temperature: -20°F to 100°F Section 15980-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 NSTALLATION A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Division 16. B. Coordinate location of exposed devices prior to rough-in. Thermostats shall be mounted where shown on the drawings. C. Temperature controls to be installed in or on insulated ductwork shall be installed after the insulation has been applied D. Thermostats and control panels shall be mounted 4 feet 0-inch above floor to centedine, unless otherwise noted. Notify ENGINEER of conflicts. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Exhaust fans EF-13101 and. EF-13102 shall be controlled by a two-stage line voltage reverse acting thermostat. When the room temperature exceeds the first stage setpoint, fan shall start on Iow speed and associated dampers shall open. When the room temperature exceeds the second stage setpoint, the fan shall start on high speed and associated dampers shall be open. When the room temperature falls below the first stage setpoint, fan shall be off and dampers shall be closed. B. Hot water unit heaters shall be controlled by a single stage line voltage thermostat. When the room temperature falls below the thermostat setpoint, two-way hot water valve shall open and fan shall start. When the room temperature exceeds the thermostat setpoint, two-way hot water valve shall close and fan shall stop. C. Hot water circulating pump P-13101 shall be Con[i-011ed fron~ ~e On-Off switch on the motor starter at the unit. D. Dampers DA-13101 and DA-13102 shall be interlocked to spdng open with the generator run signal. Wiring shall be by Division 16 CONTRACTOR. END OF SECTION Section 15980-3 1 ~382-636/03-04 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL Work Included: 1. Balancing air systems. 2. Balancing water systems. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 SUBMI'FI'ALS A. Submit under proviSions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Prior to final balancing submit a final report which includes the following information. 1. For each supply, return and exhaust register and coiling outlet: a. Room number. b. Type of register and outlet and catalog size. c. Air flow factor. d. Design CFM and velocity. e. Actual CFM and velocity. f. Percent of design CFM. g. Room pressure relationship. 2. For Each Fan and Pump: a. Unit number. b. Fan size and wheel type (Pump size and impeller). c. Motor horsepower. d. Motor nameplate voltage and amps, e. Design CFM and static pressure (total pressure) (Pump GPM and head). f. Actual CFM and static pressure (total pressure) (Pump GPM and head). g. Actual fan RPM (Pump RPM). h. Actual motor voltage and amps (each phase). 3. For Piping: For piping system record water flow through all equipment, inlet and outlet water pressure at each pump together with motor nameplate and actual current. Provide summary sheet describing mechanical system deficiencies. Describe objectionable noise or drafts found during testing, adjusting, and balancing. Provide recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory performances and indicate whether modifications required are within the scope of the contract, are design related, or installation related. List instrumentation used during testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Obtain servicos of an independent testing organization to perform testing and balancing work. The criteda for determining qualifications shall be membership in the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or cortification by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or the testing organization shall submit proof that the organization meets standards for membership in (AABC). Section 15990-1 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BALANCING EQUIPMENT A. CONTRACTOR shall have the following minimum equipment for balancing systems: 1. Duct air velocities below 1,000 fpm: Pitot tube and Micro-Manometer or Alnor velometer and duct-jet using zer° to 1,000 fpm range. 2. Water Flows: Ultrasonic Dopier Flow Meter for water systems. 3. Supply Register Velocities: Alnor velometer and applicable jet or Anemotherm. 4. Fan Rotative Speed: Timec tachometer or RPM counter and stop watch (1-minute reading, minimum). 5. Contact pyrometer 0-300°F range. 6~ Amprobe model RS:3, Or equal. ' 7. Calibrated pressure gauge (0-100 feet water head). 8. Inclined manometer 0-30 inches of water. 9. Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration Shall be calibrated by the manufacturer or an AABC approved method. 10. Instruments shall be applied in accordance with manufaCturer's instructions. B. All instruments Used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument to be available for examination upon request. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments to be in accordance with ~he requirements of NEBB or AABC Standards. PART 3 ~ EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY REPORT A. Provide an experienced instaiier tO Check the air distdbuti°n system for completion to be sure that the test openings and volume dampers indicated on the drawings, or called for in the specifications are installed, that dampers arein the open position, that the fans operate properly, and that the system is ready for balancing, Add test openings, volume dampers, air scoops, deflectmls, turning vanes, etc., as required. Adjust and change fan ddves and belts, remove and re-install ceilings, air terminals, access doors and air devices as required to balance the system. Maintain the air handling equipment in good operating condition dudng the testing and balancing procedures. 3.02 METHOD OF AIR BALANCE (CONSTANT VOLUME SYSTEMS) A. PrePare balancing sheetS tabulating air quantities, unit areas, correction factors and calculatad air velocities required for each terminal system. For procedures not specified follow AABC: Balancing shall be completed with all doors closed. B. Adjust total air quantity to 110% of design, as measured by duct traverse, by adjusting fan speeds. C. Read and record on the balance sheets the air velocities and volumes obtained. (Do not change any volume dampers while reading and recording.) ' D: If air quantities are not within 10% of design values, readjust the fan speed to proportion the air. E. Adjust the fan speed to adjust the air volume, and then reread and record. SectiOn 15990-2 F. Immediately after completion of the final round, measure the total pressure in the duct and record on the balance sheet. Adjust the fan speed to exhaust the required air volume when the automatic dampers are placed in the 100% outside air position (and 100% exhaust air position when so equipped). Balance modulating dampers at extreme conditions and record both sets of data. Measure static pressure at fan inlets, and fan outlets. Correct any problems. Measure fan speed and motor inputs and compare with manufacturer's fan data to determine the point of operation. Adjust fan speeds to produce the correct air volumes. (Do not overload the motors.) Reread and record the pressure (positive and negative), RPM, and motor input readings. Final air volumes shall be within 10% of design values except that specified room air pressure relationships must be provided. Provide reports on pressure relationships. 3.03 METHOD OF WATER BALANCE The balancer shall provide a mechanic to check the water distribution systems for completion, properly installed control valves and flow measuring devices. The mechanic shall also assist the balancing contractor in locating all control and flow measuring devices and remove any piping restrictions found by the balancing contractor. B. The balancer shall report any diScrepancies or omissions immediately. Adjust the water flow through equipment not having automatic control valves by use of Ultrasonic Dopier Meter or flow reading balancing valves. Set all balancing valves and permanently mark position on valves. D. All automatic control valves shall be opened wide to the coils. E. Check the water flow by measuring the pump pressures and motor input and compare to the pump manufacturer's performance curves. F. For equipment specified with balancing valves or flow meters, measure flow and pressure drops. Set all balancing valves and permanently mark position on valves. G. Proportion the water flow to all equipment. H. Record the water flow through all coils and equipment. Flows through 3-way by-pass valves shall be adjusted to balance through the coil and in bypass position. Read and record inlet and outlet water pressures at each pump together with motor rating, correct input and flow measuring station. Final water flows shall be within 10% of design values for heating flow rates, and 5% for cooling flow rates. 3.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Contact the temperature control contractor for assistance in operation and adjustment of controls during testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Cycle controls and verify proper operation and setpoints. Include in report description of temperature control operation and any deficiencies found. Section 15990-3 Permanently mark equipment settings, including damper and valve positions, control settings, and similar devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. Division 15 contractor to correct any installation deficiencies found by the test and balance agency that were specified and/or shown on the Contract Documents to be performed as part of that division of work. Test and balance agency will notify the project representative of these items and instructions will be issued to the Division 15 contractor for correction of the deficient work. END OF SECTION Section 15990-4 DIVISION' 16- ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes general requirements for all electrical work. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. B. ANSI/IEEE C2. 1.03 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Any device or fixture roughed in improperly and/or not positioned on implied centerlines or as dictated by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to OWNER. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work so that interferences are avoided. Provide all offsets in conduit, fittings, etc, necessary to propedy install the work. All offsets, fittings, etc., shall be provided without additional expense to OWNER. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Conform to ANSI/IEEE C2. C. The rules and regulations of the federal, state, local, civil authorities and utility companies, in force at the time of execution of the Contract, shall become a part of this specification. D. Obtain electrical permits and inspections from authority having jurisdiction. Costs for permits and inspections shall be by CONTRACTOR. 1.05 CODESAND ORDINANCES CONTRACTOR is expected to know or to ascertain, in general and in detail, the requirements of all codes and ordinances applicable to the construction and operation of systems covered by this Contract. CONTRACTOR shall know or ascertain the rulings and interpretations of code requirements being made by all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to be performed by them. Section 16010-1 1-382-636/03-O4 In preparing Bid, CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of all items and procedures necessary to satisfy the requirements of al~ applicable codes, ordinances and authorities, whether or not these are specifically covered by the drawings and specifications. All cases of serious conflict or omission between the drawings, specifications and codes shalt be brought to ENGINEER's attention as herein before specified. CONTRACTOR shall carry out work and complete construction as required by applicable codes and ordinances and in such a manner as to obtain approval of all authorities whose approval is required. 1.06 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS 1.07 A. Included in this Contract are electrical connections to equipment provided under other divisions. CONTRACTOR shall refer to final shop drawings for equipment being furnished under other divisions, for exact location of electrical equipment and the vadous connections required. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Provide a complete electrical distribution system consisting of components indicated on the drawings or specified herein, including, but not limited to: 1. All miscellaneous equipment coordination and related appurtenances required by power company. 2. 4160 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire service entrance conductors. 3. Feeders, branch widng, electrical distribution equipment. 4. Ali control wiring. 5. Access panels and access doors for access to equipment installed by Division 16. 6. Widng between system components if equipment is not prewired. Lighting fixtures, lighting controls, and associated widng: 8. Telephone raceway system, telephone, speaker wiring, intercom, and associated equipment. 9. Support system design and supports for electrical raceways. 10. Code required disconnects. Provide a standby power system consisting of components indicated on the drawings. (See Section 16230 - Standby Power System and Section 16253 - Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment.) CONTRACTOR shall connect the following equipment furnished by Divisions 8 and. 15 consisting of components indicated on the drawings or specified herein, including, but not limited to: 1. Unit heater fans, 2. HVAC unit starters. 3. Pumps, starters and control panels. 4. Air intake and exhaust fans. 5. Overhead door motors. D; Provide balancing and adjUsting of electrical loads. E. CONTRACTOR shall instruct OWNER's representative in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. The instruction shall include a complete operating cycle on all apparatus. F. Provide miscellaneous items for a complete and functioning system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Section 16010-2 1-382-636/03-04 F G A partial list of work not included in Division 16 is as follows: Painting (except as otherwise specified herein). 1.08 COORDINATION 1.09 CONTRACTOR shall coordinate work of this division with that of other divisions so that all systems, equipment and other components of the building will be installed at the proper time, will fit the available space, and will allow proper service access to those items requiring maintenance. This means adequate access to all equipment, 'not just that installed under this division. Any components for the electrical systems which are installed without regard to the above shall be removed and relocated as required to provide adequate access at CONTRACTOR's expense. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim to fit the vadous types of ceiling, wall, or floor finishes. Provide materials which will fit propedy the types of finishes actually installed. NOISE Eliminate any abnormal noises which are not considered by ENGINEER to be an inherent part of the systems as designed. Abnormal buzzing in equipment components will not be acceptable. 1.10 DRAWINGS The drawings indicate approximate locations of the various items of the electrical systems. These items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements, in conformance with Contract Documents and cooperation with other trades. Prior to locating light fixtures, confer with ENGINEER as to desired location in the various areas. In no case should fixture locations be determined by scaling drawings. Relocate fixtures and bear cost of redoing work or other trades' work necessitated by failure to comply with this requirement. In certain instances, receptacles, switches, light fixtures or other electrical devices and equipment, etc., may be relocated. Where relocation is within 10 feet of location shown on drawings, and when CONTRACTOR is informed of necessary relocation before work is begun on this portion of the job, the relocation shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. D. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit, but rather to indicate distribution, circuitry, and control. 1.11 SUBMITI'ALS CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for approval prior to beginning work, shop drawings on the equipment and materials proposed to be furnished and installed. See Section 01300 - Submittals for requirements. Section 160!0-3 1-382-636/03-04 CONTRACTOR shall, in addition, submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination in all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because of job conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by ENGINEER for purposes of clar'~cation of CONTRACTOR's intent. CONTRACTOR shall also submit detailed drawings, rough-in sheets, etc., for all special or custom built items or equipment. Drawings and details under this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following, where applicable to this project: 1. Electrical interconnecfion wiring diagrams; see Section 16480 - Motor Control, and Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation. 2. Major feeder routing in plan and elevation, including service entrance raceways and cable. 3, Equipment room layouts showing exact locations and arrangements of equipment, feeders, wiring, etc, and clearances. C. These drawings and diagrams shall show all eleCtrical switch and breaker Sizes as well as the manufacturer's name and catalog number of each piece of equipment used. D. All specification sheets, drawings and diagrams shall be submitted within thirty days from the date CONTRACTOR signs the Contract4 Surrender to Owner manuals, charts, drawings, specifications, spare parts list, and any other data received on OWNER's equipment. Equipment and material submittals must show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents as follows: 1. Proper sizes and capacities. 2. That the item will fit in the available space in the manner that will allow proper service. 3. Construction materials and finishes. When the manufacturer's reference numbers are different from those specified, provide correct cross reference number for each item. The shop drawings shall be cleady marked and noted accordingly. G. When fixtures, equipment and items specified include accessories, parts and additional items under one designation, Shop drawings shall be complete and include all components. H. See additional requirements of shop drawings under Division 1 - General Requirements. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD PRODUCTS A. All equipment shall be UL and NEMA approved. B. Major distribution equipment such as panelboards, motor control centers, dry type transformers, etc., shall be by the same manufacturer. Section 16010-4 2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT While it is not the intention of OWNER to discriminate against any manufacturer of equipment which may be equivalent tO specified equipment, a stdct interpretation of such equivalency will be exercised in considering any equipment offered as a substitute for specified equipment. CONTRACTOR shall submit with each request for approval of substitute material or equipment, sufficient data to show conclusively that it is equivalent to that specified in the following respects: I Performance: a. Capacity at conditions and operating speeds scheduled shall be equal to or greater than that of the specified equipment. b. Energy consumption at the point of rating shall not exceed that of the specified equipment. c. Vibration and noise production at the point of rating shall not exceed that of the specified equipment. 2. Materials of Construction. 3. Gauges, weights and sizes of all portions and component parts. 4. Design arrangements, methods of construction, and workmanship. 5. Coatings, finishes and durability of wearing parts. 6. National reputation of the manufacturer as a producer of first quality equipment of the type under consideration. 7. Availability of prompt, reliable and efficient service facilities franchised by or affiliated with the equipment manufacturer.. This shall include the maintenance of local stocks of Critical replacement parts equal to those maintained for the specified equipment. B. Requests for substitution shall include CONTRACTOR's reason for the request. C. If ENGINEER does not consider the items equivalent to those specified, CONTRACTOR shall provide those specified. D. See General Conditions for additional requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 UTILITY SERVICES Modifications to utility connections shall be determined. All costs for coordinating utility service modifications shall be included in the price bid as described in Section 16420 - Electrical Service System of these specifications. B. All costs for temporary service, temporary muting of piping or any other requirements of a temporary nature associated with the utility service shall be included. 3.02 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain continuous services (power, controls, alarms, etc.) dudng the entire construction period. B. No service shall be interrupted or changed without permission from OWNER. Written permission shall be obtained before any work is started. Section 16010-5 C. When interruption of service is required, all persons concerned shall be notified and a prearranged time agreed upon. 3.03 CU'I-FING AND PATCHING Provide sleeves for conduits and cables passing through masonry, concrete or other similar construction. Sleeves shall be of dgid conduit and shall extend completely through the construction. B. Sleeves for conduit 4-inch and smaller shall be at least two sizes larger than the conduit passing through. C. Sleeves in floors shall extend 3/8-inch above the floor, except in mechanical rooms and other areas where water may accumulate, sleeves shall extend 2-inches above the floor. D. Conduits or cables penetrating smoke or fire barriers shall not destroy the barrier's integrity. Grout openings between sleeves and concrete or masonry walls and floors with sand-cement mortar consisting of one-part Portland cement and three parts sand, by volume. Add sufficient water to make a stiff, placeable mortar. F. Pack annular space between sleeves and conduits with fiberglass. Where penetrations occur through fire rated walls or floors, fill space with fire-reSistive insulation. Wherever cables must pass through fire or smoke rated walls or floors, provide approved, sleeved, foam filled fire stops around cables as manufactured by O.Z., Dow, Square D, or equal. 3.04 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH All lighting and appliance panelboards, switchboards, motor starter and disconnect switch enclosures, junction boxes and pullboxes shall be cleaned of debris, and wires neatly arranged with surplus length cut off prior to installation of covers. Where louvers ara provided in switchgear or transformer enclosures, louvers shall be vacuumed free of all dust and dirt. Where air filters are provided in equipment such as motor control centers and transformers, CONTRACTOR shall replace all filters with new at the time of final completion~ C. All lighting fixture lenses and lamps (interior and extedor fixtures) shall be cleaned at time of installation and all lens exteriors shall be cleaned just pdor to final inspection. D. Equipment Shall be thoroughly cleaned of all stains, paint spots, dirt and dust. All temporary labels not used for instruction or operation shall be removed. 3.05 CONCRETE WORK All cast-in-place concrete for new electrical equipment bases shown on the drawings shall be provided by CONTRACTOR except where specifically noted to be provided by others. All new equipment, where shown on the drawings, Shall be set on 3-1/2 inch minimum Section 16010-6 leveling slabs, including MCCs, control panels, etc. Pads shall be 3-inches larger than equipment being supported. E~. Concrete shall comply with Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Provide all anchor bolts, metal shapes and templates to be cast in concrete or used to form concrete for support of electrical equipment. 3.06 PAINTING A. All painting of electrical equipment shall be done by CONTRACTOR unless equipment is specified to be furnished with factory applied finish coats. B. Alt electrical equipment shall be provided with factory applied pdme finish, unless otherwise specified. If the factory finish on any equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR is damaged in shipment or during construction, the equipment shall be refinished by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of ENGINEER, D. One can of touch-up paint shall be provided for each different color factory finish which is to be the final finished surface of the product. 3.07 CAULKING A. Caulk with a caulking sealant where indicated on the electrical drawings or hereinafter specified. Caulking sealant shall be silicone construction sealant as manufactured by General Electric or two part polysulfide conforming to the requirements of, and bearing the seal of, the Thiokol Chemical Corporation. C. Caulking sealant shall contain no acid or ingredients which will stain stone, corrode metal, or have injurious effect on painting. It shall be colored to match adjacent surroundings. D. Caulking shall be performed by craftsman skilled at such work. 3.08 BUILDING ACCESS A. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus, B, When the installation requires openings and access through existing construction and the openings are not provided, CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary openings. 3.09 COORDINATION A. Provide widng for all motors and all electrically powered or electrically controlled equipment, Section 16010-7 All starters, disconnects, relays, wire, conduit, push-buttons, pilot lights and other devices for the power and control of motors or electrical equipment shall be provided by CONTRACTOR, except as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications or on the drawings. Where starters or other devices are provided by others, they shall be connected and wired by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR's drawings and specifications shall show number and horsepower rating of all motors fumished, together with their actuating devices. Should any change in size, horsepower rating or means of control be made to any motor or other electrical equipment after the Contract is awarded, any additional costs due to these changes shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. All equipment and wiring shall be selected and installed for conditions in which it will perform; e.g., general purpose, weatherproof, rain-tight, explosion proof, dust tight, or any other special type. All motors shall be provided for starting in accordance with local utility requirements, and shall be compatible with starters as specified here or under the various trades' sections of these specifications: CONTRACTOR shall provide all line voltage power and control wiring (100 volts and above) including temperature control wiring for operation, control and supervision of all motorized equipment including widng between motor starters and control devices all herein specified and as shown on the drawings: Low voltage control wiring (below 100 volts) shall be provided by CONTRACTOR supplying the equipment which has Iow voltage wiring unless otherwise noted. H. CONTRACTOR shall connect and wire all apparatus according to approved wiring diagrams furnished by the vadous trades. Motors 1/2 hp and larger shall be NEMA rated 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown. Motors l/3hp and below shall be 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz, unless otherwise shown. Motors shall be fitted with lifting eyes. Motors shall have copper windings, have ball or roller bearings in end brackets of steel or cast iron, or aluminum brackets with steel beadng sleeves. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall threaded and plugged or have grease fittings installed. 3.10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Backfilling of ail trenches beneath concrete floor and stair slabs within building shall be accomplished with gravel fill and shall be specially compacted to same density as surrounding area. Backfill of exterior trenches shall be compacted granular fill, unless otherwise noted. Compaction shall meet the requirements of Section 02222 - Excava[i0n, Fill, Backfill and Grading. B. Lines passing Under foundation walls shall have a minimum of 1-1/2 inch clearance. C. Care shall be taken to insure no disturbance of bearing soil under foundations. Section 16010-8 -" CONTRACTOR shall follow underground pipe runs where possible to avoid additional rock excavation. See Division 2 for rock excavation requirements. E. Direct buded PVC conduit shall be bedded in compacted sand with a m~n~mum of 6-inch cover on all sides. F. All conduit shall be bu~ied a minimum 5f 2 feet 0 inches below finished grade. 3.11 EQUIPMENT ACCESS : A. All equipment, iunction and puli boxes, and accessories shall be installed to permit access to equipment for maintenance. Any relocation of conduits, equipment, or accassones to provide maintenance access shall be accomplished by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost. Equipment shall be installed with ample space allowed for removal, repair or changes to the equipment. Ready accessibility to equipment and wiring shall be provided without moving other equipment whichJs to be installed or which is already in place. Locate electrical outlets and equipment to fit the details, panels, decorating or finish of the space. ENGINEER shall reserve the right to make minor position changes of the outlets before the work has been installed. Verify door swings before installing room lighting switch boxes, and install boxes on the latch side of door unless noted otherwise. 3.12 WORKMANSHIP A. Install work using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation. B. Location of equipment as shown on the drawings is approximate. C. Utilization equipment and control devices required under these specifications shall be mounted in a code approved manner. Locations of utilization equipment and control devices as shown on drawings are within 10 feet of actual positions. Any mounting of this equipment within this lO-foot distance will be performed at no additional cost to OWNER. E. Unless otherwise noted, equipment shall be fastened to building structure or equipment framework and not placed on the floor. Where materials, equipment apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, and type of catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid. Materials and equipment of the types for which there are National Board of Fire Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) listing and label service shall be so labeled and shall be used by CONTRACTOR. 3.13 AREA CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULE A. As shown on the drawings. SectiOn 16010-9 1-382-636/03-04 3.14 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Alterations: 1. Alter, extend and reconnect conduits as necessary. 2. Reconnect existing conduits which were reused, cut or exposed due to construction as quickly as possible. 3. Where wiring is involved, new wires shall be "pulled-in" between the nearest available, accessible reused outlets to the extent allowed by the governing code. 4. Furnish and install new conduits for wires if they cannot be "pulled-in" to existing conduits. All new conduits, widng and electrical items shall be connected to the existing systems so as to function as a complete unit. Where existing electrical equipment, devices, fixtures, electrically operated items, etc., interferes with any remodeling work, they shall be removed and reinstalled in another location to avoid such interferences. All existing and relocated equipment shall be left in good operating condition. B. Include in Bid removal from service of existing electrical material and equipment as specified hereinafter, as noted on the drawings, or as needed by field conditions. END OF SECTION Section t6010,10 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION i61;10 CONDUIT 2. 3. 4. 5. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Rigid metal conduit and fittings. ntermediate metal conduit and fittings. Polyvinyl chloride conduit and riflings. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. PVC externally and internally coated galvanized rigid metal conduit. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govem work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated. B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA RN 1 - PVC Externally and Internally-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of Raceways: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical raceways of the types and capacities raquirad, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that for the project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 701 and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation." SUBMI'I-rALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.04 Section 16110~1 1.05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FI'I-rINGS 2.02 2.03 2.04 2.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of threaded rigid metal conduit. B. Handle conduit carefully to prevent end-damage and to avoid scodng the finish. C. Store conduit inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. Heavy wall seamless tubing with hot dipped galvanized coating. B. PVC Externally and Internally Coated Conduit: Federal Specification WVV-C-581 E, ANSI C80.1, UL Standard #6; hot dip galvanized rigid steel conduit with external 40 mil PVC coating and 2 mil internal urethane coating. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSl/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FI'r-rINGS A. Conduit: Intermediate grade metallic tubing, seamless, with hot dipped galvanized coating. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC) AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Heavy wall rigid, Schedule 40, UL listed for underground encased and above ground applications. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Conduit: Electro-galvanized single strip steel with PVC coating and integral grounding conductor. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSl/NEMA FB 1. B. CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Supporting Devices) Steel with no crevices. (See Section 16190 - Section 16110-2 1-382-636/03-04 P F- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT Size conduits for branch circuit conductors, control wires and instrumentation cables so as to have not less than 25% spare capacity after installation; 3/4-inch minimum size. Minimum size for liquid tight flexible metal conduit is 1/2-inch. Maintain at least 1-inch separation between conduit sizes to 1-1/2 inches; 2 inches between conduits 1-1/2 inches or larger. Maintain ~ foot separation between signal conduits (below 100 volts) and power conduits (100 volts and above). 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION Provide for the proper application, installation and location of inserts, supports and anchor bolts, for a satisfactory raceway system. Where any component of the raceway system is damaged, replace or provide new raceway system. Run conduits concealed to avoid adverse conditions such as heat and moisture, to permit drainage and to avoid all materials and equipment of other trades. Maintain a minimum clearance of 6 inches from all hot water pipes, flues or any high temperature piping or duct work. C. Avoid exposed conduit runs. Conduit may be run exposed only where it is impractical or impossible to conceal. Conduit may run exposed on the underside of precast or poured concrete floor slabs, in unfinished areas, in unfinished equipment rooms or areas in basements to suit the final condition, and in unfinished areas where the installation of equipment, apparatus, duct work and piping may cover and conceal outlets. Run exposed conduit grouped and parallel or perpendicular to construction. Do not route exposed conduits over boilers or other high temperature machinery, nor in contact with such equipment. All conduit shall be run exposed in structures below grade. rai slabs ( ' ' D. Center conduit in structu other than topping), clear of reinforcing steel, except where crossing same, and spaced on centers, equal or exceeding three times the conduit diameter. Outside diameter of conduit shall not exceed 1/3 the slab thickness for each run of conduit 1-1/4 inch or larger. Provide shop drawings when it will be installed in structural slabs. All conduits which protrude from poured concrete slabs shall be PVC coated rigid conduit. E. Conduit larger: than 3/4-inch shall nOt be installed in topping slabs and avoid conduit crossovers. Minimize conduit in topping slabs, Locate to avoid conflict with equipment, door backs, partitions and other equipment bolted to floor. F. Ream conduit smooth at ends, cap upon installation, rigidly attach to structural parts of the building and securely fasten to all outlet boxes, panel cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes, splicing chambers, safety switches, and all other compOnents o[ the raceway system. Independently support or attach the raceway system to structural parts of construction in accordance with good industry practice. Conduits through roofs shall be equipped with pitch pockets. Section 16110-3 Provide empty raceways 2-1/2 inch and over with #10 galvanized fishwire and nylon cord in smaller sizes. Conduit and boxes attached to building surfaces which may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion using fittings approved for the use. Use back-straps on all conduit in damp or wet locations or mount conduit with Unistrut, or equal, straps. Meyers, or equal, type hubs shall be used in all damp locations. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, tunnel areas, exterior locations, garage areas, all wet wells and dry wells, all areas below grade and any wash-down areas. All conduit in damp locations shall be on 1-inch stand offs. Conduit seals shall be provided where conduits pass from the interior to exterior of the building, in moist areas in accordance with the NEC, where conduits enter a room which at any time is a Iow or high temperature room, where conduits enter a room which at any time is subject to internal air pressures above or below normal and any conduit entering a NEMA 4X area. Conduits shall be securely fastened to building structure at intervals not exceeding 8 feet or closer, if necessary, with one hole malleable straps. Where hangers are necessary, 3/8-inch rod/eyelets/rings/or trapeze type in Unistrut P-1000, B-line, Superstrut, or equal channel and pipe clamps shall be used. Wire or perforated strap iron is not acceptable. Supports in NEMA 4X areas and when using PVC coated conduit shall be fiberglass, PVC or 316 stainless steel. PVC conduit st~all be securely fastened to building structure at intervals not exceeding 3 feet, or closer. Vertical conduit runs 1 1/4-inch and larger passing through floors shall be supported at each floor with conduit riser grips. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be installed in such a manner that liquids tend to run off the surfaces and not drain toward the fittings. All runs of flexible conduit to equipment and devices shall be as short as practicable, of the same size as the conduit it extends and with enough slack to reduce the effects of vibration to a minimum. A minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit shall be installed for each motor. Where fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knock-out, a gasket assembly consisting of an "O" ring and retainer shall be installed on the outside. Fittings shall be insulated throat type, Thomas & Betts, Appleton, Raco, or equal. Provide Crouse Hinds Type XJG, or equal, conduit expansion fittings, complete in all conduit runs which cross a structural expansion joint. Provide O.Z. type "DX", Appleton, or equal, conduit expansion-deflection fittings ~n all conduit runs where movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be encountered. All conduit installed below grade shall be buried a minimum of 2 feet 0 inches. Section 16110-4 1-382-636/03~04 .r- 3.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Use rigid steel conduit in: Slabs. Slabs on grade. Earth Locations exposed to weather. Locations requinng mechanical protection. All exposed locations. B. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit in: Conduits protruding from concrete. C. IMC permitted in: Interior partitions. PVC conduit that is UL listed for the specific use is permitted in the earth at exterior of the building exCept under pavement an;d/or roadways and within 6 feet 0 inches after leaving a building wall. PVC conduit is also not allOwed within 6 feet 0 inches of manholes. PVC conduit shall be used in all NEMA 4X listed rooms. E. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit not over 4 feet in length for final connections to: Equipment in wet locations. Equipment with sliding bases or flexible positioning. Equipment with vibration isolation mounting. Equipment housing ferromagnetic cores or with integral moving components, capable of generating noise or vibrations, including transformers and motors. All pumps and associated equipment. PVC coated conduit (interior and exterior) and fittings shall be used in all Class 1, Division I areas and where conduits protrude from concrete 'slabs. All c.~nduit supports, clamps, hangers in these areas shall be NEMA 4X. Conduit and fittings shall be Plasti-Bond Red-H2OT by Robroy Industries, Perma-Cote Industries 'Supreme Conduit System, or equal. END OF SECTION Section 16110-5 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Wire. 2. Cable. 3. Widng connections and terminations. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of Wire and Cable: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical cable and wire products of the types and ratings needed, whose products have been in satisfactery use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation exPerience on projects with electrical w r ng installat on work similar to that in this project. Co Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and alt local codes as applicable to construction and installation of elec!trical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified UL Labels: Provide electrical cable raceways, Wire, cOnnectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.03 E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation',, SUBMI'I-rALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit shop drawings for wiring system including layout of distribution devices, branch circuit conduit and cables, circuiting arrangement, and outlet devices. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Provide factory-wrapped, waterproof, flexible barrier material for covering wire and cable on wood reels, where applicable; and weather resistant fiberboard containers for factory-packaging of cable, wire, connectors, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, etc., to protect against physical damage in transit. Do not install damaged cable, wire, or other material; remove from project site. Section 16120,1 ~ Store cable and wire an(3 other material in factory-installed coverings in a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against the weather. F PART 2 ~ PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE All wire and/or cable for permanent installation shall be new stranded copper, delivered to project in unopened cartons or reels, except where specifically noted and be UL listed for the use intended. No wire smaller than No. 12 shall be used unless specifically noted. Motor circuit branch wiring and associated control widng: 1. Provide type THHN insulation rated at 90°C. All motor widng shall be stranded. 2. Motor control widng shall be No. 14 stranded or as noted. 3. Control wiring for supervisory equipment shall be shielded, sized per equipment manufacturer's recommendations, or as shown on drawings. C. All wiring within control panels and supervisorylcontrol ce"nters shall be No. 16 stranded minimum. Branch circuit wiring, sizes No. 8 and smaller shall be THHN or higher temperature rating gnsulation; No. 6 and larger sizes shall be THHN; No. 12 and smaller shall be stranded. All widng in damp and wet locations shall be type XHHW. All available colors shall be used, however, green shall be used only for equipment ground~. Where color coded w~re ~n larger sizes is not available, one wrap of 1-inch wide colored self adhesive tape at each terminal end shall be used for identification. Initial phase color shall be used throughout the run, even for switch legs. Colors must meet code requirements for each class voltage. Do not duplicate colors, including neutral, on different voltages. E. Color Coding: 120/208/240V 277/480V A Phase Black Brown B Phase Red Orange C Phase Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Travelers Pink Violet Equipment Ground Green Green Branch circuit wiring in excess of 75 feet, for ALL exit lights, emergency lights and exterior lights shall be minimum No, 10. Circuits 150 feet or over shall be sized for a maximum 2% voltage drop. 2.02 CABLE (601 VOLTS AND ABOVE) This specification describes single condUctor XLP (thermosetting cross-linked polyethylene) insulated, shielded power cables for use [n grounded neutral circuits not exceeding 5,000 volts phase to phase at conductor temperatures of 90°C for continuous normal operation, 130°C for emergency overload conditions and 250°C for short-circuit Section 16120-2 Bo F. G. H conditions. Cables are intended for general purpose applications in wet or dry locations. Provide 133%, 115 mils nominal insulation thickness. The following standard shall be a part of this spedfication - ICEA Publication No. S-93-639 for "Cross-linked - Thermosetting - Polyethylene - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy". Class B stranded annealed coated or uncoated copper, per Part 2 of ICEA. Conductors shall be covered with a layer of extruded conducting cross-linked polyethylene compound with a minimum thickness of 15 mils. The extruded layer shall be firmly bonded to the cable insulation and shall meet the resistivity requirements of Section 3 of ICEA. Directly over the conductor shielding shall be applied a homogeneous wall of XLP insulation. The average thickness of insulation shall be 115 mils. Minimum thickness at any point shall nol be less than 90% of the specified thickness. Physical and electrical properties of the insulation shall be in accordance with Section 4.3.1 of ICEA and UL 1072. Over the insulation shall be applied an extruded layer of conducting polyethylene shield. It shal] be in intimate contact with the 'outer surface of the insulation and shall be free-stripping, leaving no conducting particles or other residue on the insulation surface. This layer shall be legibly identified as being conducting. The average thickness of this layer shall be not less than 30 mils and the minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 90% of the average thickness. The polyshield layer shall meet the resistivity requirements of paragraph 4.1.1 of ICEA. Directly over the polyshield layer there shall be a helically applied 4 mil copper shielding tape with a minimum 10% overlap. The tape shall meet the requirements of ICEA paragraph 4.1.1.1. A polyvinylchloride jacket shall be applied overall. This jacket shall meet the requirements of Section 7 of ICEA. The average thickness of the jacket shall be as specified in UL 1072. The minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than 80% of that specified. All cable shall have surface identification showing manufacturer's name, insulation type, conductor size and voltage rating. Cable shall be tested in accordance with ICEA S-93-639 and UL Standard 1072. Certified Test Reports shall be furnished prior to production of the cable. Cable shall be shipped to permit testing on the reels prior to installation, EPR and Anaconda Unishield type cables may be (~ uoted from acceptable manufacturers. I. Aluminum substitution is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed and notify CONTRACTOR of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Section 16120-3 3.02 GENERAL.WIRING METHODS A. Install electrical cable, wire, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions; applicable requirements of the NEC, the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation"; and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended functions. B. Provide no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. C. Provide 12 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120¥olt branch circuits. D. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. E. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Avoid splices between terminals of interconnecting power and control wiring. F. Neatly train, lace, and tie wrap all winng inside boxes, equipment, MCCs, and panelboards. G. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. H. The same color shall be used for each numbered wire throughout its entire length. Terminate all wiring on terminal blocks in control panels, starter cubicles, and similar equipment. J. Provide preprinted adhesive or heat shrink type wire numbering labels at all terminations and splices. Wire numbering prepdnted on the conductor, flag type labels and individual wrap-around numbers are not acceptable. K. Use appropriate wiring methods and materials for the equipment or environment. L. Do not use a pulling means, including fish tape, cable, or rope which can damage the raceway. IV Signal wiring (below 100 volts) must be in a conduit separate from power and/or control wiring (over 100 volts). No more than eight wires plus one grounding conductor shall be permitted in homerun conduits to lighting panels. N. Provide junction or pull boxes to facilitate, the "pulling in" of wires or to make necessary connections. All raceways and apparatus shall be thoroughly blown out and cleaned of foreign matter prior to pulling m wires. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire or cable in raceway after interior of building is enclosed, watertight, dry, and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Section 16120-4 3.04 C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. Conductors shall be installed in conduit system in such a manner that insulation is not damaged, conductors are not overstressed in pulling, and walls are not damaged. No splices are permitted except in junction boxes or outlet boxes: CONTRACTOR shall observe COde limitation on the number and size of wires in an outlet box. CONTRACTOR shall either lay out work so that the wires do not eXCeed the particular box limitation, or provide larger boxes, approved for additional capacity. F. Panel dser feeder conductors shall be identified with colored taPe at panel lugs. The same phase relation shall be maintained throughout. G. Circuiting is indicated diagrammatically on drawings. CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Provide cable supports on all risers per cede requirements. C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. D. Conductors in vertical raceways shall be supported using O,Z. type "S", Appleton, or eqUal, cable supports for 600 volt conductors. 3.05 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS Use insulated, spdng wire connectors with plastic caps for 8 AWG and smaller. Provide in-line splices for all conductor connections, 6 AWG and larger. Splice crimp component shall be Burndy compression splice long barrel-bell entry type YS-FXB, or equal. Splice insulation component shall be Raychem heavy-wall, Iow voltage tubing, type WCSM, or equal. C. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. D. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature dse. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape, label as "SPARE", and indicate where the conductors terminate. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer'S recommended values. C. Prior to energizing, check conduit, raceways, outlet boxes, and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. Correct malfunction when detected. Section 16120-5 [- [-- D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with these specifications. E. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. F. Perform field inspection and testing according to provisions of this section. 3.07 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 3.08 CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary for the acceptance tests specified hereunder. Acceptance tests' shall be performed in the ~resence of OWNER or OWNER's representative and must be passed before final acceptance of the work. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for powered tests of each field installed device unless specifically noted otherwise. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for device operation as powered from its power source and signals as received at the I/O modules. Operation Test - OWNER will, by operational testing, give final acceptance of the widng system when all of the wiring is considered a complete system, All equipment shall function and operate in the proper manner as indicated in the details of the specifications and on the drawings. All motors shall be propedy connected to protective devices and motor rotation shall be in the correct direction. Demonstrate by test, at the request of OWNER's representative, the compliance of the installation with these specifications and drawings, the National Electrical Code, and the accepted standards of good workmanship. These tests 'shall include operation of equipment, continuity of the conduit system, grounding resistance and insulation resistance. A written record of performance tests on electrical, control and instrumentation systems and equipment shall be supplied to OWNER. Such tests shall show compliance with governing codes. The transformer, feeder, and sub-feeds to the lighting panels shall be completely phased out as to sequence and rotation. Phase sequence shall be A-B-C/clockwise rotation facing motor shift as follows: 1. Front to rear, or top to bottom, or left to right when facing equipment. 2. Phasing shall be accomplished by using distinctive colors for the various phases. The same color or variation of it shall ~)e used for a particular phase throughout the building and project. WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Install all winng and cable ~n raceways except as otherwise noted. This includes all Iow voltage widng such as temperature control, phone, network, fiber optic, etc. END OF SECTION Section 16120-6 SECTION 16121 MEDIUM VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1 Medium voltage cable terminations - Devices for termination of medium voltage cables including provision for electrical stress relief and cable sealing. 2. Medium voltage cable splices. 3. Splicing and terminating equipment for 5000 volt wires. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Splicing and termination equipment for 5000 volt wiring shall be UL labeled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CABLE TERMINATIONS Indoor. 1. Description: Stress cone consisting of a preformed elastomer contained in an insulating housing and compressed to form a void free unit. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Joslyn PS Catalog No. J 9275 (Purchase cable terminations for the specific high voltage cable being supplied), Raychem HVT, or equal. b. Substitutions in accordance with the General Conditions. Outdoor: 1. Description: Preformed elastomer stress cone contained within a skirted porcelain housing and compressed to form a void free unit; 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Joslyn PSC Catalog No. J 9280 (purChase cable terminations for the specific high voltage cable being supplied), Raychem HVT, or equal. b. Substitutions in accordance with the General Conditions. Section 16121-1 2.02 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICEs A. Description: Preformed elastomer splice manufactured for use with the cables involved. Built-up tape splices and poured insulating compound splices shall not be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3:01 CABLE TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Elastimold 2505 or 6505 (Purchase cable terminations for the specific cable being supplied), Raychem HVS, or equal. Substitutions in accordance with the General Conditions. A~ high vOltage Personnel must be experienced in the termination and splicing Of high V~l!age cables.: Follow manufacturer's instructions. B. All medium voltage Cables that are to be spliced shall be tested both before the splice is made and after the splice has been installed utilizing a high voltage DC test (DC high-pot test). The test voltage shall be 10 KV for 5 minutes. Written results of each test shall be provided to the OWNER and ENGINEER. All testing shall be provided by a third party testing agency such as AC Engineering Company, or equal. END OF SECTION F- Section 16121-2 1-382-636/03-04 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1.02 1.03 1.04 SECTION 16130 BOXES A. Work Included: 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. B. Related Sections and Divisions: this section. REFERENCES A, B. Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of switches, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, lugs, etc.: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products of the types and ratings reqUired, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Installer. A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical widng installation work similar to that in this project. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, boxes, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation. SUBMIq-I'ALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Section 16130-1 1-382-636/03q~4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, B. Cast Boxes: Aluminum or cast faralloy, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs, Crouse-Hinds FD Series, or equal. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSi/NEMA OS 1: Code gauge steel with galvanized or sheradized finish, secured by galvanized machine screws. B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 16160- Cabinets and Enclosures. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4, fiat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as watertight. Cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws, Crouse-Hinds WCB Sedes, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as necessary for splices, taps, wire pulling, cable bending radii, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Vedfy location and size of boxes and outlets in all work areas prior to rough-in. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of access doors. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate boxes in masonry walls for cutting of masonry unit comers only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. B. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. C. Support boxes independently of conduit. D. Use multiple-gang boxes as manufactured by Raco, Appleton, or equal, where more than one device are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. E. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. Section 16130-2 1-382-636/03-04 L. M. N. O. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to intedor wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. All concealed lighting outlet boxes shall be Raco, Appleton, or equal, 4-inch octagonal variety, minimum 2-1/2 inches deep. In plaster or concrete walls, single receptacle, single or double switch outlets, use Raco. Appleton, or equal, 4,inch square boxes fitted with raised plaster covers. In poured concrete walls below grade, use cast type boxes. In unplastered brick or block walls use Raco, Appleton, or equal, masonry bOxes. In metal door frames use Raco, Appleton, or equal partition boxes. For weatherproof switches, devices, and exterior fixtures use Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal, cast boxes with proper cover and gasket. All exposed wall and ceiling outlet boxes and small iunction boxes shall be Crouse'Hinds, Appleton, or equal, cast type with covers. Boxes in NEMA 4X spaces shall be Cadon FS Sedes, or equal. P. Boxes shall be of a depth to accommodate wires and splices and shall be equipped with both fixture hanging studs and tapped fixture ears. Boxes shall be installed so they will support the weight of the fixture. Conduit will not be considered as adequate supports. Q. Cast FS boxes with 3/4-inch hubs and aluminum fittings and enclosures may be used with all conduit types. R. All boxes attached to building surfaces which may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion. All boxes in damp locations shall be on 1-inch standoffs. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, tunnel areas, extedor locations, garage areas, all wet wells and drywells, all areas below grade, and any washdown areas. 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. C. Knock out punches or saws shall be used for holes; boxes with prepunched holes are not acceptable. D. All junction boxes shall be labeled with permanent engraved labels (not adhesive type). Section 16130-3 All boxes attached to building surfaces which may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion. All boxes in damp locations shall be on 1-inch standoffs. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, tunnel areas, exterior locations, garage areas, all wet wells and dQ/wells, all areas ~)elow grade, and any washdown areas. END OF SECTION SeCtion 16130-4 SECTION 16141 PARTI-GENERAL WIRING DEVICES 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Wall switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Wall plates. 4. Control switches. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division I shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD I - General-Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices. C. Drawings - Bill of Materials. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE Manufacturers of switches, outlets, boxes, lamps, fuses, lugs, etc.: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products of the types and ratings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices, material, and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide electrical cable, raceways, wire, connectors, outlets, switches, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 Submittals. Section 16141-1 " F B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES A-C general use Industrial specification grade, snap switch, 20 amperes, 277 volts, one of the following: Cooper 222*, Leviton 122', Pass & Seymour PS20AC*, or equal. *Complete catalog number for pole arrangement necessary. B. Provide ivory colored handles. 2.02 RECEPTACLES 20 ampere, 125 volt, NEMA 5-20R, Industrial specification grade, straight blade, 3-wire duplex grounded outlets, one of the following: Cooper 5362, Leviton 5362, Pass and Seymour 5362-A. 208 volt receptacles shall be grounded type, rated same as circuit indicated on the drawings. Provide ivory coloring. B. Outdoor Receptacle: Pass and Seymour 2094, brown receptacle with Leviton Catalog No. 5977 cover and mounted horizontally on nonferrous box. C. GFCI Receptacles: Pass and Seymour 2094, Cooper XGF20, duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. 2.03 WALL PLATES Each and every flush outle! shaJl be provided wifh standard 302 Series stainless steel plates, blank, receptacle, switch or cord as designated by outlet symbol. Surface outlets shall have plates to match Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal cast boxes. B. Thermoplastic ivory cover plates shall be usee in all "finished" areas. C. NEMA 4X covers shall be Carlon, Industrial Gray, Type FS, or equal. 2.04 CONTROL SWITCHES Heavy-duty, oil-tight operators in NEMA 4X enclosures unless otherwise noted. Control stations shall be Square D, Class 9001, Type SKY, Allen Bradley Bulletin 800T, or equal, with operators as shown on the drawings. Lockouts where called for on the drawings shall be Square D Type K5, or equal. B. Manual switches shall be NEMA 4 water-tight and dust-tight (unless otherwise noted) as manufactured by Square D, Class 2510, Type K, or equal. C. All switches and control devices shall have permanent labels as specified herein. seCtiOn 16i41-2 2.05 PHOTO-CELLS Photo-cell controller shall be rated 1800 watts tungsten minimum at 120, 240, or 277 volts. The photo-cell shall be cadmium sulfide, 1-inch diameter, gasketed for maximum weatherproofing. B. Photo-cell mounting shall include a weatherproof wall plate with neoprene gasket suitable for attachment to an approved outdoor junction box. C. Photo-cell mounting shall include a delay of up to two minutes to prevent false switching. On-activation shall occur at 1-5 footcandles; off-deactivation shall occur at 3-15 footcandles. D. Operational temperature range shall be -40°F to 158OF (-40oc to 70°C). All photo-cells shall be UL listed and include a five-year warranty. Photo-cell shall be Intermatic, or equal, K4000 Series with weatherProof wall plate, light shield and neoprene gasket. Install where ShoWn on the draWings; PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, "Off" position down, excePt as 0{herwise noted. B. Install convenience receptacles 48 inches above floor, grounding pole on bottom, except as otherwise noted. C. Convenience Receptacles: Specification grade self-grounding. D. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. E. Backwiring shall not be used in wet locations, boiler rooms, or outSide. END OF SECTION Section 16141-3 SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1,01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1 Hinged cover enclosures. 2. Cabinets. 3. Terminal blocks and accessones. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work [~ this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal 'Blocks for Industrial Control Equipmen{ End Systems. D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 'A. 'Submit SI-lop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Show Drawings for EqUipment Panelsf Include wiring schematic diagram, connection diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, applicable NEMA rating with hasp and staple for padlock. C. Back Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gauge steel, white enamel finish. D. All cabinets with double doors or that are free standing shall have 3 point latch. Section 16160-1 2.02 2.03 2.05 CABINETS A. Construction: NEMA 250~ B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with screw cover front, concealed hinge and flush lock. Finish in white baked enamel. TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES Terminal Blocks: ANSl/NEMA ICS 4: UL listed. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. B. C. FABRICATION A. B. Shop assembled enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. Provide protective pockets inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. C. Provide gasketed surfaces for all enclosure doors and covers. ENCLOSURE RATING A. Cabinets and enclosures shall be rated as listed below, unless noted otherwise on the drawings: 1. Indoor: NEMA 12, steel. 2. Outdoor, corrosive or wet location: NEMA 4X, stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each comer, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb. Section 16160-2 All cabinets and enclosures attached to building surfaces which may be damp shall be spaced out to avoid rust and/or corrosion. All boxes in damp locations shall be o~ 1-inch standoffs. Damp locations shall include, but not be limited to, all basement areas, tunnel areas, extedor locations, garage areas, all wet wells and drywells, all areas below grade, and any washdown areas. END OF SECTION Section 16160-3 1-382-636/03-04 H. Type "H" Nameplates: Use: Operator instructions Size: As necessary Material: 3-layer laminated Micarta Background Color: Yellow Character Color: Black Character Size: 3/16" Engraving and Mounting Location: As requested by ENGINEER Labeling Tags: Use: Field mounted devices (valves, limit switches, etc.) Size: 1" x 3" Material: 1/32" thick stainless steel Character Size: 1/4" Engraving: As requested by ENGINEER PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Affix nameplates with stainless steel screws or sticky-back adhesive. D. Affix labeling tags with permanent bonding cement or locking wire ties. Provide 3/8-inch hole to accommodate wire tie. E. Prepare and install neatly typed directions in all panels including existing Panels where work is done under this Contract. F. Four-inch round, 4-inch square and 4-11/16 inch junction boxes concealed above ceilings may be identified with neat lettering on the cover with a permanent type black marking pen. G. All exposed conduits for conductors operating above 600 volts shall be painted red throughout length and at 50' -0" intervals shall be stenciled in white 2,inch by 1/4-inCh letters - HIGH VOLTAGE (insert proper voltage) VOLTS. All junction boxes and pull boxes for conductors operating above 600 volts shall be painted red and stenciled with 4-inch by 2-inch white letters - HIGH VOLTAGE (insert proper voltage) VOLTS. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION Provide wire markers on each conductor including neutrals in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams for control wiring. Wire markers shall be permanently attached wrap-around adhesive or heat-shrink type markers. Wire numbering preprinted on the conductor, flag type labels, and individual wrap-around numbers are not acceptable. Section 16195-3 Conductors in pull boxes, motor COntrol centers, supervisory control panels, control panels, cabinets and panelboards shall be grouped as to circuits and arranged in a neat manner. All conductors of a feeder or branch circuit shall be grouped, bound together with nylon ties and identified. Phase identification shall be consistent throughout the system. END OF SECTION Section 16195-4 SECTION 16230 STANDBY POWER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: Steel base assembly, engine, generator, engine generator set controls, environmental systems. The generator set manufacturer shall furnish and warrant the paralleling equipment specified in Section 16253 to provide a single source of responsibility for all products provided. Related Sections and Divisions: 1. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 2. The following listing of related sections is provided for the convenience of CONTRACTOR and is not necessarily all-inclusive. Other sections of the specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of this work. All other sections of Division 16. 1.02 SUBMI'I-i'ALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Detailed descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including all deviations from these specifications. 2. Detailed layouts of all equipment and ancillary items. 3. The manufacturer shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the generator and an interconnection wiring diagram for the entire standby system. Test reports certified by the manufacturer shall be provided to ENGINEER for the entire system. C. O&M manuals for the entire standby system shall be submitted on compact disk (CD) as well as hardbound copies as specified in Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The generator shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association. 1.04 OPERATING CONDITIONS Engine generator sets (2) shall be capable of continuous standby rating at 1,800 rpm, 0.8 PF, 3-phase, 3 wire, 4160 volts, at 60 hertz, and shall have a minimum capability of 795 K'W, 993 KVA pdme and 880 K~V, 1100 KVA standby. The unit shall be capable of 4803 KVA for motor starting at a maximum voltage dip of 10%. The AC engine-generator set shall be as manufactured by Cummins NPower, Model GTA 50 GS 3, or Caterpillar, Model G3516. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Cummins NPower. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by ENGINEER. Section 16230-1 The generator set manufacturer shall verify the engine as capable of driving the generator with all accessories in place and operating, at the generator set kW rating after derating for the range of temperature expected in service and the altitude of the installation. Site conditions are: 100°F maximum ambient, and 800 feet altitude. D. Voltage regulation shall be _+0.5% of rated voltage for any constant load between no load and rated load. - ...... -- E. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Maximum frequency variation shall be +0.5%. Random Voltage Variation: The cyclic variations in RMS voltage shall not exceed -+0.5% of rated voltage for constant loads from no load to rated load, with constant ambient and operating temperature. Total Harmonic Distortion: The sum of AC voltage wave-form harmonics, from no load to full linear load, shall not exceed .5% of rated voltage (L-N, L-L, L-L-L) and no single harmonic shall exceed 3% of rated voltage. H. Telephone Influence Factor: TIF shall be less than 50 per NEMA MG1-22.43. The engine-generator set shall be capable of picking up 100% of nameplate kW, less applicable derating factors, in one step with the engine-generator set at operating temperature in accordance with NFPA Standard 110, paragraph 5-13.2.6. J. Motor starting KVA shall be 4803 KVA based on a sustained RMS voltage drop of no more than 5% of no load voltage with the specified load KVA at near. zero power factor applied to the engine-generator set. K. The generator set shall share real and reactive load proportionally within plus or minus 5% with all other generator sets in the system. The time required to automatically start, accelerate to rated speed and voltage, and synchronize all generator sets Co the system bus on a normal power failure shall not exceed 15 seconds under normal power failure conditions, assuming that the generator set is in an ambient temperature of 40°F or greater, and water jacket heaters are operating propedy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL BASE ASSEMBLY The steel base assembly shall be shot blasted in accordance with SSPC Specification No. 1: The steel base assembly shall be shop primed with one coat of Tnemec 69-1255 Hi-Build Epoxoline primer, or equal, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type, quantity as recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Section 16230-2 1-382-636/03-04 2.02 ENGINE a. The engine shall be stationary, liquid cooled, spark ignited for use with natural gas. The design shall be 4-cycle, 16-cylinder, minimum displacement of 3067 cubic inches, turbo-charged, after-cooled as required by engine manufacturer. Engine shall be certified as capable of ddving the generator of the rating indicated above on a continuous standby basis for the duration of normal source interruptions: Engine accessories shall include the following: 1. A 24 volt DC electric starter as required by the engine manufacturer. 2. A complete engine fuel system including all pressure regulators, strainers, control valves, and flexible fuel lines. 3. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator. 4. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure lubrication oil pump, full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable elements, pressure relief valve, dipstick oil level indicator, and oil drain valve with hose extension. 5. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. The goveming system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall actively control the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate shall be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed, and operating in various isochronous or parallel states. 6. Engine protective devices to indicate alarm and engine shutdown for the following: a. Low coolant temperature alarm~ b. Low coolant level alarm. c. Low lubrication oil pressure alarm and shutdown. d. High coolant temperature alarm and shutdown. e. Over-speed shutdown. f. Over-crank shutdown. 7. Battery charging alternator, 40 amp minimum, with solid state voltage regulator. 8. Engine coolant lines shall be provided between radiator and generator, sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Coolant lines shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe as specified in Division 15. CONTRACTOR shall vedfy required pipe schedule with generator manufacturer, CONTRACTOR shall insulate all coolant lines (interior and exterior) as specified in Division 15, The equipment supplier shall provide 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze solution to fill engine cooling system. 10. Engine mounted thermostatically controlled water jacket heater to aid in quick starting. The coolant heater shall be UL499 listed and labeled. Heater shall be rated single phase, 480 volts, 8,000 watts and be disconnected whenever the engine starts. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper circuit from normal utility power source. 11. Flexible fuel line and fuel solenoid. 12. The engine shall be provided with all fuel system piping required for automatic operation of the system. All natural gas piping and valves shall be as follows: a. All natural gas piping shall be provided and tested in accordance with all state, local, and utility codes pertaining to natural gas service or service requirements. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for natural gas service with Wisconsin Public Service and shall coordinate service size and loCation, and shall furnish and install all shutoff valves and pressure reduction as required. b. Natural gas piping (3 inches in diameter and larger) shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe (ASTM A-53 with flanges conforming to ASTM A181, Grade I, 150 pound forged steel flanged joints). Natural gas piping (smaller than 3-inch) shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe (ASTM A-53 with 150 psi steel weld fittings Section 16230-3 or 150 psi malleable iron screw fittings). Gas piping 1-1/2 inch and larger, above ground, may be welded. Piping 1-1/4 inch and smaller shall be screwed. c. Joints forscrew pipe shall be made by cutting pipe square and reaming inside. Pipe shal extend to shoulder of fitting with clean cut taper threads. Joint compound shall be red lead. Seamless welding fittings shall be used for all welded piping. d. Shutoff valves in all natural gas lines 1/2-inch through 4-inch shall be DeZurik, Series 400, or equal, lever operator, complete with Figure 425, or equal. BUNA steam seal and Hycar-type plug and accessories suitable for natural gas service. 2.03 REMOTE MOUNTED RADIATOR A. Engine shall be radiator cooled by a remote mounted radiator system including belt-driven pusher fan, coolant pump, thermostat temperature control, and expansion tanks. The cooling system shall be rated for full rated load operation in a 104°F ambient condition. Provide radiator drain extension. Extension shall include shutoff valve. B. The radiator shall consist of a steel frame, cooling cores, filler necks, 7 psi pressure caps, fan, rolled venturi fan ring, fan guard, fan motor, core guard, integral fan drive support, lifting holes, and removable manifold tanks. The radiator shall be forced draft (blower type) design with cooling cores and fan mounted vertically for horizontal air intake and discharge. The radiator cores shall be of Iockseam, solder-coated, oval, 1/2 inch brass tubes solde~ bonded to copper plate fins. The cores shall be bolted to a steel frame and covered with a removable core guard. D. The radiator cores shall have suitable drainage connections and vent connections at the top of the unit. Pressure caps with filler necks are included. E~+'' ~ Tt~e~'r;a~liat0~: f~:am~ Shall ~a~/~ a'mean~ f~r I~0iting~to-a floor or Support. Radiator shall have a blue finish coat. The radiator shall have a steel or aluminum fan either connected directly or connected through belts and pulleys to an electric motor. Belt and pulleys shall be guarded with an easily removable guard designed in accordance with OSHA requirements. Fan shall be guarded with an easily removable guard of zinc plated steel wire designed in accordance with OSHA requirements. Fan tip speed shall not exceed 16,500 FPM. The fan motor shall be 60 horsepower, TEFC, NEMA Design B, Class F insulation, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 230/460 volts, factory wired for 460 volts, 1.15 service factor, and have an efficiency of 95%. The motor shall have copper windings, have ball or roller beadngs in end brackets of steel or cast iron, or aluminum brackets with steel bearing sleeves. Bearings shall be prelubricated and field regreasable. Openings for addition of grease shall be threaded and plugged or have grease fittings provided. 2.04 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM Exhaust mufflers shall be provided for the engine of size as recommended by manufacturer. Mufflers shall be of the critical grade type. Mufflers shall be end in and end out type. CONTRACTOR shall mount muffles so their weight is not supported by the engine. Stainless steel flexible exhaust connections shall be provided as required for connection between engine exhaust manifolds and exhaust lines, in compliance with applicable codes and regulations. Section 16230-4 2.05 C. Provide exhaust condensation traps with manual drain valves to trap and drain off exhaust condensation and to prevent condensation from entering the engine: D. Provide a suitable rain cap at each stack outlet. Provide all necessary flanges and special fittings for proper installation. CONTRACTOR shall mount and install Ell exhaust components as shown on drawings and as required to comply with applicable codes and regulaflons~ All components shall be propedy sized to assure proper operation without excessive back pressure when installed as shown on the drawings. Make provisions as required for pipe expansion and contraction. CONTRACTOR shall cover exhaust mufflers and all indoor exhaust piping with a proper insulating material in a manner not to interfere with flexible exhaust connection. Insulation shall be described in Division 15. STARTING AND CONTROL BATTERIES A UL listed/CSA certified, 10-ampere, voltage regulated battery charger shall be provided for each engine-generator set. Chargers shall be equipped with float, taper and equalize charge settings. Operational monitors shall provide visual output along with individual form C contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 VAC, 30 VDC for remote indication of: 1. Loss of AC power: red light 2. Low battery voltage: red light 3. High battery voltage: red light 4. Power On: green light (no relay contact) B. Charger shall include an analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12-hour equalize charge timer, and AC and DC fuses. A calcium/lead antimony storage battery set of the heavy-duty starting type shall be provided. Battery voltage shall be compatible with starting system. The battery set shall be rated no less than 1400 CCA and shall be capable of a minimum of three 15-second cranking cycles. A battery rack constructed in conformance with NEC requirements and necessary cables and clamps shall be provided. 2.06 GENERATOR The generator shall be a single, prelubdcated, field regreasable bearing, self aligning, 4-pole, 2/3 pitch, brushless, synchronous type, revolving field with amortisseur windings, and with direct ddven centrifugal blower fan for proper cooling and minimum noise. No brushes will be allowed. Generator shall be directly connected to engine fly wheel housing and ddven through a flexible coupling to ensure permanent alignment. Generator design shall prevent potentially damaging shaft currents. B. Insulation shall meet NEMA MG1 standards for Class F insulation system. The maximum temperature rise shall not exceed 125°C at 40°C ambient. The generator set shall include an automatic digital voltage regulation system that is matched and prototype tested with the governing system provided. It shall be immune from misoperation due to load-induced voltage waveform distortion and provide a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation system shall be equipped with three-phase RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque-matching characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below a threshold of Section 16230-5 1-382-636/03-04 58 to ~ HZ.' The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll-off. Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise-lower switches, with an alphanumeric LED readout to indicate setting level. Rotary potentiometers for system adjustments ara not acceptable. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm (over-current warning) when load current exceeds 110% of the rated currant of the generator set on any phase for mora than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator. The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. Controls shall be provided to individually monitor all three phases of the output current for short circuit conditions. The control/protection system shall monitor the current level and voltage. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator (short circuit shutdown). The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 Article 445. Controls shall be provided to monitor the KW load on the generator set, and initiate an alarm condition (over load) when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in excess of 5 seconds. Controls shall include a load shed control, to operate a set of dry contacts (for use in shedding customer load devices) when the generator set is ovedoaded. An AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true RMS voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator-set voltage level for more than 10 seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall occur;when the output voltage of the altemator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and starting voltage is less than 25VDC or more than 32 VDC. DUring engine starting, the Iow voltage limit shall be disabled and if DC voltage drops to less than 14.4 volts for more than two seconds a "weak battery" alarm shall be initiated Provide an i~ci[er 'field automatic circuit breaker, mounted on the control panel, of the manual reset only type (cannot be used as a manual disconnect) for protection of exciter field and regulator, The generator, exciter, and voltage regulator shall be designed and manufactured by the engine generator set manufacturer. The exciter shall be 3-phase, full wave, rectified with heavy duty silicone diodes mounted on the common rotor shaft and sized for maximum motor starting loads. Systems Utilizing 3-wire, solid state control elements rotating in the rotor, will not be acceptable. The generator design shall be of the self-protecting type as demonstrated by the prototype short circuit test described under "Testing" herain. A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable of sustaining and regulating current supplied toa single phase or three phase fault at approximately 300% of rated current for not more than 10 seconds. Section 16230-6 1-382-636/03-04 2.07 Provide two embedded resistance temperature detectors per phase and temperature indication equipment. The control system shall annunciate high alternator temperature as a fault condition. M. The alternator shall be capable of delivering rated output (KVA) at rated frequency and power factor, at any voltage not more than 5% above or below rated voltage. N. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 12%, based on the standby rating of the generator set. O. The voltage regulation system shall include provisions for reactive load shadng and electronic voltage matching for paralleling applications. Motorized voltage adjust pot is not acceptable for voltage matching. 'ENGINE-GENERATOR SET CONTROL The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control system that is designed to provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. the control system shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set, and remote monitoring and control as described in this spednlcation. The control shall be mounted on the generator set. The control shall be vibration isolated and prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions encountered. B. The generator set mounted control shall include the following features and functions: 1. Mode Select Switch: The mode select switch shall initiate the following control modes: a. When in the RUN or Manual position the generator set shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. b. In the OFF position the generator set shall immediately stop~ bypassing all time delays. c. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. 2. EMERGENCY STOP SWitch: Switch shall beRed "mushroom-head" push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting. 3. RESET Switch: The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4. PANEL LAMP Switch: Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall aut0mati~lly be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second time. Generator Set AC Output Metedngi The generator set shall be provided with a metering set including the following features and functions: 1. Analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, and kilowatt (kW) meter:. Voltmeter and ammeter Shall display' all three phases. Provide four position selector switches for voltmeter and ammeter. Ammeter and kW meter scales shall be color coded in the following fashion: readings from 0 to 90% of generator set standby rating: green; readings from 90 to 100% of standby rating: amber; readings in excess of 100%: red. 2. Digital metering set, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current, frequency, output current, output kW, kW hours, and power factor. Generator output voltage shall be available in line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltages, and shall display all three phase voltages (line to neutral or line to line) simultaneously. Section 16230.7 Both analog and digital metering are required. The analog and digital metering equipment shall be driven by a single microprocessor, to provide consistent readings and performance. The generator set' shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non-automatic generator status, and existing warning and shutdown conditions. The lamps shall be high-intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm and shutdown conditions on an alphanumeric digital display panel: 1. Low oil pressure (alarm) 2. Low oil pressure (shutdown) 3. Oil pressure sender failure (alarm) 4. Low coolant temperature (alarm) 5. High coolant temperature (alarm) 6. High coolant temperature (shutdown) 7. Engine temperature sender failure (alarm) 8. Low coolant level (alarm or shutdown-selectable) 9. Fail to crank {shutdown) 10. Fail to staWovercrank (shutdown) 11. Overspeed (shutdown) 12: Low DC voltage (alarm) 13. High DC voltage (alarm) 14. Weak battery (alarm) 15. High AC voltage (shutdown) 16. Low AC voltage (shutdown) 17. Under frequency (shutdown) 18. Over current (warning) 19. Over current (shutdown) 20. Short circuit (shutdown) 21. Ground fault (alarm) 22. Over load (alarm) 23. Emergency stop (shutdown) 24. Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions. Labeling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and quality as the above specified conditions. The nonautomatic indicating lamp shall be red, and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to start from a remote location. 25. Three auxiliary generator running contacts (120 volt, dry type) shall be provided to open the combustion air dampers and start the radiator fans. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set control: 1. Engine oil pressure (psi or kPA). 2. Engine coolant temperature [degrees F or C). 3. Engine oil temperature (degrees F or C). 4, Engine speed (rpm). 5. Number of hours of operation (hours). 6. Number of start attempts. 7. Battery voltage (DC volts). The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of the last ten warning or shutdown indications on the generator set, as well as Section 16230-8 1.382.636/03-04 SECTION 16253 MEDIUM VOLTAGE PARALLELING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Provide factory assembled paralleling equipment with digital electronic controls designed for fast, reliable operation of the Standby Power Systems and including the functions described herein. E~. The system shall be a completely integrated assembly for manual and automatic operation of the standby power systems (two plus one futura). The generator set manufacturer shall furnish and warrant the paralleling equipment to provide a single source of responsibility for all the products provided. Warranty documents shall be provided verifying this warranty. Technicians specifically trained to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the paralleling equipment. Submit names, qualifications, and locations of individuals who will service and support the equipment. Related Sections and Divisions 1. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govem work in this section. 2. The following listing of related sections is provided for the convenience of CONTRACTOR and is not necessarily all-inclusive. Other sections of the specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of this work. All other sections of Division 16. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and produCt data in accordance With proVisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Detailed descriptions of equipment to be furnished, including all deviations from these specifications. 2. Detailed layouts of all equipment and ancillary items. 3. The manufacturer shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the paralleling equipment and an interconnection widng diagrams for the entire standby system. Test reports certified by the manufacturer shall be provided to ENGINEER for the entire system. C. O&M manuals for the entire paralleling system shall be submitted on compact disk (CD) as well as hardbound copies as specified in Section 01300 - Submittals. Do A one-line diagram and operating description for the generators and paralleling equipment shall be provided. The operating description shall include the following modes of operation at a minimum. This information shall be submitted to the OWNER, ENGINEER, and WPS for review and approval. 1. Maintenance testing. 2. Power outages. 3. Requested interruptions. Section 16253-1 1~03 ' "QUALITY ASSURANCE The Master Control System Panel shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, UL891 - Switchboards and Controls. The paralleling switchgear shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, UL1670. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS Power Switchgear: Switchgear Ratings - The paralleling switchgear shall be configured as shown on the drawings and rated for operation at 4160 volts. 3 phase, 1200 amps. It shall contain devices and equipment as shown on the drawings, in addition to meeting the requirements of this section. The paralleling switchgear shall be as manufactured by Cummins NPower Power Command Model 300, Caterpillar, or Shallbetter. The drawings and specifications were prepared based on Cummins NPower. CONTRACTOR shall include in the Bid and shall be responsible for the cost of any changes to accommodate other equipment including but not limited to structural, mechanical, and electrical work. CONTRACTOR shall also pay any additional costs necessary for revisions of drawings and/or specifications by ENGINEER. MetalLClad s~vitchgear Assembly 1. The metal-clad switchgear shall consist of an indoor enclosure containing cimuit breakers and the necessary accessory components all factory assembled (except for necessary shipping splits) and operationally checked. The assembly shall be self- supporting and designed for floor mounting. The integrated switchgear assembly shall withstand the effects of closing, carrying and interrupting currents up to the assigned max[mum short circuit rating. 2. Electrical Ratings: a. Nominal System Voltage, kV: 4.16 b. Maximum Design Voltage, kV: 4.76 c. Basic Impulse Level (BIL), kV: 60 d. Nominal Interrupting Capacity - Class: 250MVA e. Main-Bus Continuous Current: 1200 A. f. Cimuit Breaker Symmetrical Interrupting Capability at Maximum Design Voltage, kA: 29 g. Circuit Breaker Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary), kA: 97 h Circuit Breaker Interrupting Time: 5 cycles maximum. 3. Signs and labeling regarding potential electric arc flash hazards shall be provided on the switchgear. Signs and labeling shall follow the guidelines listed in ANSI Z535.4-1998. Components 1. Stationary Structure a. The switchgear shall be configured to include the number and type of devices as shown on the drawings to form a rigid, self-supporting, completely enclosed structure providing steel barriers between sections. Switchgear shall be front and rear aligned. The equipment provided shall be installed where shown on the drawings. Section 16253-2 1-382-636/03-04 b. The sections shall be divided by metal barriers into the following separate compartments; Circuit breaker, instrument, main bus, auxiliary device and cable. Each breaker section shall have two circuit breaker compartments (i.e. two high construction). c. Construction: Each equipment bay shall be a separately constructed cubicle assembled to form a rigid free-standing unit. Minimum sheet metal thickness shall be 11-gauge steel on all exterior surfaces. Adjacent bays shall be securely bolted together to form an integrated rigid structure. The rear covers shall be removable to assist installation and maintenance of bus and cables. Each individual unit shall be braced to prevent distortion. d. CONTRACTOR shall refer to the bid pages for Bid Alternative No. 2 price to provide all welded construction for the paralleling switchgear endosure~ 2. Circuit Breaker Compartment a. Each circuit breaker compartment shall be designed to house a horizontal drawout metal-clad vacuum circuit breaker. The stationary pdmary disconnecting contacts shall be silver-plated copper and mounted within glass polyester support bushings. The movable contacts and springs shall be mounted on the circuit breaker element for ease of inspection/maintenance. b. Entrance to the stationary pdmary disconnecting contacts shall be automatically covered by metal shutters when the circuit breaker is withdrawn from the connected position to the test or disconnected position or removed from the circuit breaker compartment. A ground bus shall be extended into the circuit breaker compartment to automatically ground the breaker frame with high-current spring type grounding contacts located on the breaker chassis when in the test and connected positions. Guide rails for positioning the circuit breaker and all other necessary hardware shall be an integral part of the circuit breaker compartment. Blocking devices shall interlock breaker frame sizes to prevent installation of a lower ampere rating or interrupting capacity element into a compartment designed for one of a higher rating. It shall be possible to install a circuit breaker into a bottom compartment without use of a transport truck or lift device. 3. Cable CompartmentJGround Bus: Compression type cable lugs shall be provided. The ground bus shall extend through this compartment for the full length of the switchgear. Provide lugs for ground conductors as shown on the drawings; Auxiliary bus, if needed, and Icad bus support NEMA Class A-20 standoff insulators shall be epoxy. 4. Main Bus Compartment: The main bus shall be rated 1200 amp, 4160 volts as shown on the drawings and be fully insulated for its entire length with an epoxy coating by the fluidized bed process. The conductors shall be Silver-plated copper and be of a bolted design. Access to this compartment shall be from the front or rear of the structure by removing a steel barrier. Provide standard provisions for future extension. 5. Doors and Panels: Relays, meters, control switches, etc., shall be mounted on a · formed front-hinged panel for each circuit breaker compartment. 6. Circuit Breakers: a. Provide circuit breakers with one vacuum interrupter per phase. Breakers of same type and rating shall be completely interchangeable. Circuit breakers provided with the paralleling switchgear shall be identical (manufacturer, model number, trip unit, protective relaying, etc.) to those provided in the distribution switchgear specified in Section 16344.5KV Metal-Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear; CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for this coordination at bid time as well as when placing orders for this equipment. The circuit breakers shall be operated by means of a stored energy mechanism which is normally charged by a universal motor but can also be charged by a manual handle supplied on each breaker for manual emergency closing or testing. The closing speed of the moving contacts shall be independent of both the Section 16253-3 1-382-636/03-04 control voltage and the operator. Provide a full front shield on the breakers. Secondary control drcuits shall be connected automatically with a self-aligning, self- engaging plug and receptacle arrangement when the circuit breaker is racked into the connected position. Provisions shall be made for the secondary control plug to be manually connected in the test position. A minimum of 8 auxiliary contacts (four A and four B), shall be provided for external use. Provide 10 additional cell- mounted auxiliary contacts both MOC and TOC type for external use. The racking mechanism to move the breaker between positions shall be operable with the front door dosed and position indication shall be visible with door closed. b. An interlocking system shall be provided to prevent racking a closed circuit breaker to or from any position. An additional interlock shall automatically discharge the stored-energy operating mechanism spdngs upon removal of the breaker out of the compadment. c. The circuit breaker control voltage shall be: 48 VDC - provide one capacitor trip unit for each circuit breaker. Trip voltage shall be 48VDC, and be provided by the switchgear batteries. 7. Instrument Transformers: Current transformers: Each breaker compartment shall have front-accessible mounting of four current transformers per phase (ANSI standard relay accuracy), two on bus side and two on cable side of circuit breaker. The current transformer assembly shall be insulated for the full voltage rating of the switchgear. The current transformers widng shall be Type SIS #12 AWG. Relaying and metedng accuracy shall conform to ANSI Standards. Voltage transformers shall be drawout mounted with primary current-limiting fuses and shall have ratio as indicated. The transformers shall have mechanical rating equal to the momentary rating of the drcoit breakers and shall have metering accuracy per ANSI Standards. 8. Control Widng: The switchgear shall be wired with type SIS #14 AWG, except where larger s~ze wire is specified. The switchgear shall be provided with terminal blocks for outgoing control connections. Wire markers shall be provided for each end of all control wires. 9. The generator sets for this project shall each be provided with a neutral grounding resistor. The resistors shall be rated fqr operation at the specified line to neutral voltage and 50 amps for 10 seconds. The neutral grounding resistors shall be installed where 'shoWn ~n ~he drawings. 10. AC control circuits in the switchgear shall be protected with properly sized fuses in safety fuse blocks, with visible fuse blown indication for each fuse. Potential [~ahsformers shall be protected on line and load side. 11. All CT installations shall include shorting type terminal blocks. DC trip and closing control power shall be provided by a battery system mounted external to switchgear in the generator room as follows: 1. System Requirements: Battery with 24 cells and 100 ampere-hour minimum capacity based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25°0 with electrolyte at normal level and m~mmum ambient temperature of 13°C. Cycle battery before shipment to guarantee rated capadty on installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded. 2. Battery: NICAD type in sealed, dear plastic containers, complete with electrolyte, fully charged, and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Each container shall weigh not more than 70 lb and contain not more than three cells. Batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging from -18 to 25°C. Current output shall not vary more than 0.8 percent for each degree below 25°C down to -8°C. 3. Rack: Provide a two-step rack that fits in available space indicated. Batteries shall be provided with necessary electdcel connections between cells and between rows of cells and include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. Section 16253-4 Accessories: Include the following: a. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales. b. Hydrometer syringes. c. Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance. d. Wall-mounted, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items. e. Set of cell numerals. Charger shall be a static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provisions for manual and automatic adjustment of the charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input- frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger shall include the following: a. DC ammeter. b. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; shall operate with toggle switch to select between battery and charger voltages. c. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights shall be provided to indicate circuit ground, connected in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junction connected to ground by normally open push-button contact. d. Capacity shall be sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V per cell, and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell. e. Charging-Rate SwitCh: Manually operated switch shall provide for transferring to higher charging rate. Charger shall operate automatically after switch operation until manually reset. f. AC power supply shall be 120Vi 60Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for any interval, charger shall automatically resume charging battery. Charger shall regulate rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from opening. g. Protective Features shall include a current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply to protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals. h. Electrical Filtering shall reduce charger audible noise to less than 26 dB. i. Battery charger failure shall be monitored through the switchgear power monitoring and control system. j. Equipment shall be identical to that specified in specification Section 16344, Part 2.04. E. CONTRACTOR is responsible for this coordination. Protective Relaying: 1. The utility main breaker (specified in Section 16344-5kV Metal-Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear) will be provided with the following three phase utility grade protective devices. This panel shall accept a signal from each of these protective devices for control of the utility main breaker. a. Under voltage relay (27). b. Overvoltage relay (59). c. High speed ovedunder frequency relay (81 O/U). d. Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46). Instantaneous Under voltage (27R). f. Synchronism check relay (25). g. Phase overcurrent (51). h. Ground Overcurrent (51N). Section 16253-5 2. Each generator set breaker in the system shall be provided with throe phase utility grade relaying or protective devices for the following functions: a. Overcurrent Relay (51/51V) b. GroundO~ercurrent Relay (51G) c. Differential Relay (87) d. Lockout Relay (86) 3. The generator main breaker Ispecified in Section 16344-5kV Metal-Clad Circuit Broaker Sei'vice' Entrance Switchgear) will be provided with the following three phase utility grade protective devices.'This panel shall accept a signal from each of these protective devices for control of the generator main breaker. a. Overvoltage Relay (59) b. Undervoltage Relay (27) c. Over/Under Frequency Relay (81) The generator paralleling breakers protective relaying shall be identical to that provided in the. service entrance switchgear and be utility grade equipment, with drawout cases, Busier BEI-IPS100, Schweitzer 300G, or ABB GPU2000R - 589V. G. The generator set paralleling breakers shall each be provided with voltage surge suppressors. The paralleling switchgear shall include 1200 amp outgoing main lugs as shown on the drawings. An overcurrent relay (50/51) shall be provided ahead of the main lugs to protect against an overcurrent on the outgoing conductors. In the event an overcurrent is detected, the three generator main breakers shall be tdpped off line. Relay setpoint ranges shall be appropriate for coordination with the mains, tie, and feeder breakers in the service entrance switchgear. The paralleling switchgear shall include analog gauges for indication of volts, amps, hertz, power factor, and kilowatts from the main buss. Provide a phase selector switch to allow display of current and voltage on each phase. These gauges and switches shall be true discrete devices for manual operation and monitoring. 2.02 CONTROL EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION Constru~tion:c ~ ~ ~ i.' Net~ '~pa~'~'~iil~ble ah'd 2. 3. a~"s-s'-requ~ir~m~nt§'~'0i; {~ paralleling equipment, and provide equipment that will fit into the space allowed. Control equipment shall be designed for front and rear access. Each section of the paralleling control system shall be listed and labeled under the requirements of UL 891; including all covers, barriers, and supports. Individual control sections shall be isolated from each other by metal or insulating barriers. All wiring shall be UL listed, 105°C, 600 volt rated, and sized as required. Each device or function shall bb suitably identified by silk-screen or similar permanent identification. Provide preprinted adhesive or heat shrink type wire numbering labels at all terminations and splices. Wire numbering prepdnted on the conductor, flag type labels ~ind indMdual wrap-around numbers are not acceptable. The framework and all other sheet metal components of the system shall be palmed with a rust-inhibiting primer, and finished with two coats of satin finish ANSI 61 gray enamel. All door mounted control components shall be industrial type, heavy duty, oil-tight devices with contact ratings a minimum of twice the maximum circuit ampacity they are controlling; Teggle S~vitches and other light duty control devices are not acceptable. Section 16253-6 Indicator lamps shall be high intensity LED type devices. Indicator lamp condition (on or off) shall be easily visible in bright room lighting conditions. 6. AC control circuits in the switchgear shall be protected with properly sized fuses in safety fuse blocks, with visible fuse blown indication for each fuse. Potential transformers shall be protected on the line and load side. 7. All CT installations shall include shorting type terminal blocks. 8. All field control interconnecting widng shall be sized as specified by system manufacturer (wiring not designated by the system manufacturer shall be minimum 14 AWG copper). All control interconnect widng shall be stranded. 2.03 PARALLELING CONTROLS Provide a paralleling control panel for each generator set in the standby power system. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator. The paralleling control functions may be integrated with the generator set control functions (with duplicate functions eliminated). Each paralleling control panel shall contain the components and devices as described in this section. 1. Operator Panel. Each paralleling control panel shall be provided with a panel to allow the operator to view the status and control operation of the specific generator set being paralleled. The operator panel shall be provided with the following features and capabilities. a. 1% accuracy generator set AC output instruments; Ammeter, Voltmeter, Frequency Meter, Wattmeter, KW-hour meter, and Power Factor Meter. Selector switches to allow viewing of voltage and amperes for each phase shall be provided. Voltmeter and frequency meter shall be analog instruments. Switches and/or other provisions shall be included to allow reading of bus voltage and frequency from this metering set. b. Synchroscope and ,generator set synchronized" indication. Indication shall be synchronizing lamp$~ LED indication, or other provisions, but must be located on the paralleling control panel~ adjacent to the paralleling breaker control switches. c. Running Time Meter, Start Counter d. Generator Set Mode Selector Switch: Switch shall provide run, off, and automatic functions for control of the generator set. RUn mode causes the generator set to immediately start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage, but paralleling breaker does not automatically close. Off mode prevents generator set from starting, or immediately shuts down the generator set if it is running~ Auto mode allows genset starting from a remote control system. e. Breaker trip/close switch with breaker status indicating lamps. The switch shall be interlocked with the control system such that breaker closure is not possible unless the mode select switch is in the run position and the generator set is synchronized with the system bus. f. Control Reset push-button switch with indicating lamP. Lamp shall flash to indicate that generator set is locked out due to a fault condition. g. Lamp test push-button switch. Operation of this switch shall cause all lamps on the panel to be simultaneously tested. h. The control panel shall be provided with a set of DC-powered lamps with a switch to allow viewing of all functions on the front panel when normal lighting systems are not available. i. Emergency Stop switch. The emergency stop switch shall be a red, mushroom head switch which maintains it,s position until manually reset. j. Manual discrete voltage and frequency adjust raise/loWer switches. Switches shall allow the generator set frequency and voltage to be adjusted plus or minus 5% when the generator set is operating independently of the system bus. Voltage and Section 16253-7 F frequency adjustment switches shall be located adjacent to the generator set and bus metering, breaker control switches, synchroscope and manual paralleling panel, for ease of use by the operator. Alarm and status indicating panel to indicate the following conditions (alarm horn shall be located on master control). All of the conditions indicated below shall also be transmitted from the Master Controller PLC to the OWNER's existing SCADA system via the Allen Bradley SLC 5/04 PLC in the new service entrance switchgear utilizing Modplus Plus communication protocol as specified in Part 2.04 below. Lamp Alarm Shutdown Function Color Horn Unit Low DC Voltage (Each unit) Amber High DC Voltage (Each unit) Amber Weak Battery (Each unit) Amber Fail to Sync Amber Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm (Each unit) Amber High Engine Temp Pre-Alarm (Each unit) Amber Ground Fault (Each unit) Red Overcurrent Pre-Alarm (Each unit) Amber Generator Breaker Tdpped (Each unit) Red Generator Main Breaker Tripped Red Utility Main Breaker Tripped Red Not in Auto (Each unit) Red High Engine Temp (Each unit) Red Low Oil Pressure (Each unit) Red Overcurrent (Each unit) Red Short Circuit (Each unit) Red Loss of Excitation IEach unit) Red Reverse Power Red Overcrank (Each unit) Red Overspeed (Each unit) Red Under Frequency (Each unit) Red Under Voltage (Each unit) Red Over Voltage (Each unit) Red Phase Rotation (Each unit) Red Low Coolant Level (Each unit) Red Oil Pressure Sender Failui~e (Each unit) Red Low Coolant Temperature (Each unit) Red .Engine Temperature Sender Failure (Each unit) Red Fail to Crank(Each unit) Red High AC Voltage (Each unit) Red Low AC Voltage (Each unit) Red Overload (Each unit) Red Emergency Stop (Each unit) Red Automatic (Each unit) Green Section 16253-8 Function Lamp Color Alarm Hom Shutdown Unit Generator Running (Each unit) Generator Breaker Open (Each Unit) Generator Breaker Closed (Each Unit) Generator Main Breaker Open Generator Main Breaker Closed Distribution Switchgear Tie Open Distribution Switchgear Tie Closed Utility Main Breaker Open Utility Main Breaker Closed Demand Mode Standby Timing for Start Timing for Shutdown Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Internal Controls. The following internal control components or functions shall be provided for each generator set in the system. a. Electronic isochronous kW load sharing control to operate the engine governors during synchronizing and to provide isochronous load sharing when paralleled. The control system shall allow sharing of real kW load between all generator sets in the system to within 1% of equal levels, without introduction of frequency droop into the system. The control system shall include all equipment required for kW load sharing with an infinite bus. The infinite bus governing controls shall allow the generator set to synchronize to an infinite bus, parallel, and ramp up to a preset load level on the · generator set. Additional controls shall be provided to cause the generator set to ramp up to a kW load level signaled by the system master control PLC. The isochronous load sharing module and engine governor shall be a coordinated system of a single manufacturer. b. Load demand governing controls shall be provided to cause the generator set to ramp down to zero load when signaled to shut down in a load demand mode. On a signal to re-start, the load demand governing controls shall cause the generator set to synchronize to the system bus, close, and ramp up to it's proportional share of the total bus load. The ramp rate of the generator set shall be operator-adjustable. c. Electronic kVAR load sharing control to operate the alternator excitation system while the generator set is paralleled. The control system shall allow sharing of reactive load between all generator sets in the system to within 1% of equal levels, without introduction of voltage droop into the system. The control system shall include all equipment required for VAR load sharing with an infinite bus in either a constant VAR or constant power factor mode for future application flexibility. Mode and adjustments shall be selectable by the operator. d. Equipment shall be provided to monitor the generator set as it is starting, and verify that it has reached at least 90% of nominal voltage and frequency before closing to the bus. The equipment provided shall positively prevent out-of-phase paralleling if two or more engine-generator sets reach operating conditions simultaneously by providing a lockout signal to disable breaker closure for generator set(s) in the system which have not been selected to be the first units to close to the bus. Controls shall be provided to recognize the failure of the first breaker signaled to close, and allow system operation to proceed in spite of this failure (breaker failure alarm). Systems using dead bus relay schemes without a disable signal to positively Section 16253-9 prevent out-of-phase paralleling shall not be acceptable. System shall include an independent backup to automatically operate in the event that the pdmary system fails. e. Synchronizer to electronically adjust the engine governor to match the voltage, frequency and phase angle of the bus. Synchronizer shall maintain the engine-generator voltage within 1% of bus voltage and phase angle within 20 electrical degrees of the bus for 0.5 seconds before circuit breaker closing. Each unit shall have its own synchronizer; systems using a switching scheme to utilize a single system synchronizer are not acceptable. Synchronizers and systems which utilize a motor ddven pot for control of AC voltage during the synchronizing process are not acceptable. The system shall be provided with a fail to synchronize time delay that is adjustable from 10-120 seconds. Control logic for fail to synchronize function shall allow field adjustment of function for either alarm or shutdown of the generator set on failure condition. f. Controls shall include a permissive relay function to assure that the generator set does not attempt to close out of phase with the bus, due to errant operation of the synchronizer. g. Controls shall include a permissive (sync check) function, to be used with "generator synchronized" indicator dudng manual paralleling, to prevent accidental closure of ~ ;..... ~the breaker with the generator set out of phase with the bus. Provisions to allow manual closure of the first generator set to a de-energized bus shall be provided. h. Control equipment shall contain a system of diagnostic LED's to assist in analyzing proper system function. i. Controls shall include three phase sensing reverse power equipment, to prevent sustained reverse power flow into the generator set. The engine manufacturer shall approve the reverse power sensing equipment. When the reverse power condition exceeds 10% of the generator set kW for 3 seconds, the paralleling circuit breaker shall be tripped open and the generator shut down. j. Controls shall be provided to verify generator set and bus phase rotation match prior to closing the paralleling breaker. k. Electronic alternator overcurrent alarm and shutdown protection. This protection is required in addition to the overcurrent relaying on the paralleling breaker, and shall sense current flow at the generator set output terminals. The overcurrent alarm shall be indicated when the Icad current on the generator set is more than 110% of rated current for more than 60 seconds. The overcurrent shutdown shall be matched to the thermal damage curve of the generator set, and shall not have an instantaneous function. I. Electronic alternator shod circuit protection. This protection shall be in addition to the overcurrent trip on the paralleling breaker. The'short circuit shall occur when the Icad current on the generator set is more than 175% of rated current and an aggregate time/current calculation indicates that the system is approaching the thermal damage point of the altemator. The equlpmen! used shall not have an instantaneous function m. Provide overcurrent and short circuit protection for the feeder connecting the generator set to the paralleling switchgear. This protection may be integrated with alternator protection but must be positively coordinated to prevent tripping of the paralleling breaker prior to operation of the alternator protective equipment. n. Controls shall be provided to sense loss of excitation of the alternator while paralleled to the system bus. o. Generator set start contacts rated 10 amps at 32 VDC. p. Cooldown time delay, adjustable: 0-600 seconds. The control panel shall indicate the time remaining in the time delay period when the generator set is timing for shutdown. Section 16253-10 q. Start time delay, adjustable: 0-300 seconds. The control panel shall indicate the time remaining in the time delay period when the generator set is timing for start. r. The control system shall monitor the paralleling breaker auxiliary contacts, and initiate a fault signal if the breaker fails to close within an adjustable time delay period after the control has signaled it to close (0.5-15 seconds). Breaker failure alarm shall cause the paralleling breaker to trip open, and lock out until manually reset. s. Controls shall be provided to initiate an alarm condition when generator set is at 90% of rated frequency for more than 20 seconds. t. Controls shall be provided to shut down generator set and initiate alarm when the generator set is at less than 85% of nominal voltage for more than 15 seconds, more than 110% of nominal voltage for more than 10 seconds, or more than 130% of nominal. u. Provide all other components required, such as properly sized current transformers, transducers, terminal blocks, etc., for reliable system operation, as described herein under "SYSTEM OPERATION." B. Paralleling Controls System Power. Control power for the paralleling control system shall be derived from the generator set 24VDC starting batteries, A solid state, no break "best battery" selector system shall be provided so that control voltage is available as long as any battery bank in the system is available, and that all battery banks are isolated to prevent the failure of one battery from disabling the entire system. Generator set governing, voltage regulation, load sharing, synchronizing, protection, and control equipment shall be capable of proper operation with battery voltage levels down to 18VDC. 2.04 MASTER CONTROL SYSTEM Provide a system master control to monitor and control the operation of the entire paralleling system, including the generator set controls, The master control panel shall contain the components and functions described in this section. 1. Solid State System Status Panel: A system status panel shall be provided and shall include the following features and functions: a. Alarm Silence Push-button b. Alarm horn c. LED Indicating lamps to indicate the following conditions: Function Color Alarm Horn Generator Set #n On Line (one for each genset in the system) Load Demand Mode Priority #n Load On (one for each load add level in the system) Load Shed Level n (one for each load shed level in the system) System Test Remote System Start Check Generator Set #n (one for each genset in the system) Controller Malfunction Check Station Battery Bus Ovedoad System Not in Auto Mode Green Green Green Red * Green Amber Red * Red * Red * Red * Red * Section 16253-11 1-382-636/03-04 2. A full color, high resolution, Human Machine Interface (HMI) panel shall be provided which allows the operator to monitor and control the on site power system. The HMI shall have a minimum viewing area of 100 square inches. The components shown on the HMI shall all be designated as shown on the drawings. The HMI shall include the following screens and/or functions: a. Screens shall be configured in a typical WindowsTM format, with a pop-up menu in the lower left corner of the screen providing access to vadous screens. There shall not be a close program "button" in the upper right corner of any screen. (Closing the program shall be accomplished only through the menu structure.) There shall be a content sensitive help button on each screen. All screens shall be submitted for shop drawing approval. b. One Line Diagram Screen. The one-line diagram screen shall display a system message (to advise the operator, if needed, or optional control operations), and shall also show the system status by a combination of animation, changing screen color, text messages, and pop-up indicators. Conditions visible on the screen shall include: (1) Generator set(s), and bus configuration, with generator set, parallel breaker and bus energized/de-energized indication (red indicating energized, green indicating de-energized). (2) Generator set designation. Control, data, and performance summary screens shall be accessible through hot keys (links) located on or adjacent to the genset icon. (3) Generator set mode (run/off/auto) (4) Generator set status (normal/warning/shutdown/load demand stop/% load). Pop-up screens shall provide access to detailed information and service manuals from the one-line diagram screen. (5) Paralleling breaker status (open/closed/tripped) (6) Bus condition (energized or de-energized) (7) Access to other system control and monitoring functions through a menu button with pop-up option display (8) Help "button" to allow access to information concerning the specific screen viewed, or concerning current system status. 3. System Control. The system control screen shall provide the operator with the ability to enable or disable load demand operation; initiate test (with or without load); control the shutdown sequence for the generator sets in the load demand mode; set the load demand time delays; set the load demand operation set points; and display and modify the automatic load add and shed sequence. 4. Genset Control. The genset control screen shall be a popup control screen to allow the operator to manually start and stop the genset, and manually open and close the genset paralleling breaker. It shall also display generator set status and percent load. Genset Data Display. The genset data display shall provide the operator with information on the status and condition on the generator set. It shall include all data displayed at the local generator set control panel, and as a minimum shall include: engine rpm, oil pressure, coolant temperature, DC voltage, engine hours, genset MW hours, number of starts, line to line and line to neutral voltage on all phases, bus line to line and line to neutral voltage on all phases, genset and bus frequency, load current, power factor, kVAR and kw, local control switch status, and genset status. It shall also provide display of all active faults in the local generator set control The screen shall include a trend chart function that allows the operator to add any monitored data point to a scrolling screen to develop an active graphical display of conditions on that Section 16253-12 6. Genset Status Summary. The genset status summary shall provide an analog and graphical display of cdtical generator set operating parameters. The screen shall include generator set state display (stopped, time delay start, idle speed state, rated volts/hz, synchronizing, load share, or load govern); analog AC metering for generator set, including 3-phase AC volts and current, frequency, kW, and power factor; and 3-phase AC bus voltage and frequency. The screen shall also include a trend chart function that allows the operator to add any function or value on to the trend chart to provide an active display of the condition of the system. 7. Load Control. The load control screen shall provide an analog display of system load as a percent of available capacity of the generator sets that are operating in parallel on the bus. The screen shall also provide an alphanumeric display of this data. It shall also display the name, status and pdority of each load block (whether on or off), and the total load of that block. The screen shall allow the operator to manually add and shed loads in any sequence desired. 8. Trending. The HMI shall be capable of providing real time trend charts for any monitored value in the system, with up to 8 monitored points at any time. Historical trend charts using a data log function in the control shall also be provided. Historical charts shall be configurable for functions displayed, and for the time frame displayed, and shall allow comparison of historical.data from multiple time periods simultaneously. 9. Alarms. Any alarm on any generator set or in the system shall result in a pop-up screen display that describes the equipment where the fault has occurred, and the name of the fault. The screen shall allow the operator to attempt to reset the fault from the HMI. It shall also offer direct access to manuals. 10. Service Information. The service information pop-up screen shall include the name, address, and phone number for the local service point for the equipment. 11. Service Manuals. The HMI shall include the ability to display the entire content of all operating and service manuals for the entire system, including generator sets (engine, alternator and control system), paralleling controls, master controls, and transfer control equipment. This requirement is in addition to the hard copy manuals required elsewhere in this specification. 12. Transfer Controls. A transfer control screen shall be provided for each transfer breaker pair in the system. The transfer control screens shall provide status information on the condition of the normal service and generator service at each device (service available), which source is connected to the load, as well as transfer control status. Information to be provided shall include: a. Indication "lamps" for common alarm, not in auto, testJexercise mode, load shed, transfer inhibit, retransfer inhibit, fail to close, fail to disconnect. b. AC data at the transfer pair, including line to line and line to neutral AC Volts for all phases of both sources, frequency of both sources, load current, power fac{or, kW, and kVA for the load. c. Test "pushbutton~ and fault reset "pushbutton." d. The screen shall also display status of all active time delays and all active faults. 13. Bid shall include a minimum of five additional screens similar in complexity to those descdbed above. 14. The following data shall be transmitted from the master controller PLC to the OWNER's existing SCADA System via the Allen Bradley SLC 5/04 PLC in the new Service EntranCe Switchgear utilizing MOdbus Plus communication protocol and a serial link (RS-485) (Assumes a Modicon PLC): voltage on each phase, current on each phase, frequency, power factor, KVAR and kW for each generator as well as for the paralleling switchgear buss. Generator and breaker status conditions as indicated in Part 2.03 above shall also be sent to the OWNER's existing SCADA system over this link. See the I/O listing in Section 16990 for additional information on the signals to be monitored from the OWNER's existing SCADA system. I/O addressing for the signals noted shall Section 16253-13 ~-382-~3~o3-o4 ~ be provided to the System Integrator specified in Section 16940. Provide PLC cards and accessories as required for monitoring these signals and this communication link. B. ' Inter6al Control Components. The'following internal controls shall 'b~'pr0vided within the master control section: 1. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for interface with HMI, to provide load demand, load pick-up, and load shed functions as well as to interface with the OWNER's existing SCADA system. The PLC shall be a Modicon Quantum or Allen Bradley SLC 5/04. Provide a terminating connector and lightning arrestor for the Modbus Plus trunk cable as manufactured by Modicon, Model Nos. AS-MBKT-185 and 490 NAC 72100 respectively. The supplier shall document and annotate the programs, update them as rec~ired after startup, and then turn the programs, including all passwords for protection, over to the OWNER in the form of compact disks; two copies are required. The supplier shall provide a commercially available PLC programming and documentation software package for the PLC provided. The supplier shall also provide HMI panel graphic programming software and passwords. Provide interconnect cables as required to allow OWNER to access PLC and HMI panel programs from their existing laptop computer. 2. Load pick-up output contacts, rated 10 A at 600 VAC (3 contacts per level). Provide direct control for all feeder breakers in the service entrance switchgear specified in Section 16344 and shown on the drawings (14 total). 3. Load shed output contacts, rated 10 A at 600 VAC (3 contacts per level). Provide direct control for all feeder breakers in the service entrance switchgear specified in Section 16344 and shown on the drawings (14 total). 4. Digital Transducer(s), PT's, and CT's and other equipmenl required to provide bus condition information to the PLC. 5. The PLC shall include eight spare digital inputs (dry contacts) for monitoring MCC power failure, generator radiator fan running (3), generator radiator fan failed (3), and TVSS failure from equipment provided by others. A redundant 24 VDC control power supply shall be provided for the Master Control System including batteries, rack, and charger. These components shall all be mounted with in the master control panel. This panel shall accept signals from the following devices for control of the Utility and Generator main breakers (the Utility ant Generator main breakers are specified in Section 16344-5kV Metal-Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear): 1. Utility and generator mains protective relays as indicated above, 2. PTs on the utility side of the utility main breaker. 3. PTs on the load side of the utility main breaker. 4. CTs on the utility side of the utility main breaker. 5. Tie breaker position (opened and closed). 6. Utility main breaker position (opened and closed). 7. Utility main breaker tripped, 8. PTs on the load side of the generator main breaker. 9. CTs on the load side of the generator main breaker. 10. Generator main breaker position (opened and closed). 11. Generator main breaker tdpped. This panel shall provide the following signals for control of the utility and generator main breakers (breakers are located in the Service Entrance Switchgear): Open and close for each main breaker. Section 16253-14 Provide all other components required, such as properly sized current transformers, transducers, terminal blocks, etc., for proper and reliable system operation. 2.05 G. It shall be the responsibility of this manufacturer to coordinate with the manufacturer of the medium voltage switchgear specified in Section 16344 - 5KV Metal Clad Circuit Breaker Service Entrance Switchgear regarding the types of signals to be provided from each of the devices noted above. OPERATION A. B. Loss of Normal Power: 1. The system shall be given a signal to start by receipt of a start signal from the power transfer control(s) (Master PLC) or other remote device: On receipt of this signal, all generator sets shall automatically and independently start, accelerate to rated frequency and build up to rated voltage. The first start system shall monitor this process, and on finding a generator set at 90% of rated voltage and frequency, will automatically disable all other units from closing to the bus, and shall close the ready unit to the bus. At this time the utility main breaker is opened, non-essential loads are shed, and the generator main bus breaker connects generator sets to the system bus. 2. The pdority (load add) controls shall prevent overloading of the system bus by providing control signals to delay operation of designated system loads until sufficient generating capacity is available on the bus, or until the priodty overdde switch on the HMI is actuated. There are four double-ended unit substations (USS Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4) and two influent pump feeders in the system that shall be shed and added in the following priority (highest to lowest): Pdority 1 - USS No. I (This load shall not be shed except in an emergency); Pdodty 2 - Raw Sewage Pumps, 1V, 1C, 2V, 2C; Priority 3 ~ USS No. 2 Right end/USS 3 Right end; Pdodty No. 4 - USS No. 2 Left end/USS 3 Left end; Priodty 5 - USS No. 4 Left end; and Pdority 6 - USS No. 4 Right end. 3. After the first generator is closed to bus, control of the remaining units shall be switched to the synchronizer in each generator paralleling control, which causes the generator set to synchronize with' the system bus, and then close to it at the proper time. 4. As each generator closes to the bus, the unit shall assume it's proportional share of the total load on the bus, and the control system will automatically add loads to the generator bus by closing feeder breakers. Failure of a Unit to Start or Synchronize: 1. If a unit fails to start after the ovemrank time delay (in the generator set control) has expired, the unit shall be shut down, and an alarm shall sound. The priority control shall prevent the lowest pdodty loads from being added to the system with or without manual intervention. The pdority override controls on the HMI may be used by an operator to manually add Iow priodty loads to the bus, if it is determined that generator capacity is available to serve the loads. Bus ovedoad monitoring Shall protect the first priority loads in the event that the bus is inadvertently overloaded due to operator error. 2. If a unit fails to synchronize, after a preset time delay, an alarm shall sound, but the unit shall continue to attempt to synchronize until signaled to stop by manual operation of the control switches on the generator set. Bus Overload: 1. If a bus overload occurs for any reason, a load shed signal shall be generated to initiate load shedding in the system~ 2. If the bus does not return to proper frequency within a predetermined pedod of time (adjustable via the HMI), additional load shed signals shall be generated until the generator set bus returns to normal frequency. Section 16253-15 3. Loads that are shed due to overload shall require manual reset via the HMI. Load Demand Mode: 1. When the system is running in the emergency mode with the "loa(~ demand~ switch on the HMI in the "on" position, controls shall continuously monitor the total load on the bus.. If the total load on the bus falls below preset limits for a period of 15 minutes, the controller shall automatically shut down generator sets in an operator predetermined order, until the minimum number of generators required to operate the load remain on the bus. The purpose of this function is to allow the generator Sets to operate closer to their rated capacity, thereby decreasing fuel consumption, and reducing wear on the system. 2. On sensing that the available bus capacity is being approached, the standby units shall automatically be restarted (in the reverse order of which they were shut down) and paralleled with the bus to assume their proportional share of system load. E. Return of Normal Power 1. When all of the system start signals are removed from the generator sets, the system shall begin a retransfer process in either an open or closed transition mode, as selected by the operator. 2. If running in the closed transition mode, the system shall synchronize the generator bus to the utility source, close the utility breaker, ramp down load on the generator breaker to a minimum value, then open the generator bus breaker. 3. If running in the open transition mode, the system shall sequentially transfer back to the utility by opening each generator bus breaker, then closing utility breaker at an operator-programmed time period later. 4. When all loads have been transferred back to the utility, the generator set paralleling breakers shall all open, and the generator sets shall operate at no load for a cooldown pedod. When the cooldown pedo(~ has been completed, the generator sets shall shut down. If a system start signal is received dudng the cooldow~ period, one generator set shall immediately close to the system bus and all other units shall synchronize to it, as described in "Loss of Normal Power" above. 6. Test With Load Mode: a. The system shall allow the generator sets to be tested by transfer Df the system loads to the generator sets. Systems loads shall transfer in either an open or closed transition mode, as determined by the setup of the control system for standby operation. b. Sequence of operation in this mode shall be similar to that described for a power failure condition. c. When the system is operating in the closed transition mode, it shall always transfer between "good" sources without a power interruption to the load. 7. Generator Set Exercise (Test) Without Load Mode: The system shall allow testing of the generator sets at no load. In this operation mode the generator sets shall start, build up to rated speed and voltage, synchronize and close to the generator bus, but system - loads shall not automatically transfer to the generator system. F. The switchgear shall be capable of operating with the service entrance switchgear tie breaker open and half the service entrance switchgear buss being fed from the generator(s) and the other half from the Utility. Section 16253-16 1-382-636/03-04 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 OTHER REQUIREMENTS Factory Testing. The system manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test on the paralleling system (including generator sets, paralleling controls, and power switchgear) prior to shipping from the factory. The test shall be witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER (three personnel minimum). The manufacturer shall notify the OWNER and ENGINEER three (3) weeks pdor to the test date. A certified test report shall be provided, and permanently retained by the system manufacturer 3.02 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The manufacturer of the paralleling equipment shall maintain service parts inventory at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The paralleling system, including generator sets and paralleling equipment, shall be serviced by a single local service organization that is trained and factory certified in both generator set and paralleling equipment service, The technicians serving the site shall be specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer in the diagnosis and repair of the synchronizing, paralleling, and Icad sharing equipment provided. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records for the paralleling equipment for at least 20 years. 3.03 SERVICE AND TESTING A. Pdor to making electrical connections, CONTRACTOR shall have a factory-trained service technician meet at the job site to go over the installation to preclude any installation and start-up problems. Once the system is connected, three simulated outages and an 8-hour run period on the actual facility shall also be provided. Testing of all interlocks, controls, indicators, etc., shall be provided during this run period. CONTRACTOR shall notify and have WPS personnel present during this testing: This testing shall occur simultaneously with testing of the service entrance switchgear. B. CONTRACTOR shall provide a commissioning report to OWNER and ENGINEER verifying that all interlocks, controls, indicators, etc. have been tested and are functionally operational. 3.04 TRAINING COURSES A. Operator (Maintenance Staff) Training: Course length minimum 24 hours. Training shall utilize equipment specified herein following installation and field testing. (Two 8-hour sessions and two 4~hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals.) Maintenance training for four operators. Course length minimum 8 hours. Two 4-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals. Section 16253-17 C. Manufacturer's training shall be directed to system and equipment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas. 3.05 SPARE PARTS A. Provide a complete set of replacement fuses for the system. B. Provide 10 spare lamps for all indicating lights. C. Provide recommended spare parts list. END OF SECTION Section 16253-18 1 ~382-636/03-04 SECTION 16344 5KV METAL-CLAD CIRCUIT BREAKER SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR .,ii II PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This section includes medium voltage metal-clad circuit breaker switchgear and its associated auxiliary equipment for the service entrance switchgear lineup. The service entrance equipment shall be indoor switchgear with horizontal drawout, vacuum circuit breakers. Related Sections and Divisions: 1. Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 2. The following listing of related sections is provided for the convenience of CONTRACTOR and is not necessarily all-inclusive. Other sections of the specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of this work. All other sections of Division 16. 1.02 REFERENCES Comply with requirements of latest revisions of applicable industry standards, specifically including the following: 1. ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 - Metal-Clad Switchgear. 2. ANSI/IEEE C37.04 - Rating Structure for High Voltage Circuit Breakers. 3. ANSI C37.06. - Preferred Ratings for High Voltage Circuit Breakers. 4. ANSI C37.1 - Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electrical Power Apparatus. 5. ANSI/IEEE C37.90 - Relays and Relay Systems. 6. ANSI C37.11 - Power Circuit Breakers. 7. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements for Electrical Indicating Instruments. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical equipment, cable and wire products of the types and ratings necessary, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. B. Installer. A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to construction and installation of electrical equipment, cable, wire and connectors. UL Labels: All electrical equipment and material shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, except where UL does not include the equipment in their listing procedures. The switchgear shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, UL 1670. Section 16344-1 E. NEMA/ANSI Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association, American National Standards Institute and other Standards pertaining to material, construction and testing, where applicable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. All transmittals shall be identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number. Shop Drawings shall include the following: 1. General arrangement drawing showing dimensioned elevation and floor plan, side views, foundation details and one-line diagram 2. Panel arrangement drawing showing layout of devices on the panel doors 3. Three line diagrams 4. AC and DC Schematics 5. Nameplate engraving drawings 6. Bill of material O&M manuals for the entire switchgear shall be submitted on compact disk (CD) as well as hardbound copies as sPecified in Section 01300 - Submittals. A one-line and operating description for the service entrance switchgear shall be Provided. The operating description shall include the following modes of operation at a minimum. This information shall be submitted to the OWNER, ENGINEER, and WPS for review and approval. 1. Maintenance testing. 2. Power outages. . 3. Requested interruptions. .05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in convenient Shipping groups. Shipping groups shall not exceed 15 ft. in length. : Bi. Circuit breakers shall be shiPPed inside their respeCtive cellS. C. Accessories cabinet and busbar splice matedal for shipping splits shall be shipped attached to the switchgear to prevent loss dudng shipment. D. CONTRACTOR shall stove the equipment so that condensation will not form in the , equipment · E. CONTRACTOR shall install temporarY'heatars, if necessarY, to prevent ~ condensation during storage. CONTRACTOR shall handle and move the switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Section ~16344-2 1-382~636/03-04 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable circuit breaker manufacturers include: ABB, Cutler-Hammer, and Siemens. 2.02 RATINGS A. System Configuration: Switchgear suitable for application in 3-phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz, 4,160 volt, grounded-neutral system. B. Electrical Ratings: 1. Nominal System Voltage, kV: 4.16 2. Maximum Design Voltage, kV: 4.76 3. Basic Impulse Level (BIL), kV: 60 4. Nominal Interrupting Capacity- Class: 250MVA 5. Main-Bus Continuous Current: 1200 A. 6. Circuit Breaker Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Voltage, kA: 29 at Maximum Design 7. Circuit Breaker Closing and Latching Capability (Momentary), kA: 97 8. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Time: 5 cycles maximum 2.03 SWITCHGEAR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION A. The switchgear enclosure shall be of metalclad construction as described in ANSI standards. The switchgear shall be factory assembled into convenient shipping groups and tested. The switchgear shall be of a coordinated design so that shipping groups are easily connected together at the site into a continuous line-up. Switchgear shall be front and rear aligned. Necessary shipping split connecting materials shall be furnished and shall be attached to the switchgear in the approximate locations where they will be needed, The switchgear assembly shall consist of one or more vertical sections, each of which shall havea main bus compartment and two vertically stacked equipment cells. The cells shall be arranged for circuit breakers or auxiliary devices or shall be blank as indicated in the detailed specification. Each main bus compartment shall contain copper bus bars (silver plated at electrical connection points) 3 phase, 3 wire, fully insulated with fluidized bed epoxy flame-retardant and track-resistant coating (sleeve type insulation is not permitted), with joints covered with preformed PVC boots held together with nylon hardware for easy installation and removal during servicing. The bus supports between units shall be flame-retardant, track-resistant, glass polyester. The switchgear shall be constructed so that all buses, bus supports, and connections shall withstand stresses that would be produced by currents equal to the momentary ratings of the circuit breakers. The bus shall be braced to withstand fault currents equal to the close and latch rating of the breakers. The temperature dse of the bus and connections shall be in accordance with ANSI standards and documented by Section 16344-3 design tests. Main bus shall have provisions for future expansion. Each bus segment shall be individually hipot tested prior to assembly. Taped joints are not permitted except in unusual joint configurations. The ground bus shall be bare silver-plated copper with a minimum size of 1/4 by 2 inches and shall extend the full length of switchgear. Provide lugs for ground conductors as shown on the drawings. Provide neutral landing lugs for neutral conductors as shown on the drawings. Neutral landing lugs shall be bonded to the ground buss. 'E~h circuit breaker and potentiai transfor~ner compartment shall contain a manually-operated racking mechanism, automatic shutters, and safety interlocks. Racking mechanism for circuit breakers shall have 3 distinct positions: connected, test, and disconnected. Each circuit breaker cell shall also include: 1. Hinged front panel. 2. Primary and secondary disconnecting devices. 3. Control circuit cutout device. 4. IVecessary terminal blocks, control wiring, blocks, and busses. 5. Engraved nameplates. 6. Manual safety lever to retain circuit breaker in withdrawn position. 7. Side wall mounted sliding type secondary disconnects to facilitate inspection of mating of contact from the front and easy accessibility for trouble-shooting. Secondary disconnects using plug and socket arrangement with umbilical cord, as well as disconnects not visible for inspection, are not permitted. 8. Provisions shall be made for closed door racking with a racking handle. Mechanical position indication shall be visible for all three positions with the door closed. 9. Racking mechanism shall be simple to install and operate. Racking mechanism using a chain to transmit motion from one side to the other side is not permitted. Provisions for installing up to three padlocks shall be integral with the racking mechanism to insure positive position locking of the circuit breaker during maintenance. 10. Each auxiliary ceil shall include the following: a. Hinged front panel, suitable for relays and instruments. b. Necessary terminal blocks, control wiring, blocks, and busses. c. Engraved nameplates. d: Provisions shall be made for Closed door racking of potential transformer cells with a racking handle. Mechanical position indication shall be visible for two positions with the door. closed. 11. It shall be possible to test the circuit breakers in the "Test" position inside the cell. Switchgear construction shall facilitate floor roll-out of circuit breakers installed in the lower cells. Guide channels shall be provided to facilitate proper circuit breaker roll-in with as much as 15° offset dudng installation. Each vertical section shall be approximately 36 inches wide by 94 inches deep by 95 inches high. The framework and the panels shall be chemically cleaned, hot phosphate treated, rinsed and oven-dried and shall be given an electrostatically applied coat of ANSI 61 polyester urethane paint. Section 16344-4 1~382-636/03-04 I. Circuit breaker cell and auxiliary coil interiors shall be painted white for better visibility and ease of maintenance. J. The enclosure shall be constructed of belted sheet steel material. Minimum sheet metal thickness shall be 11 gauge steel on all exterior surfaces. K. Cables shall enter from above or below as required by the CONTRACTOR. Signs and labeling regarding potential electric arc flash hazards shall be provided on the switchgear. Signs and labeling shall follow the guidelines listed in ANSI Z535.4-1998. M. CONTRACTOR shall refer to the bid pages for Bid Alternative No. 1 prico to provide all welded construction for the switchgear enclosure: 2.04 COMPONENTS Instrument Transformers: Comply with ANSI/IEEE C57.13 and ANSI/IEEE C37.20.0. 1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, Y, Z, and ZZ accuracy. Primary and secondary of each potential transformer shall be fused. 2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class as per ANSI, suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments. All CT installations shall include shorting type terminal blocks. Multifunction Protective Relaying/Metering: Microprocessor-based 3-phase relays shall be UL listed or UL-recognized. Protective relays shall be identical to those provided with the paralleling switchgear and be provided as follows: 1. Main and Tie Circuit Breakers (Utility and Generator): The relays shall be Basler BE1-951, Schweitzer 351A or ABB DPU2000R. 2. Feeder Protection - Motor Protection: The relay shall be a Basler BE1 -MMS100, Schweitzer SEL-701, or ABB REM543. 3. Feeder Protection - Transformer Protection: The transformer protection relay shall be a Basler BE1-951, Schweitzer 351A, or ABB DPU2000R. C. Provision for Future Devicos: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections. Double-ended AC control power shall be furnished with intemally mounted dry-type transformers, including primary and secondary fuses, The transformer primaries shall be connected to the line side of the utility and generator main breakers. A suitable automatic transfer scheme shall be provided, to effect a secondary load transfer, should one incoming supply fail, on to the healthy transformer. AC power shall be used for all functions excopt breaker closing and trip circuits. DC tdp and closing control power shall be provided by a battery system mounted external to switchgear in the switchgear room as follows: 1. System Requirements: Battery with 24 cells and 100 ampere-hour minimum capacity based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25°C with electrolyte at normal level and minimum ambient temperature of 13°C. Cycle battery before Section 16344-5 shipment to guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded. Battery: NICAD type in sealed, clear plastic containers, complete with electrolyte, fully charged, and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Each container shall weigh not more than 70 pounds and contain not more than three calls. Batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging from minus 18° to 25°C. Current output shall not vary more than 0.8% for each degree below 25°C down to minus 8°C. Rack: Provide a two-step rack that fits in available space indicated. Batteries shall be provided with necessary electrical connections between cells and between rows of cells and include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. Accessories: Include the following: a. Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales. b. Hydrometer syringes. c. Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance. d. Wall-mounted, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items. e. Set of cell numerals. Charger shall be a static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic regulation and provisions for manual and automatic adjustment of the charging rate. Unit shall automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5% from no load to rated charger output current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10% and input-frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger shall include the following: a. DC ammeter. b. DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5% at full-charge voltage; shall operate with toggle switch to select between battery and charger voltages. c. Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights shall be provided to indicate circuit ground, connected in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junction connected to ground by normally open push-button contact. d. Capacity shall be sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V per cell, and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell. e. Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch shall provide for transferring to higher charging rate. Charger shall operate automatically after switch operation until manually reset. f. AC power supply shall be 120V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10% variation in voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for any interval, charger shall automatically resume charging battery. Charger shall regulate rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from opening. g. Protective Features shall include a current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply to protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals. h. Electrical Filtering shall reduce charger audible noise to less than 26 dB. i. Battery charger failure shall be monitored through the switchgear power monitoring and control system. Section 16344-6 2.05 j. Equipment shall be identical to that specified in specification Section16253, Part2.01.E. CONTRACTOR is responsible for this coordination. Fo Terminal Blocks, Control Wiring, and Control Lugs: Factory installed, complete with bundling and protection where necessary, and complying with the following: 1. Terminal blocks shall be of molded Bakelite, rated 600 volts, 30A complete with washer head screws. Barriers between terminals shall be sufficient height that screws and lugs do not project above the barriers. Terminal density shall not be greater than 12 terminals per 8 inches. 2. Extra-flexible conductors for wires across hinges and for interconnections between shipping units. Control and secondary wiring shall be at least No. 14AWG except that the CT conductors shall be No. 12 AWG. All switchgear secondary wire shall be type SIS, rated 600 volt, 90°0, furnished with wire markers at each termination. Wires shall terminate on terminal blocks with marker strips numbered in agreement with detailed connection diagrams. 3. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for the duty required. 4. All internal control wiring terminations shall be made with tin-plated preinsulated ring-type termination lugs. G. All control components shall be suitably and permanently labeled as specified in Section 16195-Electrical Identification. VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Vacuum Circuit Breakers: Cimuit breakers provided with the service entrance switchgear shall be identical (manufacturer, model number, trip unit, protective relaying, etc.) to those provided in the paralleling switchgear specified in Section 16253 - Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for this coordination at bid time as well as when placing orders for this equipment.) Circuit breakers shall be drawout mounted units using three individual, vacuum interrupters and including the following features: 1. Circuit-Breakers shall operate at rated voltage to interrupt fault current within its rating within five cyCles of tdp initiation. 2. Contact-Wear Indicator shall be readily accessible to field maintenance personnel. Contract wear gap indicator for each vacuum interrupter shall require no tools to indicate available contact life and shall be fully visible when the breaker is removed from the cell. 3. Spare Auxiliary Contacts: Eight minimum (four A and four B). Eight additional contacts(four A and four B) shall be provided on the cell wall. 4. Operating Mechanism shall be an electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operated. a. Closing Speed of Moving Contacts shall be independent of both control and operator. b. Design of mechanism shall permit manual charging of mechanism. (1) Control Power: 48VDC for both dosing and tripping. (2) The operating mechanism shall be front accessible so that it is not necessary to work under the breaker or tip it over in order to perform maintenance. (3) The operating mechanism shall be field adjustable for the following: (a) Stroke (one adjustment per phase) Section 16344,7 1-382-636/03-04 (b) One for manual spring charging (c) One for electrical spring charging (d) One for open latch bite (e) One for close latch bite (4) All adjustments shall be independent so that change of one adjustment does not require modification of another setting. (5) A single visual check such as contact erosion indicator, shall be sufficient to verify both spring pressure and contact wear. This simple visual indicator shall be identical across all circuit breaker ratings. Confusing maintenance procedures such as separate contact erosion and wipe measurements will not be permitted. c. Circuit-Breaker Tdpping Provisions: Shunt tdp coil for tdpping with protec{ive relays, lockout relays, control switch or manual command signal from the relay. Circuit breaker shall also include mechanical push button for manual tripping. d. Circuit Breaker Closing Provisions: Close (spring release) coil for closing by electrical signal from control circuitry, control switch or manual command signal from the relay. Circuit breaker shall also include mechanical push button for manual closing. e. Current transfer path from the interrupter moving stem to the circuit breaker pole-mounted finger cluster shall not use brush, roller or wiping contacts. Only permanently bolted current transfer path such as flexible copper laminations with long mechanical life (typically 30,000 operations) will be permitted. Braided cable will not be permitted. Vacuum interrupters and circuit breaker shall be manufactured and warranted by the same manufacturer. Vacuum interrupter design shall limit the chopping currents to below 5 amperes to obviate the need for surge protection against switching transients during fault interruption. Each circuit shall contain one vacuum interrupter per phase and shall be mounted on glass polyester supports. Circuit breakers shall be floor roll out type obviating the need for lift truck etc,. when installed in the lower cells of the switchgear. In order to minimize the spare circuit breaker inventory, design shall prevent lower ' rated circuit breakers from being installed in higher rated cells but shall allow higher rated circuit breakers to be installed in lower rated cells. D. The switchgear manufacturer shall cycle each breaker through 300 mechanical on- off operations as a part of routine production tests. A three phase watt transducer with 4-20mA output shall be provided for each feeder breaker in the switchgear lineup. Watt transducers shall have an accuracy of +0.5% of full scale. The output of each transducer shall be wired to the PLC in this switchgear for monitoring kilowatts at the SCADA system. 2.06 GENERATOR PARALLELING CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS A. The Utility and Generator Main Breakers and all feeder breakers shall each include four 52/A contacts, four 52/B contacts, and one breaker tripped contact for inte[face Section 16344-8 2.07 with the paralleling control system specified in Section 16253 - Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. Provide ten additional cell-mounted contacts both MOC and TOC type for external use. These contacts are in addition to the spare contacts specified elsewhere. The Utility and Generator Main Breakers and all feeder breakers shall also accept signals from the paralleling control system to open and close these breakers. The Tie Breaker shall include four 52/A contacts, four 52/B contacts, and one breaker tripped contact for interface with the paralleling control system specified in Section 16253-Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. Provide ten additional cell- mounted contacts both MOC and TOC type for external use. The Utility Company,s protective relays shall each include one spare trip contact for interface with the paralleling control system specified in Section 16253-Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. The instrument transformers listed below shall be appropriately rated for the additional burden added to the secondary circuit by the paralleling control system. Signals from each of these devices shall be sent to the paralleling control system: 1. Utility Main Breaker Utility-side PTs 2. Utility Main Breaker Load-side PTs 3. Utility Main Breaker Utility-side CTs 4. Generator Main Breaker Load-side PTs 5. Generator Main Breaker Load-side CTs The exact addition burden shall be coordinated with the paralleling control system manufacturer. All of the above signals shall be landed on terminal strips to facilitate wiring of these signals to the paralleling control system specified in Section 16253-Medium Voltage Paralleling Equipment. It shall be the responsibility of this manufacturer to coordinate with the manufacturer of the Paralleling Control System regarding the types of signals to be provided from each of the devices noted above. SCADAINTERFACE A. Provide an Allen Bradley SLC 5/04 (no equal) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for collecting and transmitting the following data to the OWNER's existing SCADA System: Voltage on each phase, current on each phase, frequency, power factor, KVAR, instantaneous kW, total kW, peak demand (resetable) breaker opened, breaker closed, and breaker tripped for the Utility, Tie and Generator Main Breakers as well as each feeder breaker in the switchgear lineup. The PLC shall include spare I/O points for four future feeder breakers. Bo In addition to the I/O cards required to monitor the signals noted above, the PLC shall include a ProSoft Technology, Inc. Modbus Plus communicetion module, model No. 3300-MBP, for communication (RS-485) to the PLC in the paralleling switchgear. Provide a terminating connector and lightning arrestor for the Modbus Plus trunk cable as manufactured by Modicon, Model Nos. AS-MBKT-185 and 490 NAC 72100, respectively. Space shall be provided in the PLC compartment for Section 16344-9 an Allen Bradley 1771-AF1 fiber optic converter module and a 12-port fiber optic patch panel to be provided by others. C. Devices for monitoring all of the signals noted above shall be provided and wired to the PLC. See the I/O listing in Section 16990 for additional information on the signals to be monitored from the OWNER's existing SCADA system. Programming of the PLC shall be by the System Integrator specified in Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation. This manufacturer shall provide wiring diagrams to the System Integrator indicating which input each of the above signals is wired to. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Manual racking crank. B. Manual spnng charging lever. C. Spare Fuses: Six, of each type and rating of fuse used. Include Spares for voltage transformer fuses, and control power fuses. Circuit-Breaker Test Cabinet: Separately mounted and containing push buttons for circuit-breaker closing and tripping, control relay, fuses, and secondary coupler with cable approximately 9 feet long. Test cabinet shall be powered from the switchgear battery system E. Spare Indicating Lamps: Ten of each type installed. F. Touchup Paint: One-half pint of paint matching enclosure finish. G. Wheeled lift truck with circuit breaker/instrument transformer lifting device. Lift truck shall include nameplate indicating lifting capacity. H. Electric recking motor assembly. · PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Factory Testing. The manufacturer shall perform a complete operational test pdor to shipping. The test shall be witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER (three personnel minimum). The manufacturer shall notify the OWNER and ENGINEER three (3) weeks prior to the test date. 3102 DEMONSTRATION Switchgear manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorized service representative to train OWNER's maintenance personnel in the following: 1. Procedures and schedules related to startup, operation and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Startup and testing shall occur simultaneously with startup and testing of the generators and paralleling switchgear. SeCtion 16344-10 1-382-636/03-04 Co 2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. 3. Schedule training with OWNER with at least three week's advance notice. 4. CONTRACTOR shall notify and have WPS personnel present dudng this startup and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide a commissioning report to OWNER and ENGINEER verifying that all interlocks, controls, indicators, etc.,, have been tested and are functionally operational: Maintenance training for four operators. Course length minimum 8 hours. Two 4-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals. Operator Training: Course length minimum 8 hours. Training shall utilize equipment specified herein following installation and field testing. (Two 4-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the WWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals.) 3.03 FIELD SERVICE A. Switchgear manufacturer's own field service office shall be located not more than 200 miles from the installation site. END OF SECTION Section 16344-11 SECTION 16412 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Service entrance devices (i.e., MCC-13). B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45. B. NFPA 70, and 75. C. UL 1449, most recent issue. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of transient voltage surge suppressors. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products of the types and ratings whose products have been ~n satisfactor7 use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical wiring installation work similar to that in this project. C. Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical w~ring devices, material and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide TVSS devices which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories. E. NECA Standard: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Contractor's Association's "Standard of Installation". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, widng diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. Test reports certified by the manufacturer shall be provided to ENGINEER upon request for each model submitted. Section 16412-1 1-382-636/03-04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for high energy transient voltage (service entrance panels) surge suppressors. The specified surge protective device shall provide effective energy surge diversion for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 location Category C3 (service entrance). Testing shall be per ANSI/IEEE C62.45 - 1992 using ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 Panel waveforms and amplitudes. The system individual units shall be UL listed under UL1449 Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the TVSS. C. Operating Temperature: Operating temperature range shall be -40 to +55°C (-40 to 131°F). D. Storage Temperature: Storage temperature range shall be -40 to +85°C. E. Relative Humidity: Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 0% to 95% noncondensing relative humidity. F. Operating Altitude: The system shall be capable of operation up to an altitude of 13,000 feet above sea level. G. Design Life: >15 years. H. Operating Voltage: Maximum continuous operating voltage shall be no leSS than 115% of the nominal rated line voltage. I. POwer Frequency: The power frequency range shall be at 47 to 440 Hertz. J. All TVSS devices shall be MOV type. Noise filtedng capabilities shall be provided as an option for the devices specified herein. 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE DEVICES Ao The maximum surge current capacity per phase of the specified system based on the standard IEEE 8~20 microsecond waveform shall be at least 1 event at 160kA. The surge life (8/20) shall be at least 6kA for 10,000 occurrences. The transient suppression capability shall be bi-directional and suppress both positive and negative impulses. The suppressor shall be capable of interrupting a 65 kA, shOrt Circuit current delivered from the AC power line. The interrupt capability must be confirmed and documented by a recognized independent testing laboratory. The suppressor shall be designed so as to minimize the intemal surge Path impedance. Direct point-to-point internal wiring is inherently inductive and not acceptable. Connection to the power service shall be constructed as shown in the manufacturer's installation notes for best performance. Section 16412-2 The system shall be constructed using field replaceable plug-in modules; The module shall consist of multiple 40 mm metal oxide varistors. The status of each module shall be locally monitored with a red LED that will illuminate if the module protection is ?educed. Protector shall provide redundant protection within each phase module with two replaceable fuses per module. Red and green solid state LED indicators shall be provided on the hinged front cover to indicate protection status. An illuminated green LED indicates power is present at the protector on all phases, and an illuminated red LED shall indicate that one or more of the modules have reduced protection. Both front panel and internal LEDs are required to provide power and fault indications. Relay operation shall be in a fail safe operating mode, i.e., continuously energized so that power failure, reduced protection, or a break in the remote monitoring line will cause a fault indication at the remote monitor. Neon indicators are not permitted. Relay alarm contacts shall be provided for remote alarm monitoring capability of unit status. Normally open and normally closed contacts shall be provided with voltage and current limiting protection. The system shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall be activated when any one or more of the modules has a reduCed protection condition. A mute switch shall be provided for the audible alarm. A front panel built in surge counter shall be included to record the number of suppression events, A switch shall be provided for resetting the counter. A 14 gauge, NEMA Type 4, steel enclosure, with corrosion resistant hardware shall be provided for the unit. Service entrance devices shall be as manufactured by MCG, SF160M SedeS, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation and testing of the system shall be in full accordance with the manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions, and all national and local codes. Each device shall be installed in parallel with the protected equipment. No series connected protective elements shall be used. Each installed device shall be fed by a 3-pole, 30-amp circuit breaker in the protected panel. Units shall be installed as close as practical to the electrical panel. Low impedance cabling furnished by the manufacturer shall be utilized for service entrance and branch panel devices. D. Manufacturer shall provide protection modules and coordinated fuses under a no-cost lifetime replacement warranty. Section 16412-3 Manufacturer shall provide a lO-year warranty from the date of substantial completion to cover repair or replacement of the device. This warranty shall exclude plug-in modules and coordinated fuses, both of which shall carry a lifetime warranty. END OF SECTION Section 16412-4 - SECTION 16420 ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: I Utility company. 2. Secondary service characteristics. 3. Definitions. 4. Sequencing, scheduling. 5. Underground electrical service. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 UTILITY COMPANY A. The Utility Company is Wisconsin Public Service. 1.03 SECONDARY SERVICE CHARACTERISTICS A. The secondary service will be 4160 volt, 3 wire, 3 phase for power distribution, 277/480 volt, 4 wire, 3 phase for process equipment power and lighting, and 120/208 volt, 4 wire, 3 phase for miscellaneous power. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Service: As defined in the NEC, Article 100. B. Primary Voltage: Above 600 volts. C. Secondary Voltage: 600 volts and below. 1.05 SEQUENCING, SCHEDULING A. Provide electrical service system, except the Utility Company will provide: 1. Transformer. 2. Cable from terminal pole to transformer. B. Coordinate the electrical service with the Utility, and all Utility costs shall be included in the lump sum bid. An allowance of $20,000 shall be included in the lump sum bid to be adjusted at final payment in accordance with actual utility charges. 1.06 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Provide complete underground electrical service except for items furnished and installed by the Utility Company. Section 16420-1 Duct Lines: Rigid steel conduit, heavy wall seamless tubing with hot dipped galvanized coating. Duct Lines: PVC conduit, heavywall rigid, type 40 listed for underground encased applications. Duct Lines: Fiber conduit, for encased applications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Trench and backfill for duct lines and manholes in accordance with Division 2 - Site Work. END OF SECTION Section 16420'2 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMM~R~' Work Included: I Power system grounding. 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable pmvi~i0ns of Divisioh'l Shall govem work in this section. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member on separate grounding electrode. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and cold water plumbing systems. 1.03 SUBMI']-rALS A. Indicate location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductor. B, Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - pRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper bonded, 5/8-inch diameter, minimum length 10 feet. B. Conductor: Bare copper 4/0 AWG grounding grid conductor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at a point ahead of meter or service Shutoff valve. Section 16450-1 1-382-636/03-04 C. Ground system, transformer neutrals and equipment as required by code and local ordinances. D. Ail feeder neutrals shall be connected to neutral at only one point in the MCC or switchgear. Water system grounds and a minimum of three ground rods at 10-foot separations near service entrance shall be provided and ground wires must attach to point ahead of meter or service shut off valve. These shall be connected to ground bus by conductors sized to code requirements. All connections to ground rods shall be cadwelded. A ground test demonstration of passing code maximum resistance shall be provided. Ground fittings shall be O.Z. Co., Type BF, OF, LF, HG, Appleton, or equal. The above are minimum requirements. All grounding conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit with non-metallic hardware. F. Include ground for grounded receptacles, light fixtures, motors and equipment items. G. Flexible connections dO not qualify for ground. All flexible connectiOns must have separate green ground wire from motor base, lighting fixture, or equipment frame to conduit system. H. Provide a separate grounding conductor system for the grounding of all lighting standards, installed in the same conduit as the branch circuit Conductors. I. All conductor connections made below grade shall be Cadweld, or equal. J. Generator Building grounding shall be provided as shown on the drawings. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 ohms. CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a third party testing agency to test the grounding system. END OF SECTION Section 16450-2 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 16480' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Work Included: 1. Manual motor starters. 2. Magnetic motor starters. 3. Solid state starters. 4'; Motor Related Sections and Divisions: AppliCable provisions of' Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for industrial controls and systems. Bi NEMA AB 1 - Molded case circuit breakersl C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial control devices, controllers, and assemblies. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed switches. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. 1.03 SUBMITTALS NEMA PB 1.1 - Instruction for safe installation, operation and maintenance of panelboards rated 600 volts or less. A. Submit shoP drawings'and pr0duct dara in acCordance w th ProvisiOns of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. .0 AND N~ENANCE i 4 OpERATiON 'MAI DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of section 01300 - Submittals. B. inClUde spare parts data iistingl ' S°urc~ and cUrrent prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and interval~. Section 16480-1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HOLDING Store in a dean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapPing or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from did, water, construction debris, and traffic. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish. 1.06 SPARE PARTS A. The following spare pads shall be furnished with each motor control center: 1. One complete set of replacement fuses, control and current-limiting where used. 2. Twenty replacement lamps for push-to-test indicating lights. Provide lamp replacement tool. 3. One replacement relay for each type of auxiliary relay provided. 4. Replacement contacts, along with all related springs, bolts, and other materials necessary to completely rebuild one line contactor of each type furnished if more than one type is needed. B. All spare parts shall be suitably boxed or wrapped to prevent deterioration and shall be completely identified on the outside. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS A. Allen-Bradley. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the General Conditions. 2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS Integral Horsepower Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with manual reset overload relay, Iow voltage protection, green pilot light, NO and NC auxiliary contact, and toggle operator. Manual Motor Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with manually reset thermal overload unit, green pilot light, and toggle operator. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, without thermal overload unit, green pilot light, NO and NC auxiliary contact, and toggle operator. D. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type as shown on the drawings. Section 16480-2 2.03 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Each magnetic starter shall be equipped with a solid state overload relay, Allen Bradley SMP-1, or equal. B. Full Voltage Starting: Reversing or Nonreversing type as shown on the drawings. C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on drawings. Ovedoad relays shall have the following features: 1. Self-powered. 2. Up to 3:2:1 adjustments. 3. Visible tdp indicators. 4. Phase loss protection. 5. Low energy consumption. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6: 1. Enclosures in indoor, dry locations shall be NEMA 1. 2. Enclosures in indoor damp or wet locations shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. 3. Enclosures in outdoor locations shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. 4. EnClOSures below grade shall be NEMA 4X, stainless steel. 5. Starters and disconnect devices for motors shall be installed in common enclosures, combination type, with all accessories such as push-to-test pilot lights and H-O-A switches, mounted in the enclosure fronts. G. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with molded case circuit breakers. H. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts minimum, in addition to seal-in contact, or as necessary. I. Pushbuttons: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oil-tight, (30 mm). J. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oil-tight, (30 mm), push-to-test type. K. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; heavy-duty, oil-tight, (30 mm). L. Relays: NEMA ICS 2; with LED indicator. M. Control Power Transformers: 240/120 volt secondary. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with the auxiliary devices as necessary. Each magnetic starter operating at other than 120 volt single phase shall be equipped with a control transformer providing 120 volt secondary for control power. Transformer shall have fused primary connections and shall be sized per manufacturer's recommendations. Coils and pilot lights in all starters shall be 120 volts. O. Through-the-door overload reset push-buttons shall be provided for all magnetic starters installed in motor control centers and combination motor starters. Section 16480-3 2.04 SOLID STATE STARTERS Starters where called for shall be solid state soft start starters. These starters shall be constructed in motor control center type construction for location in the specified MCC as shown on the drawings. The starters shall be furnished with the following features: Output Stage Ambient Temperature Transportation and Storage Range Input Adjustments SCR Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV Rating) Transient Voltage Suppressor RC Snubber Network Hard Firing Gate Pulse Ovedoad Capacity 6 SCRs; full-wave in-line control. Operating range, 0 - 50°C at rated current. 35° to 65°C (-30° to 149°F). Initial step and voltage, 0 to 50%. Current limit, 75% to 350%. Acceleration time, 0 to 30 seconds. Deceleration time, 2 to 60 seconds. Tdp running current, 75% to 150%. Line voltage 208-480V: continuous. SCR rating 1400V. Integral MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) to protect against high-potential transient voltage spikes. To prevent false firing due to dv/dt characteriStics. A combination of high potential gate pulse and a rapid rise time to prevent SCR damage due to di/dt stress. Continuous, 115% full load capacity. One minute, 250%. Thirty seconds, 450%. Five seconds, 650%. Electronic FUse overload trip capacity acts as anelectmnic fuse, which replaces the i~- fuses. Should a fault occur, the unit will trip out in one-cycle or less. B. Provide the following trip features: 1. Overcurrent trip. 2. Phase Fail trip. 3. Current Imbalance trip. 4. Excessive starts per hour. 5. Stall and jam detection. 6. Undedoad protection. 7. Undervoltage protection. 8. Overvoltage protection. 9. Voltage unbalance. C. Provide an isolation contactor on the input of each starter. Provide an Allen Bradley converter module, Catalog No. 825-MCM (size as required) for each starter. Section 16480-4 D~: -i-~e starters shall have'ihe follOWi~ control switcl~s and intefl0ckS. 1. H-O-A switch, auto Sl~all start-stop from PLC (dry contact). 2. Provide Run, Fail, and In Auto feedback contacts (dry type) to PLC. 3. Provide local "Run" (Green), "Fail" (Red) indicating lights and ETM;' lights shall be push-to-test. 2.05 E. Solid State starters shall be Allen Bradley heavy-duty, Bulletin 150, SMC Dialog Plus, or equal; All nonpositive displacement equipment shall be furnished with Allen Bradley pump control modules. CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Molded Case Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic tdp in each pole, as per drawings. B. Motor Circuit Protector: NEMA AB 1; circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening I~ront cover with switch in "On" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. Handle Iockable in "Off" position. 2.06 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS Starters and disconnect devices for motors shall be installed in motor control canters, except where shown to be remote mounted at the motor location. Starters and disconnect devices shall be NEMA rated, sized according to application as specified. All starters and motor control cen[ere shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley, or equal. To assure proper coordination between Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation supplied eqmpment and the motor control centers, the MCC and NEMA Class IIC drawings shall be supplied as part of the Controls and Instrumentation package described in Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation. System Supplier described in Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation shall wire and test all MCCs for the functions described herein in their shop prior to shipment to the site. Auxiliary contacts shall be of quantity necessary for equipment functions. Facilities shall be provided for padlocking units in off positions. Recording running time meters, where Called for on the schedule, shall be 3 inches round, capable of reading up to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type, and flush door mounted, Engler Model lONG7, or equal. ETM shall be black with white numerals mounted no higher than 5 feet above floor. Motor Control Cen{er design shall be in accordance with latest applicable NEMA standards, shall have been tested to prove adequate mechanical and electrical capabilities, and all major components shall have been individually tested. Structures shall be totally enclosed dead front, free standing assemblies, 90 inches high and not less than 20 inches deep for front mounted units and not more than 20 inches deep for units mounted back-to-back. Section 16480-5 · F. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal buss with rating as specified, and vertical buss feeding unit compartments with a minimum rating of 300 amperes, or as necessary fo.r load and feeder breakers. All horizontal and vertical buss of all MCC sections shall be powered regardless of location of transfer switch, unless otherwise noted. All motor control centers shall include a ground buss. All buss shall be copper and braced to withstand short circuit currents as indicated. Structures shall contain a horizontal wire-way at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus and shall be readily accessible by removal of its cover plate. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference and safely accessible without disrupting service. G. A vertical wireway With a minimum of 28 square inches of cross sectional area shall be adjacent to each vertical unit compartment and shall be covered by its own door. These vertical wire-ways shall be free of all live parts and shall contain cable supports. M. N. O. P. All units shall be p~:ovided with a mechanical interlock with the unit door to prevent access unless the disconnect is in the off position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvert~ent closing of the disconnect. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in either the on or off position with from one to three padlocks whether the door is open or closed. All unit heights shall be of modular dimensions to allow for unit layout, in any combination, without structural interference. Drawout units shall have a tin-plated Stab assembly for connection to the vertical buss; no winng to these stabs shall extend into the bus compartments. Terminal blocks for NEMA Type B assemblies shall be mounted within the unit and shall be factory wired. Control centem shall be NEMA Class II. Wiring in Control Centers shall be Type B. Provide neutral landing lugs for all motor control centers. Control Centers shall be in NEMA 1 gasketed enclosures, unless otherwise noted. Remote mounted controls shall be heavy-duty, oil-tight (30 mm) of same quality and type furnished in star[ers. Equipment controls that require a manual reset shall be accomplished through a reset pushbutton on the enclosure or motor control center bucket for the associated piece of equipment. Motor control center enclosures must be in accordance with area designations shown on drawings. All outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4T cast construction. All miscellaneous power transformers shall be dry type, Class H insulation, 80°C rise (KVA as indicated on drawings). Coil windings shall be glass taped, dipped in silicone varnish, with two (2) taps 2-1/2% above and below, 480 volt primary, Delta with 120/208 volt, three phase, 4 wire secondary, unless indicated otherwise. Section 16480-6 1-382-636/03-04 All miscellaneo[Js power '~anelboards shall be Square D type NQOD, no equal, with 10,000 amp interrupting capacity, at 120/208 volt. three phase, 4 wire with branch breakers as shown on drawings, unless indicated otherwise. All lighting panelboards shall be Square D type NF, no equal, with 14,000 amp interrupting capacity at 277/480 volt. three phase, 4 wire with branch breakers as shown on the drawings, unless indicated otherwise. Minimum 20-inch wide by 5-3/4-inch deep. All bus in panelboards shall be copper. All motor control centers shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. All internal wiring shall be color coded, numbered and each wire shall be terminated on terminal strips. Schematic and winng layout drawings, following JIC Standards, which show all connections to external devices, a complete bill of materials and a detailed description cf operation shall be submitted for each piece of equipment. U. Arrangement and physical locations of all equipment within each motor control center shall be subject to shop drawing approval. V. All components shall be propedy identified with laminated engraved nameplates (mechanically fastened} with 3/8:inch high letters (white 0r black). W. Unless otherwise indicated all conduit entrances shall be through the bottom only. Xo Electrical service and motor control eqmpment in the Motor Control Center shall be in accordance with the following and shall have minimum 42,000A rating for interrupting capacity. The main service breaker or main lugs of each MCC shall be provided with a surge protection device and a voltage monitor relay. This surge protection device shall be on the Icad side of the main and be as specified herein. The voltage monitor shall be on the Icad side of the main and be a Time Mark model A257B-480 VAC, no equal. Provide MCC power fail contact to OWNER's exiswting SCADA system. Z. Main Breaker: Molded case circuit breaker, 3 pole, amperes as shown on the drawings with lugs for 480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 cycle entranCe. Breakers shall be nonautomatic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and drawings. B. Motor Starter Panelboard Installation: In conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. Overloads shall be selected on the basis of nameplate horsepower and service factor. Selection of overloads based on horsepower shown on the drawings is not acceptable. If power factor correction capacitors are provided, ovedoad protection shall be compensated for the lower motor running current due to improved power factor. D. All motor control widng shall be installed in accordance with control widng diagrams furnished. Section 16480-7 1-382-636/03-04 Fo Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor and voltage/phase rating. Provide disconnect device for all motors in accordance with applicable codes and as specified. Final location shall be determined in the field. All motors will be provided by other divisions; ready for connections. This CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for electrical connections for power and control circuit wiring, proper phase relationships, and correct motor rotation. Provide motor circuit wiring for each motor from the source of supply to the terminal box on the motor including all intermediate connections at devices such as motor starters, disconnect switches, etc. Provide motor starters as specified for all motors, unless shown or specified that starters or control equipment will be furnished by others. Provide motor circuit disconnect devices for all motors, unless shown or specified that disconnect devices or starters are furnished with other equipment. END OF SECTION Section 16480-8 SECTION 16930 INSTRUMENT WIRE AND CABLE pART 1 - GENERAL i:01 SUMMARY Work Included: This specification contains the requirements for instrument wire and cable as oPposed to electrical power wire and cable. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: comply with standards specified in this Section as listed in Division 1. B. Qualifications of Installers: Use skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Instrument cable shall be furnished in lengths as necessary. B. Reels, coils or package rolls of instrument cable shall be identified with the project name and other tagging identification as called for, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials of construction for cable and wire shall be compatible and noncentaminating. B. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications, the requirements herein listed shall be strictly adhered to. 2.02 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT WIRING, PAIRS 4-20 mA- D.C. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION A. Pairs (2/C) shall have stranded, tinned copper conductors, NO. ~16 AWG, twisted with 2-inch lay. B. Insulation of conductors shall be 15 mil, 90°C minimum PVC, rated for 300 volts. Materials sh'all equal bY eX~e~d'UL13 requirements for physical properties. Section 16930-1 C. Color coding shall be manufacturer's standard or as stated. The outer jacket shall be flame-retardant and weather and ultraviolet resistant PVC, 35 mils thick, and 80°C minimum rating. The outer jacket shall contain a rip cord and shall equal or exceed the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall be UL labeled as power limited circuit cable. If the electronic instrument wire is not installed in steel conduits, a 100% coverage shield shall be applied over the insulated conductors. The shield shall consist of a 0.85 mil minimum thickness aluminum mylar tape. A No. 18 AWG, 7 strand, tinned copper drain wire shall be furnished in continuous electrical contact with the shield. 2.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM A. Fiber optic communications cable shall be riser rated, breakout style cable, BX-Series as manufactured by Optical Cable Corporation, or equal. The cable shall be UL listed, riser rated type OFNR meeting requirements of NEC Sections 770-51(b) and 770-53(b) for use in building riser shafts and floor-to-floor runs. Cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor applications including installation in underground ducts. B. Individual fibers shall meet ISO 9314 (FDDI) specifications for local area network applications at 100 Mbps with a 62.5 ~m diameter glass core, a 125 ~m diameter glass cladding and a 250 p. rn diameter UV cured acrylate primary buffer. The fibers shall be proof tested at 100 kpsi. Each fiber optic cable shall contain 2 individual fibers. Each fiber shall be individually tight-buffered to 900 p.m with PVC. The individually buffered cables and tensioned Kevlar strength members shall be tightly jacketed with a color-coded, water and chemical resistant, elastomedc subcable jacket. The jacketing shall bind the cable and strength members such that there is no free movement within the jacket. The individually jacketed cable shall meet the requirements of EIA-455-82A. The individual subcables shall be tight!y bound and jacketed with PVC~ The jacketing shall not allow slipping or axial movement of the individual subcabies. The jacketing shall be fungus resistant, UV inhibited, and moisture resistant. For connection to transceivers, provide end connectors supplied by cable manufacturer. Provide heat-shrink tubing section where cable is broken out to protect jacketing end and minimize over flexing of the subcables. End connectors shall have integral strain relief and shall be designed to minimize losses. Connectors shall be provided on all fibers of each fiber optic cable. End connector styles shall be coordinated with the transceivers provided as a part of Section 16940 - Controls and Instrumentation. 2.04 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS Ao Although twisted conductors effectively reduce magnetic noise, where additional magnetic shield is necessary to minimize interference from stray magnetic fields, armored electronic instrumentation wire shall be provided. B. Since magnetic interference is produced by currents flowing through conductors and electrical equipment, any instrument wire run near electric motors, generators, Section 16930-2 transformers, induction heaters, circuit breakers, motor starters, power lines, or AC power and control cables may need additional magnetic shielding. Armor may be necessary on instrument cables installed in nonmagnetic electrical ducts. 1. Electronic instrument wiring, pairs, single pair. There shall be a steel wire armor of 24 gauge AISI 1006 soft annealed steel wire covedng the inner jacket. 2. The armor shall be covered by a flame-retardant and weather and ultraviolet resistant PVC, outer jacket 35 mil minimum thickness and 80°C minimum rating. The outer jacket shall contain a rip cord and shall equal or exceed the physical characteristics of UL 1277. Cable shall be UL labeled as power limited cables. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING A. All shields must be grounded. B. Shields shall be grounded at one point only. Single-pair electronic instrument cable shields shall be isolated and left open at the instrument. C. Cable shield grounds shall be isolated from control system signal grounds, except at instrument system grounding electrodes. D. The control room instrument ground shall be separate and isolated from the electrical power grounding system, 3.02 TESTING Fiber Optic Cable: The 'fibers utilized in the installed cable shall be traceable to the manufacturer. Upon request by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall provide cable manufacturer's test report for each reel of cable provided. Ttiese test reports shall include (1) manufacturers on reel attenuation test results at the specified wavelengths for each optical fiber of each reel prior to shipment from the manufacture and (2) on-the-reel Bandwidth performance as tested at the factory. Tests Prior to Installation: CONTRACTOR, at their discretion and at no additional cost to OWNER, may perform tests deemed necessary by CONTRACTOR to ensure integrity of any OWNER-furnished optical fiber. Tests may range from a simple "flashlight test" to an OTDR of each optical fiber of each cable reel prior to installation. Upon request, CONTRACTOR shall supply this test data to ENGINEER prior to installation. Tests After Installation: Upon completion of cable installation and termination, the Fiber Optic cabling shall be tested to include: 1. Optical Attenuation ("Insertion Loss" Method). 2. Verification of Link Integrity (OTDR). Section 16930-3 1-382-636/03-04 Do Optical Attenuation Testing: Optical Attenuation shall be measured on all terminated optical fibers in both directions of transmission using the "Insertion Loss" method. Measurement shall be inclusive of the optical connectors and couplings installed at the system endpoints. Access jumpers shall be used at both the transmit and receive ends to insure that an accurate measurement of connector losses is made. Multi-mode fibers shall be tested in accordance with the EIA/TIA 526,14A, Method B at 850_+30 nm. Single mode fibers (if applicable) shall be tested in accordance with the EIA/'rlA 526-7-1998. Method A.I. Testing shall be at 1300_+20 nm. F. Attenuation of optical fibers shall not exceed the values calculated at follows: Attenuation (max.) = 2*C+L*F+S dB. where _C is the maximum allowable Connector Loss (in dB), L is the length of the run (in kilometers) and F is the maximum allowable fiber loss (in dB/km). S is the total splice loss (number of splices* max. attenuation per splice). OTDR Testing: All fibers even those that are left unterminated (if applicable) shall be documented in one direction of transmission using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Multi-mode fibers shall be tested at 850-nm (nominal). Single mode fibers (if applicable) shall be tested at 1300 (nominal). The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of shod cable sections. Access Jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing of the entire length of the cable, includin.q the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2-dB in a multi-mode fiber, or 0.1-dB in a single mode fiber (if applicable) at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that fiber by OWNER. The installation of that cable shall be reviewed in an eft'od to remove any external stress that may be causing the fault. If such efforts do not remove the fault, that cable and the associated terminations shall be replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR. Documentation: Upon completion of the installation, CONTRACTOR shall provide three full Documentation Sets to ENGINEER for approval. Documentation shall include the items detailed in the sub-sections below. Documentation of Test Results shall be submitted in hard copy or in electronic form (preferred). Electronic documents may be submitted on CD-ROM (preferred) or 3-1/2" diskettes for review and distribution. Where documentation provided in electronic form requires unique software (other than an MS-WordTM compatible Word Processor or MS-ExcelTM spreadsheet) for viewing [est results, CONTRACTOR shall provide along with the above documentation, one (1) licensed copy of such software. The software shall run on a MICROSOFT Windows-based personal computer supplied by OWNER. Test Data - Fiber Optic Media: Test results shall include a record of test wavelengths, cable type, fiber and cable (or Outlet) I.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s). Section 16930-4 F OTDR traces of individual optical fiber "signatures" obtained as specified above shall be provided to ENGINEER for review, Trace files shall be so named as to identify each individual fiber by location in the cable system and fiber number or color. IMPORTANT: Where paper copy documentation of OTDR traces ara provided, the vertical and horizontal scales shall be set so as to maximize the detail in each backscatter trace. The portion of the trace which depicts the fiber under test shall extend a m~nlmum of 50% of the display area, END OF SECTION F Section 16930-5 1-382-636/03-O4 SECTION 16940 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................. 1 1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................... 1 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................... 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................. 2 1.04 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................ 3 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ........ ; .............................................. 3 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HOLDING ......................................................... 3 1.07 DESCRIPTION OF THE CITY OF OSHKOSH WWTP'S EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM ........................................................... 3 1.08 GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 4 1.09 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES (NEWAND EXISTING) ..................................... 6 1.10 COMMON REQUIREMENTS ALL EQUIPMENT .............................................. 7 1.11 MAIN CENTER .............................................................................................. 8 1.12 I/O AND ALGORITHM GENERAL ................................................................. 10 1.13 REPORTS ................................................................................................... 12 1.14 INVENTORYAND MAINTENANCE REPORTS (Bid Alternative No. 3) .......... 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................... 15 2.01 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS ....................................................... 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................... 16 3.01 SCC-2 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 16 3.02 SCC-3 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 18 3.03 SCC-4 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 19 3.04 SCC-5 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 20 3.05 SCC-6 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 20 3.06 SCC-7 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................. 21 3.07 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWlTCHGEAR PLC PROGRAMMING ...................... 21 3.08 TELEMETRY SYSTEM TRAINING ............................................................... 22 3.09 LABORATORY HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS .................................. 22 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The work includes modifications and additions to the existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) for the Oshkosh Wastewater Treatment Plant. System Supplier shall be defined as the fabricator, assembler, and supplier of all system components. This shall include, but not be limited to, all instrumentation as specified, all PLC/SCC cabinets and required interface hardware, and internal wiring, the Main Center hardware, system drawings, system software, new MCCs at the wastewater treatment Section 16940-1 plant, MCC modification drawings as necessary, etc. See paragraph 1.08 for other System Supplier requirements. CONTRACTOR shall inspect all work. The Bid shall include everything necessary to obtain a complete installation operating in accordance with these specifications and the Bidder's proposal, whether necessary items and equipment are contained in or are remote from the enclosures furnished under this Contract. All responsibility for this system ultimately lies with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the placing of circuits and making of electrical and hydraulic connections in accordance with System Supplier furnished drawings, instructions, and field supervision to ensure proper connection. CONTRACTOR shall include the services of a System Supplier factory engineer to supervise making of connections to power supplies, motor leads, communication circuits, existing control equipment, and any other connections external to the new control equipment; to adjust the equipment; initiate and check operation; instruct OWNER's electrician on operation and maintenance of the equipment; and place the equipment in operation in a manner fully satisfactory to ENGINEER. This will include on-site review of software/hardware controls from the central control point. Any auxiliary interface relays and controls needed for completion of this project, if not specifically called for, shall be by System Supplier. All switches, control and indicating lights associated with the control panels shall be new and installed in the star[er panels. After being notified by CONTRACTOR that the equipment is in full operating condition and ready for test, ENGINEER will make one 3-day trip to check operation. If the equipment does not operate according to the specifications, there will be deducted from payments due CONTRACTOR the amount of $1,000 per day for ENGINEER's time, plus travel and expenses for all additional field and office time spent by ENGINEER checking equipment. OWNER will deduct the amount of these charges from payments made to CONTRACTOR and will make payment to ENGINEER. Final acceptance and payment will not be made until the system has operated satisfactorily for a minimum of 30 consecutive days. CONTRACTOR shall include in Bid, field follow-up to ensure proper adjustments and operation during the first year following project final completion. Pdor to beginning the 30-day test the following cdteda shall be met: 1. Satisfactory operation of I/O control loops. 2. Satisfactory operation of software. 3. Satisfactory operation of control program. 4. Satisfactory operation of peripheral equipment. 5. The necessary debugging programs have been performed. 6. Data output is reliable. 7. Control loops are operational. 8. Checking and calibrating of systems have been completed. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. System Suppliers: Firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of SCADA Systems of the size and complexity specified herein and whose systems have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. B. Installer: A firm with at least 10 years of successful installation experience on projects with SCADA System design and installation work similar to that required for the project. Section 16940-2 Co Code Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) and any and all local codes as applicable to construction and installation of electrical widng devices, material and equipment herein specified. D. UL Labels: Provide control panels, power supplies, controllers, relays, wire, connectors, etc., which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories. E. NECA Standards: Comply with applicable portions of NatiOnal Electrical Contractor's Association's Standard of Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data, specifications, and installation recommendations for each item specified herein. B. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. C. Provide product data on all equipment and devices specified herein as well as wiring schematics for all systems. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Include spare parts data listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HOLDING Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to supervisory control center components, enclosure, and finish. 1.07 DESCRIPTION OF THE CITY OF OSHKOSH WWTP'S EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM The City of Oshkosh Wastewater Treatment Plant is an activated based facility with effluent limitations for BCD, suspended solids, pH, phosphorus, ammonia nitrogen, fecal coliform, and residual chlorine. The existing SCADA System is comprised of Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 PLCs (7) located in various process areas of the plant. The PLCs are networked together with fiber optic cable. The operator interface consists of desktop computers as well as panelview computers running Intellutions Fix 32 SCADA graphic software. All equipment shall be monitored and alarmed as described herein and listed in the I/O tables shown in Section 16990 - SCADA System I/O Listing. All equipment shall be monitored, totalized, indicated, recorded and stored for reports and historical data. Section 16940-3 1-382-636/03q~4 L · D. ' Modifications to the individual SCCs and the listing of COntrol and monitoring functions is shown in the I/O listing in Section 16990; SCADA System I/O Listing. With the exception of the items listed as exist?g all equipment shall be provided n th s Contract E. Shop drawings of the existing control system will be made available to the successful Bidder for development, of the required Iccp drawings, interface requirements and wiring . . requirements.~ 1.08 GENERAL A. It is the intent of this specification to define a fully integrated open type process monitoring and control system, factory tested, delivered to the site ready to function upon connection of ;)ower source and Weld instrument wiring. Components, peripherals, interconnections, cabling, power supplies, software, and services necessary to form a COmplete, integrated system shall be identified and provided by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reviewing the widng diagrams and COntrol sequences for existing equipment as well as equipment provided under other Divisions of these specifications and COordinating all interface requirements. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER in writing any deficiencies noted dudng this review. Any changes required by CONTRACTOR because of failure to complete this review shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR at no increase in cost to OWNER. To ensure a COmplete and totally integrated system, a sinqle manufacturer who has experience in furnishing similar networked computer-based monitoring and control systems of the same complexity and size for municipal wastewater facilities, shall provide specified equipment and services. The system proposed to meet this specification shall be of field proven design, incorporating manufacturer's standard equipment and software. Service of all peripheral devices shall be provided by the manufacturer of the process monitoring and control system. C, Design and specification of devices and completed system shall conform to applicable portions of latest edition of National Electrical Code (NEC). Control panels shall bear a serialized UL label indicating that it is UL approved as an assembled unit, Panels which have individual components which are UL labeled, but do not have UL approval as an assembled unit are not acceptable. Eo CONTRACTOR through System Supplier shall provide the following support services: 1 Field Service Engineer. Field Service Engineer shall be responsible for programming of system PLCs in the factory and at the site. Field Service Engineer shall be present at the factory acceptance test and be present for startup of all systems and available throughout the entire COnstruction process until final completion. Service technicians sent for system startup will not be acceptable. Support shall include on-site time. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Commissioning, installation, startup, and testing of equipment. b. Revising or rewriting manuals to incorporate an installed and accepted system. c. On-slate training. d. So~F~/-nodifications. 2. In-Factory support shall include consultatio~ following the acceptance testing and shipment. Services shall include, but not be limited to: a. Researching and answering questions related to the system operation, documentation, and system use and functions. b. Program modifications. c. Revising or rewriting manuals. Section 16940-4 F= H. = Post startup support shall include follow-up services during the one-year period following final acceptance. Service shall include follow-up recalibration and replacement of defective equipment, as well as additional training, software modifications, and control configurations as requested by OWNER. This shall include an allowance of 80 hours for work on site other than warranty repair or replacement of defective equipment. This time shall be used for software enhancements and modifications to improve the operation of the system. It shall be assumed that this 80 hours includes four trips to the site. Training Program: 1. Submit training plan including course syllabus, personnel who will be conducting the training, and schedule. 2. Provide materials, instructors, workbooks to complete the training. 3. Training courses shall include: a. Operator training. Course length minimum 12 hours. Training shall utilize · equipment specified herein following installation and field testing. Three 4-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the VVWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals. b. Maintenance training for four operators. Course length minimum 12 hours. Three 4-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the VWVTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals. c. PLC training. Course length minimum 16 hours. Two 8-hour sessions with four operators each shall be provided at the VVWTP. Training sessions shall occur at a minimum of one-month intervals. 4. Manufacturer's training shall be directed to system and equipment operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other than the process itself. Permit ENGINEER and OWNER to observe vendor's staging records or other quality assurance records relating to system(s) supplied. System Supplier shall assemble the system components as a complete process monitoring and control system and demonstrate that the system is operational before shipment; This test shall be witnessed by OWNER and ENGINEER (three personnel). System Supplier shall provide lodging and meals for two days and one night as a minimum for this witness test in Bid. All problems, errors, insufficiencies', failures, identified during testing shall be resolved before shipment. This testing shall be as an integrated assembly by simulating each of the specified I/O points and all specified algorithms. The submittal shall be in two phases; in the first submittal the following information shall be provided in booklet form: 1. Detailed catalog information, descriptive literature, and specifications of peripheral hardware items. All items being provided must be specifically noted on this literature. 2. All field devices. 3. Software. The second submittal shall include: 1. System configuration diagram. 2. Elementary wiring and loop diagrams, interconnection diagrams: 3. I/O Listing. 4. Database with PLC addresses; Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Division 1. The following additional information shall apply: 1. Manuals shall contain, but not be limited to, the following: a. System Hardware. Section 16940-5 1-382-636/03-04 b. System Software. 2. Hardware section to include: a. Safety precautions, physical description, functional description, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance instructions, checkout procedures, troubleshooting procedures, servicing, removal and replacement procedures. b. Wiring schematic and logic diagrams, parts list, and point to point wiring. 3. Software section to include: a. Software manual to describe system techniques, general philosophies, and list and description of all standard software. b. Program documentation to include programs, data base, and configuration as installed in both hard copy as well as two copies of backup disks of this information. -.- c. Provide OWNER with all passwords to access system. ' K. All components are to be standard make acceptable to OWNER, with one manufacturer to provide all similar components. The Base Bid supervisory system System Supplier shall be Altronex, Instrument Control Systems, or Wunderlich-Malec Engineering. L. System Supplier shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. System Supplier shall have a full-time staff of qualified programmers who are knowledgeable in the configuration of networked computer systems and the PLCs being provided. 2. System Supplier shall have a minimum of one Microsoft Certified Engineer. 3. System Supplier shall have training capabilities and shall have conducted training courses in programming and maintenance. 4. System Supplier shall have an adequate inventory of spare parts. 5. System Supplier shall have a full-time staff of qualified service technicians. 6. System Supplier shall be responsible for the programming and documentation of the system. 7. System Supplier shall be responsible for all details which may be necessary to properly install, wire, adjust and place in operation a complete and working system. 8. System Supplier shall be respons b e for all coordination between the system and the field devices, instrumentation equipment, motor control centers, etc., and equipment furnished with other divisions of this specification. This shall include interface with existing equipment. 1.09 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES (NEW AND EXISTING) New enclosures shall be front access only, minimum No. 12 gauge steel, hinged doors, rotating Iockable handle latch on each supervisory equipment compartment door (not screws or bolts requiring tools to open door) with top and bottom bolts actuated by one rotating handle on large doors. Provide data pockets for wiring diagrams. Painting shall include phosphate treatment, zinc chromate ~ron oxide palmer, baked rust inhibiting enamel, white intedor and OWNER-selected extedor color. All doors and panels shall be gasketed. All louvers shall be filtered, with forced air cooling as necessary by the supplier for conditions where installed. New enclosures shall be a minimum of 20 inches wide, 20 inches deep and 90 inches high. B. Indication gauges and meters shall be at eye level, minimum 48 inches, maximum 60 inches, from floor to bottom of gauge. Plastic wiring troughs shall have removable covers. Maximum trough fill shall be 30%. All wiring in supervisory enclosures and control panels not iq wiring troughs shall be bound with continuous type spiral windings. Section 16940-6 Tubing and instruments containing water shall be in separate compartments, located and constructed so that leakage or spray at 100 psi pressure cannot touch electrical conductors or devices. Leakage shall be conducted to the floor in duct or pipe. All wiring for new panels shall be done in the factory, Class II, Type C, with master terminal strips for exterior connections on the sides. Power and Class I and Class II widng shall be separated as required by the NEC. All enclosures must pass through doors to point of installation, and if enclosures are shipped in sections, all wiring and connections between sections shall be done by CONTRACTOR. All wiring shall be labeled at each end with corresponding numbers. This numbering shall be shown on the shop and record drawings. F. All devices shall be furnished flush-mounted, and an exterior engraved phenolic nameplate worded by OWNER (upon receipt of shop drawings) shall be provided for each compartment, device, light, etc. All components within the cabinets shall be identified with interior mounted engraved labels. Devices shall be grouped for each device or unit being controlled. G. Shop drawings showing interior panel layouts Shall be provided for all new panels. Drawings to be approved by OWNER prior to construction. H. The color code for panel (new and existing) and field wiring shall be as follows: 1. Red - Discrete inputs and outputs powered from the SCC. 2. Brown - Discrete inputs and outputs return to the SCC. 3. Yellow - Discrete inputs powered from the field or output wire internal the SCC. 4. Blue - Internal 24 volts or discrete output wire internal to the SCC. 5. White - Neutral. 1.10 COMMON REQUIREMENTS ALL EQUIPMENT A. All indicating and recording devices shall be electric or electronic. B, Ail motor control power shall be 120 volt, with Suitable circuit protection (fuses or breakers). Fuse holders shall be proVided With integral LEDs to indicate when the fuse is blown~ C. Provide lightning protection, isolation transformers and fused disconnects at each end of each power circuit, supervisory circuit, and local supervisory drcuit, with transformers and relays if necessary to obtain supervisory power. 120 volt power is available at all control points~ Lightning protection shall be completely solid state, self-healing, and not require the use of fuses. Provide a single switch with an indicating light to deenergize the control power for each location: Each panel shall have a GFI, duplex, 20 ampere, 120 volt receptacle and a 18-inch fluorescent light and switch. D. If enclosure and panel space is needed for future installation of devices; lights, etc., the enclosure and back panel shall be constructed for such installation. Supports shall be provided for futUre equipment and panel openings shall be made and covered with neat cover plates matching the panel. All panels shall be sized to allow for 20% expansion. CONTRACTOR shall fumish one complete extra set of fuses and similar parts which may need replacement in normal service, and an identification list of all component parts and where they may be obtained. Where equipment is necessary to perform a function as called for in one part of this specification, it shall be provided even though the detailed enumeration at Various control points may omit listing that equipment. Section 16940-7 Where a certain accuracy of sensing and transmitting levels or flows and controlling operations are called for, means must be provided to read or determine that the levels or flows are within the limits or accuracy specified of the sensing, transmitting, and controlling devices. Where no accuracy is specified, but a knowledge of levels is necessary to set operating points, an indicating device of accuracy consistent with the operation of the system is required. H. All control and auxiliary relays shall have indicating LEDs. Each analog signal entering or leaving a supervisory control panel and leaving a building shall be provided with a surge protection device as manufactured by Joslyn, Model No. 1820-28, or equal. Each transmitter shall be provided with a surge protection device as manufactured by Joslyn, Model No. 1669-02 on the output and Joslyn, Model No. 1250-32 on the power supply, or equal. 1.11 MAIN CENTER System Supplier shall furnish information to OWNER to allow access to the database for programming the user interface software. This shall include the database, addresses, program addresses, passwords, and system configuration. System Supplier shall include an allowance of $15,000 in the Lump Sum Base Bid for two desktop workstations, a 6-port ST fiber to 100 Mb converter, 24-port 10/100 Mb managed switch, 8-port 10/100 Mb unmanaged switch, stand alone media converters (5), patch cords, and software (allowance does not include Process Monitoring and Control Software ~nd Computer Software described below. These items shall be included in the Bid.) Purchase of hardware and software shall be held until approved by ENGINEER to ensure system is of current technology at project completion. CONTRACTOR shall not use any computer hardware or software supplied as part of the Contract. Final selection of each system's components shall be made at the time of actual purchase based on latest available technologies. Final COst for the hardware will be adjusted by change order based on actual system costs. Each peripheral device shall operate on a structure which allows simultaneous operation of several units without loss of data. I The system will interface with an existing centralized supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system for process monitoring and report generation. This specification defines the systems and the role of System Supplier. 2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for complete coordination in providing all equipment, sensors and meters supplied with input and output signals and contacts that are compatible with the systems as specified herein. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for complete coordination with the existing system and with manufacturers of other systems specified in other divisions of these specifications with which an interface is required. 3. Any reference made to the terminology "SCADA System" in any of the other divisions shall be synonymous with the systems as specified herein. 4. This portion of the specification defines the scope of work to be performed by System Supplier. It includes providing PLC modifications based on the requirements of this specification, providing all of the necessary hardware, software and programming for the systems, installation, startup assistance, documentation and operator training. 5. The Contract drawings and 1/O listing are symbolic representatives of the required work. It is not intended that the drawings show all appurtenances. CONTRACTOR shall provide a complete and working system according to the true intent and meaning of the drawings, specifications and standard industry practices. Section 16940-8 1-382-636/03-04 Computer Software: The following software shall be provided on the existing computers noted. Provide service and support for the following software throughout construction and for one full year after project final completion. Service and support shall include free upgrades and service packs. All software shall include manuals, license, passwords, and registration cards: 1. SCADA No. 2 and the OWNER's existing laptop each shall have Allen-Bradley RS Logix 5 PLO programming and documentation software installed on the computer's fixed disk. 2. Provide Rockwell RS Linx Gateway device drivers for SCADA No. 1 and SCADA No. 2 desktop computers to allow communications between Windows XP operating system and Allen Bradley PKTX cards. Provide two new Allen Bradley PKTX cards, one for each SCADA computer. The existing KT cards shall be turned over to OWNER. Process Monitoring and Control Software: 1. Process Monitoring and Control Software shall be provided for the main center computers including all documentation and licenses. Configuration of the software shall be by others. System Supplier shall provide coordination for addressing system I/O which includes a listing of addresses for each I/O point described as being manipulated or monitored by the operator through the SCADA System for each SOC. System Supplier shall refer to Part 1.12 - 1/O and Algorithm General, Part 3 - Execdtion, and Section 16990 - SCADA System I/O Listing for minimum requirements. Listing shall be provided as hard copy and in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file on a compact disk (CD). 2. The software shall provide preemptive multitasking to ensure that normal computer operations do not interfere with I/O communications, data processing, alarms, or historical data integrity. 3. The software shall have the ability to filter, scale, and otherwise condition acquired data. These functions, plus the ability to generate alarms on acquired data must operate independently from any other subsystem. 4. Operators shall have the ability to annotate historical alarm and event information through the standard run-time interface. Annotation may be by selection of a pre-defined "reason code* or entedng of text by the operator. Notes shall remain associated with records within historical archives. 5. The formatting of alarm and even! displays shall be fully configurable including the amount of information shown in an alarm/event window and the ordedng of the display field. 6. The operator display system shall include advanced user interface devices including list boxes spin buttons and sliders. These devices shall be an integral part of the products'standard library of objects accessible from the interface builder. The library shall be capable of being added to with user developed objects. 7. The product shall support Microsoft OLE, and ODBC for communications with report generation database software. 8. The software shall include a comprehensive set of diagnostic displays for debugging and optimizing the application. In particular, the subsystem responsible for process I/O shall include diagnostics which provide a timing analysis of each communications port. 9. The software shall be configured to take advantage of the built-in networking capabilities of the computer operating systems. The SCADA servers (2) shall be directly connected to the PLC fiber optic data highway and shall perform I/O proceSSing to the inplant and remote data. All other machines shall use the networking functions to access and mampulate the data residing on the SCADA server without storing their own copies of that data. This will allow each machine on the network to acknowledge system alarms, monitor equipment states and modify setpoints. The network protocol shall be TOP/IR Section 16940-9 -~ 10. The Process Monitoring and Control Software shall be Intellution's iFix. One desktop computer shall have a SCADA development version with 60,000 tag database for I/O and a driver to communicate with the PLC. A second desktop computer shall have a SCADA runtime version with 60,000 tag database for I/O and a driver to communicate with the PLC. The remaining five desktop computers and four Panelview computers shall be View Clients without I/O drivers. All desktop computers shall have ODBC interface capabilities. 11. Provide service and support for all Process Monitoring and Control Software throughout construction and for one full year after project final completion. Service and support shall include free upgrades and service packs. 12. The Process Monitoring and Control Software shall not be purchased until approved by ENGINEER or the computer hardware ~s released for purchase. See item B. above. equipment for comp et On of the system. 1.12 I/O AND ALGORITHM GENERAL A. In general, the following is a definition ofi/o at each MCC: 1. Run, from MCC or auxiliary starter contact (wet contact). 2. Fail - from MCC or starter auxiliary O.L. contact (wet contact); Engineering: 1. System Supplier shall provide allof the engineering necessary to accomplish and document a system which meets these specifications and is in accordance with the system configuration. The engineering to be performed by System Supplier on this project shall include, but not limited to, the following categories: a. System layouts. ~). Control panel layouts. (~. Input/output (I/O) configuration and widng diagrams. d. Programming of PLCs and coordination of addressing with Operator Interface Programming. Coordination shall include address grouping to allow group transfers to the Process Monitoring Software. e. Fiber optic data highway layout. f. Network layout. 2. Submittals: In addition to submittals previously described provide: a. Shop Drawing and Product Data. b. Logic Programs. c. Recommended Spare Parts Lists. 3.Installation: CONTRACTOR shall install all of the system equipment including, but not limited to: all local I/O enclosures, remote I/O enclosures, and interconnecting ~ cabling. This work shall include all interconnections and widng from new and existing Required to Run - Maintained start or as required (dry contact). 4. Hand-Auto - from MCC or Controller Selector Switch (wet contact), feedback to SCADA. 5. Any command to operate shall be acted upon within 5 seconds and any status feedback signals shall be received within 5 seconds. B. All alarm contacts or system changes following a command must exist or not change for 0 to 60 sec0nds to activate the SCADA to the alarm State. All analog and digital inputs shall be monitored and totalized in the PLC. This shall include, but n. ot be lim!t .ed to, flows (air, water, etc.), pressures, and levels: The PEC shall calculate maximum, minimum and running average for all analog inputs. Instantaneous values, totals, maximum, minimum and average values shall be read by the Process Monitoring and Control software and be reset on a daily basis as described below. Secti°n i6940-10 1-382-636/03-04 PLCs shall calculate equipment runtimes and number of starts for all equipment where run signals are monitored. Runtimes and number of starts shall be read by the Process Monitoring and Control software and be reset on a daily basis as described below. Daily flow totals, runtimes, number of starts, number of cycles, etc., as described above shall be reset on a daily basis. This reset shall occur based on a time (hour and minute) setpoint stored in the PLC, through the Process Monitoring and Control Software. The operator shall set the time at which the daily reset will occur. Once this time setpoint matches the current time of the processor clock, a reset signal shall be sent to all of the PLCs to clear any totals that have accumulated locally. In addition to the totalizers described above, the PLC shall also calculate cumulative totals for all runtimes, number of starts and flows. Maximum, minimum and running average for all analog inputs shall also be included as part of the cumulative total algorithm. Cumulative totals shall totalize until manually reset by the operator. The PLC shall display the date of the last cumulative totalizer reset. Communication fail alarms shall be provided within each PLC in the system for alarming at the SCADA System. All controlled equipment as described herein shall have the capability of manual control from the Process Monitoring and Control Software (with proper security level) through the manipulation of analog or digital variables. This shall be through the use of a "SCADA H-O- A" switch or by forcing a single I/O point as a manual start command. All analog and digital outputs shall be capable of being manually set from the Process Monitoring and Control Software. Where a manual reset is required at the SCADA system (i.e, level lockout, pressure lockout, etc.), the Process Monitoring and Control software shall be configured to set a discrete reset bit. Once the PLC receives the bit and the alarm condition has cleared, the PLC shall clear the alarm and place the associated equipment back in service. The SCADA System shall allow the operator (with proper security level) to change all setpoints and operating parameters within the PLCs as described herein. All control algorithms and alarms for equipment shall be programmed in the associated PLC. There shall be no control algorithms or alarms in the computers. Control of each piece of equipment shall be accomplished as described in PART 3 - EXECUTION of this section. All alarms shall be tied to the plant paging system. The assignment of all alarms to' the paging system shall be done through the SCADA System and be flexible for operation. Provide a bit which can be manipulated at the SCADA system allowing the operator to enable or disable the alarm from being sent to the plant paging system, Regardless of the state of the bit, the alarm shall be displayed at the SCADA System. An alarm silence/acknowledge bit shall also be provided to silence the alarm horn and disable all active alarms from being sent to the paging system: Battery status of each PLC shall be monitored by the SCADA System. In the event of a Iow battery condition, an alarm shall be generated at the SCADA System. The entire system shall be backed by a 30-minute line interactive UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system which, in the event of a power failure, will allow one hour to get the power back on-line. The UPS shall be Powerware 9 Series, Best Ferrups, or equal. Section 16940-11 1.13 System Supplier shall provide addressing for all hard-coded time delays and PLC settings that are not operator adjustable. This shall include, but not be limited to, time delays for float switches, call-to-run fails, level alarms, pressure alarms, [Iow alarms, weight alarms, temperature alarms, and data fail alarms. Indication of time remaining for all timers within PLCs shall be made available for indication at the SCADA System. O. All analog signals shall be scaled to engineenng units in the PLC with implied decimal to allow storage in integer registers. System Supplier shall provide all analog ranges, PLC register values and associated scaling factors to ENGINEER for use with the HMI software. This shall include upper and lower limits of PLC registers (i.e., -32768 to 32767 or 0 to 65535) as well as upper and lower limits for the associated device (i.e., 0 to 150 psi). Analog values specified to be displayed with decimal points shall be scaled by the HMI software. P. All equipment controlled automatically from the SCADA System shall have "Call-to-Run" or "Call-to-Open~Close" signals (as applicable) generated from their associated PLCs. These signals shall be displayed at the SCADA System through the HMI software. Each associated PLC shall also generate a "Call-to-Run Fail" or "Call-to-Open/Close Fail" (as applicable), if the equipment is called-to-run/open/close but does not startJopen/close within a spec'dic time pedod Call-to-run/open/close signals may be generated by the master or remote PLC, as determined by System Supplier. The "Call-to-Run/Open/Close FaiF signal shall be generated within the PLC software and may not be combined with other fail signals such as hard-wired motor fails, overtemperature, etc. In cases where the automatic altemation of equipment is prov ded by the PLC, indication of the lead, lag, and lag-lag pumps (where applicable) shall be provided and displayed at the SCADA System. REPORTS System Supplier, as part of the bid shall include the development of laboratory reports as described below. System Supplier shall include the following as part of report development: 1. Initial meeting with System Supplier's programmer, OWNER, and ENGINEER to discuss report formats, method of accessing reports, method of entering data into reports, etc. All meetings will be held at OWNER's facility and shall be assumed to be a minimum of 8 hours in duration. Meetings may be attended by any parties associated with the Contract. At a minimum, one representative of System Supplier capable of making binding decisions related to this scope of work shall attend. 2. Meeting at 25% completion of the reports with System Supplier's programmer, OWNER, and ENGINEER to review report formats, calculations, layout, etc. Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER one week pdor to the meeting. 3. Meeting at 50% completion of the reports with System Supplier's programmer, OWNER, and ENGINEER to review report formats, calculations, layout, etc. Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER one week prior to the meeting. 4. Meeting at 75% completion of the reports with System Supplier's programmer, OWNER, arid ENGINEER to review report formats, calculations, layout, etc, Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER one week prior to the meeting. 5. Meeting at 90% completion of the reports with System Supplier's programmer, OWNER, and ENGINEER for final modifications and/or additions to the reports. Reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER one week prior to the meeting. 6. Preparation and submittal of all reports at 100% completion for shop drawing review. Section 16940-12 An allowance of 40 hours for software enhancements and modifications to improve operation of the system. It shall be assumed that this 40 hours includes two trips to the site. Using OPS 32 software (latest version), System Supplier shall develop reports for the system which include real-time and historical data from the SCADA System. One copy of the OPS 32 software and three network licenses shall be provided as well as one copy of the software required for interface with Intellutions iFix SCADA software. The OPS 32 package shall be installed on SCADA Node No. 2 and the three network copies on the Lab, Solids, and Assistant Superintendent's computers. Reports shall be automatically generated to an OWNER defined pdnter location. In addition, users may generate reports on demand from the computer for either on-screen viewing or printing. The reports shall consist of the following: 1. The reports shall include, but not be limited to, minimum, maximum, average, and totalized daily values from the various inputs. The system shall also incorporate manually entered operations and laboratory data and calculated statistics. The system shall be configured such that all automatically acquired data and manual input data be accessible from any report application, without need for redundant data entry. Report data collection and totalization periods shall be operator-adjustable (i.e., 7 A.M. to 7 A.M.). There shall be included in the Bid development of a minimum of 25 reports and 10 data entry forms. Reports shall have the capability of incorporating any system variables and any manually collected operations and laboratory data, and statistics calculated from the integration of manually collected data and real-time data. These statistics shall be included for each unit process in the treatment facility. The following are examples of statistics the system shall include for each unit process: a. Process Loading Rates for BOD, TSS, Phosphorus, and Ammonia Nitrogen in pounds per day, pounds per month, pH, temperature, etc. b. Process Removal Efficiency for BOD, TSS, Phosphorus, and Ammonia Nitrogen in percent removal and quantity removed. c. Process Hydraulic Loading Rates in appropriate units such as gallons per day per square foot of cladfier surface area and unit process detention times. d. Biological parameters such as pounds of solids under aeration, F/M ratio, oxygen utilization rates, MCRT, SVI, etc. e. Lab quality control charts such as replicates, spikes, standards, etc. f. Analytical calculation tools. 2. A total of 25 individual monthly reports in row/column format shall be included with manually entered and/or process generated data. The columns to include in the 25 reports will be determined prior to the initial meeting. Sample reports are included at the end of Section 16990. 3. DNR State report currently submitted by OWNER shall be generated automatically by the system. 4. Daily and monthly reports will be as implied monthly and will include up to 31 daily summaries for the given type. 5. All maximum and minimum values will be assigned a time and date (where applicable). 6. The system shall maintain data on the SCADA File Server's fixed disk drive for a minimum pedod of one year and then compact and archive data to save disk space. 7. Calculated values shall have the capability of ignoring "No Data" points on the report or requiring data in all points per value. Averages of values shall not include the effects of "No Data" entdes, Section 16940-13 In addition to these values, the Monthly Summary shall include, but not be limited to: Flows, daily totals, monthly averages, peak and minimum values at the bottom for all analog and totalized variables. Co Operator Training: System Supplier shall include in their bid 40 hours of training on the reporting software once the reports have been completed. Training shall include all expenses (e.g., travel, lodging, etc.). Training sessions shall be a maximum of 5 hours in duration and shall occur at a minimum of one-week intervals. 1.14 INVENTORY AND MAINTENANCE REPORTS (Bid Alternative No. 3) A. Maintenance Report System: 1. An equipment preventive maintenance system shall be provided as part of Bid Alternative No. 3. The inventory and.maintenance software shall be JOB Plus by OPS Systems, inc. One copy of JOB Plus and three network licenses shall be provided as well as one copy of the software required for interface with the Intellution iFix SCADA software. The JOB Plus Package shall be installed on SCADA Node No. 2 and the three network copies on the maintenance computer, maintenance building second floor electrical/maintenance computer, and the Assistant Supedntendent's computer. The system shall be menu driven. Consecutively numbered work orders shall be automatically pdnted for each maintenance task on any selected equipment based on accumulated run time, starts, or calendar intervals each day. Intervals shall be selected by the operator. 2. Run times and starts shall be totalized in the PLC database or entered manually only when equipment run signals are not available in the database. Maintenance tasks shall have changeable yearly starting and ending dates so work orders are not generated during off season for the piece of equipment. 3. Each work order shall include the name and location of the equipment, the maintenance task required, directions on performing the task, a listing of the tools and supplies required, a list of notes ana warnings, plus a sign off section to be filled in after the task is completed. Work orders shall include a parts used section with inventory part number section. A job completion date shall be included on each work order. : 4. Completed work order numbers shall be entered into the system with the date completed, the identification of the person who completed the task, parts used and " part numbers, and any remarks made by the person. It shall not be required to enter the completed work order number on the same day it was completed. The entered information shall be added to the maintenance database for the equipment. 5. It shall be possible for the operator to command the system to invoke a specified work order ~ind to reprint current work or(~ers in case of loss. 6. A maintenance historical database shall be created to record the history of each maintenance task in the system. The operator shall be able to easily copy the history file to a compact disk. 7. The information for the maintenance tasks shall be stored in database format. 8. The hi~intenanco system shall provide the following reports: a. DescriPtion of each maintenance task with next service dates and points. This report shall be used to help schedule manpower for the next month, quarter, or · year. b. Equipment h story report which will list maintenance history for the selected piece of equipment, plus any notes or remarks made by the maintenance personnel (if entered). Section 16940-14 c. A work order history which will list all the work orders with the date issued and completed, starting from a specified date. d. A configuration report which consists of a complete list of all maintenance tasks along with all work order information. The system shall be configured to include the uncompleted work order report, the last work order report, and/or reprint all current work orders on a daily basis, after the new work orders have been automatically printed. OWNER shall be able to specify the time of day the new work orders will be pdnted. B. System Equipmentlnventory: 1. A software module shall be included on the system for inventory of equipment in the system. Information stored in the inventory shall include but not be limited to: equipment number of the device, type of equipment, date installed, date last checked or used, manufacturer name with contact name, address and phone number, local vendor name with contact name, address, and phone number, model or factory part number, installer's name with contact name, address, and phone number, local service representative name with contact name, address, and phone numbers, new or , installation cost, plus an area for notes and comments for each piece of equipment. 2. Information shall be entered and maintained by plant personnel with a simple to use, interactive inventory screen editor. 3. It shall be possible to print information, both the inventory information and the device history, for any single piece of equipment, group of equipment, or the complete equipment inventory. Also the operator shall be able to generate reports from the inventory database using any of the data fields or group of data fields as keys with the reports only including selected data fields. Operator Training: System supplier shall include in the Bid Alternative 40 hours of training on the reporting software once the repods have been completed. Training shall include all expenses (e.g., travel, lodging, etc.). Training sessions shall be a maximum of 5 hours in duration and shall occur at a minimum of one-week intervals. PART 2 _ PRODUCTS 2.01 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Ultrasonic level transmitters shall utilize an ultrasonic, noncontacting method to measure level with an accuracy of _+0.25% of measurement. Level calculation'shall be selectable from a "standard" exponent for the given tank type, but shall allow field entry of user-selected exponents. A 4-digit local display shall allow operator-selected display of level, and level shall be field programmed for units of feet, inches, etc. All adjustments shall be by digital values in EEPROM, providing memory storage through power failures without requiring battery backup. Levels shall be stored to EEPROM in Order to minimize lost data dudng a power outage. Field adjustments shall include zero, Span, blanking, and dampening. Programming shall be performed by a removable, portable keypad module, maintaining NEMA 4 enclosure integrity dudng programming or when removed from the enclosure. Output shall be 4-20 mADC into a 350 ohm load and a pulse output. The transducer radiating surface shall be self-cleaning and shall operate without problems in moisture, dust, and frost; It shall be suited for continuous submergence, with the interconnecting cable splice made above flood level. The transducer shall be designed to amplify acoustic output 54 times over normal outputs. Operating range shall be -40°F to Section 16940-15 1-382~636/03-04 200°F. CONTRACTOR shail coordinate transducer mounting height with maximum water level to be monitored. The interconnecting cable between transdUcer and the amplifier shall be provided with the instrument, limited to 1,200 feet, and be run in a conduit (provided by CONTRACTOR) separate from other wires or cables. The transmitters shall be temperature compensated through an internal temperature sensor within the transducer. Provide a 120 VAC power source for the amplifier. The amplifier enclosure shall house the amplifier and digital indicator in a NEMA4 enclosure suitable for indoor or outdoor installation The level transmitters shall be Milltronics, Inc., HydroRanger, or equal. PART3-EXECUTION 3.01 SCC-2 MODIFICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in Electrical Building A. The PLC in this panel is an Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements. There is an existing Aeration Control Panel located in Electrical Building A where shown on the drawings. This panel shall be removed and all control functions currently performed by this panel shall be programmed into the existing PLC in SCC-2 as described below. This PLC shall control the air flow control valve on each of the two aeration tanks based on the Dissolved Oxygen (DO) level in that tank. This PLC shall also control the sequencing and output of the five aeration blowers based on the header pressure and air flow rate as follows: 1. There are three DO analyzers in each of the two aeration basins. The operator shall be able to select from the SCADA system any one DO signal for a given basin, an average of any two signals, or an average of all three s~gnals from the SCADA system [or control of the air flow control valve for that basin. When an average signal is selected for control, the average selected shall be indicated at the SCADA System. The individual DO readings in each basin shall be indicated continuously at the SCADA System. 2. The operator shall be able to enter the desired DO concentration for each basin. This PLC shall compare the selected DO signal with the DO se[point. If the DO deviates from this se[point, an increase or decrease in air flow (i.e., DO) to the associated basin shall be determined by this PLC. This PLC shall be set up so that the deviation between the DO input signal and DO setpoint corresponds to a fixed ~ncrease or decrease in air flow. Air flow shall be increased or decreased by opening or closing the air flow control valve of the associated basin. 3. There shall be a DO deadband and time delay for the DO setpoint so that the DO concentration must be outside the deadband for the time delay prior to a change in valve position. This time delay shall function between each change in valve position. The deadband and time delay shall be operator adjustable (with proper secudty level) from the SCADA system. 4. There shall be set up within this PLC a valve gain (percentJppm and proportional band) setpoint for each air flow control valve that is operator adjustable from the SCADA system. The valve gain setpoint for each air flow control valve shall be used to Section 16940-16 1-382-636/03-04 control the speed of the system's reaction to DO error. This setpoint shall dictate what percentage the valve shall open or close based on the error in DO. 5. There shall be set up within this PLC operator adjustable high and Iow DO alarm setpoints based on the DO signal selected for control as well as high and Iow air flow alarm setpoints for each basin. There shall be minimum and maximum air flow setpoints (5 each) for each basin which yaw with the number of blowers on-line. These setpoints shall prevent the air flow control valve from closing any further in order to maintain a minimum air flow to that basin regardless of DO concentration and to prevent the air flow control valve from opening any further to maintain a maximum air flow to that basin regardless of DO concentration. 6. Blower output control: a. The output of each centrifugal blower (5) shall be controlled to maintain a constant pressure in the common discharge air header by modulating the blower inlet valve on each blower. The pressure in the common discharge air header shall be monitored from this PLC. The operator shall be able to enter the desired air header pressure setpoint from the SCADA system. b. This PLC shall compare the signal from the pressure transmitter with the pressure setpoint. If the pressure deviates from the setpoint, an increase or decrease in blower motor horsepower (i.e., air flow) shall be determined by this PLC. This PLC shall be set up so that the deviation between the pressure input signal and the pressure setpoint corresponds to a fixed increase or decrease in blower motor horsepower based on the horsepower reading from the motor starter. The air supply (and thus the pressure) shall be increased or decreased by opening or closing the inlet valve of the associated blower. c. There shall be a header pressure deadband and time delay for the pressure setpoint such that the header pressure must be outside the deadband for the time delay prior to a change in blower inlet valve position. This time delay shall function between each change in valve position. The deadband and time delay shall be operator adjustable from the SCADA system. d. There shall be an operator adjustable valve gain (percentJpsi and proportional band) setpoint within this PLC that shall be used to set how far the blower inlet valve moves in response to an error in header pressure. The valve gain setpoint for each inlet valve shall be used to control the speed of the system's reaction to header pressure error. This setpoint shall dictate what percentage the valve shall open Or close based on the error in header pressure. e. There shall be set up within this PLC operator adjustable high and Iow pressure alarm setpoints. There shall also be set up within this PLC operator adjustable mm~mum motor horsepower setpoints that prevent the blower inlet valves from closing beyond this setpoint and a maximum motor horsepower setpoint that prevents the inlet valves from opening beyond this setpoint to keep the blowers from entedng the surge region or overload region, respectively. f. Provide an operator adjustable minimum air flow setpoint based on the common header air flow meter so that if this setpoint is reached, the inlet valve(s) will be blocked from closing any farther. g. When a lag blower is put on-line, the PLC shall modulate all blower inlet valves together to the same horsepower. 7. Blower sequencing: a. There shall be set up within this PLC operator adjustable start and stop setpoints for each of the four lag blowers based on the total air flow to the two aeration basins. b. One blower shall operate at all times (lead blower). Based on the total air flow and the operator entered setpoints, this PLC shall automatically start and stop the lag blowers in a first on/first off alternating sequence (including the lead blower). An indication shall be provided at the SCADA system whenever a lag blower is called to run (i.e., Required). Section 16940-17 F' c, If this PLC detects that a blower is not in service (H-O-A switch at MCC or SCADA not in Auto) or that the blower has failed, it shall automatically switch to the next available blower in the sequence. d. This PLC shall contain an operator adjustable time delay that will allow the system to stabilize after a blower is placed in or taken out of service. During the stabilization period, no control actions shall be made until the time delay expires. -8. All of the setpoints described above shall be operator adjustable [at security levels) from both the SCADA system and the new panelview on this SCC. Any setpoint modifications made at the SCADA system shall be automatically updated the panelview and any setpoint modifications made from the panelview shall be automatically updated at the SCADA system. 9. All of the parameters for tuning the PID loops described above shall be operator adjustable (at secudty levels; operators shall not have access) from the panelview only. The IlO points in Section 16990 - SCADA System I/O Listing that are shown with an asterisk (*) are existing I/O points that shall be deleted from this SCC. CONTRACTOR shall remove all field wiring associated with these points. The I/O points shown with a plus (+) are new signals that shall be added to this SCC. The I/O points shown with a plus (+) in the comments column are existing points that originally received their signal from the aeration control panel and shall be rewired directly to the location noted. CONTRACTOR shall provide all conduit and widng as required for these signals. The I/O points with no special identifier are existing points that shall remain. The I/O points shown in Section 16990 - SCADA System 1/O Listing are only a portion of the I/O associated with this SCC. There are spare digital input and digital output points available in this SCC for the new points required. Provide one spare 4 point analog output card, Allen Bradley Catalog No. 1771-OFE2 for the new points required. All points on this card shall be wired to terminal blocks. Provide new terminal blocks as required. There are spare analog input points available. Provide analog isolators, Action r~struments Model G408-0001, where required [or isolation of existing signals. Provide one new 16 point digital output card, Allen Bradley Catalog No. 1771-OD16 and one new 4 point analog output card (same as above for a total of two new cards) in this PLC for future use. All points on these cards shall be wired to terminal blocks. Provide new terminal blocks as required. Fo The Aeration Tank #1 air flow, Aeration Tank #2 air flow, and Blower Header Pressure analog input signals shown in the I/O Listing are loop powered devices that currently receive their power from the Aeration Control Panel. CONTRACTOR shall provide 24VDC lOOP power to these transmitters [rom the existing 24VDC power supply in this SCC as required. There is an existing Allen Bradley T70 PaneMew terminal on the front of this SCC that 'shall be removed. Provide a new Xycom panelview terminal, Model 3115T-8850256 (no equal) with Windows XP operating system in place of the existing panelview terminal. Provide all new cabling and connections as required. The cutout in the panel door shall be modified as required for the new Xycom panelview. 3.02 SCC-3 MODIFICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in Electrical Building B. The PLC in this panel is an Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Section 16940-18 Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements. An additional mode of control (COnstant flow mode) shall be added for the six RAS pumps (M61 through M66) as follows: 1. The operator shall be able to enter the desired flow rate to be maintained through the North RAS flow meter. This PLC shall then adjust the pumps speed as well as automatically add and delete pumps M61, M62 and M63 as required to maintain the desired flow rate. The existing lead, lag, and lag-lag pump selection; operator adjustable time delays pdor to bringing a pump on-line or off-line; and pump rotation due to a failed or out of service pump shall also apply to this mode of control. Provide an operator adjustable Iow level over-ride setpoint for these pumps based on the level in the North RAS wet well that shall over-ride all automatic modes of control and shut down the pumps. Provide operator adjustable high and Iow level alarm setpoints within this PLC based on the existing North RAS wet well level. All existing control modes shall remain. 2. RAS pumps M64, M65 and M66 shall have a new constant flow mode added identical to that described above except that they will be controlled based on the flow through the South RAS flow meter and the South RAS wet well. The level setpoints described above shall also be provided for the South RAS wet well. 3. For all control modes, an operator adjustable time delay shall be added within this PLC for each pump such that afte~ an MCC power failure (existing inputs) has been detected from the respective MCC, the PLC shall stagger the restart of each pump according to the timer setting. There is an existing Allen Bradley T70 Panelview terminal on the front of this SCC that shall be removed. Provide a new Xycom panelview terminal, Model 3115T-8850256 (no equal) with Windows XP operating system in place of the existing panelview terminal. Provide all new cabling and connections as required. The cutout in the panel door shall be modified as required for the new Xycom panelview. 3.03 SCC'4 MODIFICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in the Maintenance Area MCC room. The PLC in this panel is an Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements. This PLC currently controls the inlet dampers for exhaust fans EF-6855 and EF-6856 as well as the two supply dampers from RTU-6850. SCADA H-O-A selector switches shall be programmed in to this PLC for each of these dampers (4 total). With the H-O-A selector switch in the Hand mode the damper shall open. With the H-O-A selector switch in the OFF mode the damper shall be inoperable. With the H-O-A selector switch in the Auto mode the damper shall be opened based on which DAF unit is in service (existing mode of control). Start/stop and speed control of the two Digester Feed Pumps (P-6611 and P-6612) is currently done manually by the operator from the SCADA System. Provide an operator adjustable flow rate setpoint within this PLC based on the blended sludge flow signal (FM- 10125 monitored from SCC-6). Once a pump is started by the operator, this PLC shall control the pump speed in order to maintain the desired flow rate. Normally only one pump will run at a time. The existing interlocks with the digester AOVs, sludge grinders, and Iow level lockout/restore controls shall remain as existing. An operator adjustable time delay Section 16940-19 t-382-636/03-04 F- shall also be provided within this PLC for each pump such that after an MCC power failure (existing inputs) has been detected from the respective MCC, the PLC shall stagger the restart of each pump according to the timer setting. E. The four WAS flow control valves and four PRE flow control valves associated with the DAF Systems are each controlled from this PLC to maintain a desired flow se[point based on the associated WAS flow and PRE flow. Modulation of these valves (8 total) to maintain the desired flow rate setpoints does not work properly (e.g., slow or no response). CONTRACTOR shall troubleshoot the existing PLC program for control of these valves and make modifications as required such that the valves properly maintain the desired flow setpoints. There is an existing Allen Bradley T70 Panelview terminal on the front of this SCC that shall be removed. Provide a new Xycom panelview terminal, Model 3115T-8850256 (no equal) with Windows XP operating system, in place of the existing panelview terminal. Provide all new cabling and connections as required. The cutout in the panel door shall be modified as required for the new Xycom panelview. 3.04 SCC-5 MODIFICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in the Chemical Building MCC room. The PLC in this panel is an Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to Section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements C. The fiber optic data highway shall be extended from this SCC to the SLC 5/04 PLC in the new Service Entrance Switchgear as shown on the drawings. 3.05 SCC:6'MODI~ICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in the Digester Building MCC room. The PLC in this panel is an Alien Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs. CONTRACTOR shall refer to section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements. C. The three Digester Recirculation pumps (P-10104, P-10105, and P-10106) are currently controlled directly from the two digester heat exchangers (hardwired) when their H-O-A selector switches on MCC-10A/10B are in the Auto position. The existing 2 position sludge recirculation pump continuous-intermittent selector switch in each of the two digester heat exchanger control panels shall be removed and this circuit left open. Provide a new 2 position "Local-Remote' selector switch in each digester heat exchanger control panel in series with the existing 3 position sludge recirculation pump selector switch. With the new 2 position selector switch in the "Local" position, the sludge recirculation pumps shall be controlled from the existing time clock and 3 position selector switch in each digester heat exchanger control panel. With the new 2 position selector switch in the "Remote" mode, the existing control circuitry ~n each digester heat exchanger control panel shall be disabled and the new digital outputs from this PLC enabled to control the pumps as described below. Provide As-Built wiring diagrams for modifications to each digester heat exchanger control panel. Provide 2-~14 from each digester recirculation pump starter bucket to spare digital outputs in this PLC for start/stop control (these outputs shall be wired in parallel with the existing stadJstop s~gnals from the two heat exchanger control Section 16940-20 panels) of each pump as follows: There shall be an operator adjustable repeat cycle timer within this PLC for each recirculation pump. The operator shall be able to enter individual On and Off times for each timer. An operator adjustable time delay shall be provided within this PLC for the two existing Sludge Transfer Pumps (P-10001 and P-10002) and the three existing Centrifuge Feed Pumps (P-10003, P-10004, and P-10005) such that after an MCC power failure (existing inputs) has been detected from the respective MCC, the PLC shall stagger the restart of each pump according to the timer setting. These five pumps are currently controlled from this PLC. E. This SCC contains an existing Xycom Panelview terminal, Model 3115T-8850256. The existing operating system on this unit shall be upgraded from Windows NT to Windows XP. 3.06 SCC-7 MODIFICATIONS A. This is an existing SCC located in the Dewatering Building MCC room: The PLC in this panel is an Allen Bradley PLC-5/30 (1785-L30B). Control descriptions described herein are specific in nature to equipment associated with the SCCs, CONTRACTOR shall refer to section 1.12 - I/O and Algorithm General for additional programming requirements. The throe centrate pumps (P-11001, P-11002, and P-11003) are currently controlled from a time-of-day timer within this PLC. The programming for the time-of-day controller shall be deleted and the following additional programming provided: 1. Provide an operator adjustable repeat cycle timer within this PLC for control of each pump. The operator shall be able to enter individual On and Off times for each timer. The existing flow rate control and Iow level shutoff control for these pumps shall remain as existing. 2. Provide operator adjustable minimum and maximum speed setpoints for each pump that will provent the pump speed from dropping below and rising above these setpoints. Pump speed is currently indicated (in percent) at the SCADA System for each pump. 3. Provide a percent load and amp draw indication for each pump at the SCADA System based on the amp draw for that pump. Also provide an operator adjustable percent load alarm setpoint for each pump to notify the operator when the pump is nearing an overload condition. Amp draw is not currently indicated at the SCADA System for each pump. The VFDs for these pumps are connected to this PLC via devicenet. 3.07 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR PLC PROGRAMMING The service entrance switchgear specified in Section 16344 - 5kV Metal-Clad Circuit Breaker Switchgear for VWVTP Service Entrance includes an Allen Bradley SLC 5/'04 PLC, Prosoft Technology, Inc. modbus communication module, Model No. MVI46-MCM (for communication to the paralleling switchgear), and an existing Allen Bradley 1771-AF1 fiber optic converter (for interface with OWNER's existing SCADA System). The existing fiber optic converter shall be relocated to the service entrance switchgear by this CONTRACTOR as indicated on the drawings. It shall be this System Supplier's responsibility to program this PLC and the modbus communication module to transmit the signals indicated in the I/O list in Section 16690 and Sections 16253 and 16344 to the OWNER's existing SCADA System. The PLC in the paralleling switchgear will be programmed by the equipment manufacturer and I/O addressing provided. All signals to these PLCs will be wired by the equipment manufacturer and a drawing provided. This System Supplier shall document and annotate the programs, update them as required after all Section 16940-21 startup, and then turn the programs over to OWNER in the form of compact disks; two copies are required. Provide a new 12 port fiber optic panel in the new Service Entrance Switchgear as shown on the drawings. The PLC in the Service Entrance Switchgear shall be tied into the data highway for the OWNER's existing SCADA System as shown on the drawings. This PLC shall m~nit°r ;~he 3 phase kilowatts from each of the eight (8) feeder breakers in this switchgear. The 3 phase kilowatt-hours for each feeder breaker shall be calculated within this PLC based on the associated kilowatt signal. The peak kilowatt demand for each feeder breaker shall also be recorded at this PLC. The peak kilowatt demand for each feeder breaker shall be manually reset by the operator from the SCADA system. All values described herein shall be indicated at the SCADA system. 3.08 TELEMETRY SYSTEM TRAINING System Supplier shall include an allowance of $3,600 in the Lump Sum Base Bid for Energenecs, Inc. to provide an Ethernet converter for interface of the existing Telesafe Telemetry unit with the new 24-p0rt 10/100 Mb managed switch as shown on Sheet No. 31 and for 16 hours of training on the telemet~ syStem modifications. 3.09 LABORATORY HVAC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. General 1. New building control panel (BCP) shall be standalone and shall interface with existing and new equipment as shown on the drawings and in the Section 16990 - I/O Listing. . ~ . 2. There is an existing Allen Bradley SLC 5~04 in the existing Aeration Control Panel that shall be reused to provide the controls as specified herein. The existing PLC consists : . . of the following: processor 1747-L542, power supply 1746-P1, rack 1746-A4, analog input 1746-NI041, digital input 1746-1A16, and digital output 1746-OW8. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to provide all additional racks, I/O cards, etc. required to provide the controls specified herein and shown in the I/O listing in Section 16990. CONTRACTOR shall provide a new NEMA 12 enclosure for the PLC and all associated appurtenances. 3. A temperature deadband of +_2.°F (adjustable at BCP) shall be provided for all · temperature setpoints. B. Operator Interface Panel (OIP) 1. An OIP shall be provided on the front of the new BCP. The OIP shall be as manufactured by Allen Bradley, PanelView 300, no equal. The OIP shall allow the operator to enter all control and alarm setpoints and shall be setup such that it prompts the operator for the setpoint to be entered. The OIP shall provide the following indication and operating functions for the system: a. Supply air temperature 1 (SAT-l) b. Supply air temperature 2 (SAT-2) c. Outside air temperature (OAT-l) d. Mixed air temperature (MAT-l) e. Room airtemperature (RAT-l) AHU~92~54 S~PP!Y fan Running g. Fume hood blower EF-9252 Running h. Electdc duct heater EDH-1 On i. Boiler circulating pump I Running and In Auto j. Boiler cirCulating pump 2 Running and In Auto Section 16940,22 1~382-636/03-04 k. Room temperature cooling setpoint I. Room temperature heating setpoint m. Outside air temperature economizer enable/disable temperature setpoint The above indications and control functions shall be programmed into the OIP in graphic form. The screens shall be as follows: a. The default screen shall be an overview of the system and shall show all analog values as well as run and fail of monitored equipment. b. "1 here shall be control setpoint screens that will allow the operator to enter all system setpoints and select control modes for each piece of equipment. Associated analog values shall be indicated on these screens. c. There shall be an alarm summary screen that shall indicate the last 5 alarms. The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms from this screen. The alarms shall be in chronological order. Alarms shall not clear until manually reset individually. d. The above screens are the minimum required, CONTRACTOR shall include an additional two screens in the Bid similar to those described above. Economizer 1. When the outside air temperature (from OAT-l) is above 65°F (adjustable at BCP), the outside air damper shall be at minimum position (economizer disabled). 2. When the outside air temperature (from OAT-1 ) is below 65°F (adjustable at BCP) and the room temperature is above the room temperature cooling setpoint, the outside/return air damper shall modulate between minimum and maximum position to maintain 55°F at the mixed air temperature sensor MAT-1 (economizer enabled). Return air damper shall modulate inversely with the outside air damper. Cooling 1. When the room temperature is above the room temperature cooling setpoint and the economizer cycle is disabled, the ACCU compressor shall start. 2. Whe,~ the room temperature is above the room temperature cooling setpoint as determined by the BCP and the economizer cycle is enabled, the outside/return air damper shall modulate to maintain 55°F at the mixed air temperature sensor MAT-1. Heating 1. When the room temperature falls below the room temperature heating setpoint as determined by the BCP, and either boiler circulating pump is In Auto (from H-O-A selector switch on MCC-7), the outside/return air damper shall modulate to minimum position and AHU-9254 face-and-bypass damper shall modulate to maintain the room temperature heating setpoint, 2. When the room temperature falls below the thermostat's heating setpoint as determined by the BCP, and no boiler circulating pumps are In Auto (from H-O-A selector switch on MCC-7), the outside/return air damper shall modulate to the minimum position and the electric duct heater EDH-1 shall be energized and shall modulate to maintain the room temperature heating setpoint. 3. Electric duct heater EDH-1 shall be disabled when either boiler circulating pump is In Auto. Fume Hood Operation: Normally fume hood blower EF-9252 is off, the damper at the fan (DA-9252) is 100% open and the two fume hood dampers (DA-9254 and DA-9255) are open. A switch located on fume hoods FH-1 and/or FH-2 shall start fan EF-9252. Damper DA-9254 shall be interlocked to be open when fume hood FH-1 is On and damper DA-9255 shall be interlocked to be open when fume hood FH-2 is On. If only one of the two fume hoods is On, the damper for the opposite fume hood shall be closed. Damper Section 16940-23 1-382-636/03-04 DA-9252 shall be 50% open When either fume hood is running and 100% open when both fume hoods are running. The outside air damper at AHU-9254 shall modulate to maintain the lab at a slightly negative pressure relative to atmospheric pressure. Manual Operation 1. A Hand-Off-Auto selector switch shall be provided for the outside/retum air damper at AHU-9254. When the selector switch is in the "Auto" position, the damper shall be controlled as described above. When the selector switch is in the "Off" position, the damper shall be closed. When the selector switch is in the "Hand" position, damper shall be controlled manually from a potentiometer on the front of this panel. 2. An On-Off selector switch shall be provided for the supply fan at AHU-9254. When the selector switch is in the "On" position, the supply fan shall run continuously. When the selector switch is in the "Off" position, the supply fan shall be shut down and an alarm shall be logged. When the fan is shutdown, all means for cooling and heating shall be disabled, and the outside/return air damper shall be closed. 3. A Hand-Off-Auto selector switch shall be provided for electric duct heater EDH-1. When the selector switch is in the "Auto" position, the heater shall be controlled as described above. When the selector switch is in the "Off" position, the heater shall be off. When the selector switch is in the "Hand" position, the heater output shall be controlled from a potentiometer on the front of this panel. The potentiometer shall have a 4-20 mA output for heater output control. 4. An Open-Close-Auto selector switch shall be provided for damper DA-9252. When the selector switch is in the "Auto" position, the damper shall be controlled as described above. When the selector switch is in the "Close" position, the damper shall be closed to 50 %. When the selector switch is in the "Open" position, the damper shall be opened to 100%. 5. A Hand-Off-Auto selector switch shall be provided for the face-and-bypass damper at AHU-9254. When the selector switch is in the "Auto" position, the damper shall be controlled as described above. When the selector switch is in the "Off" position, the damper shall be closed. When the selector switch is in the "Hand" position, the damper shall be controlled from a potentiometer on the front of this panel. 6. Open-Close-Auto selector switches shall be provided for fume hood dampers DA-9254 and DA-9255. When the selector switch is in the Open position, the damper shall be open. When the selector switch is in the Close position, the damper shall be closed. When the selector switch is in the Auto position, the damper shall be 'controlled as descdbed above. END OF SECTION Section 16940-24 1-382-636/03-04 SECTION 16950 TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Included: This section includes short circuit and coordination studies as described herein. B. Related Sections and Divisions: Applicable provisions of Division 1 shall govern work in this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NETA Electrical Acceptance Tests (2001 edition). .03 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL The testing organization shall submit appropriate documentation to demonstrate that it satisfactorily complies with the following. An organization having a "Full Membership" classification issued by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association meets this cdteri~ 1. The testing organization shall be an independent, third party, testing organization which can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems evaluate(~ by the testing organization. 2. The testing organization shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems. B. The testing organization shall utilize technicians who are regularly employed for testing services. 1.04 SHORT-CIRCUiT AND COORDINATION STUDIES Scope of Services: Provide a current and complete short-circuit study, equipment- interrupting or withstand evaluation, and a protective-device coordination study for the electrical distribution system. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the normal and generator (2) sources of power through the new service entrance switchgear. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations which could result in maximum-fault conditions shall be thoroughly covered in the study. Short-Circuit Study 1. The study shall be in accordance with applicable ANSI and IEEE standards. 2. The study input data shall include the utility company's short-circuit single- and three-phase contribution, with the X/R ratio, the resistance and reactance components of each branch impedance, motor and generator contributions, base quantities selected, and all other applicable circuit parameters. Section 16950-1 3. Short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties Shall be calculated on the basiS of maximum available fault current at each switchgear bus and other significant locations through the system. C. Equipment Evaluation Study: An equipment eValuation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busways, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short-circuit ratings of these devices with the maximum short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties. The evaluation study shall be submitted prior to final approval of equipment submittals. Protective-Device Coordination Study 1. A protective-device coordination study shall be performed to select or to verify the selection of power fuse ratings, protective-relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated voltage and current transformers, and medium-voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. 2. The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from the utility's incoming line protective-device down to and including the new service entrance switchgear feeders. The phase and grOund overcurrent prOtection shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices. 3. Coordination shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Elect/fca/Code and the recommendations of ANSI/IEEE Standard 399, as applicable. 4. Protective device selection and settings shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Elect/fca/Code and the recommendations of ANSI/IEEE Standard 399, as applicable. Study Report 1. Discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the OWNER's attention. 2. The results of the power-system studies shall be summarized in a final report. Four copies are required. 3. The report shall inctude the following sections: a. Description, purpose, basis, and scope of the study and a single-line diagram of the entire distribution system from the Utility's incoming line protective devices down to and including each motor control center. b. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other equipment ratings versus calculated short-circuit duties and commentary regarding same. c. Protective device coordination curves, with commentary. d. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios, manufacturer, type, range of adjustment, and recommended settings. A tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for all fuses in the system. e; Fault-current tabulations including a definition of terms and a guide for interpretation. This report shall also be submitted to WPS for their review and approval. Any comments from WPS shall be addressed by the testing agency and resubmitted to WPS. Implementation: The CONTRACTOR shall engage in independent testing organization for the purpose of inspecting, setting, and calibrating the protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and other applicable devices as recommended in the power-system study report. Section 16950~2 1-382-636/03-04 1.05 GROUNDING SYSTEMS Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all new major electrical equipment frames (e.g., MCC, switchgear, generators, etc.) PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART3-EXECUTION NOT APPLICABLE ENDOFSECTION Section 16950-3 1-382-636/03-04 SCADA SYSTEM I/O LISTING E .~, DRAW~NC NO. pROJECT ~I~N ~YO~ 01 --97~-- 158A ITAAND SAMP'EE REpO~RT~ OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS AND LAB MONTHLY REPORT 3 4 7 20 23 24 26 27 OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS AND LAB MONTHLY REPORT OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS AND LAB MONTHLY REPORT OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS AND LAB MONTHLY REPORT 2 4 7 9 20 22 27 28 29 3O OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS AND LAB MONTHLY REPORT OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS DALLY REPORT DATE: %ABEGDATE Page 1 Hour Plant Recycle Influent lnfluent Influent Pdma~y Primary North (1) South (2) North (1) South (2) Daft 1 Inflow Flow Flow pH Temp Sludge Sludge RAS Flow PAS Flew PAS/BTG RAS/BTG WAS Flow MGD MGD MGD SU De,g C Gallons % solids MGD MGD Mg/L Mg/L GPM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Minimum Maximum ~,ve~e T~tal Daft 2 WAS Flow GPM OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS DAILY REPORT %A~BEGD~TE Page 2 Hour Daft3 Daft4 WAS (1) WAS (2) FE #1 #2 #3 #4 Hour WAS Flow WAS Flow BTG BTG Pressure Holding tank Holding tan~, Holding tank Holding tank GPM GPM Mg/L M~/L PSI Level ft. Level ff. Level ft. Level ff. 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 Minimum Minimum Maximum Maximum &vere,qe Average Total Total OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS MONTHLY REPORT BEGINNING DATE: %ABEGDATE Page 1 ENDING DATE: %AENDDATE Oay % solids No~ (1) PAS Flow MGD ~ (2) No~(l) a~ OSHKOSH PLANT PROCESS MONTHL~age 2 /oABEGDATE ENDING DATE: %AENDDATE t !!oSHKOSH pLANT pROcESs MONTHLY REPORT Page3 ~""BEGINNING DATE: %ABEGDATE ENDING DATE: %AENDDATE Side I Side 2 Fem~s ChlOdne SI~ J